
■■m 



'**V c TmCj 



\ 









, 



*wt+** 







A 



GRAMMAR 



OF 



THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 



WITH 



PRACTICAL EXERCISES, 



BY 



NiWANOSTROCHT, LL.D. 



\* 



FIRST AMERICAN, FROM THE NINTH LONDON EDITION* 



i -rttfawaar^. Mad 



With considerable ADDITIONS and IMPROVEMENTS 

BT THE AUTHOR. 



BOSTON : 

Printed for JOHN WEST, No. 75, C6rnUilj^ 

1805. 



> 



David Carlisle, Printer, Camlridge-Stmtc 



P ET (% tf 






V* 






*5 



TO 



The Hon. Mr. BATHURST, 




S I R, 



N my arrival in England, I confidered it as 
a fortunate circumilance to be firft introduced to 
the honour of being appointed your French mat- 
ter. I now feel myfelf peculiarly happy, in hav- 
ing this opportunity of making my acknowledge- 
ment known to your illuftrious family, for the 
civilities I received when I was but little known 
in this country. 

From that time, it has been my ambition to 
render the Practical Grammar, v/hich now 
folicits your patronage, in fome degree, worthy 
of your acceptance. Confcious, as I am, of its 
many imperfections, and that it {lands in need 



iv DEDICATION. 

of much indulgence, yet, if it fhould be found of 
real utility to the public, your approbation will 
be no fmall recommendation ; at lead, it will 
Ihew the world how ready you are to encourage 
everf the feinted endeavours in ufeful learning, 

I am, with the greateft refpeft, Sir* 
Your mod obliged 

and very obedient 
humble fervant^ 

QOJLA5- WaNOSTROCHT. 



PREFACE. 



Cr*HAT " a great book is a great evil" is generally a great 
~ truth j for the difcovery of which we moderns muft hold 
ourf elves indebted to the f ages of antiquity. In the follow- 
ing fleets ? I have endeavoured to improve upon the ancient 
maxim , and to bring the two ends of the booh as near to- 
gether as I pofjibly could. On this frugal plan the pre- 
face might have been fpared, but cufiom mufl be complied 
with ; fome part of our time mufi be fpeni on fuperjluiiies, 
and what is rendered venerable by age muft not too haftily 
be rejected. To enter abruptly upon the main fubjetl is gen- 
erally confdered as a breach of politenefs. What is ufe- 
ful mufl fpmetimes give place to what is convenient : and 
what rigorous juf ice can?:ot defend may yet enjoy the fecuri- 
ty of prefer iption. In compliance, therefore, with univer- 
sal cufiom, with the general praBice of the ancients, and$ 
what is fill more forcible, the urgent felicitation of the 
bookfeller, I proceed to lay before the reader the general plan 
of the work. 

The idea of the Practical Grammar was firfl fug- 
gefledto the author in the courfe of his private teaching* 
He found daily the inconvenience of referring from booh to 
booh, and determined to fupply the defecJ in the befl manner 
he could. Whatever was necejfary to f«rnijh a tolerable 
acquaintance with the elements cf the language, and to point 
out the nature of its corflruElion, he propofed to admit ; and 
to rejeEl every thing that was not efentially connected with 
his principal defign. His fir ft chjeFt was, to cempriji, in as 
little room as poffible, every thing that, was really ufeful in 
the grammar > the exercife book, and the book of dia- 
logues. To this plan he has ftriEiiy adhered in the com- 
pofition, and has brought the whole together in a much 
f mailer compafs, than, at firfl, could re af on ably have been, 
expeEled. 

The fever al parts offpeech are arranged in the ufual or- 
der, and each part is dif cuffed under a fepar ate feci ion. 

Each 



vi PREFACE. 

Each rule is followed by a familiar exercife, which the 
majler may ufe in the place of a dialogue. 

The advantages, refulting from the fcholars learning and 
then repeating their own tranfiations by heart, mufl, in the 
opinion of impartial and difinterefled minds , materially tend 
to their improvement ; by thefe means, the pupils, uniting 
praElice to theory, not only become imperceptibly acquainted 
ivith the French phrafeology, which in many inflances dif- 
fers fo much from the Engliffj conflruBion, but immediately 
know what is the Englijh 'word that correfponds with the 
French, and vice veria, which cannot abfolutely be done in 
a dialogue where the French is ready ?nade for them. 
Therefore, in order the ?n ore fully to anpiver the author s in- 
tention, he has, inflead of fine fentences, extracted from the 
mofl elegant writers, and often above the comprehenfion of 
young people, preferred and made ufe of, throughout all tlyt 
exercifes, plain and eafy fentences, which, at the fame time 
they are within reach of the young learn er's faculties, will 
foon enable them tojpeak the French language with propriety 
and elegance. What more can be expelled from an elemen- 
tary book ? 

At the clcfe cf every fetlion, a recapitulatory exercife is 
given upon all the preceding rules. 

When there is any difference in the order of arrange- 
ment, the French conflruBion is pointed out by fmall figures, 
placed againfi the tcp of the words in the Engliffj fentence. 

Some of the mcfl remarkable French idioms are noticed, 
and exemplified by various inflances. Many others might 
have been adduced, perhaps to very little profit. The idi- 
omatic al exprefflons are daily giving way to a regular fyn- 
tattical form} and growing into difufe with the befll maj~ 
ters. 

Rules for pronunciation are totally omitted. From all 
the attempts that have hitherto been made, it does not ap- 
pear that any adequate idea of it can be conveyed in writing. 
The ear cannot be properly formed without the affiflance of a 
good Jpeaker. • 

Throughout the whole competition , the chief aim has been 
to unite eafe and fimplicity with accuracy and preajion. 

Thai 



PREFACE. vii 

That he has not fometimes /aid too little where more was 
required^ and fometimes too much where lefs would have 
been fujficient, he does not take upon him to affert. That 
he has fometimes failed through negligence, and many times 
through ignorance, he has alfo great re of on to fear. His 
daily avocations left him but little time for Jludy, and his 
want of a better acquaintance with the Englijh language- 
may have fubjecled him to many inaccuracies in his Jlyle, 
and fometimes, perhaps, to palpable improprieties. 

The author cheerfully embraces this opportunity of ma- 
king his mofl grateful acknowledgements to the public for 
the favourable reception given to the former editions of 
this grammar, and, in general, to all his other works : 
while he is perfectly fenfble of the obligation, he if alfo fen- 
jijble that much indulgence was required to juflify the fa- 
vours he has already received cither as a teacher or as 
an AUTHOR. That generous indulgence he again folicits 
for their acceptance of this new edition, and begs to affure 
them, that in every fit uation of life, it will be his conflant 
care, as well as his highejl ambition, to deferve the flattering- 
encouragement he has met wHh in this country, and never 
forget the obligations already conferred,. 

In this edition, the errors in the former publications are 
carefully cor reeled, the feveral exprejfions, which did not fo 
well p leafs in the courfe of practice have bee?i altered, and 
every improvement added which could tend to facilitate the 
attainment of the French language. It having been fug- 
gefled, byfoms gentlemen } to whole judgment the author pays 
the greateft deference- that the irregular verbs being arranged 
in alphabetical order, in the body of the book, would be a con- 
ftderable improvement to the work, and facilitate the pro- 
grefs of the fcholar , this is done in the prefent edition, The 
primitives of the i; regular verbs are conjugated at length, 
and at the end of each are given its fevered compounds.-, with 
large e>:er C 'fes both upon the primitives and compounds. 

Alfred-House^ Camberwell, 
March 4*b* 1802. 



An EXPLANATION of the ABBREVIATIONS 

MADE USE OF IN THE FOLLOWING WORK. 



m. 


Noun mafculine. 


f. 


Noun feminine. 


pi. 


Plural. 


adj. 


Noun adjedtive. 


pro. 


Pronoun. 


v. 


Verb. 


p. a£l. 


Participle a&ive. 


P- P- 


Participle paffive. 


adv. 


Adverb. 


P- 


Prepofition. 


c. 


Conjunction. 


int. 


Interjection. 


*o> 


The Englifh word, that has this mark 




underneath, is not to be exprefled in 



French. 

The figures, , , , &c. direft to the conftruftion of 
the words in the French fentence. 

Two words that have the fame number, are exprefled 

by one word in French. 



A 

Praftical French Grammar. 



SECT. I. 

GRAMMAR is the art of fpeaking and writing in 
any language with propriety \ or, it is the art of 
rightly expreffing our thoughts by words. 

Grammar is of two kinds, general and particular. 
Univerfal grammar confiders language in itfel£, explains 
the principles which are alike common to every tongue, 
and diftinguifhes, with precifion, between thofe partic- 
ulars which are eiTential, and thofe which are only acci- 
dental. Particular grammar applies thefe common prin- 
ciples to a particular language, and furnifhes certain 
rules and obfervations which are, either mediately or 
immediately, deducible from its common principles. 

A grammar of the French tongue muft be formed 
agreeably to the eftabliflied ufage, and thofe particular 
modes of expreffion to which cuftom has given its fancr 
tion. It has therefore for its object, in common with 
all other grammars, the confideration of letters, fylla- 
bles, words, fentences, &c. 

In the French Alphabet there are twenty-five 
letters, viz, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, p, q, 
r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z. Six of thefe are vowels ; fo called 
becaufe each can be diftinctly founded without the af- 
ilitance of any other letter, namely, a, e, i, o, u, and y. 
The reft are called consonants, becaufe they cannot 
be perfectly founded without being affociated with fome 
vowel, either before or after them. 

A syllable, whether compofed of one or more 
letters, requires, in the pronunciation, no more than a 
iingle impulfe of the voice : ex. ba> me, moi y &c. 

A word may confift of one fyllable, or of many 
compacted into one meaning | for, a word is the ftnalleft 
part of fpeech which is in itielf fi gnificant : ex. t7icn, my, 
livre y book, &c. 

B A 



( 2 ) 

A sentence, or phrase, is an aflemblage of words 
arranged in their proper order, forming a fenfe either 
more or lei's complete : ex. 
*Je fuis voire a?ni y I am your friend. 

J'ecrivis hier a voire tanie^ I ye iter day wrote to your 

aunt. 

A period may confift of two or three fentences 
joined together, fo that they depend on one another to 
form a complete fenfe. Each of the fentences forming 
part of a period is called member of the period, ex. 

Les grands homrnes font Great men are fcarce : we 

rares ; on doli les refpec- ought to refpedt them, 

/ct, et /'on devroit tou~ and be conftantly en- 

jours travailler a fe ren- deavouring to relemble 

dre fe?nblable a eux. them. 

A discourse, or speech, is an aflemblage of fen- 
tences (or phrafes) and periods, joined together and 
arranged according to the rules of the language. 

KINDS of WORDS. 

There are, in the French tongue, nine different forts 
of words, which are generally called the nine parts of 
fpeech, viz. 

i. I/Article, The Article. 

2. Le Nom, The Noun. 

3. Le Pronom, The Pronoun. 

4. Le Verbe, The Verb. 

5. Le Participe, The Participle. 

6. L'Adverbe, The Adverb. 

7. La Preposition, The Preposition. 

8. La Conjonction, The Conjunction. 

9. L'Interjection, The Interjection. 

Five of them are declinable, that is to fay, the radi- 
cal part of the word remaining the fame, the other parts, 
but efpecially the termination, will admit of fever al va- 
riations. Thefe declinable words are, the article, noun, 
pronoun, verb, and participle. 

The four laft, as they never vary their terminations, 

are therefore. called indeclinable* 

GEN- 



( 3 ) 
GENERAL EXPLANATION. 

The articles are certain little words, which, joined 

to nouns, determine the extent of their fignification, 

and which, in French, denote their gender, number, and 

cafe, correfponding to the Engliih words the, of the, 

from the, and to the. Thefe in French, are, 

Le, la, les, The. 

De, diiy de /a, des, Of, or from the. 

A y au y a la, aux, To the. 

The noun, in general, is a word which is ufed to 
name or qualify every thing which is the object of dil- 
courfe : ex. 



Papier, 


Paper. 


Bon, 


Good. 


Plume, 


Pen. 


Petit, 


Little. 


Pain, 


Bread. 


Mauvais, 


Bad, &c. 



The pronoun is a word commonly fubftituted in 
the place of the noun, to avoid its too frequent repeti- 
tion : ex. 
J'ai vn M. votre pere, et I faw your father, and 

lui at parley fpoke to him. 

In this inftance the word lui, to him, is put to avoid 
the repetition of the word pere, father. 

The verb is a word which either exprefles the ftate 
of the fubjeft, or an action done by the fubjefr, or the 
aftion received or fuffered by the fubje£t : ex. 
Monfrere eft malade. My brother is ill. 

Ma foeur ecrit arte lettre, My lifter ivrites a letter. 

Votre confine eft puttie. Your coufin is puniihed. 

The verb is varied by moods, tenfes, peribns, and 
numbers. 

The participle partakes both of the nature of the 
verb and the adjedtive noun : ex. 



Ayanty Having, 

Dormant) Giving, 



Aime, Loved, 
Purti, Puniihed, &c. 



The adverb is fometimes joined to the noun, but 
more frequently to the verb, whence it derives its 
name. The uie of the adverb is, to determine the 

fignification 



( 4 ) 

Signification of the noun or verb ; or to exprefs fome 
particular modification or circumftance of the action or 
quality : ex. 

Je vous aime fincerement, I love you fwcerely. 
Venez demain, Come to-morrow* 

In thefe inftances, the words Jincerely and to-morrow 
are adverbs. 

The preposition is a word which is put before 
the noun or pronoun, and it always governs the word 
before which it is placed ; ex. 

Chez mon ami y At my friend's houfe. 

Devant moi> Before me, &c. 

The conjunction ferves to connect the feveral 
parts of a difcourfe : ex. et y and ; car y for ; mais y but, &c. 

The interjection is a word which exprefles the 
different affections, or paflions of the foul : ex. 
He las , mon Dieu I Oh, my God ! &c. 

A more particular delineation of thefe nine parts of 
fpeech, and their ufe in the compofition of a fentence, 
or period, will be the fubject of the following fections. 







SECT. II. 

Of NOUNS. 

"OUNS are divided into fubftantives and adjec^ 
tives. A noun substantive exprefles a thing 
fubfifting by itfelf, and can make a complete knCe inde- 
pendent of any other word : ex. Dieu y God , roi, king % 
maifon 9 houfe, &c. 

A noun substantive is either common, collective, 
or proper. 

A common noun is applicable to all beings or things 
of the fame kind : ex. homme y man \ roi y king \ ville y 
town 9 table ) table, &c. 

A collective noun is expreflive of many particu- 
lars, yet, as thefe particulars are all united in the mind, 
and comprehended under one general idea, they may 
therefore be conceived as one individual, and, without any 

impropriety, 



( s ) 

impropriety, expreffed in the Angular number : ex.peu~ 
ple y people \forety foreft ; armee, army, &c. 

A proper noun is applicable to one perfon or thing 
only : ex. Pierre, Peter , LondreSy London, &c. 

N. B. A noun is always a fubitantive when we can- 
not, with propriety, add to it the word perjonne, perfon, 
or the word chofe> thing. 

A noun adjective is ufed to exprefs the quality, 
colour, form, or quantity, of the fubftantive to which it 
belongs, and is fo called becaufe its meaning cannot be 
afcertained without being joined to its proper fubftan- 
tive, with which it muft alfo agree in gender, number, 
and cafe : ex. hon, good ; aimable, lovely \ rouge, red % 
jaime, yellow •, rond, round , quarre, fquare ; un> one $ 
deux, two ; trois, three, &c. 

A r . B. The noun is always adjective when one can 
add to it the word perfonne or choje, perfon or thing. 

In NOUNS four things muft be considered, viz* 
Les Articles, The Articles. 

Les Genres, The Genders. 

Les Nombres, The Numbers. 

Les Cas, The Cafes. 

ARTICLES. 

There are three forts of Articles, viz. 
& Article dejini, The Article definite. 

L 1 Article partkif, The Article partitive. 

L y Article in deputy The Article indefinite. 

The article muft always agree with the noun in gen- 
der and number. 

The definite article is fo called becaufe it means 
the whole of the object to which it is applied. 

Singular. 
Le 9 for the mafcuiine, before nouns beginning with a 

confonant or h afpirated : -ex. le roi, the king, &c» 
La, for the feminine : ex. la reine, the queen, &c. 
U with an elilion, for both senders, -before nouns fin- 
gular beginning with a vowel or H not afpirated ; ex, 
Pen/ant, the child; &c, 

B z Plural* 



.. C 6 

Plural. 

Uf, for both, genders* whether the noun begin with a 
confonant or a vowel : ex. les rois, the kings \ les reines* 
the queens 5 les enfans, the children, &c* 

The partitive article means only a part of the 
objeft, the Englilh word some being always expreffed 
or implied. 

Singular, 

*"] Thefe two articles are ufed 
Bu for the maf. | before r nouns beginning with 

Be la for the fern. f a confona.it or h afp,rated : 

1 ex. du pain, tome bread; de 
J la viande, fome meat. 
De l\ for both genders, beginning with a vowel or an 
H not afpirated ; ex. de Fencre, fome ink. 

Plural. 
Des for both genders : ex. des 'amis, fome friends. 

The indefinite article, is de or d y > of, from) and 
£, to. 

This article is ufed, without diftin£tion, before nouns 
mafculine and feminine in both numbers* Proper 
names, and the great eft part of the pronouns, are declined 
with it. 

Some grammarians admit of a fourth article, viz. im 
for the mafculine,. and une for the feminine, in Englifh 
a or an ; but it may be obferved, that it is always de- 
clined with the indefinite article, and therefore takes the 
nature of a noun adje&ive. 

GENDERS and NUMBERS. 

There are two genders, viz. the mafculine and the 
feminine. A noun is mafculine when there is before it 
k or un, as le or un livre, the or a book,. A noun is 
feminine when it is preceded by /#• or une, as la or une 
plume, the or a pen. 

There are two numbers^ the lingular and plural, 
The lingular number fpeaks of one thing only : as, une 
-table >} a table j. the plural fpeaks of more than one ; as,> 

des 



( 7 ) 

des tables y tables. There are fome nouns that are never 
ufed but in the. lingular number : a% 

1. The names of metals ; ex. ory gold \ argent y filver \ 
cuivrey brafs y plamby lead, &c. 

2. The names of virtues and vices : ex, avarice y avarice ; 
charitey charity ; foiy faith \ hainey hatred \ orgueil^ 
pride -y prodigalitey prodigality* &c. 

3 . The names by which the five fenfes are denoted : ex* 
la vue 9 the fight ; le gouty the tafte ; F odor at y fmelling * 
le toucher y feeling % Homey hearing. 

4. Proper names, except when they are uied metaphori- 
cally. 

5. To the foregoing may be added the following,, which 
are not reducible to any general rules. 



Artilleriey 


artillery. 


Fainiy 


hunger* 


Attiraily 


implements. 

x 


Fwnee y 


fmoke* 


Bcnheury 


happinefi. 


Fuitey 


flight* 


ColerCy 


anger. 


Gloirey 


glory.. 


CourroiiXy 


wrath. . 


Honte-y 


fhame. 


Enfancey 


infancy* 


Jeuneffly 


youth. 


Laity 


milk. 


Salttty 


fafety.. 


Miely 


honey. 


Solfy 


thirft. 


Noblejfey 


nobility. 


Sommeily 


fleep. 


Pativretey 


poverty* 


VieilleJJcy 


old age. 


Sangy 


blood. 




C3 



There are others which are never ufed but in the 
plural number only ; fiich as 

Ancetresy. anceftors. 



Ayeuxy 

AtourSy 

CifeauXy 

DeliceSy 

DeperiSy 

EntrailleSy 

EpoufailleSy 

FontSy 



forefathers. 

apparel. 

fciffors* 

delight* 

coft. 

entrails. 

efpoufals. 

font* 



Fitner allies y funerals, 

Fra'iSy expenfes, 

Hardes % cleat hes. 

LimiieSy limits. 

Mceursy manners, 

MoucheiteSy fnuffers. 

Tenebresy darknefs. 

VivreSy victuals. 



And, in general, tbofe which* in Englifh^ admit of no 
fingular* 



( 8 ) 

V/ • In general the plural number is formed by adding an 
i/S s to the lingular : ex, 

Le pere y the father ; les peres, the fathers. 

La mere, the mother ; les meres, the mothers, 8cc. 

All nouns, having their lingular ending in j*, x, or z, 
admit of no variation in the plural : ex. 

Lefils, the fon ; les filsy the fons. 

line noixy a walnut ; des noix, walnuts. 
Le nez, the nofe ; les nez, the nofes. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Nouns ending in au, eau, eu, oeu, ieu, or ou, form 
their plural by x inftead of j- : ex. 

Un chapeaiiy a hat ; des chapeauXy hats. 

Un manteauy a cloak % des manteaux, cloaks. 
Un lieu, a place y des lieuxy places. 

Un choiiy a cabbage ; des chottXy cabbages. 

The following differ fron> this rule, and their plural 
terminates in s. 

Matou, a great cat °, matouSy great cats. 
Trouy a hole ^ trous, holes. 

Nouns ending in al and ail have their plural in aux : 
ex. 

Animal ^ a living creature) animauxy living creatures* 
Chevaly a horfe ; chevaux, horfes. 

Travail, work \ travaux, works* 



Thefe only are excepted : 
Baly a ball, 
Gouvernaily the helm, 
Detaily account, retail, 



Eventaily a fan, 
Seraily a feraglio, 
Portaily gateway, 



Which form their plural in s* 

Nouns of more than one fyllable (polyfyllables,) end** 
ing in nt, moil generally form their plural by changing 
the t into s : ex. 

Enfant, a child 5 enfans, children. 

Commandement, command $ commandemens, commands. 

But nouns of one fyllable only (monofyllables) pre- 
ferve the t, and form their plural by adding s :■ as, 

Dent, 



( 9 ) 

Dent, tooth j dents, teeth. 

Pont, bridge \ pants, bridges* X 

Tout, adj. all, makes tens in its plural mafculine. 

The following are not conformable to any eftablifhed 
rule. 

Ayeul, a grandfather \ ayeux, grandfathers. 
Betail, cattle \ bejliaux, cattle. 

del, heaven ; cieux, heavens. 

CE//, the eye ; yeux, eyes. 

t, C des dels de lit,* tefters of a bed. 

" £ des ceils de loenf, ovals. 

There are, in French, feveral compound words like 
the two laft, which require fome attention from the 
learner, in the formation of their plural, the difficulty 
of which may foon be removed by means of reflection ; 
for example : 

A noun being compofed of a mbftantive and an ad- 
jective, feparated by a hyphen, both admit of the plural 
formation : as, 

Un geniil-homme, a gentle- des gentils-hommes, gentle- 
man 5 men. 

A noun compounded of two fubftantives and a prep- 
ofition, united by hyphens, the firft only in French, 
which is generally the laft in Engliih, admits of the 
plural formation : as, 

Un arc-e;>:-ciel, rainbow \ des arcs-en->ciel, rainbows. 

Un chef-d'oeuvre, a mafter- des chefs-doeuvre, mafter* 

piece ; pieces. 

N. B. Some of thefe French compound words are 
fometimes rendered in Engli£h by one word, in which 
cafe the formation of the plural, in the French, is ftill 
the fame : as, 

Un cul-de-fac, an alley des culs-de-fac, alleys, 

(without egrefs ;) 

Nouns compofed of a verb or a prepofition and a 
fubftantive, the fubftantive only admits of the plural 

formation : as, 

1 Un 

* This term becomes obfoletc 1 it is better to fay, unfond de lit, 









( to ) • 

Un avant-toity eaves ; des avant-tois, eaves. 

Un caffe-ncifette> a nut- des caj)e-noifettes> nutcrack- 

cracker ; ers. 

Un garde~fou, a rail ; des ggrde-foux, rails, &c. 

' Meffeigneurs, my lords. 

Mejfieurs, gentlemen. 

Me/dames, ladies. 

Mefdemoifelles, mifles, 

or young ladies. 



MonjYigneur, my lord, ""] JH 
Monjieur, Mr. or matter, tj ^ 
Madame, Mrs. or madam, > ^ g 
JMademoifelle> mifs, J4 *cL 

J s 



CASES. 

There are fix cafes, viz. 

1. Le Nominatifi The Nominative. 

2. Le Genitif) The Genitive. 

3. Le Datify The Dative. 

4. IJ Accufatifi The Accufative. 

5. j£* Vocatif, The Vocative. 

6. L'Ablatifi . The Ablative. 

The nominative and accusative cafes have ex- 
actly the fame form, and are always declined with the 
fame article ; the only difference between them arifes 
from their different pofitions in the fentence, 7 

In the natural construction, the nominative always 
precedes the verb, and the accufative follows it. The 
nominative is the JubjeEl of the fentence, and the accu- 
fative is the cbJeEl to which it refers : ex. 

Le roi alme le peuple, The king loves the people. 

In order to know the nominative from the accufative, 
I aik, who loves the people ? The king (which is the 
anfwer) is the fubject, and confequently the nomina- 
tive. Whom or what does the king love ? the anfwer 
is, the people, which is the object, and therefore the 
accufitive. 

The genitive and ablative are declined with the 
fame article, but the firft is always preceded by another 
word on which it depends : as, 

La porte de la chambre, The chamber-door, that is, 

the door of the chamber. 

La maifon de mon pere, My father's houfe, &c. 

Cr 



( " ) 

Or it is governed by a prepofition : as, 

Pres du feu, Near the fire, Sec. 

The laft is always put after nouns or verbs exprefllng 
divifion, partition, or feparation ; and after fome prepo- 
fitions. The genitive is known by the articles de, du y 
de la, des, of or of the. Sometimes the article is not 
exprefled in the Englifh, as may be feen in the fentences 
before-mentioned. The ablative is known by the arti- 
cles de, du, de la, des, from or from the. 

The dative mews to whom the thing fpoken of is 
given, or to what it is attributed : as, 
Donnez cette pomme a mori Give that apple to my bro- 

frere. ther. 

This cafe is known by the articles a, au, a la, aux, 
to or to the. 

The vocative is ufed only for calling or naming the 
perfon to whom the fpeech is addrefled : as, 

Ami, qui etes-vous P Friend, who are you ? 

DECLENSIONS of NOUNS 

All changes in nouns are formed by numbers and 
cafes. To decline a noun, therefore, is to exprefs its 
feveral variations ; and, under thefe variations, to point 
out its different iigniiications. 

Some fhort examples are added to the nouns, that 
learners may more eaiily underftand what has been laid 
refpefting the cafes. 

Decle?ifion of the Article Definite, Le, (the) before Nouns 
mafculine beginning with a Confonant or H afpirated. 

Singular. 
Nom. LE prince, The prince. 

Le prince ejl genereux. The prince is generous. 
Gen. DU prince, Of the prince. 

Les vertus du prince, The virtues of the prince ; 

or, the prince's virtues* 
Dat. AU prince, To the prince. 

Parler au prince, To fpeak to the prince. 

Ace. LE prince, The prince. 

Aimer le prince y To love the prince. 

Voc. 



( 12 ) 



Voc. O princCy 
AbL DU prince y 

Recevoir des leitres du 
- prince ', 



O prince. 
From the prince. 
To receive letters from the 
prince. 



Declenfon of the Article Definite La (the,) before Nouns 
feminine beginning with a Confonant or H ajpirated. 

Singular. 
Norn. LA princejfey The princefs. 



La princejfe eft aimable 9 
Gen. DE LA princejfe, 

Les regards de la prin- 
cejfey 
Dat. A LA princ£jft y 

Donner a la princejfey 
Ace. LA princejfey 

Imitez la princejfe y 
Voc. O princejfey 
AbL DE LA princejfey 

Eire fepare de la prin- 



The princefs is amiable. 

Of the princefs.. 

The looks of the princefs; 

or, the princefs's looks. 
To the princefs. 
To give to the princefs. 
The princefs. 
Imitate the princefs. 
O princefs. 
From the princefs. 
To be feparated from the 

princefs. 



Declerfwn of the Article Definite, L', ( the J for both Gen- 
derSy bef&re Nouns beginning with a Vowel or an H not 
a/pirated. 

Singular. 



Nom. JO enfant y 

L' enfant eft timidey 
Gen. De V enfant, 

Le te?nperainent de P en- 
fant, 
Dat. A Uenfanty 

Attribuer a P enfant. 
Ace. L' enfant y 

Admirer V enfant y 
Voc. O enfanty 
AbL DE L'erfant, 

S? eloigner de Pe?fant $ 



The child. 

The child is fearful. 

Of the child. 

The child's temper ; or, the 

temper of the child. 
To the child. 
To attribute to the child 
The child. 
To admire the child. 
O child. 
From the child. 
To go away from the child. 

The 



( *3 ) 

The plural of thefe nouns, whether they begin with 
a confonant or a vowel, are declined, in both genders, 
by the article les, (the.) 

Plural. 



Nom. LES rois, 

Les rois commandent, 

Gen. Des rois, 
U ordre des rois, 

Dat. AJJX rois, 
Envoyer anx rois. 

Ace. LES rois, , 
Refpeffez les rois, 

Voc. rois, 

Abl. DES rois, 
Eire loin des rois, 



The kings. 

The kings command. 

Of the kings. 

The order of the kings \ 

or, the kings' order. 
To the kings. 
To fend to the kings. 
The kings. 
Honour the kings, 
O kings. 
From the kings. 
To be far from the kings e 



The definite article mud be placed, in French, before 
all nouns ufed in a general fenfe, or denoting a whole 
fpecies of objects, though the Englifh admit of no arti- 
cle in this cafe : ex* 



* 



Uhomme eft mortel, 

LE Danemarc, LA Suede, 

et L? Anglet err e, font LES 

trois rovaumes dit nord, 
Aimer LES pommes et LES 

poires, 
Hair LA parejfe, 
LA vertu et LA beaute font 

eftimables. 
L?or eft prefer able aL? argent, 

This article is alfo placed before nouns ufed in a fpe- 
cific fnfe, or denoting a particular objecl: > in which cafe 
the article is likewife expreffed in Englifh : ex. 
Uhomme que vcus m'avez The man whom you re- 



Man is mortal. 

Denmark, Sweden, and 
England, are the three 
northern kingdoms. 

To love apples and pears. 

To hate idlenefs. 

Virtue and beauty are efti- 

mable. 
Gold is preferable to filver. 



recotmnande eft fort ha- 
bile, 
LES pemmes et LES poi- 
res de votre jar din font 
exeellentes, 



commended me is very 
fkiiful. 
The apples and pears of 
your garden are excel- 
lent. 

LA 



•\« 



( 14 ) 



The beauty and virtue of 
your lifter caufe her to 
be admired. 

The gold of America is 
preferable to that of Eu- 
rope, 



LA be ante et LA vertu de 
voire fosur la font ad- 
mirer ', ~/ 
L y or de V Amerique {ft pre- 
ferable a celut de l*\Eu- 
rope, 

This article being declinable in French, and confe- 
quently admitting of different variations, muft be 
repeated before all the fnbftantives of a Sentence, and 
before nouns adjective ufed as fubftantives, and agree 
with them in gender and number : ex. 

LE fel, LA moutarde> et The fait, muftard, and oil, 
U huile, font fur LES are on the tables. 
tables, 
LE blanc, LE rouge, et LE 
noir, font trois differentes 
eouleurs, 
\ On the contrary, this article, though exprefled in 
<v Englifti, muft be omitted in French, before a noun/im- 
^ mediately followed by a name/ denoting a degree of con* 
c£ fanguinlty or kindred, or the name of a particular place 
%& to which it belongs m , and when it precedes a noun, in 
jlN: the nominative or accufative cafe, denoting dignity, office^ 
or bufinefs Pex. 

Alexandre fils de Philippe, Alexander the fon of Philip. 
Robert frere de Richard, 



White, red, and bteck, are 
three different colours. 



Mon ami demeure a Lon- 

dres, ville capitale d/An- 

gleterre, 
Monfeur 2)*****, premier 

medec'm de la reine, 
Jldonft'igneur P eve que de 

****^ p rem ler au?nonier 

du roi, 

In feveral inftances, the definite article is neither ex- 
preffed in Englifh'nor French, and this generally hap- 
pens when nouns common are not taken in the full extent 



Robert the brother of 
Richard. 

My friend lives in London, 
the capital city of Eng- 
land. 

Mr. D # * ## , the queen's 
firft phyfician. 

My lord bifhop of ****, 
the king's firft almoner. 



JU, 











A* * 



lr^ 4k*^4S 



( *S ) 

of their figniflcation, efpecially in narrations, and after 

the conjunction niy neither : ex. 

Omfcimce^ bofineury interet, Confcience, honour, inter- 

tout ejifacrifie : il na ni eft, every thing is facri- 

jujlice ni humanite. ficeci : he has neither 

juftice nor humanity. 

RECAPITULATION of the ARTICLE 

DEFINITE. 

Singular. Plural. 

Maf. Fern. Maf. & Fern. Maf. and Fern. 

Le, lay r ; Les> the. 

Du } de la y de P ; Des> of or from the. 

Au y a la y a P ; AiiXy to the. 

EXERCISES upon the foregoing RULES. 

Where is the mafter of the houfe ? — Virtue 
0#,adv, g/?,v. maitr eym. maifon y i. Vertiiyi. 

is eftimable. — The prince fpoke to the king. 

eftyV. e/Jimable y^dj. prince ,m. parlay. iviyT£\ m 

— Do you 2 prefer 1 England 3 to 4 France 5 ? — 
^» vousypro. prefereZyV. Angleterrejl. France y£. 

To the third P a g e °f the book. — Prefer virtue 

troi/ie me yzdj. page yf. livreyVn. JPrefereZyV. 

to riches, friendfhip to money, and utility to pleafure. 
richejfeSy'piS. amitieyi, argent ,m. etyC, utilite y £. pi ai/ir ,m. 

— The father, mother, and children, are dead. — 

pere ,m. mere y £. enfant ,m. fontyV. mortyp.p. 

The 1 lazy 2 do 3 not s love + work 6 . 

parefieuxyzdj* *o> ne-pas y adv, aimentyV* QiivragCyVsx. 

Corn grows for men and grals fcr 

Bledym. brotty v. pour y p. homrhey m. herbey f. 

cattle. Juftice is the miftrefs and queen of 

betailyiti. ^ Jujiice y £. £/?>v. maztreflefi reine y L 

rirtue. .Walk in the garden. 

Promenez-vcuSyV. dansy$. jardw 3 m. 

Send 



( i6 ) 

Send the child to fchool. . Give the 

EnvoyeZy\. enfant y m. eco/e, f. Donnezjr. 

tooth-picks to the gentlemen Children 1 

cure-dent,m. gentil-hommey m. 

generally 3 like 1 apples* and 5 pears 5 . — 

ordi/2airement)<L&v. aimentyV. pommeji. poire£. 

Education is to the mind what cleanlinefs 

Education^, g/?,v. efprit y V£\. ce que^xo. properte yf. 

is to the body.- 1 like yellow and grey. — 

corps ^m. Je^xo. aimejj. jaune>vs\. gw, in. 

Peace and plenty make men happy, 

PaiXyf. abondanceji. rendentyV. heureux&&y 

The life of man is fhort. The enemies 

vie, f. court e y adj. etirienTtyfJi. 

were on the mountain. Love wifdom. — 

etoientyV. fur y p. mont eigne yi* AimeZyV* f a g e ]f e ) f* 

Do x not 3 neglect 2 ftudy* . — Avoid leifure.— 

*o> neg/igeZyV. etude>£. EvitezyV. loifir y m. 

You admire the beauty of the ladies.-r— 

Vousy^vo. admireZyV. beauteyi, dameyi. 

To the thickneis of the walls. Honour is the 

epaijfeury f. murailley f. Honneur y m. 

reward of virtue. — She comes from church.-— 

recoinpenfeyL Elk y^vo. vientyV. eglifeyi. 

We go to the park. — Corn, wheat, and 

t^NcuSy^ro. ailonSyV* parc y m. fromentym. 

%8rley, are dear. 1 hate milk, butter, and 

\ orge y £ fontyV. cheryzd}. haisyV. laityTH. beurre,m. 

cheefe. —We fpeak of America and not of 

fromagCy m. parlonSyV Ameriqueyf non pas y adv. 

Poland. It is the will of the emperor, 

Pologne y {. CeftyV. volonteji. empereury m. 

Bring the knives and forks. —Honour is 

Apporti'ZyV. couteauy m. Jourcbette % f. 

due 






w. 



due to kings. The fate of nations is governed 

<fi},p.p. fortjm. nation^ gouveme,p.]). 

by Providence- — You play with the boys. 

pjr,$. Providence^, jouez^. ayecfr garfan, m. 

Revenge is the pleafure of a weak 1 mind 1 .--^ 
Vengeance >{. plaifir,m* de un foible&ay ejprit y m. 

Patience and perfeverance are neceflary. Italy 

Patience ,f. pe rf eve ranee, £. . necej/aire&d]. Italie,£. 

is the garden of Europe. The Jupiter of the 

jar din > m. Europe , f. 

heathens was the fon of Saturn and the 
payehjcci% etoit } v. fils, m. Saturne,m. 

father of the gods. ■ The defire of glory, 

pere y vci. dieu,m. defr,m. gloire,i. 

riches, power, and pleafure, is a difeafe of the 
pouvoir,m. line mala die, f. 

mind. Tranquillity of foul is the height of 

dmeyi. Tran qui lite ,f. anient. comble,vc\. 

felicity. Grant us peace. Have you 

fe licit e,£. Accordez,v. nous^ro, paix,£. Avez-vous^w. 

paffed through Spain Portugal, or Hoi- 

pcifje, p.p. par, p. Efpagne,£. Portugal, m. ou, c. Hoi- 

TancT? Mr. Dubois, the king's filverfinith, has 

/ande y f. crfevre,m. a, v. 

fent the watch. — The rnoft noble cf 

euvoyejp.p. montre,£. plus, adv. noble ',adj. 

virtues is charity. — Carry the grammar to the 
charitejt. Portez, v. grammaire,£. 

boys, and the dictionary to the girls. — They 

diSionnairfytru jille,£. lis , pro. 

come from the Indies. — Prefer always 

viennent,v. Jnae,£. Freferez,v. toujour?, adv. 

virtue, prudence, and good fenfe, to beauty. — 
Prudence^it bonfx&y fens^m. 

C 2 Put 



( 18 ) 

Put the wine, beer, and cider, on the 

Mettez, v. pin f m. biere, f. cidre, m. fur, p. 

table. — — Give me the loaf. My 

table, f. Donnez, v. moi, pro. pain, m. Ma y ipro. 

fitter lives at York, the capital city of the 

fceur,f. demeure,v. #,p. *~^ 

county of the fame name. -(It is faid) that 

conite,\VL* meme^d]. nom.m. On dit que 

America, France, and Spain, have made peace 

oniyW faitjp.'p. 

with England. 

When in Englifli, two or more mbftantives, Signi- 
fying different things, come together in a fentence, ha- 
ving a dependence on each other, and having no ftop 
between them, the laft (in Englifli) muft be placed at 
the beginning of the fentence (in French,) and the 
others having the fign of the Englifli genitive, thus ('s) 
or (') only, come after it, with the genitive of this article 
before them, according to their gender and number : as, 
Le x fls r du> roi± The 1 king's 4 fon.* 

La 1 couronne' 1 de 3 la remedy The 1 queen's 4 crown. 1 
La l femme* du 3 fls* du s The 1 chancellor's fon's 4 

chance Iter 6 wife.- 

That is, the fon of the king ; the crown of the queen ; 
the wife of the fon of the chancellor. 

The genitive of this article is often made in Englifli 
by to, efpecially before nouns expreffing alliance, con- 
fanguinity, or kindred, witnefs, or inheritance ; and, in 
Ihort, whenever to may be turned by the above ge- 
nitive. 
Mcnfeigneur le due de *'**, My lord duke of ## % 

frere du roi, brother to the king. 

Madame la Marquife de The Marchionefs of * ## , 

# * # , foeur de la femme lifter to the lord chan- 

du grand chancelier, cellor's wife. 

Motif Richard, parfumeur Mr. Richard, perfumer to 

de la princeffe % the prineefs. 

That 



■ ( '9 ) 

That is, my lord duke of ***, the king's brother ; the 
marckwnefs of ***■, the lord chancellor's wife's fifler ; 
Mr. Richard r , the princefs's perfumer. 
II a ete temoin de cetie que- He was witnefs to that 

relle, quarrel. 

N. B. It has been already remarked, that the Englifh 
definite article the is not expreffed in French in the 
above cafes. 

If the fecond fubftantive in French (which is the 
firft in Englifh) ferve to denote fome particular com- 
modity, use, quality, or liquor, then it muft be put a 
in the dative : as,^ ^£*^J^v/ 

Le l pot 1 au lait* The 1 milk* -pot/ 1 / ^ <tf 

La* bouteille 1 a I'huile^ The 1 oil 5 -bottled 

La l femme~ aux pommesf The 1 apple 3 -woman.* 
Le l march e 1 au poijfin/ The 1 fifh 3 -market. 2 

After the adverb bien when placed before a fubftan- 
/ tive, and fignifying much^ a great deal y many, the genitive 

of this article muft always be ufed : as, 
[^ 1 ^fBien du merite^ Much merit. 

/r^^Bien de V argent > A great deal of money* 

• tty* ^Bien des dames , Many ladies. 

Bien des tivres'} Many books. 

EXERCISES ON the foregoing RULES. 

I have ken the king's apartments and the 

y^pro. aiyV. ?;#,p.p« appart€ment,m. 

queen's pifture. The children make much 

reine> f. portrait ,m. font^v. bien y adv. 

noife. — Bring me the wine - bottle. The 

bruit $x\. Apportezjj* moi>pro. vin^m. bouteillefi. 

man's ftrength is very great. He has 

force ,£ £/?,v. £/V//,adv. grande^d]. i7,pro. #,v. 

many friends. — Mr. Richard has married 

bien&dv. ami^m. Monfeur^m. a>v. epoufe$cp m 

Mifs Prefcot, niece to the Earl of the 

Mademoifelle, £> niece> f. , Gotnte^n. 

Tower, 



( 20 ) 

Tower. — "Where is the ^fifh - market ? They 1 

Tour,L Ou,adv. poiJ/on,m. marche,m. i/j^pro. 

give 3 you z much 4 troubled — (There is) the 

donnentyV. vous, pro. peine, £. Voila,^\. 

oifter - woman. — Where is your wine-cellar ? 

huitre,L femmefi. votre, ^ro. vin,m. cave,£* 

——— Lend me the maid's cloak. ■■■ 

Pretez,v. moi, pro. fervante,£. mantelet, m. 

Give me the ink-bottle. — This man has 

Donnez,v. encre,f. Cet,pro. 

(a great deal) of money. — Tell (to) the butter- 
bien^&y. Dites,v. a beurre,m. 

man to come here. ; We live 

de vemr>v. m, adV. Nousjpro* demeurons,m. 

in the poultry-market. 

dans$. volaUkyf.^A. 

Declension of the Article Partit,ive, 

Singular. 

Mafculine. 
Nom. Ace. du pain, fbme bread.* 
Gen. Abl. de pain, of or from fome bread. 
Dat. a du pain, to fome bread. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. de la viande, fome meat. 
Gen. Abl. de viande, of or from fome meat. 
Dat. a de la viande, to fome meat. 

Mafculine or Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. de V argent, fome money. 
Gen. Abl. d? argent, of or from fome money. 
Dat. a de r argent, to fome money. 

The plural is the fame for both genders. 

N. A. 

* In afking a queftion, the Engliih generally make ufe of any^ which a 
in French, mull be rendered by this fame article : as, 

T a-t-il du pain hi ? Is there any bread here ? 

Avez-vous de la viande ? Have you any meat ? 

A't-dk achate des livres ? Has fhe bought any books ? 




( 21 ) 

N. A. des livres y fome books, des auteurs y fome authors. 
G. A. de livres, of or from, &c. d*auteurs % of or from, &c. 
Dat. a des livres, to, &c. a des auteursy to, &c. 

N. B. If the fiibftantive be preceded by an adjec- 
tive, inftead of du y de la y des y we muft ufe de or'd' : as, 

Singular. 

Mafc. Fern. Mafc. or Fern. 

N A. ") De mauvais vin y De bonne eau y D' excellent pain y 

G. A. 3 Bad wine. Good water. Excellent bread. 

D. a de mauvais vin y a de bonne eau y a a" excellent painy. 

To bad wine. To good water. To excellent bread. 

Plural. 

De bans livres y D'habiles gens y 

Good books. Learned men. 

a de bons livres y a d' habile s gens y 

To good books. To learned men. 

This laft rule is not general ; for, there are fome 
fubftantives, though preceded by an adjective, which 
require the other article, inftead of de. However, 
inftances of this kind are very few : they never happen 
but when the adje&ive and fubftantive prefent to the 
mind one idea only : as, Paris eft le centre du ban gouty 
&c. Paris is the centre of good tafte, &c. 

This article mufc be ufed wherever the Englifh word 
some is either expreffed or underftcod, and ought to be 
repeated before every fubftantive in a fentence : as, 
Du pain et de V eau lui Bread and water are fuffi- 

fuffijentj cient for him. 

Apportez du viniagre y de Bring fome vinegar, muf- 

la moutarde y de Yhuile y et tard, oil, and forks. 

des fourchettesy 

EXERCISES upon this ARTICLE. 

Bread, meat, and water, are things necef- 

font y v. chofe y i. necef- 

fary to man. — I drink wine and water. — 

faire&d}. J^pro. bois y v. 

She 



( M } 

She eats cheefe. Bring me fome 

Elle, pro. mange, v. moi> pro, 

muftard. — Have you bought fome paper, pens, 
moutardeyi. Avez } \. achete,p.p. papier y m. plume f. 

and ink ? — You 1 always 3 read 2 good* books. 5 — 

encrefi* toujours&dv. lifezyV. 

Send him fome bread, meat, and potatoes. 1 

EnvoyeZyV. /z//,pro. pomme de terre,f. 

Bad 1 wine 2 is + 3 not 5 worth 4 good 5 water, 7 . 

vautyV. 

Do you 2 fell 1 fruits 3 ? He fpeaks to 

«<^ vendeZyV. fruityia. J/ 5 pro. parley. 

learned people. — Buy fome tea and fugar. — 

gensyf.* AcheteZyV. theym. fucreym. 

I have heard good news. — Will you 

aiyV. apprisyp.p. bonne yzdJ}. nouvelUyi* VouleZyV. 

eat fome beef with turnips and carrots ? 

manger ft. boeuj ^m. avecyp. navet ,m. carrotUym. 

-—You have fine fruits. — Do you 2 drink 1 beer 3 ? 
avezyV. beaux ,adj. «<=» buveZyV. biereyf* 

"" (Is there) any wine in the bottle ? — — 

Y a-t-il dans,]?. bouteilkyf. 

She has worthy friends. — Bring me good 

Elle ,pro. ciyV* digneyzd), amiyixi. bonneyzdj* 

pens.— I 1 have 1 given 4 him 2 bread, money, and 

donney p.p. luiy pro . 

clothes. — Lend me fome books. — I prefer 

habit ym. prefere y v. 

good water to bad wine. — She has mo- 

Elle j, pro. tf,v. mo- 

defty and prudence, — Bring us fome plates.— 

dejlieyi* nouSypvo* ajjiettey f. 

Will 

* Gens, preceded by an adjective, is of the feminine gender ; but a 
vfhen the adjective follows, it is put in the mafculine, 



( n ) 

Will you have fome milk or cream ?— — — Mifs 

k^ cu,c. cremefi. Mademoifel!e,i t 

Sharp has fine eyes. 

Declension of the Article Indefinite. 

All proper names of perfons, cities, towns, and vil- 
lages, are declined with this article, ex. 

Singular. 

Mafculine. 
Nom. Ace. Pierre, Peter. 

Gen. Abl. de Pierre, of or from Peter. 
Dat. a Pierre, to Peter. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. Marie, Maria. 

Gen. Abl. de Marie, of or from Maria. 

Dat. a Marie, to Maria, 

This article, before a noun beginning with a vowel 
or h not afpirated, is exprefTed as follows : 
Nom. Ace. Antoine, Anthony. 

Gen. Abl. d* Antoine, of or from Anthony. 

Dat. a Antoine, to Anthony. 

Nom. Ace. Londres, London. 

Gen. Abl. de Londres, of or from London. 

Dat. a Londres, to London. 

N. B. It is neceffary to obferve, that the dative of 
the article to, ufed after a word fignifying coming, 
going, returning, or sending to, placed before the 
name of a kingdom, republic, county, or province, muft be 
rendered in French by the prepofition en, without any 
article : ex. 

Monfrere ejl alle en Italie, My brother is gone to Italy, 
II doit bientot retourner en He is foon to go back again 

Amerique, to America. 

Ma mere fe propofe d 9 en- My mother intends fend- 

voyer ma fosur en Portu- ing my filler to Portugal 

gal on en Efpagne, et de or Spain, and thence to 

la en Allemagne. Germany. 

O* 



( *4 ) 

On the contrary, to muft be rendered by de, when it 
immediately follows the word read or way : ex. 
Le chemin de Londres y The road to London. 

Le chemin de Parisy The way to Paris. 

( EXERCISES upon this ARTICLE. 

(Here is) John's brother. — Speak to Martha. — 
Foici,2id}. Jean y m. frere,m. Par/ez y v. Marthe^i. 

!j It is Peter's hat. She goes to Richmond. — 

(?*ftj v * chapeatiyva. is//^pro. va,v. 

He comes from Paris. — You have Mr. 

II y pro. vieniyV. Vous ,pro. aveZyV. Monfieur ,m. 

Richard's fword. — When 1 will 2 you 3 go 2 

epee, f. Quand, adv. ireZy v. 

to 4 France 5 ?— Give me Laura's cap. 

Donnez y v. moi y pro. Laure y f. bonnet l ,m. 

I (am going) to Croydon, — I have found 

J^pro. vaisy v. ai y v. trouve 3 p.p. 

Andrew's waiftcoat.— She (mall come back) to England 
Andre All. vejle y f. reviendra y v. 

(next year). Carry that to Stephen. — 

Panne e prochaine. PorteZyV. cela$>ro. Ltienne y m. 

(Here is) the road to Clapham. 
Voiciy adv. 

^The genitive of this article de is ufed after nouns and 
<&**?< adverbs of quantity y whether exprefle.d in Engiifh or 
f] not : ex. 
/) "■• }Q *Deux livres de cerifesy Two pounds of cherries. 

Quatre aunes de moujje- Four yards of muflin. 

liney 
Trcp de viny Too much wine. 

Moins de merite y Lefs merit. 

Plus de fagejfe y More wifdom. 

After the negation pas or pointy no #r not ; the words 
3W, wl^at ; quelone-chofcy fomething \ and rien y nothing : 
ex. 

Point 



( *5 ) 

Point de repos, No reft. 

(2^ de bruit ! What a noife ! 

Que d' integrite I What integrity ! 

Quelque-chofe* de bon, Something good. 

Rien de mauvais, Nothing bad. 

Before nouns of countries, kingdoms, and provinces., \/ 
when preceded by a noun expreffing a perfon al title, or /V 
by a verb fignifying coming, arriving, or returning 
from : ex. 

JL* ra d' Angleterre, The King gf England- 

27 arrive de France, He arrives jfo?;/* France, &c. 

iVl 5. Speaking of either of the four parts of the 
world, the prefent cuftom requires the definite article to )( 
be uied : ex. ' N 

Monfrere arrive de Y Ame- My brother arrives from 

rique, America. 

Elle vient de YA/ie, She comes from Afia. 

EXERCISES on these RULES. 

I have bought fix yards of cloth. — 

ye, pro. ai,v. achete,]).^. drap,m. 

Bring me three pounds of veal and two 

Apportez,v. moi, pro. trots veau,m. deux 

pounds of mutton. — She has a great 

mouton,m. £ile,-pro. a,v. un grand,zdj. 
number of children. — Do *not 4 give 3 her 2 

notnbre,m* <<* ne-pas donnez,v* /#/,pro. 

(too 5 many) pears. 6 — I 1 have 3 *no + daughters. 5 — 
trop, adv. ai, v. ne point, file, f. 

Did you fee the tluke of Bavaria with the 

Avez,v. vour, pro. vu,p.p. duc,m. Bavieref. avec,p. 

archbifhop of York ? — We have (Co many) 

archeveque,m. Nous, -pro. avons,v. tant ' 

D grapes. 

* It muft be obferved, that the won! chofe, {landing by itfelf, is of 
the feminine gender ; but, being joined to the word quelle, it is o* 



the mafcUline. 



•V' £uc i^aU- ji . tk J. /3 • 



( 26 ) 

grapes. — They have (a little) money. — 1 

raijinpci. jftr,pro. ont,v. unpeuyzdv. 

know the king of Pruffia. — He has more 

connois y v. JF * ruffe , f. //, pro. a y v. 

friends than you. (There were) (fo many) 

amum. que,c. vousjpvo. II yavoityV. 

ladies. — He commanded an army of forty 
dame 9 £ coinmandoity v. une armeey f. quarante 

thoufand men. — She 1 fays 3 ^nothing 4 true. 

milk dit, v. tie rien y adv. vraiy adj. 

You ipeak of Alexander, king of Macedonia, f. 
par/eZy v. Alexandre, m. Macedoine, f. 

Do you 2 come 1 from 3 Italy ? No ; I come from 
^ venez } v. Italie y f. viens y v. 

Africa. 
AfriquCy f. 

De is likewife placed before nouns governed by ano- 
ther fubftantive, of which they exprefs the charac- 
ter, CAUSE, COUNTRY, MATTER, NATURE, and 

qjjality : ex. 

Une 1 waifori 1 de briquef A 1 brick 3 houfe. 2 

Du vin 1 de Bourgogne? Burgundy 2 wine, 1 &c. 

After the adjectives of number, when they are fol- 
lowed by a participle paffive : ex. 

Qiwtre de r envoy es. Four fent away, &c. 

EXERCISES on these RULES. 

Your 1 fifter 2 has 3 a 4 filk 6 gown s and a gold 

Voire ,pro. foeur yf. #,v. une y foie>£. robe, f. un y <?r,m. 

thimble. — We drink Champagne wine. — 

de> m. Nous, pro. buvon.Sy v. Champagne y f. 

(It is) a marble pillar. — They have a 

CV/?,v. marbreym* pillier ,111. Ils> pro. onty v. une 

country - houfe, — Edinburgh is the capital 
xa7V.pagne£*maifony£* Edinhcurgy £&v. , capitakyzdj. 

city 



( 2 7 ) 



A* 



city of the kingdom of Scotland. — Shtrt 1 the 1 

ville,{. royaume y m. Ecop, f. Fenn-Zy v. 

fore + - door. 3 — A lady of wit is a jewel 

devant^portefi. Une dame£. efprit y vci, e]i ? y.un joyattfto. 

of worth. — (He is) a man of honour. — She 

prixy m. Ctjt, v. un 
has bought iilver buckles and diamond 

achete, p.p. argent, m. bouck, f. diamant^m. 

ear - rings.- — Have you ipoken to the filk* 

pendans d? oreiliesa. Avez, v. parle,p.ip. foief. 

merchant. — Give 1 me 2 the* upper 5 - craft. 4 

marchandyVii. Donnez^.moi^xo. dzgusjn. croute,L 

Sixty loft. — Bring me my ftraw hat. 

Soixanteperdu^.p. montfpro. paille y L chapeaujc&p 

De is placed after the adjectives fignifying dimen- 
sion ; as, epaisj thick; gros, big, large; haut, high, 
tall j large, wide, broad , long, long : and prof and, deep ^ 
though there is no article expreffed in Englifh : ex. 
Une 1 table* longue* de dix^ A 1 table 2 ten 4 feet 5 long* 

pieds 5 et 5 large 7 de huit? and 5 eight 3 broad. 7 

But there is a more elegant way, which is, to turn 
the adjective of dimenfion into the fubftantive : then 
the words of meafure and thofe of dimenfion are prece- 
ded by de : ex. 

Une table de dlx pieds de A table ten feet long and 
longueur et de huit de eight broad, 

largeur 3 

In this laft example, it may be feen that the French 
and Englifh are parallel with each other \ therefore, in 
the following exercife, the adjective and fubftantive are 
put down, that the learner may tranflate it both ways. 

EXERCISES on these RULES. 

I have a box four inches thick, 
y^pro. ai ,v. une* hit *,f. quatr 'e , pouce^ra, epais~feur,L* 

* Read ^ai; , adjective, fpaijfeur^ fUbftantive, and fo af the others* 

ten 



( 28 ) 

ten feet long, and fix broad. — — I know 

dix piedym* long — ueurfi ftx large-urji. connois?}* 

a man feven feet high. (It is) a ditch nine 

tin fept haut — eur y £. QeJ},\. un fofse,m. neuf 

feet fix inches deep and five feet broad. 

profond — eurf. cinq 

(There is) a room fifty paces long and 

Voila tine chambref.. ci?iquante pas,m. 

twenty broad. — The walls of our garden 

vingt tnurailleji. noire ^ro, 

are thirty feet three inches high, and two 

font, v. ont,v. trente trots deux 

broad. 

If the learner tranflate this laft fentence by the ad- 
jective of dimenfion, he muft ufe the word font y which 
is the proper word of the Englifh are, and follows 
the preceding rule : but, if he turn the adjective of di- 
menfion into its fubftantive, the word etre, to be, is to 
be rendered into French by the verb avoir, to have, and 
de before the word of miafure is fupprefled. In this 
laft cafe, the word ont muft he inferted inftead of font. 
Example by the adjective : 
Notre chambre eft longue 

de vingt pie ds et large 

de douze : 

By the fubftantive : 

Notre chambre a vingt pieds Our room is twenty feet 

de longueur et douze de long and twelve broad. 

largeur \ 

When two fubftantives are joined together by a hy- 
phen, both making a compound word in Englifh, the 
firft of which denotes the form or ufe of the fecond, the 
latter muft be placed before the former in French, and 
followed by the dative of this article a : ex. 

i / Un moulin 1 a papier? A paper 2 - mill. 1 
y Une boite 1 h poudre? A powder 1 -box** 



K 



Xu (K^ZfW h * 1$ * 



( *9 > 

EXERCISES on this RULE. 

Gun - powder was invented by a monk. 
Canon } m.pQudre y f.fut>v. invent ee y p.p, par y p. moine y m. 

—The fervant has loft the tinder-box* and 

a y v. perdu y p.p. fufil y m. 

cannot light the candle. If you go to 

nefauroit y v. allumer y v. chandelleji* Si $ c> allez y v. 

London to-morrow, bring me a toupee- 

demain^Av. aportez y v. moi y pro. toupet y m* 

iron. — Have you ^Qn the water-mill which 
fer ',m. Avez y v. vu y p.p* que y pro* 

my father has bought ? — No> but I have 

mon y pro. achete y p.p. iV<?#,adv. mais y c. ai y v. 

feen the wind-mill which your brother has built 

vent y m. fait bdtir y v. 

at Greenwich.— I have found your fitter's work- 

a y p* trouve y p.p. ouvrage y m* 

bag in the eating - room. 
fac y m* dans y p. manger y m. chambre y f. 

Declension of un, m. une> f. a or an. 

Singular. — Mafculine. 
Nom. Ace. un livre> a book. 

Gen. AbL d y un livre y of or from a book* 
Dat. a un livre y to a book. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. une plume y a pen* 
Gen. Abl. d'une plume y of or from a pen, 
Dat. a une plume y to a pen, 

EXERCISES upon this ARTICLE, 

I have a hat and a fword. — She {peaks of . 

ai y v. chapeau y m. epee y f. Elie y pro. parley. 

an officer. — He 1 has 3 given* it 2 to 5 a 

effiaerym, l^pro.* <3>v. donne y p.p. /t^pro. 

D 2 foilor.* 



Ix 



( 3° ) 

failor. 6 (There are) a bird and a cage. 

matelotjKi, Voila, adv. oifeau>m. cage,L 

It muft be obferved, that the Englifh article A or 
an, before nouns of measure, weight, number, and 
a part of time, muft be rendered in French by the de- 
finite article, le r la, les : ex. 

Deux chelins le cent. Two (hillings a hundred. 

XJn ecu le boiffeau, A crown a bufhel. 

And by the prepofition par, ufed in the fenfe of each, 
' every, or per : ex. 
;> Je tut donne deux chelins I give him two Shillings a . 
par Jetnai 'tie, week. 

line guinee par mois, One guinea a month. 

<| N. B. A or an is not to be exprefled when it imme- 
c^ diately precedes a noun in the nominative or accufative 
^r- cafe, denoting title, dignity, office, bufinejs^kox words 
which denote the gender or /pedes of things ; and 
Jaftly, after the verb etre, to be, unlefs that verb be 
preceded by ce in the third perfon lingular, or the above 
nouns be followed by one of the relative pronouns^ 
ivho, whom, which, &c. or by an adjeftive in the fuperla- 
live degree : ex. 

M. D — , menibre de la Mr. D — , a member of the 
chambre des communes y houfe of commons, fpoke 
parla beaucoup hier. very much yefterday. 

J % m lit Caftor et Pollux, I have read Caftor and Pol* 

opera Francois. lux, a French opera. 

Etes-vcus Anglois? Are you an Engliihman ? 

Non, M.jejuis Frangois. No, fir, I am# Frenchman. 
Sa Jceur eft tnarchande de Her lifter is a milliner and 
modes et Jon frere eft her brother is a tailor. 
tailleur* 

\ EXERCISES on these RULES. * 

Barley fells for three fhillings a 

©rge,i\ Jevendfi* *<* frw,adj. chelin,m. 

bufliel. That ale {is worth) fix pence 

fyiJftaUjXn* Gette$vQ« dlefi vaut«v* T^m* 



a pint.— Beef cofls four pence a pound.— 
pintef. Boeufyin. couteji. quatrepfi). livre£. 

This lace coft a crown an elL — *- He 

Cette^xo. dentellef. coutaft. ecu } m. aunef. i7,pro. 
fells his beft cloth a guinea a yard.— 

vetulyW. fon^ro. meilleur&Sy drapyVCi. guinee y i. verge>£. 

My mailer comes twice a week. — Bur- 

Mottjoko* vientyV. deux fois y zdv. femaineji. 

gundy wine is fold nine fhillings a bottle. — My 
fe vendyV. ne uf } 2id]. 

uncle goes to France thrice a year, She 

ancle f&. va y v. trois foiSyZdv. an y m.Elk y$ro. 

gives three fhillings a day and ten pence a mile. — * 
donncy v. jour % m. milky m, 

Are you a phyfician ? *— - No, fir, I am a 

EteSyV. medecinym. fuisyV* 

furgeon. — Briftol, a fea - port, paffes now 
chirurgietiym. mer y f. portym. paJftyV. a prefentyzdv* 

for the fecond city of the kingdom of England. — » 

pOUt'y p. 

The 1 king 2 made* him 3 a bifliop. 5 Is fhe a 

fit, v. /?,pro. eveque y m. E/l>v* 

dutchefs or a marchionefs ? 
duchejfe y f. inarquife y f. 

Of NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 
Rule to form their Feminine Gender. 

Many adje&ives in al have no pluraifor their ma£- 
cuiine, as conjugaly conjugal \ fataly fatal ; filial, filial \ 
natal y natal 9 naval \ naval ; total \ total j and fome few 
others, with which a little practice will foon acquaint 
the learner. 

Adjectives ending in e mute are of both genders : ex* 
Un jeune hcmmey a young man. 

line jeune fiemme $ a young woman. 



<Sl 




( 3* ) 

Adje£Uves ending with one of the following letters, 
d> e, i> /, n, r, s> /, and w, form their feminine by adding 
an e mute : ex. 
Mafc. Grand, Fern, grande great. 

Poliy poliey polite. 

Aimey aimeey loved. 

Civily civiky civil. 

Demly demiey half. 

Ntiy nue y bare, naked. 

Thefe two laft adje&ives are indeclinable when they 
precede a fubftantive, but are declinable when they fol- 
low it : ex. 

Une demi-livrey a half-pound. 

line llvre et demie, a pound and a half. 

Nu tete y bare-head. 

Nu piedsy bare-foot. 

There are a few ending in an 3 asy el y /'/, eil 3 ien y in y es 9 
ety isy otiy os y oty and ul y that double the final letter, before 
an e mute, for the feminine : ex. 

Mafc. Fern, 

Pay/an, countryman. Payfanne 3 countrywoman, 

GraSy g ra Jfty &*. 

Gentily gentilky genteel. 

Eternely eternelhy eternal. 

Pareily pareille 3 alike. 

Chretien^ Chretienne 3 Chriftian. 

Epais> ep a ffl e y thick. 

Bony bonne y good. 

GroSy gwjfh big. 

Soty fate* foolifh. 
The following are very irregular, and cannot be com- 

prifed under any rule, viz. 

Maf. Beauy bel,* Fern. beUe y handfome, fine, 

Benin? benigne y benign. 

Favoriy favorite y favourite. 

FoUyfoly* , f0lky fool. 

Fraisy fraichey frefh. 

Mafc. 

\% Set and/*/ are ufcd before fobAanttes beginning with a vowe* 
%r « cot afpimed. 



i 



( 33 ) 

Mafc. Long, Fern. longue, long. 

Matin, maligne, malicious. 

Mou, molte, foft. 

Nouveau, nouvel* nouvelle, new. 
Vieux, vieil,* vieille, old. 

Adje&ives ending in c add he to the c for their femi- 
nine : ex. 
Mafc. Blanc, Fern, blanche, white. 

Franc, franche, fincere. 

Sec, seche, dry, &c. 

The four following are excepted : 
Mafc. Caduc, Fern, caduque, in decay. 

Grec, Greque, Greek. 

Public, publique, public. 

Turc, Turque, Turkifh. 

Thofe ending in^ change f into ve for the feminine : ex* 
Mafc. Bref, Fern, breve, fhort. 

Naif, naive, plain, ingenuous, 

Neuf, neuve, new. 

Veuf, widower, veuve, widow. 

Vif, vive, quick. 

Adjeftives ending in x change x into fe : ex. 
Mafc Douloureux, Fern, douloureufe, dolorous, painful* 
Heureux, heureufe, happy, &c. 

Jaloux, jaloufe, jealous. 

The following are excepted : 
Mafc, Doux, Fern, douce, fweet. 

Faux, fatijfe, falfe. 

Perplex, perplexe, perplexed* 

Prefix, prefixe, prefixed. 

Roux, rouffe, reddifii. 

Declension of Nouns Adjective. 

French adje£tives muft agree with thpir fubftantives 
in gender, number, and cafe ; ex* 

Singular 

Nouvd and 'visit are alfo ufed before fubftantives beginning wuh 
a yowel or h not afpirated. 



( 34 ) 

Singular. — Mafculine. 
Nom. Ace. Le bon livre, the good book. 
Gen. Abl. du bon livre> of or from, &c. 

Dat. au bon livre, to the good book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. Les bons livres, the good books. 
Gen. Abl. des bons livres, of or from, &c. 
Dat. aux bons livres, to the good books. 

Singular. — Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. La bonne plume, the good pen. 
Gen. AbL de la bonne plume, of or from, &c. 
Dat. a la bonne plume, to the good pen. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. Les bonnes plumes, the good pens. 
Gen. Abl. des bonnes plumes, of or from, &c. 
Dat. aux bonnes plumes, to the good pens. 

As two or more fubftantives in the fineular are 
equivalent to a plural, the verb and adjective, or parti- 
ciple paft, muft be put in the plural when they refer to 
two or more fubftantives in the lingular, and that adjec- 
tive or participle is to be put in the mafculine, if thofe 
fubftantives be of different genders : ex. 
Lefrere> la foeur, le neveu> The brother, fifter, ne- 

et la niece, font tous phew, and niece, are all 

bons,. good, 

Le roi, la reine, le prince, The king, queen, prince, 

et la princejfe, etoient and princefs, were gone 

fort is, out. 

But, when two or more fubftantives of different gen- 
ders are immediately followed by an adjective or parti- 
ciple, the French language requires that adjective or 
participle to agree in gender and number with the laft 
fubftantive ; except thofe adje&ives or participles imply- 
ing union or collection, fuch as joint, uni, reuni, &c. which 
follow the foregoing rule. 
11 gouverne avec un pouvoir He governs with an abfolute 

et une autorite abfolue, power and authority. 

Elk laiffa le coffre, le cabinet) She left the trunk, the clo~ 

et la chambre, ouverte* <- fet^ and the room> open. 



7 



at 



( 35 ) 

jfai trouve les enfans, le I found the children, father 
fere, et la mere, reunis, and mother, united. 

The Place of the Adjective in a Sentence. 

Some adjectives are always placed before their fubftan- 
tives, and others after them , but there is a kind of ad- 
jectives which may either precede or fucceed their fub« 
ftantives, as the euphony of the fentence requires. 

The following muft be placed before : 

Beau, 

Bon, 

Brave, 

Cher, 

Chhify 

Galant, 
Grand, 

Gros, 

Honniie, 

jfeune, 



handfome, fine. 


Jdi, 


pretty. 


good. 


Me chant, 


wicked. 


brave. 


Mauvais, 


bad. 


dear. 


Meilleur, 


better. 


vile, poor, mean. 


Moindre, 


lefs. 


well-bred. 


Petit, 


little, fmall. 


great, tall. 


Saint, 


holy, faint. 


big, large. 


Tout, 


all. 


honeft, civil. 


Vieux, 


old. 


young. 


Vrm, 


true. 


RF.fs n\r tut? vr 


YQT!ClCW>JirL 


AnTPPTUrRQ 



*\J* 



I have feen a handfome lady who (was fpeak- 
w,p.p. dame,f. qui,$ro. par- 
ing) to an old gentleman. He had a fine 

hit, v. gentil-homme,m. II, pro. avoit, v. 

hat and a pretty fword. — Your little fifter 

chapeau, m. Voire, pro. 

deferved a better fate. Your father was a brave 

meritoit,v. . dejlin,m. etoit,v. 

general and a well-bred man. — I know a young 
general, m. connois, v. 

man who has a good horfe, ' but a bad ftable. — 

ho?nme,m. a, v. theval,m. e curie, i. 

He 1 has^ lent* it* to s an honeft 6 man. — The 

prete,ip.ip. &, pro. 

apoftle Paul was a holy man. — — My brother has 

apGtre,m* 

bought 



( 3* ) 

bought a good watch. . — You have loft all 

achete,*p.p* montre,{. avez,v. perdu, p. p. 

your money. 

Some adje&ives have very different meanings, accord- 
ing as they are placed before or after their fubftantive ; 
as, une femme fage, a wife woman ; une fage femme, a 
midwife : and une groffe femme, a big woman ; une 
femme grofle, a woman with child : un homme honnete, 
a civil man ; un honnete homme, an honeft man, &c. 
A little practice will remove many apparent difficulties. 

Adjectives, expreffing names of nations, colour, fgure, 

form, tafte, hearing, and touching, thofe that denote 

natural qualities, together with thofe ending in He, ie, 

and ique, as alio the participles, when ufed adje&ively, 

mull be placed after their fubftantives. 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING RULE. 

You have an Englifh hat, and fhe has 

Anglois,zd]* chapeau,m. elle,pro. a 3 ,v. 

a French gown. — He reads an Italian pro- 

Frangois,%&). robe,{. 7/,pro. lit, v. It 'alien, adj. pro. 

verb. I like the German tongue, and a 

<verbe,m* aime,Y. Alkwand,ad]* langue,f. 

Spanifh drefs. (It is) a fquare ^ place. — 

Efpagnolfl&y habillement,m. Ceft,v. quarre,zd}. place, f. 
She likes fweet wine. — Your fifter has 
Elle,pro. aime,v. doux,zd). vin,m. Voire $ro. foeur,i. a,v. 

an harmonious voice. — I have bought a white 
harmonieux,zd). voix,f. achete,^^. blane,zdj. 

gown and a black cloak. — You have a _ faithful 
noir, adj . mantelet, m. fdele, adj . 

fervant. 1 eat green peas with 

domc/!ique,m. et,f. mange,v. verd,'dd}. pois,m> avec,p> 
boiled mutton. — Bring me a pound and a half of 
houilU,^.^. mouion,m. demifidy 

cherries 



( 37 ) 

cherries and half a pound of currants. » We 

cerifeSyL grofeilleSyi. NouSyipro. 

had a kind reception, and we played at 

eumes>v. favorable ,adj. accueil,m. joudmes y x. a p. 

a diverting game. — He lives in a 

divertiflant y%d). jeu y m. J7,pro. demeure y v. dans yip. 

cold country. — You have left the windows 

froidy adj. paySytn. Jaijfe,'p.'p. Jenetre>L 

and the door open. — Will you have a bit 

porte y f* VouleZyV. <<>> tnorceaUyVd. 

of roafted chicken ? She prefers a 

roti> p.p. poulety m. Elle y pro. prefere, v. 

round table. — Do you 2 read 1 the 3 Punic 5 

rondy adj. table , f. ^ ^z, v. P unique y adj. 

w ar ?4 JJe has made a rafh vow. 

guerre y f. y#/Y, p.p. temeraireyZCL]. vceuyvn* 

Your fitter is an agreeable lady. I like 

efly v. agr cable y adj. damey f. az'/fti, r. 

a grey fluff. — (It was) really a tragical 

grz\f,adj. etoffey f. CetoityV* reellementyzdv. tragique ,adj. 

hiflory. 
hifloirey f. 

When two or more adjectives belong to one fubftan- 
tive, the fureft way is to place them after it, with the con- 
junction ety and, before the laft ; and, if an adjective be 
ufcd in a fentence without a fubftantive, this adjective 
muft always be rendered in French by the mafculine 
gender. 

EXERCISES on this RULE. 

We have a juft, wife, and boun- 

Nousy pro. avortSyV. jujleyzd}. fcge y adj. bien- 

iful, king. Mr. Brown's daughter 

l aifanty adj. Monfieury m. Brutiy m. JHle } f. 

E is 



( 38 ) 

is with a fincere and generous lady. 

5//, v. fincere 9 adj. gene re ux , adj. 

I have a fcholar of a folid, bright, and 

ecclier, m. /elide y adj. brill ant y adj. 

lively, genius. — The wicked fhall be punifhed. 

vif\?*(X]. efprityXa. me chant } 7idj.ferontyV. puniyip.p. 

— Mifs Prefton is a young, handfome, and 

Mademoifelle, f. ejly v. 

well-fhaped, lady. — She has married a fober, 
blenfaity adj. epoufe,p.ip. fobre yzd). 

virtuous, and amiable, man, — The good 

vertueuX) adj. aimableyzdj* 

ihall be rewarded. 
feronty v. recompenfey p.p. 

DEGREES of COMPARISON. 

Adjectives and adverbs are the only kind of words 
that will admit of different degrees of more or lefs in 
the feveral qualities of perfons or things. 

There are two degrees of comparifon. 

1. Le comparatif the comparative. 

2. Le fuperlatif the fuperlative. 

Some grammarians admit of another degree, which 
they call pofitive : but this is merely an adjective, ufed 
in its limple lignification, without expreffing any increafe 
or diminution :• ex.joli, pretty; aimabky lovely. 

The comparative refers to fome other perfon or thing, 
and mews its equality y excefsy or defect ; it is therefore of 
three forts : 

1 . Le comparatif d?£galite y The comparative by equal- 

ity. 

2. Le comparatif d? excesy The comparative by excefs. 

3 . Le comparatif de defauty The comparative by defec~L 

The comparative by equality is formed by placing the 
adverbs ant ant , as much, or aufjiy fo, before an adjec*- 

ti>e : ex. 

Mon 



( 39 ) 

Mon frere ejl auffi favant My brother is as learned 

que vouSy as you. 

Alexandre etoit auffi. ambi- Alexander was as ambiti- 

tieux que Cefar, ous as Crefar. 

Ala fceur a autant £ argent My fifter has as much mo- 

que vgus. ney as you. 

The comparative by excefs is formed by placing the ad- 
verb plus, more > before an adjective : ex. 
Mademofelle A. ejl plus Mifs A. is more learned 
favant e et plus belle que and more handfome (or 

Mademoifelle B. handfomer) than Mifs B. 

Sa confine a plus de llvres Her coulin has more books 

que vouf. than you. 

The comparative by defecl is formed by placing the 
adverb moins, lefs, before an adjective, or tani, fo much, 
or fty fo, with the negation ne pas or point, not, or ne 
—niy neither — nor, before them : ex.*** 
Votre coufne ejl moins noble Your coufin is lefs noble 

que vouSy than you. 

11 a moins d'efprit que fa He has lefs wit than his 

fotury fifter. 

Mon per e rt ejl pas fi riche My father is not fo rich as* 

que le votre ', mats il n y a yours, but he has not fo 

pas tant d* amour-propre, much felf-love. 

It muft be obferved, that, in fentences in which the 
above adverbs more or lefs are repeated to exprefs a com- 
parifon, the definite article the, preceding either, is to- 
tally fupprefled in French : ex. 
Plus une chofe ejl difficile, The more a thing is diifi- 

plus elle ejl honorable, cult, the more honour- 

able it is. 
Moins vous lui donnez, The lefs you give him, the 

moins il depenfe, lefs he fpends. 

Plus on ejl pauvrey moins on The poorer people are, the 

a d'emharrasy lefs care thev have. 

From the above inftances, it may be eafily feen that, 
when the adverbs tant y autant , plus y and moins y are im- 
mediately followed by a fubftantive, that fubftantive 



( 40 > 

muft be preceded by de. The learner will alfo obferve, 
that ft and auffi generally precede adjectives, when a 
comparifon is made with either ; whereas tant and autant 
are always followed by a noun or verb, the French con- 
junction que, Englifhed by either as, than, or that, being 
the two terms of the comparifon : plus and moins may 
precede either an adjective, a noun, or verb. 

The above comparative adverbs ft, auffi y tant, autant % 
plus,- and moins, muft be repeated, in French, before each 
adjective, noun, verb, or adverb, in the fentence : ex. 
Voire frere eft auffi favant Your brother is as learned 
et auffi eclaire que mm and enlightened as my 
coufin, mais il n'ejl ni ft coufin, but he is neither 
prudent ni ft circonfpeEl Jo prudent nor circum- 
que fd faur, fpedt as his lifter. 

Man pere a autant de pom* My father has as many ap- 
miers et autant de poi- pie and pear trees in his 
riers dans J on verger qu'il orchard as there are in 
y en a dans le v6tre, yours. 

M. Robert n*a ni tant de Mr. Robert has neither fo 
bien ni ta?it d 9 efprit que much wealth nor wit as 
M. Dubois, \ Mr. Dubois. 

Son frere aine [era plus at- His eldeft brother will be 
tentif, plus indujlrieux, et more attentive, induftri- 
plus riche, que lui, ous, and richer, than he. 

Mademoifelle S. a moins Mifs S. has lefs wit, lefs 
d'efprit, moins de viva- livelinefs, and becoming- 
' cite et moins d'agremens, nefs, than her lifter. 
que fa foeur, 

The fame rule is to be obferved with refpeft to the 
adverbs ufed in forming the fuperlative degree. 

N. B. The three following adje£tives are compara- 
tives by themfelves : meilleur, better ; pire, worfe ; and 
mohidre, lefs ; which fignify plus bon, plus mauvais^ 
plus petit. 

The fuperlative exprefles the higheft degree of any 
quality. There are two kinds of fuperlatives : — The 
relative, which exprefles' the quality of a perfon or thing 

above 



( 4* ) 

above all others of the fame kind. In this cafe, one of 
the following articles, le, la, les, de, du 3 de la, des, a, au> 
a, la aux, precedes the adverbs plus, moft ; mieux, beft ; 
rnoins, leaft ; before an adjeftive ; or the adjectives 
meiUeur % beft ; moindre, leaft ; pire, worfe : ex. 
Voire fceur eft la plus belle Your fifter is ihe hand- 

et la meilleure femtne de fomeft (cr the moft 

la ville, handfome) and the beft 

woman in town. 

The abfolute fimply expreiTes the quality of a perfoii 
or thing in its higheft degree. This happens when one 
of the adverbs ires, fori, bien, very ; inftniment, infi- 
nitely \ precedes an adjedtive : ex. 
Voire cifeau ejl tres, fort, or Your bird is very pretty. 

bien, jolty 
Dieu eft infinimcnt ben, God is infinitely good. 

When any of the comparatives by excels or defeat 
are preceded by one of the pcfleflive pronouns thon, ton % 
fon, noire, voire, leur, Sec. they become fuperlatives : ex. 

Vous ties mon meilhur ami^ You are my beft friend. 

EXERCISES upon the DEGREES of 

COMPARISON. 

You 1 are 3 2 not 4 fo 5 dutiful 5 as- 

eies, v. ne-pas, adv. obeijfant, adj . 

your 8 brother. 9 — Lucia is handibmer, but: 

voire jpro, frere,m. Lucie, f. ejl, v. n:ais,c 

more proud, : than her fifter. — I .am 

orgueilleux,zd}. yfc,pra. foeur,{. je,pro. fuis,\:> 

as tall as you. My father is as rich 

haut&d}. vousjpxo. Mon,pvo. pere,m. iiche,zah 

as yours. — His filter is more covetous than he. — 
k votregro. &?,pro. avare,A&] % luigrh. 

Nothing is pleafanter to the mind than the light 
Rien //f,adv. agreable,zdj. efprit,m< lumicreJ. 

of truth. — She is lefs polite than her 

yeritefi. JS//p,pro. eft, v. poli^d\. fagtQ. 

E % daughter. 



( 42 ) 

daughter, but her daughter (is not) fo revenge- 

filled mais,z. riejl pas,v. vindica- 

ful as {he. — I am your moft humble fervant 

tif, adj . elle ,pro. humble, adj . ferviteur,m. 

— Mifs D. (has not) fo much wit as her lifter, 

n'a pas, v. tjprit, m. 

but fhe has as much livelinefs and is as amiable 
mats, c. vivacite,f. 

as fhe. The 'richer 4 they 2 are, 3 the more 5 

riche,zdj. *7r,pro. font, v. 

covetous 8 they 6 are. 7 — My friend has a very 

avare, adj. Man, pro. ami,m. a, v. 

beautiful country - houfe. The vine is one of the 

beau, ad}. campagne,i.maifon,i. vigne,f. 

moft ufeful and agreeable gifts of Providence, 
utile, ady. agreable,ad}. don,m. Providence ,f. 

— Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and nothing 

aimable, adj. 

is more defirable than wifdom. Paris (is not} 

dejirable,ad]. J a g e Jf e y £ 

fo populous as London. My beft friend is 

peuple ,adj. Londres. 

dead. — My daughter is taller than your fon by 

mort,zd}. Ma,^ro. JHs,\n. de 

two inches. — Virtue is the moft precious thing 

deux precieux, adj. chofe,$+ 

in the world* — The lion is the ftrongeft and the moft 
du monde , m. f or t> a 4J* 

courageous of all animals. ~ — (There is) the 

courageux, adj. animal, m. Voila, adv. 

handfomeft Lady in London. — She has as much virtue 

de 

and good fenfe as beauty, -— - - Mifs P. is the 
fens } m* 

xnildefts 



( 43 ) 

mildeft, politeft, and moft affable, of all her 
deux ycidj. poliyzd}. affable ',adj. /kr,pro. 

fifters. — Your brother is taller than you by the 



whole head. 

touted). tete y f. 



■ If France were as rich as Eng~ 
S?,c. etoityV. 



land, (it would be) the beft country in the world. % 
ce feroityV. pays, m. 

Of NUMBERS. 



There are two kinds of numbers : ift. 


which fimply relates 


the number of the 


of, viz. 




Un, 


One. 


Deuxy 


Two. 


TrotSy 


Three. 


Quatrey. 


Four. 


Cinay 


Five. 


SlXy 


Six. 


Septy 


Seven. 


Hulty 


Eight. 


Neufy 


Nine. 


D2Xy 


Ten. 


Onze } 


Eleven* 


Douze y 


Twelve. 


Treizey 


Thirteen. 


Quatorzey 


Fourteen* 


Qjuinzey 


Fifteen. 


Seize y 


Sixteen. 


Dix-fepty 


Seventeen, 


Dix-huity 


Eighteen. 


Dix-Neufy 


Nineteen* 


Vingty 


Twenty.* 


Vingt et un y 


Twenty-one. 


Vingt-deuXy 


Twenty-two* 



VingU 

* It may be ohferved in fome of thefe examples, that the prepofition 
in, following an adjective in the fuperlative degree, mufl be rendered 
in French by one of thefe articles, de, du, de la, des, according to the 
gender and number of the fubftantive to which it belongs. The prep- 
ofition by, when it follows an adjective in the comparative degree^ is 
rendered by de only, 



( 44 } 



&c. 



Vlngt-troisy 

Trente> 

Trent e et tin, 

Trente-deux } &c. 

Qimrante, 

Cinquante, 

Soixante, 

Soixante et tin, 

Soixante et deux> &c. 

Soixante et dix y 

Soixante et onze, &c. 

Quatre-wingtS} 

Quatre-vingt un, 

Quatre-vingt deux, &c* 

Quatre-vingt dix, &c« 

Cent, 

Cent un, &c« 

# 
Deux cens, 
Trois cetiSy &c. 
Neuf eensy 
Mille 3 milyf 
Deux milky 
Trois milky &c. 
Cent milky &c, 

Neuf cens milk % 
Un million, 

Thefe ahfolute numbers are declined with the article 
indefinite, de 9 a y and are always placed before the fub- 
ftantive to which they are joined : ex. 

Trois hommesy Three men, 

Cinquante femmesy Fifty women,, &c. 

They are invariable in their form* except vingt y twenty y 
centy a hundred ; and million, a million ; which take an s 
in their plural, j t 

* It will be feen by the above, that the Englifh particle a or enc is- 

not expreffed in French : ex. 

ye Vai vu et lui ai parle c&nt foh> I have feen him and fpoken to him a 
mille foh, hundred times, a thoufand times* 

f Mentioning the date of the year, we muft write mil, and not 

milt; JW an mil/eft tens quatrt'v'mgt dix-neuf, the- year 17-$$. 



Twenty-three, &r* 

Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Thirty-two, 

Forty. 

Fifty, 

Sixty. 

Sixty-one. 

Sixty-two, feV. 

Seventy. 

Seventy-one, Zsfc* 

Eighty. 

Eighty- one. 

Eighty-two, £sV. 

Ninety, &c. 

A or one* hundred. 

A or one* hundred and 

one, Z*fc. 
Two Hundred. 
Three Hundred, t&c. 
Nine hundred. 
A or one* thoufand. 
Two Thoufand. 
Three Thoufand, Isfc. 
A or one hundred thou~ 

fand, &c. 
Nine hundred thoufancL 
A million. 



( 4* ) " 

It muft be obferved, that, when the number un y one, 
comes after vingty twenty ; trente, thirty ; quarante, 
forty, &c. the fubftantive, relating to thofe two numbers 
taken together, is put in the fingular in French, though 
in the plural in Englifh : ex. 

Vingt et un homme> One-and-twenty men. 

Trente tf un ecu> One-and-thirty crowns. 

Quaranie et unjour, One-and-forty days, £pV. 

And, when the noun fingular, in French, immediately 
following the unity is attended by an adjeftive, that ad- 
jective muft be put in the plural : ex. 
M on frere a vingt et un an My brother is full one-and- 

accomplisy twenty years old. 

Voila trente et une guinee There are one-and-thirty 

lien compteesy guineas well told. 

N. B. Such were the opinion and decifion of the 
French academy fome years ago, but now the beft au- 
thors write vingt et un ans accomplis ; trente et une guinees 
lien compteesy &c. 

However, cuftom will have us fay, 
Vingt et un chevauxy One-and-twenty horfes. 

Trente et un volumes y One-and-thirty volumes. 

N. B. The cardinal numbers muft be ufed in French 
when fpeaking of the days of the month, though the 
ordinal be ufed in Englifh ; as, le deux, le cinq, le fept, 
le onze, le vingt, le vingt-et-un, le vingt-huit, de Novern- 
bre ; the fecond y the fifth y the f eve nth y the eleventhy the 
twentieth y the twenty-jirjry the twenty-eighth y of Novem- 
ber ; but we muft lay, le premier , the firft, fpeaking of 
the firft day of every month : as, le premier de Maiy the 
firft of May \ le premier de Novembre y the firft of No- 
vember, &c. 

2d. The ordinal numbers. — This clafs of numerals, 
befides the fimple notation, fignifies the order or rank 
of things, viz. 

Le premier or unieme y The firft. 

Le fecond or deuxieme y The fecond. 
Le troiJierne % The third. 

Le 



\ 



( 46 ) 



Le quatrieme, 

Le cinquieme y 

Lejixieme y 

Le feptieme y 

Le huitieme y 

Le neuvieme y 

Le dixie me y 

Le onzieme,* 

Le douzieme y 

Le treizieme y 

Le quatorzieme % 

Le quinzieme y 

Le feizieme y 

Le dix-feptieme y 

Le dix-buitieme y 

Le dix-neuvieme> 

Le vingtieme y 

Le vingt et unieme y 

Le vingt-deuxieme y &c. 

Le trentieme y 

Le t rente deuxieme y &c* 

Le quarantine me ) 

Le cinquantieme y 

Le foixantieme> 

Le foixante et dixieme y 

Le quatre-vingtieme y 

Le centieme y 

Le cent unieme, 

Le cent deuxieme, Sec. 

Le deux centieme } 

Le tniHieme y 



The fourth. 

The fifth. 

The fixth. 

The feventh. 

The eighth. 

The ninth. 

The tenth. 

The eleventh. 

The twelfth. 

The thirteenth. 

The fourteenth* 

The fifteenth. 

The fixteenth. 

The feventeenth. 

The eighteenth. 

The nineteenth. 

The twentieth. 

The twenty-firft. 

The twenty-fecond, tsfc* 

The thirtieth. 

The thirty-fecond, 5sV. 

The fortieth. 

The fiftieth. 

The fixtieth. 

The feventieth. 

The eightieth. 

The hundredth. 

Tne hundred and firft. 

The hundred & fecond, tsV. 

The two hundredth. 

The thoufandth. 



Thefe ordinal numbers are declined with the article 
definite, le, la y &c. and are placed before their iubftan- 
tives : ex. 

Le premier jour du mois % The firft day of the month. 
La cinquieme dame y The fifth lady. 

Speaking 



* No elifion is to be made in the article before onze, onzlhne / for, 
TVe fay, U % du 7 au t la* dc h t », ia 7 &c, onz? t onzicme* 



( 47 ) 

Speaking of fovereigns, we ufe the abfohtte number in 
French, though the ordinal be ufed in Englifh ; but we 
place it after the fubftantive, as in Englifh, without ex- 
preffing the article the : ex. 

Louis Seize, Lewis the Sixteenth. 

Henri Ouatre, Henry the Fourth* 

However, common ufage requires us to fay, 
Henri Premier, Henry the Firft, 

George Second, George the Second, 

and not Henri Un, George Deux. We alio fay, 
Charles Quint, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixte Quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

The definite article the is alfo fupprefTed, in French, 
before the ordinal number, when it is preceded by a noun 
ufed to quote a chapter, article, or page of a book : ex. 

Livre troifteme, Book the third. 

Chapitre premier, Chapter the firft. 

Verfet dixieme, Verie the tenth. 

But, fhould the ordinal number precede the noun, the 
conftruction is the fame in French as in Englifh, and the 
article is expreffed : ex. 

Le premier Uvre The firft book. 

La auatrieme page, The fourth page. 

Re.capitu-lat.ory or promiscuous EXERCISES 

UPON ALL THE PRECEDING RULES. 

Ignorance is the mother of admiration, er- 
Ignorance,L ejl,v. mere,f. admiration, f. er~ 

ror, and fbperftition. — The covetous defpife the 
reur, f. fuperftition, f. avare,zcY). meprifent,v. 

poor. ; Humility is the bails of Chriftian virtues 

pauvre,2,d). Humilite,f. bqfe,L Chretien^d). vertu,f. 

— Pride is generally the effect of ignorance. 
Orgueil, m. effet, m. 

— Give me fome bread, meat, turnips, and 
Donnez,v. moi,pro. ztavet,m. 

water. 



( 4» ) 

water. — Merit and favour are the two fprings 
Merit e y m. faveur y L font y v. fource y f. 

of envy. Intereft, pleafure, and glory, are the 

envie y f. Interet y m. 

three motives of the actions and conduft of men. — 
motifs m. conduite y f. 

Is 1 \V x not* Peter's book ? — Your father 

Eft y v. r^pro. ne-pas Votre^vo. 

is gone to London. — The father's houfe and 

alley p.p. maifon y f. 

the fon's garden (are adjoining). — He found 
fils y m. jar din , m. fe joignent y \. trouva y \. 

the windows and the door fhut. Truth is 

ferme, p.p. Verite y (. 

the bond of union and the balls of human hap- 
lien y m. union y f. humain y 2.d}. bon- 

pinefs ; without it, (there is no) confidence in 

heur y m. fans, p. elle y pro. // n 9 y a point confianceji. dansjp. 

friendlhip and no fecurity in promifes. — The 

amitie y f. point y adv. furete y £ promeJJe y f. 

love of liberty and independence is the chara&er 
amour ,m. liberie y L g/?>v. cara£iere y m. 

of noble minds. Iron, fteel, and brafs, 

dme y f. Fer y m. acier y m. cuivreyVd* 

are more ufeful than gold and filver. 

font y v, utile y d.d]. or y m. argent , m. 

• The fmith has at laft repaired the two 

ferrurier y m. a,v. enfin y zdv. repare y -p.ip. 

jacks, and the cook is roafting the 

tourne-broche y m. cuftniere y {. fait rotir y v* 

meat. — — I have feen the infide of the church. — 
ai y v. «y#jp.p. dedans y m. eglife y f. 

Bring me my powder-box and my toupee-iron. 

ma y pro. mon y pro. 

—I 



( 49 ) 

— I take a leflbn three times a week. ■ ■ The 

prends,v. <o> 

ftudy of grammar is 2 Neither 3 fo dry nor fo dull 

ne — ni y c. fee, adj. ni y C. tri/le,adj. 

as (it is thought.) — Have prudence and patience, 

on fe T imagine, y. Ayez,v. 

and you (will have) fuccefs. — A good confeience 
vous, pro. aurez,w. fucces,m* confcience,£* 

is to the foul what health is to the body. ■ 

ame,f. ce que ,pro. fante,L corps, m. 

Merit and virtue are the only fource of true 

unique, adj . veritable, adj. 

nobility. — Religion, commerce, and arms, are pro- 
?iobleffe,£. Religion, f. commerce, m. armes,i 9 pro- 

per inftru&ions for a young prince. — Her 
pre, adj. injlrutlion, f. a Son, pro. 

father has been made a knight of the order 
a, v. .£/£,p.p. fait,ip.p* chevalier, m. ordre,m. 

©f the Bath, and her grandfather was a knight of the 
Bain,m. etoit,v. 

order - of the garter. He has not fo much 

jarretiere, f. /# ^ adv. 

profit, but more honour. — Fortune's favours are 
profit, m. faveur,L 

feldonr the prize of virtue. — This cloth 

raremekt, adj, prix,m. Ce, pro. drap,m* 

is equal to filk, — I fee the coaft of Eng- 

compar able, adj. foie,f. vois,v. cote,{~. 

land. — A foreft twenty miles long and eleven 
foret, f. . #zi//£, m. 

wide. — The example of a good life is a leflbn 
exemple,m. vie,£. legon,£. 

for the reft of mankind. The French 

pour, p. refle,m, genre /iumain,m. Francois, adj. 

F * fleet 



( 50 ) 

fleet was deftroyed, by the brave Admiral 
Jiotte,L futyV. detruite,*p.p. par,-p. 

Nelfon, on the firft of Auguft, 1798. — The eldeft 

^ Aoftt>m. aine,zdj. 

fon of the king of England bears the title of Prince 

port e, v. titre,m. 

of Wales, as preemptive heir to the 

GalksyL commends. prefomptifaS). heritier,m. 

crown. — Lewis the Sixteenth was the grandfon 
couronne>{. Louis, m. 1 petit-jits, x&. 

of Lewis the Fifteenth. William, furnamed 

Gui//aume,m. furnomme^sp. 

the Conqueror, king of England and duke 6f 

Conquer ant) m. due, m. 

• Normandy, was one of the greateft generals 

Norm an die y i. etoit,v. grand,2.d], general,m 

of the eleventh century. He (was born) at Falaife, 

Jtec/e,m. naquit,v. a, p. 

and was the natural fon of Robert, duke of 

nature I ', adj . fi Is, m. 

Normandy, and Arlctte, a furrier's daughter. He 

foureur,m. fille,£+ 

died at Hermentrude, in France, on the « 

MourutyV. a, p. en,$. ^ 

ninth of September, 1087. - ■ Mrs. Nelfcn's 

Madame, f. 

, fervant knows the price of all the provifions. 
fervant e,£. ,fait,v. prix,m. toutyzd]. de?iree,£, 

— She came from America in three weeks. 

vint, v. en, p. femaine, f. 

Thomas was formerly a mufician, now 

autrefois, adv. muficien,jx\. a-prefent, adv. 

he is a dancing-mafter ; to-morrow he will be a 
danfe, f, maitre^ m. demain&dx. fera, v. 

paint en 



^ 



( 5* ) 

painter. ■ ■ — ■ This water is very agreeable to 

peintre, m. Cette, pro, agreabky adj . 

the fmell. We (are going) to Coxheath 

odoraty m. Nous, pro. allonsy v. 

to fee the camp. — The road - to Croydon is 

^ voiTy v. campy m. chemifiy m. 

very bad in winter. — Bring us good wine, 

eriy p. hiver'y m. Apporiezy v. vltiy m. 

good beer, and the oil - bottle. — — The front 

bterey f. facade^ £ 

of the king's palace (is not) fo beautiful as 

roiy m. palaisy m. n 9 eft pasy v. 

I thought. — Generolity excites admiration. — 
croyoisy v. Generofitby f. excite y v. admiration y f. 

Charles the Second, the ion of Philip the F ourdi, the 

Philippe 

grand - fon of Philip the Third, and the great-grand- 
petit yzd) . arriere-petit- 

child of Philip the Second, left his kingdom to 

fits laiffhy v. forty pro. 

Philip the Fifth. — On the eighteenth of February, 

«=>> Fevriery m. 

1478, the Duke of Clarence, brother to king Ed~ 

ward the Fourth, was drowned in a butt of 

douardyioci. JutyV. noye, p.p. tonneauyin. 

malmfey - wine. — The inhabitants of the city of 
malvoifiey f. habitant , m. vilky £ 

Dublin have prefented a petition to the king. It 

ontyV. prefentejp.Tp. adrejfe y £. .ElIe 3 mo> 

was figned by one-and-twenty knights and 

etoity v. Jigne y p a p. par, p. 

above two hundred citizens. — ■ — Good cider is 

plus ,adv. citoyaiy m, . cidre y ni; 

preferable 



( 52 ) 

preferable to bad wine. He has many 

preferable, ad}.' II, pro. a,v. bien&dv. 

children and plenty of money. The longer 

beaucoup, adv. argent '; m. long, adj. 

the day is, the fhorter is the night. You 

jour, in. court, adj. nuit,(. Vous, pro. 

have a fine hat. — ? — Shame is a mixture of the 
avez, v. Honte, f. melange, m. 

grief and fear which infamy caufes. -— 
chagrin, m. crainte,(. que, pro. infamie,£. caufe,x. 

Religion, morality, government, fine arts, in a 

morale, f. gouvemement, m. *//,p. 

word, (every thing) is overturned. — Homer was 
mot, m. ftw/ renverfe, p.p. Jut, v. 

the firft poet who perfonified the divine attri- 
po'ete,m. perfonnijia,\. dlvin, adj. attri- 

' butes, human paffions, and phyfical caufes. — 
but,m. humaln, adj. phyfique, adj. 

Pride and vanity are often the fource of the 

vanite, f. _ fouvent, adv. 

misfortunes of mankind. — We fell good 

malheur, m. Nous, pro. vendons, v. 

bread, excellent meat, and very large fiihes, 

excellent, adj. grar, adj. poijjbn, m. 

but 1 we 2 have* Neither 5 gold nor filver. 

?nais,c. avons,v. ne- — ni,C. or, m. ni, c. argent, m. 

(Is there) any beer in the cellar ? — Mrs. B — ■ 

J* a-t-il dans, p. raw, f. 

is a good, virtuous, prudent, and generous, lady ; 
vertueux, adj. dame, f. 

{he has a daughter as beautiful as an angel. — 

elle, pro. #, v. -ange,va. 

Pindarus (was born) at Thebes, a city of Greece. 
Pindare,xa. ndquit,w. a, p. Grece,i. 

—Malta 



I 53 ) 

~ Malta is a finall ifland, but it produces 

Malte>£. ile } {. maisyC. ^/Z?, pro. produityV. 

corn, cotton, honey, figs, and the frneft 
bie y rn. cot on y m. miely m. figue^ f. beau y z&). 

oranges in the world. — The pleafure of the mind , 
orange y f. monde y m. plaiftr, m. ejprlty m. 

is greater than the pleafure of the body ; and the 

carps y m. 

difeafes of the mind are more pernicious than 
maladle y f. fonty v. pefnicieuoCy adj ♦ 

the difeafes of the body. — Health, honours, and 

Sante 3 f. 

fortune, united together, cannot fatisfy 

uniy p.p. enfemb/e y2.dv. ne peuvent y v. fatisfairey V; 

the heart of man. — (It is) in the fixth page of 
cceury m. _ Cefljt. dansyp. p a g e > f* 

the fecond book, chapter the third. ■— Mifs W — 9 s 

father, a banker in the Strand, is one of 

banquiery m. dansy p. Strandy m. 

the richeft men in town, but fhe is prouder 

mats, c. orgueilkwcy adj. 

and more haughty than if fhe were the nand- 
hautainy adj. etoity v. 

fomeft woman in Europe. — Hypocrify is a 

homage which vice pays to virtue, — 

hommagey m. quey pro. vice,m* mndy v. 

A judicious anfwer does more honour than a 

judicieuxy adj. reponfe> f. fatty v. 

brilliant repartee. - — . Give me a knife and 

bri/lantyzdj. repartte^I. couteau , m. 

fork. My father has bought one-and~thirty 

fcurc;;ettey f. achete, p. p. 

* 2 fine 



t 54 ) 

fine grey ^ horfes. — (He is) an intrepid man 

£W,adj. C'e/?,v. intrepide,d.dj. 

and a man of honour and probity. — Mr. C , the 

probite, f. 

queen's jeweller, has a very prudent wife, and 
jouailler, m. a, v. prudent, adj. 

the moft faithful, induftrious, and honeft, fervant 

fidele,^}. indu/lrieux,?Ld]. honnete^&y 

in the town. — He found beauty, youth, riches, 
* trouva,v. jeunej/e,£. 

wifdom, and even virtue, united in her 

meme, adv. reuni, p.p. fa, pro. 

perfon. ■ ■ — Thomas has difcretion, but he has 

a, v. difcretio?i> f. mats 

no wit. They have a quantity of 

ne-point,zdv. ejprit,m. lis, pro. ont,v. quantite,L 

apples and pears. — Vienna, the capital of the empire 

Vienne, f. 

of Germany, is a fine city. — The more pleafing 

Allemagne y i. agreable, adj. 

plays are, the more dangerous they are. — 

fpecfacle, m. danger eux, adj. Us, pro. 

The rich, the poor, the young, the old, the learned, 

favant, adj. 

and the ignorant, are all fubjeft to death. True 

ignorant, ad]. fujet,ad]. mort,£. Vrai, 2.d], 

friends are as rare as good melons. The 

ami, m. font, v. rare, adj. melon, m. 

famous mine of Potofi, in Peru, is above two 
fameux, adj. mine, f. Perou,m» plus de,zdv. 

hundred and fifty fathoms deep. — Henry the Firft, king 

toife, f. 

of England, and brother to William Rufus, died 

le Roux, niQurutpV.* 

the 



( ss ) 

the richeft prince m Europe. — Paul is taller than 

% haut) adj. 

you by an inch, but • Mrs. Nichol's 

* pouce, m. mais, c. Madame^ f. 

brother is the talleft of all. 
fibre , m. tout) adj. 

SECT. III. 
Of PRONOUNS. 

There are feven forts of Pronouns. 

1 . Les Pronoms perfonnels. Pronouns perfonal. 

2. Les Pronoms conjonBifs, Pronouns conjunctive. 

3. Les Pronoms pofffffs, Pronouns poffeffive. 

4. Les Pronoms demonflratifs, Pronouns demonftrative. 

5. Les Pronoms relatifs, Pronouns relative. 

6. Les Pronoms interrogatlfs, Pronouns interrogative. 

7. Les Pronoms indefnis, Pronouns indefinite. 

They have their genders, numbers, and cafes. 

Of Pronouns Personal. 

Pronouns perfonal are thofe which directly denote the 
perfons and fupply the place of them. 
There are three perfons. 
The firft is the perfon that fpeaks : ex. 
J e park, I fpeak. 

Nous parlonsy We fpeak. 

The fecond is the perfon fpoken to : ex. 
Tu paries , Thou fpeakeft.. 

Vous parlezy You fpeak. 

The third is the perfon fpoken of : ex. 
II or elle parle> He or file fpeaks. 

lis or elles parlent, They fpeak. 

Both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

Je or moi, I. Nous, we. 

Tu or tot, thou. Vous, you or y£. 

Mafculine. 
* See the remarks on the prepofitions in and by in the note, page 43. 



( S<$ ) 

Mafculine. 
II or lui, he, it. Us or eux, they.s 

Feminine. 
Elle, fhe, it. Elles, they. , 

Thefe pronouns are never to be ufed but as nomi- 
natives to the verbs. The reft are declined with the 
article indefinite : ex. 

Firft Perfon for both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

G. Ab. de moi, of or from me. de nous, of or from us. 
Dat. a moi, to me. <z nous, to us* 

Ace. moi, me. nous, us. 

Second Perfon for both Genders. % 
Singular. Plural, 

G. A. de tot, of or from thee, de vous, of or from you. 
Dat. a tot, to thee. a vous, to you. 

Ace. tot, thee. vous, you. 

Third Perfon. 
Singular. 
Mafculine. Feminine. 

G. A. de lui, of or from him. (Telle, of or from her.* 
Dat. a lui, to him. a elle, to her. 

Ace, lui, him. elle, her. 

Plural. 
Mafculine. Feminine. 

G. A. d'eux, of or from them, d' elles, of or from them. 
Dat. a eux, to them. a elles, to them. 

Ace. eux, them. elles, them. 

There are two other pronouns of the third perfon, viz. 

Singular and Plural. Both Genders. 
I ft. Gen. Abl. defoi, of or from one's felf, himfelf, 

herfelf, themfelves. 
Dat. afoi, to one's felf, himfelf, &c. 

Ace. foi, one's felf, himfelf, &c. 

N. B. Though it has been faid> that the perfonal 
pronouns are ufed for the names of perfons, it jnuft not 

thence 

, * Her, when {landing by itfelf, is to be rendered, by elle, la t or 
fo/,but, if joined to a noun, by the pronoun poffeffive,/w»,/*,/«. 



# 



( 57 ) 

thence be concluded, that they are never employed for 
the names of animals or inanimate objects *, this feldom 
happens in the firft and fecond perfons, but the perfonal 
pronouns, //, elk ; ils, elks ; may denote every objeft 
in nature, either animate or inanimate : ex. 
Ce chien ejl fort beau, mais That dog is very hand- 

il eft trop gras, fome, but it is too fat. 

Voyez-vous cette maifon ? Do you fee that houfe ? it 

elle me coute beaucoup, cofts me much 

Ce font de bons livres, mais They are good books, but 

ils ne font pas Men relies, they are not well bound. 
Vos boucks feroient plus a Your buckles would be 

la mode, ft elles etoient more in the fafhion, if 
plus pet ites, they were fmaller. 

2d. The GENERAL AND INDEFINITE PRONOUN on, 

one, is always considered as a nominative of the niafcu- 
line gender, and can never be ufed (in French) but in 
the lingular, though the meaning be plural : ex. when 
we fay, 

On chante, on mange. They iing, they eat , 
i. e. fome men or women ling, eat. 

The word me me, felf,is very often joined to the per- 
fonal pronouns, to denote, in a more efpecial manner, 
the perfon fpoken of : as, 



Moi-meme, 


Myfelf, 


Lui-meme, 


Himfelf, 


Elk-meme, 


Herfelf, &c. 


and are declined as above. 





Observations on the Pronouns, Je and Moi ; 
Tu and Tot j II and JLui ; Ils and Eux. 

Je and moi are ufed in two different fenfes, though 
both in the nominative cafe. — Je is always followed or 
preceded immediately by a verb to which it is the nomi- 
native cafe, and has no need to be joined to any other 
pronoun : but moi always requires to be followed by one 
pronoun or more either expreffed or underftood : ex. 

Qui a pris mon livre ? Who took my book ? 

C'eft moi. It is L 

That 



( 5 8 ) 

That is, 

C'ejl moi qui Fat pris, It is / who took it. 

, Mot muft be ufed inftead of je before an infinitive 
mood, or at the end of a fentence, when it is intended 
to exprefs fomething fudden, as grief ] furprife, &c. ex. 
Moi lui parley ! I fpeak to him or her ! 

In fhort, moi muft always be ufed in French as / in 
Engiifh, when it is followed by the pronoun relative, 
ivho or <whomf<$T is preceded by the verb etre, to be, 
ufed imperfonally, as c^efl, it is ; cetoit, it was, &c. ex. 

Moi qui vous aime, I who love you. 

C'e/l moi qui doisy aller, It is /who am to go there. 

And, h&lj, moi is ufed whenever any difference or 
dlftinclion is intended between perfhns or things, in 
which cafe it muft be immediately followed byyV ; ex. 
Monfeeur De la Tour co?n- Mr. De la Tour command- 

mandoit F infanterie, et ed the foot, and / com- 

moi je commandois la manded the horfe. 

cavalerie, 
lis partirent, moije reflai, They went away, /remained. 

The fame rule is to be attended to with refpecl to 
toi, lui , eux : &c. 

Toi qui me paries, Thou who fpeakeft to me. 

% demeurai, et lui s'en I remained, and he went 

alia, away. 

Eux et mon per e font fortis They and my father went 

ce matin, ^ out this morning. 

Lui et eux, ne pouvant s'ac- He and they parted, not be- 

corder, fe feparerent, ing able to agree. 

Cefl moi qui lui ai ecrit, It is /who wrote to him, 

mais c'e/l toi, c* efl lui, ce but it is thou, he, they, 

font eux, qui, &c. who, &c. 

After thefe remarks, it is alfo neceflary to obferve 
here, that y>, I, never admits of an adjective or partici- 
ple immediately after it, except in atls or deeds, notes or 
bills, receipts, and the like': ex. 
Je, fouffigne, demeurant a I, the underfigned, living 

Londres, declare, C5V. in London, declare, &c. 

♦ Je, 



( 59 ) \ 

Jeyfottffigney reconnois avoir i, the underfigned, ac- 

regu de Monf, D* %% la knowledge to have re- 

fcmme de — — . ceived from Mr. D ## * 

the fum of . 

V 

/ Of Conjunctive Pronouns. 

Thefe pronouns are called conjunctive, becaufe they 
are always joined to fome verb by which they are gov- 
erned, and are generally ufed for the dative or accufa- 
tive cafes of the perfonal pronouns. There are three 
perfons in the conjunctive, as in the perfonal, which are, 

For the firft Perfon, both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

Dat. or Ac. Me> tmi 3 # me, or to me, Nous> us, or to us. 
for a moiy or mou for a nous y or nous* 

For the fecond, both Genders. 
Singular. Plural. 

Dat. or Ac. Te b toiy # thee, or to thee, VouSy you, or to you, 
for a tor, or tou for a vouSy or vousn 

For the third. 

Singular. — Mafcuiine. 

Dat. Luiyl , . . ,. 

* Y > mm, it, or to mm, to it, 

for a luly or ltd. 

Feminine. 

Dat. JLuL 7 r i 

Ace. j^/^ her, it, or. to her, to it, 

for a elhy or elle. 

Plural. Both Genders. 
C Dat. Leur> 1 , ' - * 

Ace. Les, 5 them > tC them ' 

for a en*, m. a elks, f. eux^ m. elks, f. 
Dat. or Ac. Se> one's felf, himfelf, herfelf, themfeives, 

for a foiy or foi* 

Five of thefe pronouns are ufed for the dative or ac- 

cufative cafe, and are both genders, viz. 

Me or moiy te or toiy nous y vcuSyfe : ex. 

Vous 

* Moi and toi muft be ufed, indeed of me or te, after the fecond perfon 
fingular or pinral of the imperative mood,conjugated without a negative. 




( 60 ) 

Vous me parlezy You fpeak to me. 

II vous croity He believes you. 

Vous me /r/>z dfe, &c. You dejQre me to, &c. 

In the firft example, me is the dative cafe/ becaufe it 
may be turned by a moi> to me ; in the fecond, vous is 
the accufative, &c. 

Lui and leur are ufed in the dative only, and are of 
both genders : ex. 

Je lui park, I fpeak to him or to her. 

Vous leur ecriveZy You write to them. 

Voire chien a befoin cfeauy Your dog wants water, 

lui en donnerai-je ? fhall I give him fome ? 

Vos chevaux font fatigueSy Your horfes are tired, give 

donnez-leur un peu de them, a little reft. 

reposj 

The three others are ufed for the accufative, and may 
be applied either to things animate or inanimate, viz. 

Le, mafc. him, it j la y fern, her, it ; and Ies> mafc. 
and fern, them : ex. 

Je le vois tous les jours , I fee him every day. 

Je lefaisy I know it. 

Nous la connoiffonsy We know her. 

II les enverra cefoir. He will fend them to-night. 

There are three other , conjunctive pronouns, com- 
monly called particles relative, or fupplying pronouns. 
They are en y j, and le^ 

V En always denotes a genitive or ablative, and relates 
to fome obje£t mentioned before ; it is rendered in 
Englifh by of or from him y her, it> them ; about hiniy 
her y it) &c. with or without him y her> it> &c. at ity &c. 
for it, &c. upon it, &c. any> none, fomey fome of &c. 
thence y thereof ; and fometimes it is elegantly underftood 
in Englifh, though it muft abfolutely be exprefTed in 
French : ex. 

Nous en parhnsy We fpeak of himy of her, 

of it y of themy about himy 
about her y about it y or 
about them. 

J 9 en fuis fdche y I am forry for it. 

Dotwez- 



( 61 ) 

Donnez-lui en, Give Wmfome. 

Lai en avez-vws parte P Did you carry her or him 

any ? 
Ne hi en envoyez pas> Send her or him #0//*. 
A 7 !?/// en venons y We come from it or thence* 

In the three laft fentences but one, it fliould be ob- 
ferved, that the pronouns of it or of them are under- 
stood, in Englilh, according to the object or objects 
mentioned before. 

yL, Y is ufed for the dative only ; it is Engliflied by to it, 
to them^ of it 3 in it, upon it, thither, there, &c. and very 
often not expreffed in Englifh, though it muft be in 
French. 

It feldom fupplies the place of animate objects, ex- 
cept when connected with the verbs fer, to truft, penfer 9 
to think, and the like : ex. 
Son pere ne voulut jamais y His father never would 

confentir, confent to it. 

Addifon ccmpofa plufieurs Addifon compofed feveral 

wvrages tres ejlimesy. on much-efteemed works, 

y lit a 19 excellent es chofes, we read excellent things 

in them. 
Puifque ces gens-la vous ont Since thofe people have 

trompe, ne vous y fez deceived you, do not 

plus, truft them any more. 

Quand un ami efl mort When a friend is de id, we 

fouvent on n'y penfeplus, often think of him no 

longer. 
<J Le, which, in Englifh, is either not exprefled, or 
/ moft commonly rendered by fo, likewife prevents the 
repetition of one or more words, and fupplies the place 
of the fame. It is indeclinable when it relates to, and 
holds the place of, one adjedtive or more, a verb, or a 
whole member of a fentence : ex. 
Vous rriavez cru belle, mais You have thought me 

je nelefuis pas y handfome, but I am not. 

Nous etions fort emlar- We were much embar- 

raffes, et mus le fommes raffed, and are/; yet. 

encore ) 

G Les 



( 62 ) 

Les enfans doivent s*appli- Children ought to apply 

quer h leurs etudes au- to their ftudies as much 

tant quils le peuventy as they can. 

On the contrary, le is declinable when it relates to, 
and holds the place of, one fubftantive or more ; then 
le is ufed for the mafculine, la for the feminine, and les 
for the plural : ex. 
N'etes-vous pas le jils de Are you not Mr. Drum- 

Drummond? — Ouiyjele mond's fon ? — Yes, I 

fuisy am. 

Etes-vous la mere de ce bel Are you the mother of 

enfant ? — Non } je ne la that fine child ? — No, 

fuis pasy I am not. 

JMef dames y rf etes-vous pas Ladies, are you not my 

les tantes de mon ami friend Mr. B.'s aunts ? 

Monf B. ? — Ouiy nous — Yes, we are. 

les fommes. 

N. B. It muft be obferved, that the following pro- 
nouns me y te y fe y le y la y and lesy can never be ufed after 
a prepofition \ as we cannot fay, fetois avec le y avec la f 
I was with him, with her ; but we muft ufe the perfonal 
pronouns, moi y toiyfoiy lui y elle y and eux, or elles y and fay, 
fetois avec lui, avec elle, &c. 

EXERCISES upon the two foregoing 

PRONOUNS. 

The pronoun perfonal may be placed before or after 
the verb, agreeably to the Englifh conftru£iion : ex. 
Je parky I fpeak. 

Avons-nous parle ? Have <we fpoken ? &c. 
But the conjuntlive pronouns are to be placed (in 
French) before the verbs by which they are governed, 
though they come after them in Englifh : ex. 
11 me 2 parky 3 He ! fpeaks 3 to me? 

Ngus 1 le 2 connoiffbnsy* We 1 know 3 himy 7 - &c. 

Except in the fecond perfon lingular and the firft and 
fecond perfons plural of a verb in the imperative mood, 
conjugated affirmatively ; in which cafe they come after 

the verb : ex. 

Donnez* 



( 63 ) 

Donnez-Xz lui, Give it to him. 

Envoyons-leur y en, Let us fend fame to them 

thither. 
Cejl un honnete homme He is an honeft man, truft 

jiez->vous y, him. 

But, if the reft be conjugated negative ly, the pro- 
nouns follow the above rule : ex. 
Ne le lui donnez pas, Do not give it to him. 

Ne leur y en envoyons pas, Let us not fend any to them 

thither. 
Cet homme eft fort ruse, ne That man is very cunning, 

vous y jiez pas, do not truft him. 

When two imperatives are joined by either of the 
conjunctions, et, and, ou, or, the conjunctive pronoun or 
pronouns muft precede the laft imperative by which it 
is governed : ex. 
Allez le trouver, et lui elites Go to him, and tell him to 

de venir ici, come here. 

Apportez-le rnoi, ou me Bring it to me, or fend it 

Y envoy ez, to me. 

The verbs fier, to truft ; and penfer, or f anger, to 
think \ require the conjunctive pronouns after them ^ 
except the fupplying particle y, which may be placed 
before or after, agreeably to the foregoing rules : ex. 
Nous nous jions a lui, a eux, We truft to him, to them. 
Penfez-vous a elle ? Do you think of her ? 

Ouiyfjpenfe, Yes 5 1 do (think of her.) 

When two or more of the conjunctive pronouns come j 
together in the fame fentence, they muft be arranged / 
in the following order : j 

Singular. Plural, j 

Me, m. et f. me or to me, Nous, m. et f. us or to us, j 
Te. m. et f. thee or to thee, Vous, m. et f. you or to you, , 
Se, m. et f. one's felf, him- Se, m, et f. themfelves, 

himfelf, herfelf, i 

are to be placed before all others , next, \ 

Le,m him, it, 1 f r . _ r _ r* •, I 

La, f. her, it, f before ) f ^ m ' et £ ? him > t0 her > / 

\es> m. et £ them, \ ? W * m * et L t0 them > / 

r, 



, ( 64 ) 

T, to it, (fometimes to him, J", to them, Sec* I 

to her, to them, especial- 
ly in the fecond member \ 

of a fentence ; ) there, 

thither, &c. And 

En, m. et f. of cr from him, En, m. et f. of or from 

her, it, &c. them, &c. 

the Lit of all : ex. 

II me le promit, he promifed // to me. 

Je vous les donneraiy I will give them to you. 

Vous les lui enverrez, you w 11 fend them to him or her* 

NousJlq leur fimes voir, we fhewed £//# ft? />^/7j. 

JEY&r vous y en enverra', flie will fend fame to you thither* 

Except, however, from that rule^the pronoun of the 
jSrft perfon,moi ; which, in the imperative mood of a verb 
\ conjugated affirmatively, is placed after y and en : ex. 
I Apportez y en moi, Bring me fome there. 

N. B. The above pronouns, when governed by two 
or more verbs, mull be repeated, in French, before 
every governing verb, though mod generally expreffed 
but once, in Englifh, and alter the laft verb : ex. 
Voire fits vous aime et vous Your fon loves and fears 

craint, you. 

Je le plains et Y encourage, 1 pity and encourage him. 
Que Dieu la beniffe et la ; £- May God blefs and re- 

compenfe, dit le prince, ward/^r, faid the prince. 
Je ne veux ni vous les ven- I neither will fell nor give 

dre ni vous les donner, them to you* 

Your brother bought yefterday a very good 

acheia, v. hier, adv. 

book \ and, 1 after 2 having 4 read 5 it, 3 he 1 gave 4 
apres, p. avoir, v. lu, p.p. le donna, v. 

it 3 to me. 2 I 1 am 3 very 4 glad 5 of 2 it. 

*<>> me* fuis,v. bien^dx. aife,zd}. en. 

Do 7 not 5 lend 4 it 2 to her. 3 — She 1 fpoke 4 to 

^ ne-pas, adv. pretez,v. *c*tui* par la, v. ^ 

him 2 of 3 it. — I fee her and fpeak to her (every 
lui voiS)\* parley. tons les 

day,) 



( 65 ) 

day.) Carry it to her. I 1 (will * carry) 

Jours. PoriezyV. menerai^. 

them* thither 5 myfelf. 5 Do you 5 know 2 

l es y & connciffeZyV. 

\ them ? r T (will *write) to them 2 mylelf. 4 He 1 

ecrirai, v. <^ leur 

wills 2 not 4 fell 7 it 5 to them, 6 but he will 

veut, v. ne-pas vendre, v. *>* mais y C. 

give it to you. Our mafter rewards and 

donnery v. recompenfe a v. 

punifhes us when we defer ve it. If 1 

punity v. quand } adv. meritont y v. Si } c. 

they 1 afk 4 you 3 a 5 favour, 6 will 3 you 4 refufe 3 
\ demandent>v. grace yi. refufereZyV, 

it 1 to them ? 2 ■ He 1 has 3 taken 4 it 2 away 4 

a y v. emportiy p.p. 

with 5 him. 6 — I find him more reafonable 
aveCy p. trouvey v. raijonnable a adj; 

than his fifter. — Talk 3 no 1 more* of 2 it. — 

fay pro. Parlezy v. ne p/us y adv. 

I 1 thank* you 2 for 3 it. Why 1 do you 5 

remercie y v. en. Poarquciy adv. ^ 

give 4 it 1 to her ? 3 Had 4 you 3 J not 6 pro- 

donneZy v. AvieZy v. ne-pas pro- 

mifed 7 it 2 to him? 3 Do you 4 *not 5 fee 3 the 6 

miSy p.p. *<>> voyezy v. 

beauty 7 of 2 it ? — Often beauty feduces and deceives 
beaut e a f. feduity v. trompe a v. 

us. — I 1 2 never 5 will 4 confent to 3 it, and 1 1 2 

ne-jamaiSy adv. confentiraly v. y 

3 neither 5 will* fpeak 7 nor 8 write I0 to 6 him. 9 ~ 
ne — ni veux a v. parler, v. ni> c. ecrirey v. 

They ^ are forry for it You 1 may 2 tell 5 

font ft. fdcke, adj . p:uvez a v. dire> v. 






( 66 ) 

it 3 to her,* but do not tell it to her brother. — . 

ws» ditesy v. fori) pro. 

Since you (have no) pears in your 
Puifque) c. rfavez point ft. poire y f. dans, p. voire y^to. 

garden, I (will fend) you fome. — They 1 have* 

jardin y m. ctvderraiy v. en onty v. 

ftolen s from us 2 the 6 great eft 7 part s of 3 them. — 
W£,p.p. k^ partie>{. 

Believe me, go 1 and fpeak 3 to them, 2 do 'not 5 

CroyeZyV. allez, v. ^ parler, v. 'ss* 

*confide 2 in 3 it. — ■ This nofegay is for her, 
jiezy v. vous y* CV,pro. bouquet ym. efty v. pour y p. 

and not for him. ■ My brother has 

et non-pas y adv. Mon y pro. 

written a letter to your filler, and 1 fhewn 4 
ecrity p.p. voire, pro. a montre>v* 

me 2 the 5 " two 6 firft 7 lines 8 of 3 it. — - Does he 3 know 2 

ligne, f. *<?•» connoity v. 

her ? r — She returned it to him. ■ We 1 have 4 

rendity v. avons, V. 

forced 5 them 2 to 3 it. — Will 3 you 4 bring 3 

forceSy p.p. y. apporterez, v 6 

me 1 fome ? 2 — He fpeaks Xo me, and not to you. — I 

parky v. 

confent to it. — Do you 2 think " that 3 fhe 4 has 7 
confenSyV. ^>> croyez y v. que aityV. 

fpoken 8 to him 5 of 6 it ? — Go and fee her, 

par /$,$.$. Allez ,M+ ^ voir,v* 

and carry her thefe flowers. — We truff: 

porteZyW cesy pro. jleursy f. Nous nous Jions, v. 

to them. — If I had money, T would 4 give you* 
SiyC. avoisyV* donneroiSyX. 

fome, 3 but you know as Well as I do how much 
mats, c. feveZ) v. *o? combien,adv« 

it 



■ ( 67 ) 

it is fcarce now. Send* me 1 x none. 3 5 — - 

rare, adj. h prefentyzdv. Envoy eZyV. ne en pas. 

Have 11 you 3 any 1 ? — — — I (will carry) them to you 
AveZy v. porter aiy v. *<pi 

thither. — Send it to me, or bring it to me yourfelf. 

— Do 'you* remember 3 (of) 2 it ? — No, but 1 

vs» fouvenezy v. Non y adv. maiSy c. 

I 2 will 4 think of 3 it. — - Do not give it to him, give 
penferaiyV. y. & dcnneZyV. 

ifr to me. — Send fome to them thither. 

Of Pronouns Possessive. . 

Thefe pronouns are called pojfejjivey becaufe they 
always denote property or poffeffion. 

There are two forts of poiTeffive pronouns, viz, ab- 
folute and relative. 

The abfolute are fo called becaufe they muft always 
precede the fubftantive to which they are joined, and 
agree with it (and not with the poffefTor as in Engliih) 
in gender y number y and cafe. They are, 



Singular. 






Plural. 


Mafc. 
Mon>* 

Tcny* 
Son,* 




Fern. 

May 

Tay 

Sa y 




Both Genders, 
Mesy my. 
TeSy thy. 
Sejy his, her, or its* 






Both Genders. 






Notre y 
Votre y 
JLeury 


Nosy our. 
% VoSy your. 
Leursy their. 



They are declined with the article indefinite, de> a : ex, 

Singular. 

Mon, ton, /on, muft be uf-d before a noun feminine beginning 
With a vowel, to prevent the hiatus : ex. 

Mon o.me, My foul. 

Son Qfimofty His or her opinion* 



( <fc ) 

Singular. 

Mafcuiine. 

Nom. Ace. #Z0# pere, my father. 

Gen. Abl. de mon pere, of $r from my father* 

Dat. a mon pere, to my father. 

Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. ma mere, my mother. 

Gen. Abl. de ma mere of or from my mother^ 

Dat. h ma mere, to my mother. 

Plural. 

Mafcuiine. 
Nom. Ace. mes freres, my brothers. 
Gen. Abl. de mes freres, of or from my brothers* 
Dat. a mes freres, to my brothers. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. mes fours, my fifters. 
Gen. Abl. de mes fours, of or from my fillers, 
Dat. a mes fours, to my fifters. 

The others are declined as the preceding. 

Thefe pronouns ought to be repeated before every 
fubftantive in a fentence, though not expreffed in Eng- 
lifh : ex. 

J*ai perdu mon chapeau et I have loft my hat and 

mes gants, gloves. 

When thefe pronouns are ufed in a fentence, fpeak- 
j. ing of any part of the body> they are not to be expreffed 
in French, but the prepofition in and the pronoun 
are rendered by the article definite , the perfonal pro- 
noun being fufficient to determine the pofiefllon : ex, 

J y ai mal aux yeux, I have a pain in my eyes* 

and not dans mes yeux. 

II fe cajfa le bras. He broke his arm. 

This will be ken among the idiomatical exprelSons. 

Its, their, having a reference to inanimate or 

irrational objects, and placed in another member cf the 

fentence 



i i 



/ 



( 6 9 ) 

lenience from that wherein the object referred to is 
itfelf expreTed, are not made into French by Jon, fa 9 
jes, &c. biu by en : ex. 

JVindfor efl un beau village , Windfor is a fine village, 

j'en admire la fititaiion, I admire its fituation, 

les promenades, &c, walks 3 tsfc. 

Ceiie maifon ejl ires bien This houfe is '.veil fituated, 

Jituee, mais P arckiieclu- e but its architecture does 

ne m 'en plait pas, not pleafe me. . - 

The relative are never joined to any fubftantive ; 
for, the fubftantive, to vvhicn they refer, is always 
implied in the pronoun. They are, 

Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur. 

Mafc, Fern. 

JLe mien, les miens, la mie?me, les miennes, mine. 

Le tien, les tiens, la iienne, les tiennes, thine. 

Le fieri, - lesjiens, lafienne, les Jiennes, his or hers, 

Le noire, les no tres, la noire, les notres, ours. 

JLe voire, les votres, la voire, les votres, yours. 

Le leur, les leurs, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 

They are declined with the article definite : ex. 

, Singular. 

Mafc. Fern. 

Nom. Ace. le mien, la mienne, mine. 

Gen. AbL du mien, de la mienne, of or from mine. 

B*t. au tnietjy a la mienne, to mine. 

Plural. 

Mafc. Fern. 

Nom. Ace les miens, les miennes, mine. 
Gen. Abl. des miens, des miennes, of or from mine. 
Dat. aux miens, aux miennes, to mine. 

The reft are declined as the preceding. 

When any one of thefe relative pronouns is ufed 
after the verb etre, to be, fignifying to belong to, it 
mult be expreiTed in French by one of the pronouns 
perfonal in the dative ; ex. 

Ce 



( 7° 1 

Ce livre efl a moi, This book is mine. 

Cette epee eft a lui, et non This fword is his, and not 
pas a vous, yours* 

Alfo, when it is joined to a noun fubftantive in 
Englifh, it ought to be rendered in French by a pro- 
noun pofieffive abfolute, and the fubftantive put in the 
genitive plural : ex. 

Un de mes, de vos, amis. & friend of miney of yours ; 
i. e. one of my or your friends* 

Of Pronouns Demonstrative. 

Thefe pronouns are called demonfrative^ becaufe they 
diftinguiih, in a precife manner, the perfon or things 
to which they are applied. They are. 

Singular. 
Mafc. Fern. 

Ce, cet>* cette y this, that. 

Celuiy he, that. celle y fhe, that. 

Gelui-ciy celle-ciy this. 

Celui-lay celle-lciy that. 

Plural. 
Mafc. Fern. 

Cesy cesy thefe, thofe. 

Ceux, cellesy they, thefe, thofe, 

Ceux-ciy celles-ciy thefe. 

Ceux-lay ce!les-lhy thofe. 

Ce quiy ce que, what. 
Ceciy this, cela^ that.f 

Thefe two laft are always of the mafculine gender 
and of the lingular number. 

Thefe pronouns are declined with the article indefi- 
nite, dey a ; ex. _ 

9 ' Singular. 

* Cet is ufed before a noun mafculine beginning with a vowel or H 
mute ; ex. cet oifeau, this bird. 

f The word that, whether expreffed or underttood, when it 
comes between two verbs, and is followed by a noun or pronoun, muk 
be rendered in French by <*ue, which mult be placed immediately 
after the firft verb : ex. . . 

Je/ais ojje votrefrhc ej marie, I know that your brother is married, Sec. 



( 1\ ) 

Singular. 

Mafculine. 
Nom. Ace. ce Vivre, this or that book. 
Gen. Abl. de ce livre, of or from this book. 
Dat. a ce livre, to this book* 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces livres, thefe books. 
Gen. Abl. de ces livres, of or from thefe books* 
Dat. a ces livres, to thefe books. 

Singular. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. cette plume, this or that pen. 
Gen. Abl. de cette plume, of or from this pen* 
Dat. a cette plume, to this pen. 

Plural. 
Nom. Ace. ces plumes, thefe pens. 
Gen. Abl. de ces plumes, of or from thefe pens* 
Dat. a ces plumes, to thefe pens. 

Singular. 

Mafculine. 
Nom. Ace. celui, he, him, that. 
Gen. Abl. de celui, of or from him. 
Dat. a celui, to him. 

Feminine. 
Nom. Ace. celle, fhe, her, that. 
Gen. Abl. de celle, of or from her. 
Dat. a cell-s to her. 

. 

Plural. 
Mafc. Fern. 
N. Ace. ceux, celles, they, them, thofe, fuch as* 
G. Abl. de ceux, de celles, of or from thofe. 
Dat. a ceux, a celles, to thofe. 

The others are declined as the preceding. 

N. B. He, Jhe, they, him, her, them, being immedi- 
ately followed in a fentence by ivho, ivhom, or that, ufed 
in an indeterminate fenfe, not relating to any individual 

mentioned 



,i-^*2* 



( 72 ) 

mertio^ed before, and only implying any perfon, one, or 
am bodyi muft net be rendered in French by the per- 
ioral pronouns, il, elk, &c. but by the above pronouns, 
celui, cehe, &c. ex. 

Celui, qui pi atique la vertu He who praftlfes virtue 

vit heure;:x, lives happy. 

Celle, que vous vites chez She, whom or that you 

mon ft ere, tfeji pas ma- faw at my brother's, is 

riee, not married. 

Vms pumjfez celui on celle You punifti him or her 

qui n'ejl pas coupable, who is not guilty. 

The fame rule muft be cbferved with refpecl: to fuch 
us, fuch that, ufed in Englifli in the fame fenfe as he 
nvho, they who : ex, 

Ceux qui meprifent la Such as defpife learning da 
fcience n'en connoijfent not know its value. 
pas le prix, 

Ce, cette, ces, this, that, thefe, thofe, muft always 
precede the fubftantive to which they are joined, and 
agree with it in gender, number, and cafe. On the 
contrary, celui, celle, celui-ci } celle~ci, celui-la, celle-lh, this, 
that, &c. either in the fingular or plural, are never 
joined to any noun ; for, the noun, to which they refer, 
is always implied in the pronoun : ex. 

Jf'ai vu le portrait du pere I have feen the father's 
et celui dufls, picture and that of the 



>n. 



Cette montre tfejl pas a vous, TK watch is not your's, 
c'ejl celle de ma mere, it is that of my jtfiother, 

or my mother's ; that being underftood. 

N. B. The pronoun that, either in the fingular or 
plural, is often fupprefled in Englifh and fupplied by an 
apoftrophe and an s at the end of the noun fubftantive 
as above, but muft be exprefled in French by the above 
pronoun celui, celle, &c. according to the gender and 
number of the object to which it refers : ex. 

II a pris mon chapeau et He has taken my hat and 
ceiui de mon pere^ my father's. 

Vous 



( 73 ) 

Vous avez iechire ma robe You have torn my gown 
et celle de mafoeur, and my fitter's. 

Sometimes the particles ci 9 la, here, there, are alfo 
joined to the pronouns ce, cette, ces, to diftinguifh, 
with more preciiion, the objects to which they are ap- 
plied : ex. 

Ce ehapeau-ci, This hat* 

Cette vi!le-&, That town, &c. 

The two following expreffions, the former , the latter, 
referring to fubftantives mentioned in a preceding fen* 
tence, are elegantly made into French by cclui-ci, celui- 
la, &c. and agree with the noun. 

Celui-ci, celle-ci, this, applies to the neareft objech 
Celui-la, celle-lh, that, to that which is more remote. 

Ce qui, ce que, what. This pronoun is never joined 
to any noun ; it always can be turned by thai which) 
or the thing 'which : ex. 
Je vous dirai ce qui ltd ejl I will tell you what has 

arrive, happened to him ; 

that is, that which, or the thing which > has happened to 
him ; 
Savez-vous ce que je ltd Do you know what I told 

dis ? him ? &c. 

Ceci, this, cela, that, are only ufed when fpeaking of 
things, the word thing being always under flood : ex. 

Ceci me plait, This pleafes me ; 

that is, this thing pleafes ir.e. 

Cela me fait peur, Thai frightens me ; 

that is, that thing frightens me, &c. 

EXERCISES upon the two foPvE going PRO- 
NOUNS. 

Give me my book. — I have met your 

Donncz,v. livre, m. ai, v. rencontre, p.p. 

fifter with a friend of yours. — She had loft 
f(£ur,f. avec,p. qvolt $ \. perdu, p»p, 

H her 



( 74 ) 

her gloves and fan. « Have you found your 

gani y m. event 'ail \ m. Avezy x . U ow&e\ p.p.' 

pen ? His daughter is older than mine, 

plume y f. filled e/l,v. w//#,adj. 

but her fon (is not) fo tall as yours. My 

mats, c. /lis, m. n\jl pas, v. grand, adj. 

mother has (a pain) in her head. Bring me 

mere>£. a,v. mal,m. tele,f. ApporteZyV. 

that dictionary. 1 have found my hat and my bro- 

dicfionnaire y m. 

ther's. — Men commonly hate him whom 

ordinairement) adv. hdijfenty v. q ^,pro. 

they fear. Learn this leflbn, it is not lb diffi- 

craignentyV. AppreneZyV. le}on,{. diffi- 

cult as that. — Take care of that child. — 

rile, adj. Prenezy v. foin y m. enfant , m. 

Her brother fays he will not refufe you what 

dlty v. ne pas refufera, v. 

you alk of him. — My ambition is the only 

demandeZyV. <& ambition y {. feulyzd). 

% eaufe of his imprudence.-— Your houfe is more con- 
caufey f. imprudence y f. com- 

Venient than hers, but it is not fo well fituated. — 
modcy adj. fitueyzd]. 

She, whom you hate, is my bed: friend. — You have 

hdiffeZy v. amiey f. 

punifhed him who did not deferve it, and rewarded 
puniy'p.p. <<>> meritoityV. recompenfeyip.ip. 

her who was guilty. — I have £een your father, mo- 

aiyV. vuy p.p. 

ther, brothers, and fitters. — She, who dines with 

£f//i,pro. dineyV. avec y T p. 

us, is my brother's wife. Her affeftion for me 

fem?ne y £* affiecHotiyi. pQur y ]). 

is 



( 75 ) 

is falfe. — I hope you will come foon to 

jaux } 3.d}. efpere^x, viendrez x v. biehtot>adv. 

fee us. — His coach is beautiful, I admire its 
voir, v. caroffe, m. 

painting and ornaments. — Such 1 as a feem 3 

pcintureyi. ormment $ in. gw/,pro. paroijfent y v. 

to 4 be happy 5 " are 3 6 not 9 always* fo. 7 — Your 

etre, v. heureux> adj. font, v. tcujourSyzdv. 

horfes are better than theirs, — They ftole my 

chevaly m. volerent, v. 

watch and my mother's. — Tell her, my lifter will be 
montre y {, Dites y \. fera y v> 

glad to fee her. — She has a pain in her 

bie?i-aife y adj. de voir, v. h y v. 

teeth, — (It is not) my hat, it is hers ; but this is 
dent£. Ce n'ejl pas, v. c y e/}> v. 

better than that. — We ought to pray for them that 

de-vons y v. prier y v. pour^, 

perfecute us. — Of all virtues, that which moft 
perfecutenty V, le plus y adv. 

diftinguifhes a Chriftian is charity. — Thefe candles 
diftingue y v. chandslle y f. 

are better than thofe. — This fan is mine, and not 
font } \. ?ion-pas 

yours.— Give me this, and take that. — -This book 

pre?tez,v. 

and that I (lent) you are the two beft. — Tell me 
at prete x v. Dites y v. 

what vexes you. — I have feen the king's palace, 
fdche y v. palaiS) m* 

and that of the queen. 

reine 9 f. 

Of 






( 7<5 ) 

Of Pronouns Relative. 



rr+t 



Tiefe pronouns are called relative, becaufe they have 
always a reference to fome other noun or pronoun in 
the difcourfe either expreffed or implied. They are 
declined as follows : 

Singular and Plural, 

Both Genders. 
Nom. qni, who, which, that. 

Gen. de qui, or dont y of whom, whofe,* of which* 
Dat. a qui> to whom, to which. 

Ace. que, quh\ whom, which, that. 

Abl. de qui, dont, from whom, from which* 

Ace. quoi, que, what. 

Gen. Abl. de quoi, or donty of or from what. 

Dat. a quoiy to what. 

Singular. 
Mafculine. Feminine. 

Nom. Ace. lequely laquelle, which. 

Gen. Abl. duquel, or donty de laquelle, of or, &c. 
Dat. auquely a laquelle, to which. 

Plural. 

Nom. Ace. lefquels, lefquelles, which. 

Gen. AbL defquels, or dont, defquellesy of or, &c. 
Dat. auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

The noun or pronoun, to which the pronoun relative 
has a reference, is called antecedent, with which it muft 
agree in gender and number : ex. 

% connoh un homme qui doit I know a man who is to 
alter voir le camp, go and fee the camp. 

In 

* Whose, being ufed interrogatively, muft be rendered in French 
by a qui, 

t ^h "whom, is never ufed in the accufative but when it is gov- 
erned by fome of the prepofitions : ex. 

Avec : qui> With whom. Pour qui, For ivhom. 

Or, when it fignifies what per/on : ex, 

Amenez qui i>ous *>oudrez % Bring whom you pleafe ; 

that is, v>hat per/on you pleafe* 



( 77 ) 

In this fentence qui has a reference to homme, man, 
becaufe I can fay lequel homme, which man, &c, 
jfai lu la lettre que vous I have read the letter (that) 

m'avez envoy ee, you fent me. 

In this iaft fentence que has a reference to lettre, let- 
ter, becaufe it may be faid laqaelle lettre ? which letter ? 

&c. The relative que, whom, which, or that, is 

fometimes elegantly underftood in Englifh, but it mult 

always be exprefTed in French : ex. 

La dame, que vous con- The lady, you know, is 

ttoijfezy eft arrivee ; arrived : 

whom is underftood in the Englifh. 

Thefe pronouns, like the perfonal and conjunctive, 
when governed by two or more verbs, inuft be repeated 
(in French) before each governing verb, though moft 
commonly exprefTed but once in Englifh, and before 
the firft verb : ex. 

Le Dieu que nous aimons The God whom we love 

et que nous adorons, and worfhip. 

Les lettres que vous avez The letters which you have 

ecrites, et que vous written and fliewed me, 

m' avez montrees, &c. £sY. 

JJhomme a qui )\ai prete The man to whom I have 

iant d 9 argent, et a qui lent fo much money, 

'faijifouveut ecrit, &c. and written fo of ten,c5V. 

When the words to which, to what, at which, at whai^ 
in which, in what, have; a reference to inanimate things, 
and when they can be exprefTed by where, whereto, I 
whereat, or wherein, tliey are to be rendered in French 
by the adverb of place, oh : ex. 
Je vous montrerai la mat- I will fhew you the houfe 

fin ou il demeure, in which he lives -, 

that is, where he lives. 
Void la parte par ou nous This is the door through 

entrdmesy which we went in. . 

Quoi, what, and fometimes that, or .which, is. ne* 
tifed in the nominative cafe •, in the other cafes 
generally ufed j$ an indeterminate iignilication, 

H z 



I 1 



( 78 ) 

never exprefied but in fpeaking of inanimate things, 
and efpecially when it has for its antecedent ce or rien ; 
ex. 

C y ejl a quoiyV vous confeille It is of what I advife you 

de penfer y to think. 

11 n y y a rien a quoi il ne There is nothing for which 

foi't difpofe $ he is not difpofed. 

"When we fpeak of irrational beings, or inanimate 
r I things, in the genitive, dative, or ablative, cafes, we 
make ufe of icquel> laquelky which, &c. inftead of qui : 
ex. 

Le chevaly auquel vous don- The horfe, to which you 
+ ne% a boire y give ibme drink. 

/* f As alfo after a prepofition : ex. 

La fenfire fur laquelle vous The window upon "which 
vous appuyezy you lean. 

And when who, ivhom x or %vhich y refers to one or 
more*obje£ts on which the choice is to be formed : ex. 

Apportez-moi lequel vous Bring me which you pleafe* 
voudrezy 

Of Pronouns Interrogative* 

They are called interrogative, becaufe they are only 
ufed in alking queftions, and have no antecedent : they 
are declined with the article indefinite. 

Singular and Plural. 

Both Genders. 
Nom. Ace. qui, who, whom. 
Gen. Abl. de qui> of or from whom* 
Dat. a quiy to whom, whofe. 

\ Nom. Ace. quoiy or que y what j* 
t>y \ Or, qu y eft-ce quu qiiejt-ce que. 

Gen. Abl. de quoi y of or from what, 
at. a quoiy to what. 

Singular* 

Or f*A 

Vhcn what, m Englifh, Cgnifics HOW mvch, it nwft Vc 
Vcnch by fmbm% 



\ 

\ 



t 

erne 




( 19 ) 

Singular. 
Mafculine. Feminine. 

N. A. quel, or lequel, quelle, or laquelle, what, which* 
G. A. de quel, &c. de quelle, &c. of or from, &c. 

Dat. h quel, &c. a quelle, &c. to what, which. 

Plural. 
Mafculine. Feminine. 

N. A. quels, or lef quels, quelles, or lefquelles, what, which. 
G. A. /fe gwi/fj &c. ife quelles, &c. of er from, &c. 

Dat. <r> gWj-, occ. <? quelles, &c. to what, which. 

Q«i, who, whom, as an interrogative pronoun, always 
refers to perfons and never to things, and it may be ex- 
preffed by quelle perfonne P what perfon ? ex. 
Qui ejl Ik ? Who is there ? 

Qui cherchez-vous ? Whom do you feek ? 

Quoi and que, what, have always a reference to things 
and never to perfons, and may be expreffed by quelle 
chofe, what thing : ex. 
Que voulez-wous P or qu'eft- What do you want ? 

ce que vous voulez P 
De quoi parlez-vous P What are you fpeaking of ? 

Quoi ! vous ofez me repon* What ! you dare anfwer 

dre P me ? 

N. B. According to the French idiom, quoi can 
never be put before a verb as its accufative, it is always 
que : ex. 
Que dites-vous ? or, qu'eft- What do you fay ? 

ce que vous dites P 

Quel, quelle, what, are always joined to fome fub- 
ftantive with which they muft agree in gender and 
number: ex, 
Quel livre traduifez-vous ? What book do you tranf- 

late ? 
Quelle heure ejl-il ? What hour is it ? 

We alfo fay, 
Quel mot i What a word ! 

Quelle beaute f What a beauty ! 

When, in French, * is not to be exprefied. 

la 



( 8o ) 

In order to avoid repetition, lequel, laquelle, which, 
are elegantly ufed as fubftitutes for quel or quelle, and 
the fubftantive to which it is joined ; and then lequel 
muft always be followed by a genitive, either expreffed 
or underftood : ex. 

One of my fitters is mar- 
ried. 
Which is it ? that is, which 

of your fillers is it ? 
I am fpeaking of one of 

your friends. 
Ofivhich are you fpeaking ? 
that is, of which of my 
friends are you fpeaking ? 






Une de mesfaurs eft mariee, 

Laquelle ejl-c£ ? that is, /#- 

quelle de vos foeurs eft-ce ? 

jfe park d'un de vos amis, 



Duquel parlez-vous ? that 
is, duquel de mes amis 
parlez-vous ? 



Of Pronouns Indefinite. 

Thefe pronouns are called indefinite or indeterminate, 
becaufe they generally are fubftituted for the name of a 
vague and indeterminate objedl. Among them fome 
are ufed as nouns adjective, being always joined to a 
noun fubftantive % others are fometimes ufed as pro- 
nouns without a fubftantive, and fometimes as adjec- 
tives with a fubftantive. 



Aucun, aucune, 

* Autre, 
Autrui, 
Chacun, chacune, 

Chaque, 
Hun V autre, 



Les uns 



les autres, 



Uun et V dutre, 
Uun ou l J autre, 
Ni Pun ni V autre, 
Nul, nulle, 
Pas un, pas une f 
Perfonne $ 



None, no one, not one, 

not any. 
Other, any other. 
Other, other people. 
Each, every one, every 

body. 
Every, each. 
One another, each other. . 

Some others. 

Some — — fome. 

Both. 

Either. 

Neither. 

None. 

No one, not one. 

Nobody, none, no one, any 

one, any body. 

La 



( 8x ) 



La plupzrt de } des, 
Pluftenrsy 
Quelconque y 
Que/que, 
Quelque chofe y 
Quelque » que, 

Quel q U e y 

Quelle que y 



Qiielque chofe qui) or que,"" 
Quoi que> 



Quoi que cefoit que y 
Tout ce quiy or que> 
Quelqunti) quelquune, 

QuiconquC) 

Qui que ce pit) or fat , 






j 



Quoi que cefoit) or fut y 



PJen y 

Tel) telle y 

Tel qui) 

Telle qui) 

Tout) 

Tout le monde y 

Tout que. 



Moft. 

Many, feveraL 

Whatever. 

Some, any. 

Something, any thing. 

Whofoever, whatfoever, 
whatever, however,how~ 
foever, though, &c. 

Whatever, whatfbeven 

Some, fome one, fome- 
body, any. 

Whoever, any body. 

Whofoever, nobody in the 
world, nobody at all, 
any body whatever, no 
man living, let him be 
who he will, be who he 
may, &c. 

Whatfoever, nothing in 
the world, nothing what- 
ever. 

Nothing, any thing. 

Such one, fuch. 

Such as he, fhe, they, who, 
thatj &c. 

Every, every thing. 

Every body, any body. 

As — 



as, for all, al- 
though, however, &c. 



OBSERVATIONS on some of the above PRO- 
NOUNS. 

Aucuri) aucutiC) is never ufed but in the lingular, and 
always negatively : it relates to a perfon or thing men- 
tioned before : ex. 
Aucun ne s'eft encore avife No one has yet thought of 

de vous cvntredire) contradicting you. 

Aucun 



( 82 ) 

Aucun r\ y a porte la conf- Not one has carried con- 
taticef loin, ftancy fo far. 

In fome fentences expreffing a doubt, aucun is ufed 
without a negation : ex # 
X a-t-il aucun, ou aucune, Is there any of you who 

de vous qui le fouffrit ? would luffer it ? 

Autrui has neither gender nor number, and can only 
be ufed in the genitive or dative cafe, always referring 
to perfons : ex. 
Ne faites point a autrui ce Do not unto . others what 

que vous ne voudriez pas you would not wifh to 

qrfon vous fit, be done unto. 

Chacun, chacune^ may be ufed in a general or limited 
fenfe, mentioning perfons or things : ex. 



7? 



very 



one in his turn. 



Chacun a fan tour y 

Les arbres portent leurs Trees bear their fruits each 

fruits chacun dans leur in their feafon. 

faifon, 

Uun V autre exprefs a reciprocity in the action, atid 
may be applied to perfons or things : ex. 
lis fe jettent des pier re? Fun They throw ftones to each 

a F autre, other. 

Le feu et V eau fe detruifent Fire and water deftroy one 

Tun Fautre, another. 

Uun et V autre always require the verb in the plural, 
and may likewife be applied to perfons or things : ex. 
L'un et Fautre ont raifon, Both are in the right. 
L'un et Fautre fervent au Both ferve the fame pur- 

meme ufage^ pofe. 

Obferve that both is not to be exprefled in French 
when it precedes two nouns or pronouns united by the 
conjunction and : ex. 
Son fr ere et fa fceur font Both his brother and fifter 

?nortSj are dead. 

Ni Pun ni V autre require the verb to be put in the 
fingular, if that pronoun be placed before the verb as 
its nominative, and in the plural, if it come after it ; 

fo 



( «3 ) 

m both cafes, the verb mint be preceded by a nega- 
tion : ex. 
Ni Tun ni Pautre ne tn'a Neither of them have an- 

repondu> or, Us ne rrfont iwered me. 

repondu ni Full ni l'au- 

tre ; 

Nuly pas utiy are always accompanied with a negation, 
and can onlv be ufed as 'z nominative to the verb : ex. 
Nul ne pent fe fatter d'etre No one can flatter himfelf 

agreable a Dieu> to be agreeable to God. 

Pas un ne k croit. Net one believes it. 

Perfonrte is likewife attended with a negation, except 
in ientences of doubt, admiration, or interrogation : ex. 
Perfonne ne pent fe vanter Nobody can boalt of being 



d*elre fans defaut, 
Ne parlez a perfonne, 



without a defect. 
Speak to nobody y or, do not 

fpeak to any body. 
Did ever any body expreis 

himfelf with more grace 

than Sheridan ? 



Perfonne s' ' ef-il jamais ex- 
prime avee plus de grace 
que Sheridan ? 

Que/que always exprelTes an indeterminate figniflca- 
tlon, and is generally joined to a fubftantive, with which 
it agrees in number : ex. 
Quelque autcur. Some author. 

Ouelques philofopheSy Some philofophers. 

Quelque que. Ouelque y immediately joined to a 

noun followed by que } exprefles an indeterminate quality 
or quantity ; it is declinable before a fubftantive and 
indeclinable before an adjective, and requires the verb 
to be put in the iubjunctive mood : ex. 



Quelques efforts que Von 
faffe pour voiler la veri- 
te> elle fe decouvre tot ou 
tard ; 

Quelques fauies que vous 
ayez faites, on vous par- 
donnera fi vous vous re- 
pentez fneerement ; 



Whatever efforts people 
make to hide truth, it is 
difcovered one time or 
other. 

Whatever faults you may 
have committed, vou 
will be forgiven, if you 
fincerely repent. 

Quelque 



( 8 4 ) 



Quelque equitable* quefoient 
vos ojfresy je doute quon 
les accept e ; 

Quelque puiffans quefoient 
les rois, Us meurent com- 
me le plus vil de leursfu- 
jets ; 



However equitable your 
offers be, I doubt of 
their being accepted. 

Though kings be ever lb 
powerful, they die as 
well as the meaneft of 
their fubje£ts. 



Quel que, quelle que, muft be thus divided when it is 
immediately followed by a verb or a perfonal pronoun, 
and agree in gender and number with the noun to 
which it relates ; it likewife requires the verb to be put 
in the fubjunctive mood : ex. 
Quel que foit Vennemi dont Whatever the enemy be 



vous apprehendez la ma- 
lice, vous devez vous re- 
pofer fur voire innocence, 

Les loix condamnent to us les 
criminels, quels qu'ils 
puiffent etre, 

Ouelles que foient vos in- 
tentions, Isfc. 



whofe malice you dread, 
you ought to reft on 
your innocence. 

Laws condemn all crimi- 
nals, whoever they may 
be. 

Whatever your intentions 
may be, &c. 



Ouelque chofe qui or que, quoi que, quoi que ce foit que, 
tout ce qui or que, always relate to things, and never to 
perfons ; with this difference, that in French we gener- 
ally begin the fentence with either quelque chofe que or 
qui, quoi que, or quoi que ce foit que, with the following 
verb in the fubjun&ive mood ; on the contrary, we al- 
ways make ufe of tout ce qui or que, when whatever can 
be turned by all that which or every thing which, and 
may be placed either at the beginning or in the middle 
of a fentence, according to its fituation in Engliih, with 
the following verb in the indicative mood : ex. 
Quelque chofe quon vous Whatever may be faid to 

dife, or, quoi que ce foit you, do not believe it. 

quV/ vous dife, ne le 

croycz pas ; 
A quelque chofe que, or, 

h quoi que ce foit que, 

vous vous appliquiez t - 



To whatever you apply 
yourfelf. 



J* 



( *5 ) 

Je ferai tout ce qu'zV vcus I will do whatever, or *"y» 

plaira, ery thing you pleafe. 

Tout ce qui £/? ag re able Whatever ', or a// z\6tf£ 
^V/? jta/ tcujours utile y which, is pleafing, is not 

always ufeful. 

Oudqiiun, quelquune, relates to perfons or things, 
and makes quclques-uns, quelques-unes, in the plural. 

Quiconque, is indeclinable, and always ufed in the 
finguiar : ex. 

II a ordre d? arret er qui- He is ordered to flop whom* 

conque puffer a par-la, foever, or any body that 9 

goes that way. 

Qui que ce foit, fpeaking of perfons only, may be 
Englifhed different ways ; but, when by whoever, what 
per/on foever, it muft always be followed by the pro- 
nouns if, elle, or qui, and fometimes by both, unlefs it 
be governed by a verb or a prepofition : ex. 
Oui que ce foit qui me Whofoever deceives me 

trompe, ilfera puni ; fhall be punifhed. 

Oui que ce foit qui vous Whofoever fpeaks to you 

parle de cette affaire, fei- about that affair, pre- 

gnez de n y en rienf avoir ; tend not to know any 

» thing about it. 

When the above pronoun is Englifhed by nobody in 
the world, no man living, &c. it muft be attended with 
the negation ne before the verb : ex. 
Je rCen ai parle a qui que I mentioned it to nobody 

ce foit, whatever, or to no man 

living. 

When fpeaking In the paft tenfe, qui que ce fut muft 
be ufed : ex. 

• 

Cefar ne vouloit Je fier a qui Csefar would truft to no* 

<fue ce fut, body whatever. 

II tie jit part defes projets a He acquainted nobody in the 

qui que ce fut, world with his projects. 

The above obfervation is to be made with refpect to 

quoi que ce foit, quoi que ce fut % only ufed in fpeaking of 

inanimate objects. 

I Tc 



( 86 ) 

Tout que. Tout, preceding a noun immediately 

followed by que, is indeclinable in the mafculine and 
declinable in the feminine before nouns beginning with 
a confonant : ex. 

Tout favant qu'/7 efl, il fe As learned as he is, or , for 
trompe quelquefois ; ally or although, he is 

learned, he ibmetimes 

miftakes. 

Tout laide qu'^/? cette de- This young lady, as ugly 

moifelle, elle fe fait des as ihe is, or, for all ihe 

amis par-tout ; is ugly, gets friends 

every where. 
N. B. This will be feen again among the conjunc- 
tions. 

To the above pronouns may be added the three fol- 
lowing expreffions, which are generally ufed in an in- 
definite or indeterminate manner : 

jfe ne fais qui, I knoiu not who. 

jfe ne fais quoi, I know not what. 

Je ne fais quel, I know not which or what. 

jfe ne fais qui is only faid fpeaking of perfons, and 
fignifies a perfon we do not know : ex. 
II park a je ne fais qui, He fpeaks / know not to 

whom. 
Elle fit abordee par je ne She was accofted by I know 

fais qui, not whom. 

Je nefais quoi is only faid of things, and fignifies an 
object which cannot precifely be named nor defined : 
ex. 
27 fe plaint de je ne fais He complains of / know 

quoi, not what. 

We fometimes put mi before je ne fais qui, and in- 
differently un or le before je nefais quoi : ex. 
11 parle i/'un je ne fais qui, He fpeaks of / know not 

whom. 
Elle s*ejl adreffee a un je She addrefied herfelf to / 

ne fais qui, know not whom. 

II y a la-dedans un je ne There is in that / know 

fais quoi qui me plait, not what that pleafes me. 

J'ai 






( 87 ) 

J 9 at lu une come die intltu- I have read a play which 
lie Le je ne fais quoi, has for title I know not 

what. 
Je ne fan quel In this kft expreffion, quel takes the 

form of an adjective, and niuft always be accompanied 

with a fubftantive ; it is faid ipeaking of both perfons 

and things : ex. 

Lorfque fentiai.je wjene When I went in, I faw 
fais quel homme, quelle / know not what man, 

femme, quel tableau ^ what woman, what pic- 

quelle figure ; tare* %uhat figure. 

EXERCISES ON the foregoing PRONOUNS. 

The man who fold me thefe pens is very cun- 

a venduyV. ru- 

ning. — The lady of whom you fpeak (is not) 
y?, adj. darne^i. parlez,v. rfejl pas, v. 

handfome. — Other people's opinions are not the 

fentiment, m. 

rule of mine. — Mifs D , whom you love 

regie, f. aimez, V. 

fo much, is very ill. The table, upon which 

tanty adv. malade, adj. table, f. fur, -p. 

you write, is broken. — Who 1 told 4 it 3 to you. 2 — 
ecrivez, v. caffe, p.p. a dit, v. ^ 

He, who was with you, related to me how 

etoit, v. a raconte, v. comment, adv. 

every thing had paiTed. — — She ( will not ) 

s'etoity v. pajje, p.p. ne veut pas, v. 

hear of the mifery to which he is reduced. — 

entendre parleryV. misere,L redwtyip.'p. 

Whofoever defpifes the poor is himfeif defpicable. — 
meprifey v. me pr if able, adj „ 

He (keeps company with) I know not whom, and that 
frequenter* 

difpleafes 



( 88 ) 

difpleafes her. — No one is fres from fault. . 

dep/aityV. s exempt ^adj. defaut>m. 

What 1 are 2 you 3 doing- ? — Have you heard any 

faiteSy v. appriSy p.p. 

news ? - — Shun vice, and love what is good. — 

nowuelle yf, EviteZyV. vice % m* aimezyV. bon y adj. 

Every one afts for himfelf. — Who was with 

agitSyV.poitrjp. etoit % v. avecy^. 

you ? — It 1 was 1 a 3 gentleman 4 whofe 5 name 10 P know 8 
Ce monfteur y m. nomyxsx. Ja'iSyV. 

7 not.° — Somebody knocks at the door, go and 
ne-pas. frapp e y v. a y p. a/IeZyV. & 

open it. — Men 1 generally 3 love* him 4 

§uvrir 9 v. Homme, m. generalementyTidv. 

who 5 flatters 7 them. 6 (Kere are) two pears, which 

jlaitey v. KoiciyZdv. poire y £. 

will you have ? — The man I fent you was 

voulezy v. »o» ai envoye, v. 

honeft. Servants are men or women 

honneteyTidS. Dome/}iqueym. ei f. ou 3 c. 

whom we keep and reward for 

nourrlJJbnSy v. recompenfons, v. poury p. 

the fervices they do to us. — Both religion and 

rendentyV. 

virtue are the bonds of civil fociety. — Is that the 

lien, rn. fociete, f. 

horfe for which you gave a hundred guineas ? — 

avez donneyV. <<?-> 

Whatever 1 thefe 3 books 4 be, 2 fend them to me. — 

foienty v, 
Whofe 1 fword 4 is 2 this 3 ? — It belongs to I know 

epeey f. appartienty v. 

not whom. — What crime is fhe guilty of? 

crime, m. to up able y adv. 

~-Wha,t 



( 89 3 

—What is he forry for? — Nobody 1 fpeaks 3 to* 

jache, adj. de parky v. ^ 

you. 1 — Whom 1 do you 3 feek 1 ? Has 4 fome- 

«^* chercheZyV. A-t-il>\* 

body 1 fpoken 3 to him 1 of it ? — Whofoever 1 fpeaks* 
parley p.p. vis 

to you, 2 do 4 not 6 anfwer. 5 Who was the fir ft 

*o> ne-pas repmdeZyV* futyV. 

king of France ? — They are two lifters \ which 

do you 3 like 1 bed 4 ? Whatever you (may fay,) 

*o* aimeZyV. le mieux y%dv* dijiezy v. 

they fhall be punifhed. She (finds fault) with 

Jeronty v. puniy p.p. trouve a redire y w. a 

whatever I do. — You fpeak of the lady whofe huf- 
fo'iSy v. parleZy v. 2iia~ 

band has been fo ill. — There are four drawings : 
r/,m. £/<?,p.p. Voila ,adv. dejjeins ym. 

which do you choofe ? Is there any thing more 

v>» choiJljfeZyV. T a t-il,v. 

ridiculous ! — Some fay {he is married, others fay 
ridicule , adj. difentyV. marieey^.^. 

not. Whatever her fortune be, he fays lie ne- 

que notiy adv. fortune f. dityV. ne- 

ver will marry her. — I faw nobody in the 

jamais y adv. epouferay v. ai viiy v. 

world. — At 1 what 1 do you 4 play 3 ? — That vexes me. 

*o> joueZy v. fdchty v. 

— We will give you fhortly what you have 

donner oris yV . dans petty adv. aveZy v« 

lent us.— As amiable as fhe is, £he* does 2 not 5 

prete y *p.ip. ctimableyZd}. «<^ ne-pas 

pleafe 4 me. 3 — Every one complains of you. — There is 
plait y v, J e plaint y v. // y a 

I 2 I know 



( 9° ) 

I know not what mean in that behaviour. — I love 

&z/, adj. conduit l e } {. aime y v. 

neither of them. — Both are married. — From 1 whom" 

do you 5 know 4 it 3 ? — He was fo honeft that he mif- 
^ favezyV. etoit, v. Je de- 

trufted nobody at all. — (For 1 all 3 ) they* are 5 rich, 2 

JioityV. Tout que richeyTidj. 

they 1 give 3 -nothing 4 to the poor. 5 They 

donnenty v. ne-rietiy adv. 

do 2 juftice 3 to 5 one 4 another. 6 

fe rendenty v. 

Recapitulatory or promiscuous EXERCISES 

UPON ALL THE PRONOUNS. 

I fpeak French. — You fpeak Englifh. — We 
parley v. parlez y v. 

do 2 not 4 underftand 3 what 5 they 5 fay 8 to us. 7 — 
«.<s» ne-pas comprenonsy v. difent y v. ^ 

She 1 fpeaks 3 to you A 2 and 4 robs 6 you 5 (at the fame 7 
parle y v. <<^ vdle } v. en me me 

time.) We 1 have 1 - 2 not 5 feen 6 them. 3 — Your 

terns y adv. avonSyV, vusy p.p. 

mother came (to fee) me yefterday, and I (will go) to 
mere yf, vintyV. voir yY. hiery adv. irai y v. 

fee her (to-morrow.) — Is there any body that efteems 
demain yzd\. EJl-ilyV. eJliniCyS. 

her more, than I do ? — Attention^ cares a credit^ mo- 
ve^ foiny m. 

ney, I have put every thing in ufe. They 1 

#7/.f,p.p. en y ip. ufageym, 

are 2 happy 3 but 4 we 5 are 8 c not° fb. 7 — 

JbntyV. heureuXy2i<X]. mais y c. JommeSyV. 

That dictionary cofts me three guineas^ but I owe 

wutey v. doisy v* 

jnudb 



( 9* ,) 

much to it. "Whatever may be your troubles, 

foienty V. peiney f. 

you ought to write to me more frequently. — 
devriezy v. ecrirty v. Jouventy adj . 

I (will lend) you the book ihe fent ^ me. Be- 

preteraiyV. a envoy e, v. Cro* 

lieve me, he is very ill. 1 fhall be very glad 

yezy v. maladey adj . aife y adj . 

to go there with you : for, I have fomething to ' 
de allet'y v. avecy v. car, c. % 

tell him. — I love your fitter, and I owe her re- 
direyV. aimeyV. dotSyV. ref* 

fpeft Give me my hat and cloak. 1 

pecfyVCi. DotmeZyV. chapeaityVa. mantdetyXH. 

have dined with your father and mother. ■ T hey 1 
</i?«£,p.p. 

often 4 procure 3 me 2 that 5 pleafure. 6 — They 

fouventy adv. procurentyV. plaifir *, m. 

have fent you good apples. — Write to me, 

ontyV. envoy e, p.p. Ecrivez y v. ^>> 

do z not 4 write 3 to her. 2 — Carry fome to your fitter. 
k^ PorteZyV. JceuryV. 

— I will do whatever you pleafe. — The Thames 
feraiyV. p/airayV. Tamife yf 9 

is a very fine river ; it divides London into two 

riviere yf. divijhy v. etiy p. 

parts. London is the capital of England, 

pariieyi. capitale y 2L&]. 

as Paris is that of France. — Brett is a fine 

comtne y adv. 

fea - port in France, but its entrance is djf- 
meryi. portytti. en y p. maiSy c. entree , f. 

iicult and dangerous. Thefe books are mine, 

danger euxy adj. font y v. 

and 



( 92 ) 

and not yours. Your exercife is better 

non-pas y adv. theme> m. 

than mine, but it is not fo well as your brother's. 

bien, adv. 

—Do you 2 think 1 of 3 me 4 ? — Yes, I do. — 

^ penfeZyV. a CW,adv. pcnfe % v* 

You do not know what vexes me. I will 

«>> JaveZyV. veuXyV. 

( not accept of any of the terms which they 

accepter y v. w=» condition^ f. 

offer me. — Whom ought we to worfhip ?— 
offirentyX. devonSyV. ^» adorer y v. 

God, who is the father of them that love him, and 
DieuyVa. aimentyV* 

the protestor of thofe that fear him. — Of 

protecleury m. cralgnenty v. 

all thofe who contend againft religion, fome do it 
dlfputenty v. contre y p. Jbnty v. 

becaufe it perplexes them ; others, becaufe they 
parce quey c. ewbarrajfty v. 

wifh to have the glory of perplexing its de- 
veuIentyV. avoir , v. embarraJferyW, de- 
fenders. Thofe trees are well expofed to 

fenfeury m. arbre y m. expofSy p.p. 

the fun, yet their fruits are not good.— 

Joleily m. cependanty adv. 

I believe your uncle is arrived. — His ability is 

crotSyV. cncleSyTCi. arrive , p.p. habiLteyf* 

not fo great as yours. — Two rivals are generally 
grand yzd} . rival \m. 

enemies of one another. — Who gave you that 

a donne^ v. 

letter ? — Your brother's fervant. What 1 does 

kttreyi. domeflique, m* *=» 



( 93 ) 

he* write 1 to you- ? — That his library is at our 
ecrit,v. bibliotheque, f. a 

fervice. His letters pleafe me fo much that I 

Jet vice, iru plaifent, v. 

wiih v to increafe their number. He, that 

veux, \ augmenter, v. 

wants virtue* wants (all things.) — That lady 

manque de, v. tout,m* ddme,t» 

pleafes you, fcr T you" are' always 5 fpeaking 4 of 3 her. 
plait , v. car,c. toujours y 2.dv.parlez y v, 

— The beauty of the mind creates admiration ; that 
beaut e,£. efprii, m. donne, v. 

of the foul gains efteem ; and that of the body 

dme,L donne, v. e/li?ne,f. corps, m* 

love. Moil friends are more attached to our 

amour , m. attache, pp. 

fortune than they are (fo) to our perfon. — 
que — ne, c. 

Whoever is without virtue feldom values men, 

fans, p. rarement,adv. e/lime,v. 

and whoever is too good values them too much. 

trop, adv. 
— It is me who told me that this houfe (is not) 

Ce a dit,\. maifo?i,i. tfejl pas,x. 

yours. — You believe that Mrs. D — is in 

croyez,v. £^ v « dans, p. 

your intereft, and I believe nothing of it. — 

interet, m. crois, v. ne — rien, adv. 

Ambition (treads upon) wifdom, honour, probity, 
Joule aux pieds 

and, on their ruins, lays the foundation of 
fur, p. ruine,£. eleve,v. fondement,tn, 

its greatnefs. — Whatever her intention may be, I 1 
fa grandeur ,f, . fcit,v. 



f 



( 94 ) 

do 4 not 6 love 5 her 3 the 7 lefs for* it. — Nobody 
aime y v. mains y adv. 

in the world has complained of your conduct. — 

/j?, V, plaint , p.p. 

When you read the hiftory of the Roman 
Quand y c. HreZyV* hijloire^. Remained]. 

emperors, you will find one (of them) whofe 
ernpereurfXi* trouverez y v. 

name was Nero,— The ftudy of geography is ab- 
Neron. geographic >{. ab- 

folutely neceflary to him who has a rafte for 
fohmient y z<Lv. du gout y va. 

hiftory. — He 1 that 2 fold* us 3 this 5 clock 5 did 9 

a vendity v. horljge y f. a y v. 

7 not 10 cheat 11 us. 8 — What do you think of it ? 

ne-pas trompe y p.p. ^ penfez y v. 

•— — Whofoever 1 cheats 3 me 2 fhall 4 repent (of 5 

trompe y v. Je repentira y v. 

it.) — Every body thinks we (fhall have) peace. — 

croityM. aurons y v. paixyf, 

England owes her riches to her naval ftrength and 
doity v. forceSy f. pi. 

the encouragement flie gives to her commerce. — 

donney v. 

We fpeak of what has happened to him. — My 

par/onSyV. . j/?,v. ^rnw,p.p. ^ 

houfe is like others, it has its beauties as well 

maifojiy f. commey adv. ay v. beaute y f. 

as its inconveniences. — She, who (was fpeaking) to 
incommodite yi. par/city v. *>> 

you, is not yet married. Her father, mo- 

eticoneyZdv. marie y p.p. 

ther, brothers, fitters, uncles, and aunts ; in fhort, 

9ncky m. tante y f. enjin y c- 

' all 



( 95 ) 

all her relations, are dead, and have left her 

parehtyin. et f. cnt>v. Iaijfe>j>.j>. 

a considerable fortune. — Do you know any of 

«<^ cofinotffeZyV. 

thefe ladies ?— -Yes, I know fome of them. — 

Qui, adv. connoisy v. 

For 1 all they 5 are 6 young* and 3 handfome, 4 they have 

onty v. 

a great deal of nrodefty and virtue. — Defire him to 

Priezy v. de 

bring them here. — Is that the gown for which 
amener,v. ia y zdv. EJlyV. robe ,f. pour ,p. 

you gave five guineas ?~— There is I know not 
avez donncyV. guinee y f. II y ay v. 

what in the colour which pleafes much. — To 
dansy p. plait y v. beaucoup ,adv, 

what (does he apply himfelf ?) — This apple and that 
s* applique-t-il P 

he gave you are very good. — Give me either 
donna y v. Donnez, v. 

of them. — I 1 will 5 fend you* fome 4 thither. 3 —I can- 
ks* enverraiyV. ne peux 

not fell it to you for fo fmall a fum. — I pre- 
paSyV* vendre y v. pour yip* fomme yf. pre-* 

fer the beauty of the mind to that of the body.-— • 
fere y v. 

Some love one thing, fome another. — She fays 
aimenty v. dityV* 

fhe hates that man, many think . Ihe loves him.— - 
haity v. aimey v. 

He, whom nobody pleafes, is more unhappy than 

plait y v. malheureiiX) adj. 

he who pleafes nobody. — I was near your fitter 

etoisyV* auprh tfte,p. 

when 



( 96 ) 

when that happened to her. — Both his father and 
quandyC. arriva 9 V m 

mother died on the fame day. — As covetous as 

moururentyV. ^ avarejad). 

he is, he gave me one guinea. — Whatever has 

a dom:e y v. fcty\* 

happened to you, I am forry for it. — He would 
arrive yp. -p. *o> fu'iSyW. fdcheyzdj. vou/utyV. 

do it in fpite of any body whatever. — Learning 
fairest* *7z,p. deph>m. Science, f. 

is preferable to riches, and virtue to both. — Some phi- ♦ 

phi- 

lofophers have thought that fixed ftars were 
Iofophe,m. 0///,v. cru> p.p. jfixeyzd}. etoikyi. etoientyV. 

as many funs. — (Here are) two grammars, which 1 do 

Voici&dv. «* 

you 3 prefer 1 ? — I prefer this to that. — Both are very 
prefereryV* 

good. — He believes nothing of what you told him. 
croity v. ne rien avez dit> v. 

«— You blame him who does not deferve it. — 
MdmeZy v. merite, v. 

To whom did you fpeak ? — I fpoke to nobody 5 
avez } v. parley p.p. at parley v. 

for, I faw neither of them. 
^r,c. at vityV. <& 



SECT. IV. 

Of VERBS, and their different SORTS. 
Verbs are ufually divided into feven forts, viz. 

1 . Les verbes auxiliaireSy auxiliary. 

2. Les verbes aElifsy adtive. 

3. Les verbes pajjifsy paffive. . 

4. Les yerbes neutres, neuter. . 

' / 5. Les 



( 97 ) 

5- Les verbes refill 's 9 reflective. — /© §* 

6. Les verbes perfonneUy perfonal. ^* 

J. Les verbes imperfonnels, imperfonal. — ~ ^ O < ■ 

Some of them are regular, that is to fay, they follow 
the general rule of the conjugation to which they be- 
long ; others do not, and are called irregular. 

The auxiliary verbs are, avoir, to have, and etre, to be. 
The two auxiliaries are ufed to conjugate all the com- * 
pound tenfes of the other verbs. 

The aflive verbs. — In this clafs, the action is tranii- 
tive, that is, it pafTes from the fubject to the object : ex. 
Le maitre punk les ecoliers The mafter punijhes the 

pareffeux, lazy fcholars. 

The active verb fometimes governs two cafes, one to 
which the action directly refers, or which is the direct f 
object of the action, and is therefore called the direcl or 
abfolute cafe ; the other, to which the action refers but in- 
directly, and it is called the indirecl or relative cafe : ex. 
Voire fceur a ecrit une Ion- Your lifter wrote a long 

gue lettre a men frere, letter to my brother. 

A long letter is the direct or abfolute cafe, and to my 
brother the indirect or relative cafe, of the verb wrote* 
The direct cafe can be no other but the accufative of a 
noun or pronoun, but the indirect is either the genitive^ 
dative, or ablative. 

In the pcif/lve verbs, the action is received or fuffered 
by the fubject, : ex. 
Les ecoliers pareffeux kvont Lazy fcholars Jhall be pun-* 

punis, i/bed. 

In the neuter verbs, the action is intranntive, that is, 
it remains in the agent : ex. 



Je dors, I fleep. 

■ Nous etudions, We ftudy. 



Vous voyagez, You travel, 
Elle foupire, She fighs. 



In the refiecled verbs, the action returns upon the 
agent that produces it : ex. 

II fe repent, He repents himfelf. 

Elle fe loue, She praifes herfelf. 

Thefe verbs have always^ before their infinitive, and 
are conjugated with a double pronoun, 

K The 



( 98 ) 

The perfonal verbs are thofe which are conjugated 
with three perfons, in the lingular and plural, through- 
out all their tenfes. 

The imperfona! verbs have but the third perfon of the 
lingular number. 

N. B. There is a kind of verbs, which may be dis- 
tinguished by the name of reduplicative, always exprei- 
fing a repetition of the action : ex. 

l\ecommencer, To begin again. 
Refaire, To do again y Sec. 

In thefe verbs, the Engliih word again is to be ren- 
dered in French by the fyllable re prefixed to the radix 
of the verb, and not bv encore. 

All the above verbs may befmiple or compound. 

A verb is fmple which cannot be divided, without 
lofing its meaning : as, 



Appeler, To call ; 
Edtir y To build j 

Mentir, To lie \ 



Voir, To fee ; 

Prendre y To take ; 

Vivre> To live ; 



which would mean nothing if they were divided. 

A verb is compound when it is preceded by one or 
more Syllables : as, 



"Kappe/er, To *vcal. 
'Kebdtiry To rebuild. 
TDbmentir, To belie. 



Trevoir, To for eke. 

TLntreprendre, To undertake. 
Survivre, To0#/live,&c. 

Thefe laft verbs are generally formed by prefixing 
to them part or the whole of a prepofiticn. 

CONJUGATIONS of VERBS. 

To conjugate verbs is to give them different inflec- 
tions or terminations, according to their moods, tcnfes> 
perfons y and numbers. 

MOODS. 

Mood or mode, in the lenfe it is taken here, is a 
grammatical term, which means the mamier of affirm- 
ing, or denoting, in the verbs, by different inflections. 

There are, in the French language, four moods, ab- 
folutely diftinct from each other, by the Several inflec- 
tions, or by fome other difference. They are : 

Uinfinitifi 



( 99 ) 

Uhifinitif, The infinitive. 

L'ikdicatify The indicative. 

Uimperatif) The imperative. 

Lefubjonclif, ou conjonclif, The fubjunclive or conjunc- 
tive. 

Of the Infinitive Mood. 
This mood is thus called, 'becaufe it only exprefTes the 
action or fignification of the verb in an indefinite and 
indeterminate manner, that is, without affirmation, and 
without any relation as to time, number, or perfon : ex, 
Parler, To fpeak. 

Chanter, To ling. 

Danfer> To dance. 

Of the Indicative Mood. • 

This mood is thus called, becaufe it not only indicates 
the affirmation in the different tenfes of the verbs, but 
likewife the time, number, and perfon ; without being 
preceded or governed by either conjunction or verb : ex. 
J'ecris une kttre y I write a letter. 
// chanie line chanfon> He rings a fong. 
Ecris and chante are two verbs in the indicative mood, 
becaufe they do not require to be preceded by a con- 
junction* or another verb to make a complete fenfe. 
The definition of this mood will be better underftood, 
by comparing the little that has been faid with what is 
going to be faid with refpect to the fubjunclive mood. 

Of the Imperative Mood. 

The name, which has been given to this mood, is 
derived from a Latin word which fignifies-ft? command ; 
and the imperative is in fact but a manner of denoting 
in the verbs the action of commanding^ entreaiingypray- 
ingy exhorting, and fomelimes forbidding : ex. 
Ne meprifez pas les avis Do not defpife the advice 

que je vous donne, which I give you. 

It is eafy to perceive that this manner of {peaking is 
but an exhortation : as if T had faid, 

* Among the conjunctions, fome govern the indicative, others the 
fubjunclive ; this will be explained in time. 



( Joo ) 

Je vous exhort e,je vous prie, I exhort, I entreat you, not 
de ne pas m'eprifer mes to delpife my advice. 
avis. 

This mood has no firft perfon in the Angular, becaufe 
it is impoflible to command one's felf ; and, if it have 
the firft perfon plural, it is becaufe one fpeaks as much 
to others as to one's felf: as when we fay, 

Evitons tout ce qui pourroit Let us avoid every thing 
ofetifer les mitres y that might offend others. 

The fecond perfon Angular, the firft and fecond plural, 

admit of no pronouns before them ; as to the third, in 

both numbers, it is always preceded by the pronoun il 

or elky &c. and the conjunction que. 

Of the Subjunctive, or Conjunctive. j<*- 

The name of fubjunftive, or conjunctive, fufficiently 
conveys what its ufe is in a fentence. It may be de- 
fined thus ; a manner of expreffing the different tenfes 
of the verbs without any affirmation. In fa ft, the fub- 
junftive never affirms \ it is always preceded by, or fub- 
jeft to, fome conjunction ; and, if it fhould be met with 
in a fentence containing an affirmation, that affirmation 
can only be expreffed by the verb that precedes the fub- 
junftive, which is ufed but to modify that affirmation. 
In the fubfequent fentence, 
Je travaille afin que vous I work that you may reft 

vous repofiez, yourfelf, 

the affirmation is only expreffed hj je travaille^ I work, 
and what follows only expreiTes the end which I purpofe 
by working, viz. to procure you fome reft. Again, 
Je defire que vous faffiez I wifh that you may do your 

voire devoir. duty. 

I will affirm that I wifh ; but it is clear there is no af- 
firmation in thefe words, that you may da your duty 9 fince 
I do not fay, that you do, that you have done, that you 
will do, your duty ; but only that I wifh you may do it. 
My wifh is not doubtful j but it is very doubtful whe- 
ther you will or may do your duty, 

TENSES. 



y A K tr* 'W^K^i^N^-*^ 



n \ 




■ 



^s^TSu* 4**~^<h*^, t 'e&zSlPff* 



( wi ) 

TENSES. 
There are, ftriftly fpeaking, but three natural and 
proper tenfes, in the verbs : viz. 

Le pajfe, The pafL 
Le prefent. The prefent. 
Lefutur y The future. 

In the French language, the tenfes are divided in th6 
following manner, viz. five in the infinitive mood % 
three of them are Ample, the two others compound. 

In the fimple tenfes, the verb is exprefied in one 
word : ex. 

Parler, To fpeak. 

Chantanty Singing. 
Danfe* Danced. 

The compound tenfes are conjugated with feme one 
of the auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, or iiri, to be, 
joined to a participle pafiive : ex. 

Avoir parley To have fpoken. 

Ayant chantey Having fung. 

Etre airhey To be loved. 

Etant aimcy Being loved. 

Simple Tenses. 

Le prefeniy The prefent. 

Le participe aclif, The participle active. 

Le participe pajjify The participle pafiive. 

Compound. 
Le prefent y The prefent. 

Le participe paffe. The participle paft. 

There are ten tenfes in the indicative mood, viz. 
five fimple and five compound : they are., 

Simple, 
Le prefent, The prefent. 

L'imparfaity The imperfect 

Le preterit y The preterite. 

Lefutur, The future. 

Le conditioned The conditional. 

K % Com?, 



( I<« ) 

4 

Compound. 
Le prefent) The prefent. 

UimparfaHj The imperfect. 

Le preterit y The preterite. 

Le futur y The future. 

Z? conditioned The conditional. 

JV". i?. The imperative admits of no tenfe but the 
prefent. 

The fubjun&ive mood has four tenfes 7 two Ample? 
and two compound. 

Simple. 
Le prefeniy The prefent. 

Le preterit^ The preterite. 

Compound. 
Le prefent j The prefent. 

Le preterit. The preterite* 

Before we proceed any farther on the conjugations, it 
has been thought proper to explain the different ufes of 
the above tenfes, as one of the moft important articles 
in a language, whofe precision partly depends on the 
difference which cuftom fets between one tenfe and 
another with regard to the fenfe of the fentence. We 
fhall endeavour to be fliort and concife, and fay nothing 
but what is ufeful, in hopes that the following expla- 
nation will be fufficient to remove a difficulty which 
conftantly puzzles the learners. 

TENSES of the INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Simple. 
Present. 

This tenfe is ufed when the ftate, action, or impreC- 
fioa, mentioned by the verb, i; exifling, doing) or \. hap- 
pening) at the very time we are fpeaking : ex. 

Je me porte Hen, I am well. 

Voire foeur eft malade y Your fifter is ill:. 

Nous nous promenonSj We are walking. 

Vous eerivezj You are writing* 

Us jouent. They are playing) &c. 

The 






i m ) 

The prefent is alfo ufed. 

i°. When fpeaking of anions or things which we 
habitually do, are accujhmed to do, or can do : ex. 
Nous dinons toujours a deux We always dine at two 

heuresy o'clock. 

Elle etudie rhijloire> She Jhidies hiftory, 

Vous parlez Francois, You /peak French. 

Lit-// V Anglais ? Does he raw/ Englifh ? 

2°. When fpeaking of actions which are to be done 
in a very fhort time, we generally ufe this tenfe inftead 
of the future : ex. 
Je pars ce foir pour la com-' I fef out this evening for 

pagne y the country. 

Que fzites-vous demain ? What do you to-morrow ? 
Inftead of 
Je partirai ce foir pour la I fhall Jet out this evening 

campagne y for the country. 

Que ferez-vous demain P What will you do to-mor- 

ro^ ? 

3 . This tenfe Is alfb conftantly ufed in French in- 
ftead of the preterite or compound of the prefent, es- 
pecially in orations or Jet difcourfesy and in poetry , in or- 
der to reprefent a paft action or event as prefent to the 
mind of the hearers or readers* 

Imperfect. 

This tenfe has two ufes : in the firjly it expreffes an 
action prefent or doing at the time of an action thai is 
pajl ;■ as when I fay, 
Monfrere apprenoitjfo le$on My brother ivas learning 

quand vous arrivdtes x his leffon when you ar- 

rived. 

In the above fentence, the aft of learning, though 
paft with refpeft to my narration, was prefent at the 
moment your arrival took place ; therefore this tenfe is 
but imperfe&ly preterite and imperfectly prefent. 

In the fecondy the imperfedl is employed every time 
we fpeak of ablions of habity or atlims reiteratedy at a 
time which is not defined ; ex. 

Quand 



( *°4 ) 

Quand /etols a Londresy When I was In London, I 
y'allois fouvent voir mes often went to fee my 
amis, friends. 

that is, I often ufecl to go, or I frequently went. Sec. 
The imperfect is likewife ufed when we fpeak of the 

character^ or fome inherent and dijlinclive quality, of 

peribns or things no longer exifting ; and after the 

AEnglifh conjunction if> though the verb be preceded by 
(houldy could) 'would: ex. 

Philip, the father of Alex- 
ander the Great, was 
the deepeft politician of 
his time. 

Csefar had I know not 
what of great in his 
phyfiognomy. 

Carthage carried on a pro- 
digious trade by the 
means of her fhips, which 
went as far as the Indies. 

Palmyra and Perfepolis 



Philippe , pere d y Alexandre 
le Grandy etoit le plus 
Jin politique de fon terns , 

Cefar avoit je ne fais quoi 
de grand dans la phyjiom- 
mie y 

Carthage faifoit un prodi- 
gieux commerce par le mo- 
yen de fes vaijfeauxy qui 
alloient jufqu'aux Indesy 

Palmire et Perfepolis e- 
toient de grandes et belles 
villeSy 
j SV/venoit,yV le payer ois, 

George II. etoit d*une taille 
plutot petite que moyenne; 
il avoit les yeux t res-fail- 
lansy le nez grandy et une 
belle complexion ; il etoit 
douxy moderey et humain; 
fobre et regulier dans fa 
maniere de vivre ; il fe 
plaifoit dans la pompe et 
dans Vappareil militaire, 
et etoit naturellement 
brave : il aimoit la guerre 
comme foldaty /'etudioit 
comme une fciencey et a- 
voit, fur ce fujety une 
* ~ cor- 



were large and fine cit- 
ies. 

If he would comey or came, 
I would pay him. 

George II. was y in his per- 
fon, rather lower than 
the middle fize ; he had 
remarkably » prominent 
eyes, a high nofe, and a 
fair complexion \ he was 

, mild, moderate, and hu- 
mane y in his way of liv- 
ing, fober and regular : 
he delighted in military 
pomp and parade, and 
was naturally brave : he 
loved w r ar as a foldier, he 
Jludied it as a fcience, 
and hady on that account, 



f 



( *° 5 ) 

correfpcndance etablie a- a fettled correfpondence 

vec quelques-uns des plus with iome of the great eft 

grands generaux que r Air generals whom Germa- 

lemagne ait produitSy ny had produced. 

From the above inftances it might confidently be be- 
lieved that every difficulty attending the ufe of this tenfe 
will be entirely removed ; I lhall, however add, as a 
farther illuftration,fthat whenever the verb, which in 
Englifh is in the preterite, can be made by the pafi tenfe 
of the verb to bey and that preterite changed into the 
participle activ&J or(when that preterite can be Uirned by 
the verb in the infinitive mood preceded by* ufed/y that 
paft tenfe muft be made in French by the imperfect. 

Preterite. 

This tenfe is fo called becaufe it always exprefTes an 
action done at a time determined or fpecified by an ad- 
verb, or fome circumftance in the fpeech, and fo en- 
tirely elapfed that nothing more remains of the time 
when that afticn was doing : ex. 
jfe fus malade hier pendant I was ill yeflerday for two 

deux heuresy hours. 

La dernier e fois que nous The lajl time we went to 

allames le voir, nous fee him, w^e had a kind 

eiimes //;; aceueil favor- reception. 

able y 
Vqus ecrivites a voire frere You wrote to your brother 

il y a huit jours, eight days ago. 

Us effuyerent de grandes They underwent great 

peries /'annee paffee, loffes lajl year. 

Future. 

This tenfe fimply exprelTes that an aftion will be 
done at a time that is not yet come : ex. 
Je vous verrai demain a I will fee you to-morrow 

LondreSy in London. 

Mon fere vous ecrira la My brother will write to 

femaine prochaine y you next week. 

* In French, as well as in Englifh, we fometimes ex- 
prefs an a&ion that is to be done inftantly by the verb 
allery or s'en allery immediately followed by an infini- 
tive : ex, 

/ // *■ 



( io6 ) 



je vais, or je m en vais, 

ecrire a ma tdnte, 
Je vais, or je m'en vais, 

partir, 
Which fignify : 
Je lul ecrirai tout prefente- 

ment, 
Je partirai ddm Pinjlant. 



I am going to write to my 

aunt. 
I a?n going to Jet out. 



I will write to her pre- 

fently. 
I willfet out inftantly. 
To exprefs an uncertainty in a future tenfe, that is, 
to exprefs that it is not decided that fuch a thing will 
be done, we make life of the word devoir immediately 
followed by a verb in the infinitive mood, and that is 
the only inftance wherein devoir does not imply obliga- 
tion, neceffity, &c. : ex. 

The king is to Jet out for 
Cheltenham about the 
middle of July, and is 
not to return till the lat- 
ter end of Auguft. 



Y Leroi doit partir pour Chel- 
tenham vers le milieu du 



mois de Juillet, et ne doit 

revenir qiHa la Jin du 

mois d'Aouty 
That is, 
Onfuppofe que le roi partira 

&c. et qitil ne reviendra 

&c. 



It is fuppofed that the king 
willfet out, &c. and will 
not return till, &c. 

Conditional. 
The name of this tenfe is a true definition of it : in 
fact it is always ufed to exprefs fome condition or fuppo- 
Jition, and has always a reference to the prefent, becaufe, 
by fuppofing the condition effected, the action, men- 
tioned by the conditional, becomes prefent : ex. 
jfe Wxoisjif avois des livres, i would read i had books. 



Vous auriez lafTevrefivous 

mangiez de ce fruit, 
Je ferois mortifie s 9 il ' per doit 
fon proces* 



You would have a fever if 

you ate of that fruit. 
I jhould fo 'mortified if he 
fhould lofe his law-fuit. 
It is fometimes ufed, inftead of the future, after the 
conjunction que : ex. 

11 a promis quV/ viendrolt, He has promifed to come, 

or that he will come. 
This tenfe is often called the uncertain tenfe, becaufe 
it expreffes an action made uncertain by the conditional 

that 



( 107 ) - 

that follows it, and fome grammarians place it among 
the tenfes of the fubjunctive mood, though it be very- 
certain that it never is governed by any of the conjunc- 
tions which require a fubjunclive mood after them. 

Compound Tenses. 

Compound of the Present, 

The compound of the prefent is employed in two 
different manners. 

i°. It expreiTes an aclion paft in an indeterminate 
time, but not too much diftant from the time we fpeak : 
thus we muft fay, 
J^'ai vu mademoifelle voire I have feen your lifter, and 

fceur et lui at parte y fpoken to her. 

Le rot de P ruffe a conquis The king of Pruflia has 

la Silefiey conquered Silefia. 

Cela s'eft pafie avantageufe~ That has pajfed advantage- 

ment pour votre couJin> oufly for your coufin. 

In the above fentence, the aclion is certainly paft, 
but the time when it paft is neither determined nor 
fpecified. 

2°. It expreffes a time definite and determinate, but 
of which there yet remains fome part to elapfe : ex. 
Les fruits ont tres blen re- Fruits have very well fuc~ 

uffi cetie annee, ceeded this year. 

Nous /-/avons pas eu beau- We have not had much 

coup de neige cet hiver, fnow this winter. 

// a plu toute cette fe?naine y It has rained all this week, 

tout ce moisy all this month. 

Nous avons vu d'eiranges We have feen ftrange things 

chofes dans cejtecle, in this century. 

In the above fentences, this year y this vueeky this ivin- 
ter y Sec. are times which Itiil laft, and are not yet elapfed. 

To exprefs an action recently paft, we fometimes 
mak? ufe of the verb yenir immediately followed by de, 
and the verb in the infinitive mood : ex. 
Je viens de le voir paiTer, I have juft feen him go by. 
Le roi vient d'arriver, The king is but juft arrived* / 

Elle vient d'expirer, She if but jujl dead. 

The 



^s 



( io8 ) 

The fame tenfe may be exprefTed by the verb /aire, 
preceded by the negation ne and followed by the con- 
junction que, with an infinitive preceded by de : ex. 
XI ne fait que $arriver y He is but juft arrived. 

jfe ne fais que defortir y I have but jujl gone out. 

N. J?. This particle de is here indifpenfable, becaufe, 
without it, the expreffion would have quite another 
fenfe, and would exprefs a continuation or a frequent 
reiteration in the action : ex. 

Vous ne faites que forth*, You do nothing but go out. 
JElle ne fait que jouer et She does nothing but play 

danfer y and dance. 

Compound of the Imperfect. 

The compound of the imperfect exprefles an action 
paft before another, which is paft alfo, but with this 
difference, that the action exprefTed by this tenfe is the 
principal object of the perfon who fpeaks, and the fol- 
lowing fentence is fubordinate to that exprefTed by the 
compound of the imperfect. So that, though the time 
of that fubordinate fentence be defined, that of the prin- 
cipal fentence is not the lefs indeterminate, becaufe the 
former has no influence on the latter. As, when we 
fay, 
Nous avions dine lorfquM We had dined when he ar- 

arriva y rived, 

our principal object is to exprefs the action of dining as 
paft, without determining at what time, but only before 
an action which is palled aifo, without, however, the lat- 
ter being a confequence of the former ; for, we do not 
mean to fay, that he ftayed, or waited, till we had dined, 
to arrive. 

Compound of the PpvETERite. 

This tenfe alfo exprefles an action done or paft be- 
fore another which is likewife paft, and is determined 
by the following fentence, which is the principal object 
of the attention. Thus, when we fay, 
Quand ils eurent acheve de When they had done play* 

jouer y ilsfe mirent a chart- ing, they began finging, 

ter> 

we 



Lorfque, 1 m _ 
Quand, \ ' 



( 109 ) 

■we mean at firft. to convey that they began Jinging, and 
that it was not till they had done playing ; in which cafe, 
the action of having done playing is fubordinate to this, 
they began Jinging, and confequently the latter deter- 
mines the time of the other. 

The following obfervation is very plain, and will in 
fome manner fix the ufe of the above tenfe, viz. that it 
is hardly ever ufed -except after the conjunctions 
Auffitot que, 1 Apres que, After ; 

D'abord que, > As foon as ; 
Des que, j 

which never precede a compound of the imperfect, un~ 
lefs the verb exprefs a cuflom or habit. 

Laftly, we muft ufe the compound of the preterite 
when the adverb, bieutot^ foon precedes or follows the 
verbs was or had, to exprefs an action or thing as done 
and accomplished : .ex, 

t? affaire fut bientot faite, The bufinefs was foon over. 
yietis bientotjim de manger, I foon had done eating. 

Compound of the Future. 
The name of this tenfe feems at firft to ronvey a con- 
tradition : what is meant by that, is not that an action 
can be future and pall at the fame time, but only that 
the a£iion, which is to come, will be pad when another 
a£lion happens, or even before it happens : ex. 

Je ferai parti quand vans I Jhall be gone when you 

reviendrez., come back. 

Quand vous aurez fini vos When you have done your 

affaires, vous viendrez me bufinefs, you fliall come 

tr Quver ; to me. 

In the firft fentence, I fi:all be gone, which is a future 
time with refpe£t to the prefent we fpeak in, will be a 
paft time by the time you will or purpofe to arrive, &c. 

Compound of the Conditional. 
This tenfe generally fuppofes a condition, as the flrfl: 
conditional, with this difference, that, the condition taking 
place, the aftion expreSed by the verb in the conditional 

h is 



( no ) 

is accomplished, and confequently in a part time : ex. 
Je vous aurois ecrit il y a I would have written to you 
tin mcisyftfeujfefu vctre a month ago, if I had 
adrejje, known your direction. 

The indicative mood has another tenfe, formed by the 
compound of the prefent of the verb avoir > joined to a 
participle paffive, which has not been inferted in the pre- 
ceding tenfes on account of its being feldom ufed : ex. 
Quand fzi eu dmc, Jefuis When I have had dined> I 
parti >• fet out. , 

But it is more elegant and more natural to fay, 
Apres avoir dine> je fuis After I had dined, I fet 
parti ; out 

TENSES of the SUBJUNCTIVE, or CONJUNC- 
j TIVE MOOD.K -&> 

The fubjun&ive or conjunctive, has no future dif- 
tinguifhed from the prefent , becaufe the prefent of the 
fubjunftive likewife exprefles a future tenfe : ex. 

jfene crois pas qiiil vienne, I do not think he will come. 

Add the following obfervations to the latter. 

"i°. When the verb which precedes the conjun&ion /U t 
is in the prefent or future of the indicative, and when 
we do not mean to exprefs an adtion paft in the fecond 
verb, we muft put this laft verb in the prefent of the 
fubjunftive mood : ex. 

Je fouhaite que vous reuffif- I wifh you may fucceed in 

fiez dans votre entreprife^ your undertaking. 

jf attendrai qu'il vienne, I will wait till he come. 

2°. When the verb, which is before the conjun&ion, jM!\ 
is in fome of the paft tenfes, or conditional, and we 3 
wifh not to defign, by the fecond verb, a paft time more / 
diftant than the flrft verb's, we muft put this fecond/ 
verb in the preterite of the fubjunctive : ex. 

Alexandre 




1 



( »I ) 



Alexandre ordonna que tons 
fes Jujets V adoraffent 
comme un dieu, 

ye voulois que vous ecrivif- 
fiez a voire four, 

II fouhaiteroit que vous prif- 
fiez des mefures plus con- 
vertibles, 



Alexander ordered that all 

his fubje£ts JJjould wor- 
Jhlp him like a god. 
I wiihed you to write tO\ 

your filler. 
He would wifli you to take 

more becoming mea-* 

lures. _ 



3". The compound of the prefent of the fubjun&ive 
mood is ufed when we fpeak of an action paft and ac- 
complished, with regard to the tenfe of the verb which 
f precedes the conjunction ; and this tenfe is generally the 
prefent, compound of the prefent, or future, of the in- 



dicative : ex. 

Je doute qu y aucun philofophe 
ait jamais bien connu 
Punion de Fame avec le 
corps ; 

II afallu quej'zie confulte 
to us les medecins ; 

c Je n'aurai garde d 9 y aller 
que je n'aie recju quelque 
affurance d'etre bien ac- 
cueilli ; 



I doubt whether any philo.- 
fopher have ever well 
known the union of the 
foul with the body. 

I was obliged to confult all 
the phyiicians. 

I fhall by no means go 
there till I have received 
fome aflurances of being 
welcome. 



4°. After the imperfect, preterite, compound of the 
. Jmperfe£t,of the indicative, or one of the two conditionals, 
r !we ufe the^compound of the preterite of the fubjunc- 
/tive moodV likewife after the conjunction if, when pre- 
ceding a compound tenfe : ex. 

y'ignorois que vous euffiez I did not know you had 



embraffe cette profejfton- 

la ; 
Vous n'avez pas cru que je 

fufle arrivee avant vous. 
Nous aurions ete f aches one 

vous vous fufliez adreffe 

a d'autres qu? a nous ; 
I 



embraced that profeflion. 

You did not believe \Jhould 
have arrived before you. 

We fhould have been forry 
if you had applied to any 
other but us, 

A s NUMBERS 



j 



* 



( 112 ) 

NUMBERS and PERSONS. 

A tenfe is compofed of numbers : that is, the Angu- 
lar and the plural. 

That there are three perfons, has already been obfenr- 
ed under the perfonal pronouns \ we have only to re- 
mark, that lome of thefe three perfons are always joined 
to the verb as its nominative cafe, therefore the verb muft 
agree with that nominative in number and perfon : ex. 



Jefaisy I do. 
Tufaisy Thou doefb 
11 fait \ He does. 



Nous faifonSy We do. 
Vous faitesy You or ye do. 
lis font y They do. 



The pronoun vous y you, denotes the fecond perfon 
lingular and plural, with this difference, that, when we 
fpeak to a perfon only, the attribute, or qualifying noun^ 
muft be put in the Angular : ex. 
Vous etcs marie y and not You are married. 

marie s ; 
Vous etiez general de Var- You were general of the 

mee } and not generaux ; army. 

But we mull fay marie s and generaux y if we Ipeak 
to many. 

When the verb has two or three nouns or pronouns 
as its nominative, it mull be put in the plural, though 
all thefe nominatives be in the lingular,. becaufe two or 
more nouns in the lingular are equivalent to a plural*, 
with regard to verbs as well as to adjectives : ex. 
Monfrere et ma foeur font My brother and filler are 

partiSy gone. 

That has already been mentioned in the adjectives. 

If, among thefe nominatives, one is of the firft per- 
fon and the other of the fecond, or one is of the fecond 
and the others of the third, the verb mull agree with 
the firll in preference to the fecond, and with the fecond 
in preference to the third, obferving that, in French, 
the perfon fpoken to mull be named firft, and the per- 
fon fpeaking is to be mentioned the laft : we mull 
therefore fay, 



( «?3, ) 

Geft vous et moi qui avons It is you and I who have 

decouvert tout ce complot, difcovered all that plot. 

Ce rieft ni vous ni ma foeur It is neither you nor my 

qui avez ouvert la porte, filler who have opened 

the door, &c. 

Vous, mon pere, et moi, par- You, my father, and I, will 

tirons demain, fet out to-morrow. 

The pronoun relative qui, in thefe and the like fen- 
tences, always takes place of the firft. or feeond perfon, 
and only agrees with the others in number ; it is for 
that reafon we muft fay, 
Cejl moi qui fuis caufe de It is I who am the caufe of 

ce malheur, that misfortune. 

Oejl vous qui avez revele It is you who have revealed 

cefecrei, that fecret. 

Ce n'ejl ni lui ni moi qui It is neither he nor I who 

/'avons fait, have done it. 

There are four conjugations in the French language. 
Each is diftinguifhed by the termination of the verb in 
the infinitive mood. 

The firft makes er, as donn^r, to give. 

The feeond ir, as punzr, to punifh. 

The third evoir, as recevoir, to receive. 

The fourth re, as rend re, to render. 

N. B, It is neceiFary that the learner fhould be well 
acquainted with the manner of conjugating the two 
following verbs, becaufe of the frequency of their oc- 
currence in fentences, and in formihg the compound 
tenfes of all other verbs. 

CONJUGATION of the auxiliary VERB 

AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Compound of the prefent. 

Avoir, to have. Avoir eu, to have had. 

Participle aftiyc Compound of the paft. 

Ay ant, having. AyaM eu, having had". 

Participle paffive, 
Eu, had. 

I- % Indicative 



Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. Singular. Plural. 

jf'ai, I have. Nous avonsy we have. 

Tuas> thou haft. Vous avez> you or ye have* 

II a, he has. lis ont, they have. 

Elle a y fhe has. Elles oni. thev have. 

Imperfect. Sing. Plural. 

jpavoisy I had. Nous avions> we had. 

Tu avohy thou hadft. Vous aviezy you had. 

17 avoity he had. //> avoienty they had. 

Preterite. Sing. Plural. 

jf y eusy I had. iV^j 1 eumesy we had. 

2# *w, thou hadft. Vous eutesy you had. 

II euty he had. 7/j* eurenty they had. 

Future. Singular. 
yauraiy I fhall <?r will have. 
Tu aurasy thou wilt, &c. have. 
17 aiira y he will, Sec. have. 

Plural. 
Nous auronsy we fhall, &c. have. 
Vous aurezy you will, &c. have. 
lis auronty they will, &c. have. 

Conditional. Singular. 
J'auroisy I fhould, could, would, or might, have* 
Tu auroisy thou wouldft, &c. have. 
17 auroity he would, &c. have. 

Plural. 
Nous aurionsy we fhould, &c. have. 
Vous^aurlezy you would, &c. have. 
lis auroietity they would, &c. have, 

Compound Tenses. 

They,are formed by adding the participle paffive, em* 
had, to the preceding : ex. 

Compound of the prefent* . 

J* at eu> I have had; &c* 

Compound 



( »5 ) 

Compound of the imperfect* 
J*avois eu> I had Jiad, &c. 

Compound of the preterite* 
jfeus etjy &c. I had had, &c. 

Compound of the future. 
y<xnrai cu, &c. I will or fhali have had, &c. 

Compound of the conditional. 
jfaurois eu y &c, I would, ihould, could, or might, have 

had, &c. 

Imperative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Aie y have thou. 
Qu'il aity let him have. 
Quelle ait j let her have. 

Plural. 
Ayons y let us have. 
Ayezy have ye or you. 
Qu'ils or elks aienty let them have. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Que f aiey that I may have. 

ta aiesy thou mayeft have. ' 

il aity he may have. 

Plural. 
Que nous ayonsy that we may have. 
vous qyezj you may have. 

Us aienty they may have. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Quefeujfe, that I might have or had. 
tu eujfesy thou mighteft have. 

il euty he might have. 

Plural. 
Que nous eufftonsy that we might have. 
vous evjjuzy you might have. 

its eujfenty they might have* 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle paffive, eu 9 
tad, to the two preceding ; ex. 

Compound 



( ir<5 



Compound^ of the prefent. 
Quefaie euy &c. that I may have had. 

Compound of the preterite. 
Quefeuje eu y &c. that I might have had. 

The learner ought to conjugate the preceding verb 
with a negation : ex. 

Je rfai pas, I have not ; 

Nous riavons pas, We have not ; 
always placing ne before the verb, and pas after it. 



CONJUGATION of the auxiliary 

ETR E> to be. 

Infinitive Mood. 



VERB 



Prefent. 
Etre> to be. 

Participle adlive. 
Etant> being. 

Participle pailive. 
Ete, been. 



Compound of the prefent. 
Avoir ete> to have been. 

Compound of the paft. 
Ayant ete y having been. 



Indicative Mood. 



Prefent. Singular. 
Jefuisy I am. 
Tu esy thou art, 
II ejly he is. 

Imperfect. Sing. 
jpetoisy I was. 
Tu etoisy thou waft. 
II etoity he was. 

Preterite. Sing. 
Je fuSy I was. 
Tufusy thou waft. 
IlfuU he was. 



Plural. 
Nous fommesy we are. 
Vous etesy you are. 
lis fonty they are. 

Plural. 
Nous etionsy we were. 
Vous etiezy you were. 
lis etoienty they were. 

Plural. 
Nous fumes y we were, 
Vous fiitesy you were. 
lis furenty they were. 



Future. Singular. 
Jeferaiy I lhall or will be. 
TuferaSy thou wilt, &c. be* 
Ilfera, he will, &c. be. 



Plural. 



( "7 ) 

Plural. 
Nousferonsy we ihall, &c. be. 
Vans Jerez % you will, &c. be. 
lis feront> they will, &c. be.. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je feroisy I would, could, fhould, or might, be* 
TuferoiSy thou wouldeft, &c. be.. 
Ilferoity he would, &c. be. 

Plural. 
N&vsferionsy we fhould, &c. be. 
Vous feriezy you would, &c. be. 
Ilsferoienty they would, &c. be. 

Compound Tenses. 

They are formed by adding the participle pafllve of 
this verb, etiy been, to. the fimple tenfes of the indica- 
tive mood of the verb avoir : ex. 

Compound of the prefent. 
fai et£y &c, I have been, &c. 

Compound of the imperfect. 
jf'avois ete y &c. I had been, &c. 

Compound of the preterite. 
J'eus ete y &c. I had been, &c. 

Compound of the future. 
J'aurai <?/<?, &c, I ihall or will have been, &c. 

Compound of the conditional. 
J*auroh etc, &c. I fhould, could, would, or might, have 

been, &c. 

Imperative Mood* 

Prefent. Singular. 
Soisy be thou. 
Qtiilfoiiy let him be* 

Plural. 
Soyonsy let us be. 
Soyezy be ye. 
Qu'ifsfcient, let them be. 

Subjunctive 



( ii8 ) 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Que je fois y that I may be, or be. 
tufoisy thou may eft be. 
ilfoity he may be. 

Plural. 
Que nousfoyonS) that we may be. 
vousfoyez, you may be. 

ilsfoienty they may be. 

i Preterite. Singular. 
Que je 'JyJ/e y that I might be, or were. 
tufujfesy thou mighteft be. 
ilfuty he might be. 

Plural. 
Que nous fujjtonsy that we might be. 
vous fuffiezy you might be* 

Us fujfent) they might be. 

Compound Tenses. 
They are formed by adding the participle paft of this 
verb, he, been, to the two fimple tenfes of the fubjunc- 
tive mood of the verb avoir : ex. 

Compound of the prefent. 
Que f aie ete, &c. that I may have been, &c. 

Compound of the preterite. 
Que feujfe ete> &c. that I might have been, &c. 

This verb, as well as the preceding, is to be conju- 
gated with the negation : ex, 

Je nefuis pas, I am not* 

Nous nefommes pas, We are not. 

N. B. Here it is peculiarly neceffary to obferve, that 
the two above verbs, avoir y to have, and etre, to be, are 
only auxiliaries when they are joined with fome parti- 
ciple paffive of another verb $ otherwife, etre may pro- 
perly be called a fubjlantive-verb ; that is, a verb which 
only expreffes the affirmation, without any inherent 
quality ; and the verb avoir is an aftive one, which fig- 
ttifies to poffefs. 

EXERCISES 



( ™9- ) 
EXERCISES upon the two auxiliary VERBS. 

GENERAL OBSERVATION. 

Every verb mull agree with its nominative cafe in 
per/on and number ; but after collective nouns, fuch as 
amas, foule y i?ifinite y nombre^ la pluparty &c. followed by 
a genitive, the verb mull agree with that genitive in 
number : ex. 
La plupart de fes amis Pont Moft of his friends have 

abandonee, forfaken him. 

In order to eafe the learner, the different fimple 
tenfes are marked in the following exercifes, as far as 
the irregular verbs, when it is hoped every difficulty 
will be removed by practice and attention. The fecond 
perfon Angular, being feldom or never ufed in conver- 
fation, has been omitted throughout the exercifes on 
the verbs. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I have a book.— -I am happy. He has 

/ivre>m. heureux ,adj. 

a hat, which is too big. — — We have 

ckapeaii) ni. trcp, adv. granddad}. 

no money. We are not ambitious. You have 

argent j m. ambit ieux, adj. 

a fword. — You are very proud. Thofe girls 

epee y f. orgueilleux> adj. jilleji. 

have modefty ; they are virtuous. 

modejlie , f. vertueux> adj. 

Imp. I had a friend. — — I was grateful. — My 

ami, m. reconnotjfant^ adj. 

fifter had no work, fhe was lazy. We had 

v ouvrage,m. pareffeuxy adj. 

a holiday, we were very glad of it. We had 

<<>* conge , m. rtf/tyadj. 

company, but you were not ready. ~ Your brothers 
tompagniej;. mais,c* pret,zd). 

had 



( x 20 ) 

had learning, they were loved by every body. 
f avoir y m. #««£, p.p. de 

Pret. (As foon as) I had a fine horfe I 

Des que f c. few, adj. cheval y m. 

was merry. My coufin had a little gar- 

de bonne humeur. coufin ,m. petit ,adj. gar- 

den, he was ingenious. — As foon as we had bread 
ditty m. adroit y adj. pain y m. 

we were fatisfied. — You had fine weather, you were 
rajfafteip^. terns y m. 

pleafbd. Your friends had beautiful flowers, they 

content y^d]. beau yzd}. jleuryi. 

were very careful of them. 
foigneux ,adj. 

Fut. I lhall have difcretion ; I fhall be prudent. 

— Mifs White fhall have a bird that will be very 

oifeauytxu 

tame. ■ We fhall have no books % we fhall not 

xipprivoijey adj. 

be learned. — You fhall have pens and paper ; you 
favant yadj. plume ,f. papier , m. 

will be bufy. The Englifh will have a good 

occupeyzdj. 

admiral ; they will be victorious. 
atniraly m. viclorieux y adj . 

Oond. I could have a pretty dog. 1 

jolty adj, chien % m. 

would not be troublefome. — Mr. Thomas would have 

import uriy adj . 

good wine -y it would be a delicious thing. — We 
vin ym. ce delicieux^d}. cbcfe'yf. 



would have a dictionary ; we would not be negligent. 

diEliomiairey m. 

—You 



(121 ) 

—You would have good officers ; you would be in- 

officier^ra. in- 

vincible. — — Thefe ladies fhould have a better re- 
vincible y adj. dame } £ de- 

ception \ they would be thankful. 

curiam. reconnoifflmty^di]. 

Imperative Mood. 
Have patience, and be indulgent. — Let her have a 

gown \ let her be happy. — Let us have at leaft 

robe£, aa moins,ad\\ 

fome gratitude ; let us be diligent. — Let them have 
recbnnoiJjancejL 

partridges ; let them be merry. 
fierdrix, f. joyeux^zd). 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Pres. That I may have riches. That I may 

richeJTes^i^, 

be charitable. — That he may have fcholars. — That 

ecolierS) m. 

he may be attentive. That we may have a good 

attefitify adj. 

houfe. That we may be well lodged, — That 

maifon^i. kien&d). /tfg\? 5 p.p. 

you may have your money , that you may be paid. — - 

argent^ m. P n y e > P.* P* 

That they may have apples ; that they may be ripe. 

po?nme i i, muif&d}* 

Pret- That I might have generoiity. That I 

gcfierojite^i. 

might not be poor. «■ That he might have no plea- 

pauvre^d}. plai- 

fure. — That he might be uneafy. — That we might 
Jir.m. inquiei) adj. 

M have 



( 122 ) 

have our fhare. — That we might not be deceived 

part) f. trompe, p.p. 

That you might have a couple of fowls. — That you 

couple, £ poulety m. 

might be pleafed. That they might have no pen- 

content, adj. 

iion. — That they might not be rewarded. 

recompenfe, p. p. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES upon the 
COMPOUND TENSES. 

I have had (a great deal) of trouble ; I have not 

bien, adv. peine, f. 

been rewarded. — Your brother would have had 

frere, m. 

leave, if he had been diligent. — If you had mar- 

permiflionJL. epou- 

ried him, you would have had a tyrant inftead 

y?,p.p. tyran&\. au lieu, p. 

of a hufband ; you never could have been happy. — 
- mari, m. ne jamais 

If we had fought we could not have been con* 

combattu, p.p. vain- 

quered. — Thomas has had two holidays, becaufe he 
^#,p.p. conge, m. parceque, c. 

has been very a£Hve. — Your friend could have had a 
acjify adj. 

better watch, he would not have been cheated. — Your 
montre,L trompe, p.p. 

uncle and my brother have been wet. — — You could 
andean. mouille^jg, 

have killed a hare if you had had a gun. 

/#<?, p.p. Iievre,m. fi>z* fujil % xa. 

After 



( *23 ) 

After thefe exercifes, the learner ought to conjugate 
the two foregoing verbs, throughout the feveral tenfes 
of the indicative mood only, firft, with an interroga-' 
tion affirmative, and then with an interrogation nega- 
tive : ex. 

Singular, 

Affirmatively. 
Ai-je ? have I ? &ms-je ? am I ? 

A-t-il P has he ? Eft-il P Is he ? 

Monfrere a-t-il P has my brother ? 
Sa file ef-elle ? is her daughter ? 

Negatively. 
N 9 ai-je pas ? have I not r Ne fuis-je pas P am I not ? 
N 9 a-t-il pas P has he not ? Weft-Upas ? is he not ? 
Ma foeur n 9 a-t-elle pas P has not my lifter ? 
Voire coujm ri eft-il pas P is not your coufin ? 

Plural. 
Affirmatively. 
Avons-nous P have we ? Sommes-nous P are we ? 
Avez-vous P have you ? Etes-vous P are you ? 
Ont-ils P have they ? Sont-ils P are they ? 

Vos freres ont-ils P have your brothers ? &c. 
Ses files foni-elles ? are his daughters ? &c» 

Negatively. 
N f avons-nous pas P have we not ? 

N' avez-vous pas P have you not ? 

N' ont-ils pas P have they not ? 

Ses enfans n } ont-ils pas P have not his children ? 

Ne fimmes-nous pas P are we not ? 

N 9 etes-vous pas P are you not ? 

Ne font-ils pas P are they not ? 

Mes/oeurs ne font-elles pas P are not my fillers ? &c. 

N. B. In the interrogations, it muft be obferved* 
that, when there is a noun Handing as a nominative to 
the verb, the pronouns il y elle, nous, vous, Us, elles, though 
not expreffed in Englifh, muft be expreffed in French 
immediately after the verb, according to the perfon and 
number $ and, when the verb terminates with a vowel, 

a 



( **4 ) 

a -z- is to be added, in the third perfon lingular, be- 
tween the verb and the pronoun, the noun beginning 
the phrafe : ex. 

Voire oncle tf-t-il des enfans ? Has your uncle any chil- 
dren ? 

that is, your uncle, has he any children ? 

M.on coufin aura-t-il conge ? Will my coufin have a 

holiday ? 

that is, my coufin, will he have a holiday ? 

The fame rule muft be obferved in the conjugation 
of the other verbs : ex. 

Voire frere joue~t-\\ du vio- Does your brother play 

Ion ? on the fiddle ? 

Sa fceur dinera-t-elle ici Will her c fifter dine here 

aujourdfhui f to-day ? &c. 

But, if the fentence begin with que interrogative, or 
an adverb, the pronoun is not to be exprefled, and the 
noun is to be put after the verb : ex. 

Qwefaii voire faeur ? Whai is your fitter doing ? 

Comment fe porte voire How does your brother ? 
frere ? 

The learner will have no trouble in going through 
the other fimple tenfes cf the indicative mood ; and, as 
for the compounds, it needs only to be remarked, that. 
eu% had, or eii^ been, is to be added to the fimple tenfes 
of the verb avoir ^ to have ; ex. 

Ai-je en ? have I had ? 

N' ai-je pas eu ? have I not had ? &c- 

Ai-je ete ? have I been ? 

N'ai-je pas ete ? have I not been. ? 

m 

■Pp-omiscuous EXERCISES on the preceding 

RULES. 

Have I my books? — Am J not unhappy to 

malheureux ,adj. de- 

have 



I 



( I2 5 ) 

Have loft his friendfhip ? — Has he no money : — > 

perdu, p.p. amitie, f. 

Is my filler arrived ? Has not your father a great 

arrive, p.p. 

deal of friendship for you. — Have not your parents 
amitie, {. 

fent you all the money you wanted ? Have 

envoye, p.p. avoir, \. befoin de 

we not a garden ? — Are we not very happy ? — Have 
jardin,m. 

you a good gun ? — Are you dexterous ? — Have not 
fufil,m. adroit, adj. 

my brother and lifter a beautiful coach ? — Are not 

carojfe, m. 

Paul and Thomas two pretty children ? — Are your 

jolt) adj. 

brothers arrived ? — Are you not glad to fee them ? 

de voir, v. 

— Have they fpoken to you ? — Had you not a little 
parle, p.p. 

dog ? — Was not your paper very good ? — Are not 

the Englifh ladies generally handfomer than the 

generahment, adv. 

French ? — Shall you have occalion for your dictiona- 

btfpin^au de 

ry ? — Shall I not have the pleafure to fee you to- 

de voir, v. de~ 

morrow ? — "Were you not in the room ? — Shall we 
main, adv. chambre,L 

not have leave ? Will they not be angry ? 

permjjfwn, f . facie, adj . 

M you not have had a better watch ? -— If France 

Si^ c. 

were. 



( 126 ) 

were as rich ^ as England, would it not be the. 

riche> adj. C e> pro. 

beft country in* the world ? — Will you not be afha- 
pays,m. hon- 

med ? — Has not your friend had bad weather ? 

teux 9 adj. mauvais y 2.d]. terns ,m. 

— Had not our admiral better feamen than yours ? — 

mat elot y m. 

Has he been victorious ? — Would not your hat be too 
viEiorieuxy adj. 

big ? Is not your lifter older than mine ? 

grand) adj. dge 9 adj. 

Are you not happier than if you were married ? ... 

marie 9 p.p. 

Shall not John have a holiday if he be diligent ? 

Jean 

Has not your coufin more money than you ? Was 

not your wine very dear ? 

The learner will foon be convinced how neceffary it 
is to know thefe two verbs perfe£Hy well, becaufe the 
compound tenfes of all the others are formed with 
them. When he is well acquainted with their ulage, 
he will only have to add the participle paffive to any 
of their tenfes : ex. 
Y^i aime, I have loved, or, did love. 
Je n y ai pas chante y I have not fung, or, did not ling. 
Ai~]e-parle ? have I fpoken, or, did I fpeak ? 
N'ai-je pas etudie ? have I not ftudied ? or, did I not 

ftudy ? 
/Ivez-vous danfeP have you danced ? or, did you dance? 
N'avez-vous pas ecrit P have you not written, or, did 

you not write ? 
Jefuis pant) I am puniflied. 
% nefuis pas attendu, I am not expected. 

Suit*- 

* See the degrees of companion, 



( "7 ) 

Suis-je aim'e ? am I loved ? 

Ne fuis-je pas perdu ? am I not undone ? 

Etes-vous marie ? are you married ? 

N' etes-vous pas convaincu P are you not convinced 

REMARK on the VERB ETRE, to be. 

In Engliih, when this verb immediately precedes 
any noun, fignifying old, hungry, thirjly, cold, hot, or 
afraid, it fliould be rendered into French by avoir, to 
have, and the adje&ive muft be changed into its fub- 
ftantive : ex. 

Quel age zvez-vous ? How old are you ? 

y'ai fept ans, I am {even years old. 

Avez-vcus faim ? Are you hungry ? 

Non, mats y'ai foif, No, but I am thirjly, &c» 

EXERCISES. 

How old is your daughter ? — She is feven years 
Quel, pro. file, f. an, nu 

old. My fon will be eleven years old (in the) 

«-£>> JiIs,fol. au 

month of April. — I was very hungry when I 

mois,m. Avril,m. grand, adj. quand,c. 

arrived. Were you not very thirfty ? — He is 

fuis arrive, v. grand, adj. 

not afraid. You will foon be warm. — Are 

peur, f. bientot, adv. chaud, m. 

you not cold ? — How old are thefe two young chil- 
froid,m, en- 

dren ? — The one is three years old, and the other is 
fant, m. 

not yet four. "Was not my fifter more than 

encore,7xdv. 

ten years old when £he died ? 

quand, adv. mourut,v» 

FIRST 



( 128 ) 

FIRST CONJUGATION 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. ^ Parlor, to fpeak. 

Participle a&ive. *ant, fpeaking. 

Participle paflive. e, m. ee, f. fpokeiu 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. Avoir parte, to have fpoken. 
Paft. Ayant parte, having fpoken. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Je parW, I fpeak, or, I do fpeak, or, am fpeaking. f 
Tu es, thou fpeakeft. 

II e, he fpeaks. 

Plural. 
Nous *ons, we fpeak. 
Vous ez, you fpeak. 
Its ent, they fpeak. 

Imperfeft. Singular. 
Je-^>zv\»%isi I was fpeaking, fpoke, or, did fpeak 
Tu *ois, thou waft fpeaking, &c. 

II *oit, he was fpeaking, &c. 

Plural. 
Nous ions, we were fpeaking, &c. 
Vous iez, you were fpeaking, &c. 

Its % Gient, they were fpeaking, &c* 

Preterite. Singular. 
jfe parl-*^z, I fpoke,, or, did fpeak. 
Tu *as, thou fpokeft. 

II *a, he fpoke. 

Plural. 

f When, in Englifh ? a participle aclive is joined to any of the tenfes 
of the auxiliary: verb to be, the auxiliary muft be left out in French, 
and the participle put in the fame tenfe, &c. with the auxiliary that' 
is fupprcfled : ex. 

ye park, I am fpeaking ; ye priois, I was defiring ; 

Vous parle%, you are fpeaking; Nous chantions, we ivere fingmg ;• 

&nd notjeiuxsparfont) vous etes farlant 7 f^tois friant. &c: 






( "9 ) 

PluraL 
Nous $dx\-*dmesy we fpoke. 
Voas *dtes, you fpoke. 

lis erenty they fpoke. 

Future. Singular, 
Je parl-mz/, I fhall or will fpeak. 
Tu erasy thou lhalt or wilt fpeak. 

77 era 9 he fhall 0r will fpeak. 

Plural. 
Nous eronSy we fhall or will fpeak. 
Pottr eras, you fhall or will fpeak. 
lis erom\ thev fhall or will fpeak. 

Conditional. Singular. 
TV parWro/j, I fhculd, would, could, or might, fpeak* 
7# tmf* thou fhouldeft, &c. fpeak. 

// eroit, he fhould, &c. fpeak. 

Plural. 
Nous erionsy we fhould, occ. fpeak. 
Vous eriez, you fhould, &c. fpeak. 
/// eroienty they fhould, &c. fpeak. 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. J* at parley I have fpoken. 

Imperfect, jfavois parley I had fpoken. 
Preterite. J'eus parley I had fpoken. 
Future. J* aural parley I fhall or will have fpoken. 

Conditional. J'aurois parley I fhould, would, could, 

have fpoken. 

Imperative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Parl-f, fpeak thou. 
Qitil ey let him fpeak. 

Plural. 
*onsy let us fpeak. 
ezy fpeak ye. 
Qiiils enty let them fpeak. 

Subjunctive 



( *3° ) 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Que je pari-**, that I may fpeak, or> I fpeak. 
tu es, thou mayeft fpeak. 
il e y he may fpeak. 

Plural. 
nous ionsy that we may fpeak. 
vous iez, you may fpeak. 

Us enty they may fpeak. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je parl- # *^£, that I might fpeak, or, I fpoke. 
tu *ajfes y thou mighteft fpeak. 
il *at> he might fpeak. 

Plural. 
nous *ajffions> that we might fpeak. 
vous % a/Jiez y you might fpeak. 

Us *ajfent % they might fpeak. 

Compound Tenses. 
Prefent. Que faie parley that I may have fpoken* 
Preterite. Que feujfe parley that I might have fpoken,. 

After the fame manner are conjugated about 270a 
regular verbs. The following are excepted : viz. 

Aller y being very irregular, will be (een among the 
Irregular verbs. 

Envoyer is only irregular in the future and condi- 
tional ; as, inftead of faying, f envoyer at y I will fend, &c. 
f envoy eroisy I would fend, &c. according to the con- 
jugation, we fay, 

Future. 
Singular. Plural. 

y* enverraiy I will fend. Nous enverrons* 

Tu enverras. Vous enverrez. 

II enverra. lis enverront. 

Conditional*. 

* Verbs in this conjugation, whofe radix terminates in g or c im- 
mediately fucceeded by a or o, require, for the foftening of their 
founds, that an e be added to the g, and a cerilla to the $. Little 
ftars are placed where thefe alterations are required^ 






( n* ) 

Conditional. 

^Singular. Plural. 

J'enverrois, I would fend. Nous enverrions. 

Tu enverrois. Vous enverriez* 

II enverroiU Ms enverroient. 

Puer is only irregular In the three perfons of the pre- 
fent tenfe of the indicative mood ; zs>je pus, tu pus, il 
put> inftead of, je pue, &c. This verb is feldom ufed, 
for we fay, fentir mauvais, inftead of puer. 

Verbs ending in ayer and oyer, as effayer, to try, 
envoyer, to fend, change the y into I wherever the let- 
ter y is immediately followed by an e mute : ex.j'ffaie, 
tu effaies, il effaie, fenvoie, tu envoies, il envoie, &c. 

The learner, having conjugated a verb affirmatively 
and negatively, ought to conjugate tw r o others, with an 
interrogation affirmative and negative, in the indicative 
mood only, and fo on through the other conjugations, 
before he makes the exercifes : ex. 

Affirmatively* 

Manges-tu P doft thou eat ? 
Mange-Uil P does he eat ? 
Parlons-naus P do we fpeak ? &c. 

Negatively. 

Ne parle-je pas P do I not fpeak ? 

Mafoeur ne chant e-t-elle pas P does not my lifter fing ? 

N. B, In many Terbs, the common ufage does not 
admit an interrogation in the firft perfon lingular, pre- 
sent, of the indicative mood. — Inftead of faying, 

Mange -je P Do I eat ? Punis-je P Do I punifh ? &c. 
we fay, Eft-ce queyV mange P Eft-ce quejepunis P &c. 

Some verbs, ending in e mute, in the firft perfon 
lingular, prefent, in the indicative mood, change the e 
mute into an e with an acute accent, and je after it ; 
as it is feen by parle-je. 

It 



( *3* ) 

It has before been obferved that the compound tenfes 
are eafily formed, by adding the participle paffive of the 
verb to any of the tenfes of the auxiliaries avoir, to 
have, or etre, to be, as they have been conjugated, either 
affirmatively, negatively, or interrogatively : ex. 

Affirmatively, 
J'ai danje, I have danced^ or, I did dance. 

Negatively. 
Je ttai pas parle, I have not fpoken, or, I did not fpeak. 

Interrogatively-affirmatively. 
Avez-vous chante ? Have you fung, or, Did you finp ? 

Interrogatively-negatively. 
N'a-t-i/ pas mange ? Has he not eaten, or. Did he not 

eat ? 

Obferve that we make ufe of 

Metier, To take, to carry, 

Amener, To bring, 

Emmener, To carry or take away, 

and all the compound verbs of metier, whenever we 
fpeak of rational or irrational beings to which nature 
has given the faculty of walking, or has not deprived 
them of it through illnefs or accident : in all other 
cafes we make ufe of 

Porter, To carry, to take, 

Apporter, To bring, 

Emporter, To carry or take away* 

and all the compounds of porter. 

EXERCISES on this CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I play fometimes, but I never 

JGU-er,v. que/quejvis,zdv. mais,C. tie jamais, adv. 

win, « How much does your brother give 

gagn-er,v. Combien, adv. ^> do?m-er,v. 

for his board ? — - We do not command ; we pr?y. — 
petition, f. *<» commatid-er,y* pri-er,w 

You 



( *33 ) 

You always borrow ; you never lend. — You 

toujoursyzdv. emprunt-er y v. pret-erjt. 

are always fpeaking when I write. Why 

quat:d y adv. ecris y v. PGurguoi y adv. 

do you not grant him that favour ? — What do 

«^ accGrd-er, v. grdce y f. 

they afk you ? 

demand-er y v. 

Imp. I was defiring them to fing a fong. — 

pri-er y v. de chant-er y v. chanfonji. 

She was not fpeaking to you. — Were we not joking ?— ■ 

badin-er y v. 

Were you not fcolding them when I came ? — They 
grGnd-er y v. vins } v. 

were eating fifh. 

mang-er y w poiJ[on y m. 

Pret. I fppke to them (a long while.) — Did not 

long-tems y zdv. 

the king forgive them ? — We wept for joy 

ra,m. pardonn-erft. pleurrerfJ. de joie y £. 

when we found her. — Why did you not play qn 
trouv-er y v* & 

Friday laft ? They fattened the man to 

VendrediyVCi. dernier y zd}. li-er y v. 

tree, knocked him down, and then robbed 

arbre y m. aJJbmm-er y N. «o> enfuite y zdv. vol-er ,v. 

him of his watch, gold ring, and all the money he 
«o* mofitre y f. bague y f. 

had in his pocket. 
pGche y f. 

Fur. I will buy a watch the firft time I 

achet-er y v. fois y i. 

go to London. — Will not your father fend 

iraij Ve envGy-er y v. 

N you 



( *34 ) 

you to fchool this winter ? — What fhall we give him ? 
ecole ,f. hiver y m. 

— Will you not carry the children to the play ? — 

men-er y y. enfant y m. cotnedie y i* 

They will empty the bottle if you do not take 

vid-er y \. bouteille^f* <<* emport-er y v. 

it away. 

Cond. I would lend them money if they 

pret-er y \. 

were not fo idle. Would not your mother de- 

parejftux y zd]. me- 

fpife fuch a conduct ? — Why ihould we fend 

pr\f-er y v. tel y adj. conduit e y f. 

them there ? — I am fure you would marry her 

fur y adj. epouf-er y v. 

if fhe were rich. — Would they not pay us if they 
ricke, adj . pay-er y v. 

had money ? 

Imperative Mood. 

Bridle my horfe, and bring him to me.— 

Brid-er y v. cheval y m. amen-er y v. 

Give a chair to that lady. — Let her not (come up>) 
chaife y f. dame y f. nwnt~er y V. 

for I am engaged. — Let us carry thofe peaches to Mrs. 
engage y f .p. peche y L 

X) . — Do not neglect your affairs. — Let them 

negl. ; g-?r y 'v. affaire^. 

hunt. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may help you. — Though* he 

aid-er^* Ouoique y c* 

do 

* Conjun&ions which require the (uDjunctive mood 






( 135 ) 

do not approve of my plan. — Provided* we 

approuv-er, v. <o» p/an,m* Pourvuque, c. 

avoid their company. — That you may try 

evit-er y V. compagnie,f. eprouv-er,v. 

that gun. That they may not command. 

fufdy m. 
Pret. That I might change my opinion. — That 

chang~er, v. opinion, f. 

he might eat an apple. — That we might not fall 

pomme,L tom&-er,v. 

into their hands. — That you might encourage the 
clans, p. main, f. encourag-er, v. 

induftrious. — That they might exercife their talents. 
induJirieuX) adj. exerc~er } v. ta!ent,nu 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 

TENSES. 

I have forgotten to bring your penknife. — — He 
oubli-er,v. de canif, m. 

has not yet fpoken to us. — Has Ihe brought Ijer 

encore, adv. «o> 

work with her ? — Have we not gained our caufe ? — 

gagn-er, v. 

Why have you not yet begun your exercife ? — 

commenc-er, v. theme, £ 

You had taken the muftard away. You would 

mouiarde, f. 

have judged more favourably of him. — Stay 

jug-er,v. favor ablement, adv. Reder^ 9 

here till* we have dined. — Could we not 

id,2idv.jt/fqu 9 a ce que,c. dvi-er, v. 

have affifted that family ? — They have broken their 
aid-er>\\ familleji* caff-erjy. 

windows, 



( 136 ) 

windows, becaufe they had not illuminated as 

fenetre ? {. parceque>c. Mumin-eK?f. comme,zdv. 

it had been ordered. — I fhall have dined foon. ; 

ordonn-er 9 v. bientdt&dv. 

We would have fent them to prifon if they had 

envoy-er^ v. en prifon, f. 

refilled. That we may have denied the faft. 

rejijl-er>v. ni-er>v. fait>m. 

Had you not imitated their manners. — They had not 
imit-ery v. manierey f. 

executed his commands. Had I not lighted 

execut-er y v. commandetmni, m. allum-erfj. 

he fire. — They would have carried him to the con- 
jeuy m. 

cert if I had not hindered them (from it.) — We 

empech-er, v. 

might have accepted of his offers. 
acceptor y v. ^ offre^ f. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. PtuwV, to punifh. 

Participle aftive.- iffanty punifhing. 

Participle paiiive. i, m. ie y f. punifhed. 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. Avoir puniy to have punifhed. 
Paft, Ayant puniy having punifhed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Preterite. Singular. 

Je pun-zV, I punifh, I do punifli, or I am punifhing. 
lu is. 

11 it. 

Plural. 



( *37 ) 

Plural. 
Nous ^uri-iffbnsy we puniih, &c. 

VoUS i/fez. M 

lis ijfettf* 

Imperfeft. Singular. 
Je -pvn-ijjbisy I did puniflb, or I was punifhing. 
Tu ijfois. 
II ijfoiu 

PIuraL 
Nous ijjionsy we did punifli, &c. 
Vous ijjlez. 
lis ijjoient. 

Preterite. Singular* 
Je pun-zV, I punifhed, or I did punilh. 
Tu is. 

11 it. 

PIuraL 
Nous zmesy we punifhed, &c. 
Vous ites. 
lis irent. 

Future. Singular, 
Je purwra/, I fhall or will puniih, 
Tu iras. 

II ira. 

Plural. 
Nous irons > we fhall or will punifh. 
Vous irez. 
lis iront. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je pun-m?/V, I fhould, would, could, or might, puniih* 
Tu irois. 

II irolt. 

PIuraL 
Nous irionsy we fhould, &c. punifh. 
Vous iriez. ^ 

Us i me nt. " . 

Compound Tenses. 
Prefent. J'ai pum 3 I have punifhed/ 

N 2 Imperfect 



i^» 



i 



M 



( *3* ) 

tfliperfeft. favois puni y I had punifhed. 
Preterite. J'eus puni y I had punifhed. 
Future. J'auraipuni y I fhall, &c. have punifhed. 

Conditional. Jaurois puni y I mould, &c. have punifhed. 

Imperative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 

Pun-ir, punifh thou. 
Qu'H iffiy let him punifh. 
Plural. 
iffonsy let us punifh. 
tffez y punifh ye. 
Qitih iffenty let them punifh. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Queje pim-i/p, that I may punifh, or I punifh. 
tu i/fes. 
il iffe. 

Plural. 
nous ijfionsy that we may punifh. 
r uous jjffiez* 
Us ijfetbt* 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je pun-7^, that I might punifh, or I punifhed. 
tu ijjes. 
il it. 

Plural. 
nous iJfionS) that we might punifh. 
vous i/Jiez, 
Us iffent. 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. Que fate puni y that I may have punifhed. 
Preterite. Que J eujfe puni y that I might have punifhed. 

After the fame manner are conjugated about 200 
regular verbs y the following are excepted, as being 
irregular. 

jicquerir, 



( *39 ) 

Acquerir, to acquire. Ouvrir, to open. 

AJfailliry to aflault. Partir, to fet out. 

Bouillir, to boil. Se repentir, to repent. 

Courir> to run. Sentir> to fmell. 

Cueillir> to gather. Servir, to ferve. 

Dormir> to fleep. Sortir> to go out. 

FaillWy to fail. Souffrir y to fuffer. 

i*Wr, to fly, to avoid. 2>«ir, to hold. 

Mentir, to lie. Venir^ to come. 

Mourir y to die. /^//V, to clothe. 
Qfr/V, to offer. And their compounds. 

EXERCISES upon this CONJUGATION. 

Indicative M'ood. 

Pres. I always finifh my work before 

tci/jours>7idv. jin-ir?]. ouvrage^x. avantfg. 

the others. — Your friend does not fucceed in his 

a?ni y m. reujf-ir\. dans$>. 

undertaking — Do we not furnifh arms againft 
entreprife^. fourn-irft. artne,£. awtre>p. 

ourfelves ? — Why do you hate him ? They 

*** ha-ir y v. 

cure the difeafes of the body and not thofe of 
guer-zr>\. maladie y f. corps y m* 

the mind 

efprityVa, 

Imp. I was building my houfe when you de- 
bdt-ir y v. maifonfi. quand y zdv. de- 

molifhed yours. Was he not enjoying a good 

mol-ir>v. jou-ir de,v. 

eftate ? — We hated him, becaufe he did not aft kind- 
bien } m. parceque,c. ag-ir,v. hon- 

ly towards us. — On what were you re- 

netementflfa. enversft* Sur$. re- 

fletting ? 



f *4° ) 

fle&ing ? — The mountains were refounding with 

jlech-ir y x* mantagne y £. retent-ir, v. 

their cries. 
criy m. 

Pret. I warranted them very good. — Did your 
garant-ir % V. 

mafter accomplifh his prornife ? — We (leaped over) 
maitre y m. accompl-ir ,\ r. promeJft y f. franch-ir y v. 

the ditch, and feized the guilty. — Why did you not 
fojfe y v&. faif-irff. coupable y ^y 

applaud that pretty a&refs ? — Did not the foldiers 
applaud-ir y v, jolted), aclrice y f. fo/dat y m. 

obey the commands of their general ? 

cbe-ir y v. h commandement y vci* 

Fut. When fhall I banifh all thefe thoughts 

bamt-irff. touted], penfee y {« 

from my mind ? — This plant will foon bloffom if you- 

pi ante y f . fieur-ir y v. 

water it often. — We fhall warn your relations 

arroferff. fouvent y 2.dv. avert-ir y v* parent y m. 

of it. — Shall you not enjoy, as we do, the 

comme&dv. ^ 

pure pleafures of the country. — Her children vill 

puryxdJy 

blefs her for it. 
len-ir y v. 

Cond. I would choofe this cloth, if I were 

choif-ir y v. drap y m. 

in your place. — Would he not blufh if he acled 

roug-ir y v. 

fo ? We would not punifh them if they were 

ainji y zdv. 

diligent. — Would you not aft with lefs feve- 

aveeg. meiftsfldv* /eve- 
nt y ? 



( I4i ) 

r j t y ? — They could furnifh us with arms and troops 
ritefi ^ I troupefi 

if we wanted any. 

avoir bejiin 

Imperative Mood. 

Do not nil the glaffes. — Let him enjoy the 

remp!-ir> v. verre^ m. 

fruit of his labours. — Let us reflect on what we have 
travail^ m. 

to do. Let them define the queftion. 

afairefi. defin-irjf. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. That I may not perifh. — I wifli he 

per~if) v. fmhaiter t v. 

may fucceed. — That we may not (bear hardfhips.)— 
reujf-ir,v. pdt-ir y v. 

That you may not hate us. — Provided they do not 

(grow tall.) 
grancl-ir y v. 

Pret. That I might refrefh my memory. — » 

rafraich-ir y v. memoir e>i. 

That fhe might not roaft the meat. That we 

rot-ir^Y. 

might (become younger.) — That you might punifh 
rajeun-ir) v. 

the idle. — That they might not (grow old.) 

vieill-iry v. 

Compound Tenses. 

I have filled my cellar with good wine. — Has 

rempl-ir,v. cave,f. de 

he not leaped over the ditch ? — We had finifhed our 

work. 



( M* ) 

work. They would have feized him. We 

ouvrage y rru 

fhould have perlihed without any affiftance. — When 

fans, p. fecoursy m. 

fhall I have built my houfe ? — I have (very much) 
bdt-ir> v. beaucoup^dv. 

weakened his courage. — Though they have adorn- 
offo'ibl-ir, v.* Ouoiquey c. em- 

ed their gardens to dazzle the vulgar, they 

bell~iryV* j 'ar din ,m. pour eblou-irjt. vulgaire^m. 

have not fucceeded, becaufe they have dlfobeyed 

parceque, C. defobe-irji. h 

their father and mother. 

THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Rec^iwV, to receive. 

Part, active. evant, receiving. 

Part. paft. ***, m. ue % f. received* 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. Avoir re§t^ to have received. 
Paft. Ay ant regit, having received. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 

Je req-ois, I receive, I do receive, or I am receiving, 



Tu 


ois. 


II 


oit. 




Plural. 


Nous 


evonty we receive, &c. 


Vouz 


evez. 


Ms 


oivetih 



Imperfect 

* Verbs of this conjugation, whofe radix terminates in c, require, 
for the foftening of their found, that a cerilla be added to the (5) 
whenever it is followed by o or u. 



( H3 ) 

Imperfeft. Singular. 
Je rec-evois 9 I did receive, or I was receiving. 
Tu evois. 
II evoit. 

Plural. 

Nous evionsy we did receive, &c. 
Vous eviez. 
Us evoienU 

Preterite. Singular. 
Jei re$-us, I received, or I did receive. 
Tu us. 
11 uU 

Plural. 

Nous times, we received, &c. 
Vous iites. 
lis urent. 

Future. Singular* 
Je rec-evrai, I fhall or will receive. 
Tu evras. 
II evra. 

Plural. 

Nous evronsy we fhall or will receive. 
Vous evrez. 
lis evront. 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je rec-evroisy I fhould, would, could, or might, receive* 
Tu evrois. 
II evroit. 

Plural. 
Nous evrwttSj we fhould, &c. receive* 
Vous evriez. 
Us evroient. 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. jpai regu y I have received. 

Imperfeft. J'avois regu, I had received. 
Preterite. J'eus regu y I had received. 
Future. J'aurai regu y I fhall, &c. have received. 

Conditional. J'aurois regu y I fhould, &c. have received*" 

Imperative 



( 144 ) 

Imperative Mood, 

Prefent. Singular. 
"Req-ois, receive thou. 
Qu'il oive y let him receive. 
Plural. 
evonsy let us receive. 
evezy receive ye. 
Qu'ils oiventy let them receive. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Que je rzq-cive> that I may receive, or I receive. 

tu oives. 
il oive. 

Plural. 
nous evionsy that we may receive. 
*vous eviez. 
Us oivent. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je req-ujje, that I might receive, or I received. 
tu ujjes. 
il itt. 

Plural. 
nous tiffionsy that we might receive. 
vous tiffiez* 
Us ujfent. 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. Que fate reguy that I may have received. 

Preterite. Qtiefeujfe reguy that I might have received. 
Recevoir des nouvelles de To hear from fomebody. 
quelqu'utiy 

After the fame manner are conjugated 7 verbs only: 
the following are excepted, being irregulars : 

AJJeoWy to fit down. MouvoWy to move. 

Dechoiry to decay. Pleuvoivy (v. imp.) to rain. 

Fallow y (verb imperfonal,) Pouvoiry to be able, 
to be needful. Savoir, to know. 

Vahivy 



( M5 ) 

V<i.loW, to be worth. Vouloir y to be willing, 

Voir to fee. And their compounds. 

EXERCISES on this CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I entertain great hopes from his con- 
conc-evoir>v. efperance y f. con- 

d u &. I am to write to your brother to-morrow 

duitej. * eerire>s. 

to let him know that your father is arrived. — 
fourfaire y v. favoir,v. 

A commander ought to be intrepid in the midfl 
commandant ,m. devoir yv. au milieu,m. 

of dangers. — He is to go and breakfaft at my 

aller>v. ^ dejeuner yv. chezjg. 

uncle's next Sunday, and he is to come and fup 

venir 9 V* & fouper y v. 

with us. — We fometimes entertain a hatred for per- 

quelquef9!S,adv. haine y f. 

fons who deferve our friendship. — Do you not 

me riter, v. a mitie 4 f . 

perceive a mountain beyond that tree ? — We are 
aj>perc-evoir 9 v. derriere^p. 

to remit him the value in goods- or in 

remettrejj. valcurS. f«,p. marchandife^i. 

money. — Are you not to dine with my father and mo- 
ther to-morrow ? — Men commonly owe their vir- 
demaitty adv. d-evoir^v. 

tues 

* When the verb to he is ufed in the prefent or imperfect teixfes of 
the indicative mocd, and precedes another verb in the infinitive mood, 
denoting a futurity in the action, it is to be rendered in French by the 
fame teiifes of the verb devoir , and not by qtre : ex. 

jfe dois alter au pare, I am to go to the park. 

JVgw devions hi ecrire^ We were to write to him. 

o 



( *46 ) 

tues or their vices to education (as much as) to 

aidant que y c. 

nature. ■ Are thefe young ladies to go to the 

al/er } v. 

ball ? 
bal y m. 

Imp. I owed four guineas to your aunt when fhe 

guinqeyi. 

died. Was not your brother to receive that money 

mourutjV. 

laft Thurfday ? We received his tirefome vifits 

Jeudiy m. annuyanty adj . 

becaufe we were obliged to it. — Were you not to let 

obligeryV* jaire>v. 

them know it fooner ? — — They were not to flay 
favoir y v. re/}er>v, 

above fix weeks. 
plus , adv. 

Pret. I received yefterday, with (a great deal) of 

bietiy adv. 

Dleafure, the books you lent me. — As foon as we 

envoyefyV. 

perceived the danger, we warned him of it. — They 

avertir y v. 

heard yefterday from your brother. 

Fur. I fhall entertain a bad opinion of you 

mauvais yZd], 

if you do not avoid Mr. R 's company. — We 

evtter y v. 

fhall owe him nothing more after this month. — I hope 

apresyip. * * 

you will receive all my letters during my abfence. 

pendanifg* 

Cond* 




( M7 ) 

Cond. I fhould anftver your brother's let- 

* repo?idre>v. a 

ter, but I have not time. — Ought not your fifter to 

tems^rn, 

give your mother an account of all her actions ? — 
rendre,v. «<?-> compte y m* 

She would foon perceive the danger, if fhe knew 
bientot)Z&v. favoit,v. 

the confequences of it. Children fhould every day 

learn fomething by heart. You fhould not 

apprendrCy v . c$eur, m , 

defpife the advice that he gives you. — Should they, 
meprifer,v. avis,m. 

after what they have done, expect: to receive 

nprefyip. fait, p. p. s'atte/idre } v. a 

favours ? 

Imperative Mood. 
Receive this fmall prefent as a token of my 

marque, £. 

friendship. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Pres. and Pret. Though I perceive fhips 

Quoique, C. vaijjeau y m . 

(afar 

* When the word Jhould exprefTes a duty or neceffity, or can with 
propriety be turned by ought, it is rendered in French by the condi- 
tional of the verb devoir : ex. 

Je devrois alter le voir, I Jhould, or ought to, go and fee him. 

Vous^ devriez le fecourir dans fa You Jhould help him in his mifery, 
misere, &c. & c . 

The words Jhould or ought, when joined to the verb to have, imme- 
diately followed by a participle paffive, muft be rendered by the com- 
t / pound of the conditional of the above verb, with the participle paflive 
>j'jf turned into the prefent of the infinitive mood ; ex. 

^'aurois du Vohliger a refer ici, I Jhould, or ought to, have obliged 

him to flay here. 
Nous aurions du revenir tfutot, We Jhould have come back fooner. 






( i4« ) 

(afar off,) t cannot diftinguifh them. ■ He 

de loin yadv. ne fauroisyV. 

wrote to us by the firft poft, that we might 

ecrivity v. ordinaire^ m. 

receive his orders (in proper time.) 

a terns 3 zd\\ 

Compound Tenses. 

I have not yet received his anfwer. — You 

encore y adv. reponfe y f. 

fhould have (been making) your theme this morning 
* faire y v. mati?i> m . 

inftead of playing. He has entertained the hope 

au Iieu y p. 

of living here all his life. She ought to have 

vivre> v. ici y adv. vie, f . 

thanked him for the good advice he gave her. — 
remercier y v. de,p. 

When did you hear from your fitter ? ■ We have 

not heard from her fince her departure. — — Your 

depuiSy p. depart^ m. 

uncle fhould not have obliged him to pay half the 
oncle y m. a moiti'e£* 

expenfes. We fhould have owed him a hundred 

yhz/V,m.pl. 

livres I beg your pardon, I ought not to have 

iivre x f. demanderft. 

~made you wait fo long. — ■ — Ought not we to 

faireyV. attendre y v. long-temsyzdv. 

have employed our time better than (we did) the 
employer y-v. nous riavonsfait 

laft three months we were in France ? 

FOURTH 



( 149 ) 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Vend-re y to fell. 

Parf. adtive. ant, felling. 

Part, paffive. #,m. ue y f. fold. 

Compound Tenses. 
Prefent. avoir vendu, to have fold. 

Paft. ayant vendu, having fold. 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. Singular. 
Je vend-/, I fell, I do fell, or I am felling, 
Tu vend-/. 

11 vend - Plural. 

Nous vend-0/zj-j we fell, &c. 
Vous ez. 

lis ent. 

Imperfe£t. Singular. 
Je vend-0/>, I did fell, or was felling. 
Tu ois. 

11 f • Plural. 

Nous ions^ we did fell, &c. 
Vous iezm 
lis omit. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je vend-//, I fold, or did fell. 
Tu is. 

II it. 

Plural. 
Nous imeS) we fold, &c. 
Vous ties. 
lis irent. 

Future. Singular. 
Je vend-ra/, I fhall or will fell. 
Tu ras. 

II ra> 

Plural. 
Nous ronsy we fhall or will fell. 
Vous rez. 
lis ront. 

O 2 • Conditional, 



( *5<> ) 

Conditional. Singular. 

Je vend-ra>, I fbould, could, would, or might, fell. 

Tu rots. 

II roit. y 

Plural. 
Nous riotis, we fhould, &c. fell. 
Vous riez. 
lis roient. 



Prefent. 

Imperfe£l. 

Preterite. 

Future. 

Conditional 



Compound Tenses. 

J'ai vendue I have fold. 

J'avois venduy I had fold. 

J 'eus venduy I had fold. 

J'aurai vendu, I {hall, &c. have fold. 

J'aurois vendu> I (hould, &c. have fold. 

Imperative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Vend-/, fell thou. 
Qu'il e y let him fell. 

PluraL 
onsy let us fell. 
ez> fell ye. 
Qu'ils enty let them fell. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Queje vend-^, that I may fell, or I felL 



tu 


es. 


il 


e. 




Plural. 


nous 


ions. 


vous 


iez. 


Us 


ent* 


Preterite. Singular. 


Queje veiid-j^, that I might fell, or I fold. 


tu 


\ffes~* 


il 


it. 




Plural. 



( *5* ) 

Plural. 

Que nous vend-?ffions> 
vgus tjfiez. 

i/s ijjent. 



Prefent. 
Preterite. 



Compound Tenses. 

One fate vetidu, that I may have fold. 
Que feujje vendu, that I might have fold. 



After the fame manner are conjugated about 40 verbs, 
The following are excepted as being irregular. 



Ahfoudrey to abfolve. 

Battre y to beat. 

Boire> to drink. 

Circoncire> to circumcife. 

Conclure> to conclude. 

Conduirey to conduct. 
And all the verbs end- 
ing in uire. 

Gonfire, to preferve. 

Conno'hre, to know. 

And all thofe ending 
in oitre. 

Coudre, to fow. 

Craindre, to fear. 

And all thofe ending 
in indre. 

Croire, to believe. 

Dire, to tell. 

Fcrirey to write. 



Faire y to make, to do. 

Frire, to fry. 

Lire, to read. 

Meitrey to put. 

Moudrey to grind. 

Naitrey to be born. 

Faitrey to graze, to feed. 

Plairey to pleafe. 

Prendrey to take. 

Rirey to laugh. 

Suffirey to fufEce, to be 

fufficient. 
Suivrey to follow. 
Se tairey to hold one's 

tongue. 
Trairey to milk. 
Vaincrey to conquer. 
Vivrey to live. 

And their compounds. 



N. B. Verbs of this conjugation, whofe radix ter- 
minates in py as romp-re 9 corromp-rey &c. take a / in 
the third perfon lingular of the prefent tenfe indicative 
mood : ex. je romps, tu romps , il rornpt ; the reft are 
conjugated as vendre. 



EXERCISES 



( »# ) 

EXERCISES on this CONJUGATION. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I do not mean to wrong him. 

pretend-re, v. <& faire tort, v. lui, pro. 

Is your mother coming down ? We expett our 

defcend-re, v. attend-re,v. 

friend Mr. A . — — Do not you forbid her to 

def end-re, v. de 

go there ? They fell bad fruit. 

alter, v. mauvais, adj. 

Imp. Did I not interrupt him whilft he 

interromp-re, v. pendant que, c. 

was anfwering them ? — She was melting into tears 
re pond-re, v. fond-re, v. en, -p. larnte,{, 

when you arrived. — Were we not lofing our time ? 
arriver, v. perdre, v. terns, m. 

> : You were not fpreading your nets. ■ Did they 

etend-re, v. filet, m. 

corrupt our jmanners ? 
corromp-re, v. moeurs, f. pi. 

Pret. (As foon as) I had received my money, I 
Des que, c. 

returned them what they had lent me. — Did he not 
rend-re, v. preter, v. 

hear * you ? We (waited for) them a month. 

entend-re, v. attend-re, v. mots, m. 

— (For how much) did you fell it them ? — They 
Combien, adv. 

<Hd fpill all the wine. 

repand-re, v. 

Fut. I Ihall fhear my flock (in the) month 

tond-re } v. troupeaii) xa% au 

of 






( i*3 ) 

of May, — If you do not take care, the dog will 
Maty m. preneZy v. gardey f. 

bite you. — Shall we not lofe if we play ? — You 

rnord-re> v. 

will melt it, if you put it into the fire. — 

fond-re y V. metieZy v. dans y p. 

They 1 fhall 3 not 2 hear 3 s of 6 me 7 (any 4 more.) 

ent end-re par/er 5 v. plusy adv. 

Cond. Should I not do him the juftice 

rend-rey v. 

he deferves ? — Would he not interrupt you ? — 
meritery v. 

We would defend them if we could. . Why 

defend-rey v. pouvions % v. 

would you not anfwer if I were ipeaking to you ? 

repond-rey v. 

— Your hens would (lay eggs) ey^ry day if they 
pouky f. pond-re y v. 

were not fo fat. 

grasy adj. 

Imperative Mood. 

Give 1 God 3 thanks. 2 Let her not come 

Rend-reyV. Dieuy m. grace y f. 

down. — Let us (give up) our accounts faithfully. — - 

rend-rey v. compte^m.fdelementy^dv, 

Do not lofe my book. Let them hear the voice of 

VQlXy fo 

the Lord. 

Seigneur y m. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. and Pret. Speak loud that I may hear 

hauty adv. 

what you fay. She plays upon the harpfichord 

diteSy v, claveffitiy m. 

though 



( *54 ) 

though you forbid her to do it. — He wrote 
quoique,c. defend-re,v. defaire,v % ecrivit,\. 

to us that we might not expeft him. 

att end-re, v. 

Compound Tenses. 

I have loft my book ; have you found it ? -— 

perd-re, v. trouver, v. 

She has broken her fan. » Have you not inter- 

romp-re, v. event ail, m. 

rupted me feveral times ? — I had not then an- 

alor s, adv. re- 
fwered his letter. — If they (had gone) therfc 

pond-re, v. h etoient alies, v. 

would they not have loft their time ? — He fays he 

dit, v. 

would have folcj* us very good wine. — Had you 

vend-re, v. 

not forbidden her to fpeak ? — That they might have 

de 

waited for us. 

Recapitulatory EXERCISES on the regular 
Verbs of the four Conjugations. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I love attentive fcholars, but I punifh 

attentif,2.d]> eco/ier,m. mais,c. 

feverely lazinefs and inattention. — Your bro- 

feverement, adv. parejfe, f. 

ther does not receive this news with pleafure. — ~ 

nouvelle, f. 

Do we not expeft your mother to-day ? ■ "We 

attendre, v. 
hope (that) you will fucceed in your undertaking.— 
efperer,v* reufiir, v. 

Why 



( *SS ) 

Why do you not fulfil your promife ? 

Pourquoi, acfv. accofuplir, v. promeffe, £ 

They perceive the danger* and they do not en- 

appercevolr y Y. td- 

deavour to fliun it. 
cher, v. de eviter, v. 

Imp. I was fpeaking of your aunt when you 

tante y f. 

(came in,) and was doing her the juftice fhe deferves. 
entrer, v. rendre, v. meriter, v. 

— - Mr. N. did not a£t towards your foil with much 

agir y v. Jilsj m. 

tendernefs. Mr. P. and I were anfwering your 

tendrejje y f. 

letters when you arrived. — You undoubtedly en- 

arriver y v. fans doute y adv. con- 

tertained great hopes from his laft voyage. — 

cevoir, v. dernier y adj. 

They were fpending their money in trifles, in- 
depenfer> v. en,-p. bagatelle y f. au 

Head of buying books. 
lieu de, adv. acketer y v. 

Pret. I built this houfe in one thoufand feven 

hundred and feventy-nine. — Your father yefterday 

hier> adv. 

received agreeable news. She burft into tears 

fondre y v. 

after your coufin was gone. We fent him a 

apres que y c. partly p.p. 

great $leal of money unknown to your mother. — — - 

a Vlnfguy^* de 

Why did you not finifli your work fooner ? 

finiry v. 

(As 



( r S 6 ) 

(As foon as) they perceived us, they (ran away.) 
Des que, c. prirent lafuite. 

Fut. I will (give up) my accompts (at the) be- 

rendre> v. au 

ginning of next week. . My friend, Mrs. R« 

prochain y adj . Jemaine, f . 

will dine with me next "Wednefday. — We fliall feize 

Mercredi, m. f a if tr > v » 

the firft opportunity to thank him for his kind- 
occafion y f. pour remercier y v. de bon~ 

neffes. — You w T ill foon entertain a better opinion 

te y f. bientot y adv. 

of him. — Will not your lifters (come down) to-day ? 

defcendre y v. 

Cond. I would lay two guineas your uncte 

gager y v. 

is not yet arrived. — If iiiy father were rich, he 
arriver y v. 

would rebuild his count ry-houfe. — Should we not 
rebdtir y v. Devoir y v. 

exprefs our gratitude towards thofe who do us 

exprimer y v. reconuoiJfance y f. font y v. . 

good ? — If you would, you could render great fer- 
bleny m. voutiez, v. rendre y v. 

vices to your country. ■ I am certain (that) they 

paySy m. 

would reward you if you deferved it. 

reconipenferfj. merit er y v. 

Imperative Mood. 

Difcharge with equity the duties of your office. — - 
Remplir y v. e quite ,f. devoir y m* chdrge y i. 

Let him receive the punifhment due to his crime. — 

putritionj f . du y p.p. 

Let 



( m ) 

Let us give God thanks for the good news we re- 
rendre,\\ grace, f. de 

ceived yefterday. — Imitate the great a&ions of your 

hier,zdv. 

anceftors. -Let them enjoy the fruit of their 

ance 'tres,m. jouir,v, de 

labours. 
travail r ,m. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. Write to me by the firft poft, that 

Ecrivez, v. ordinaire, ro. afin que, c. 

I may receive your letter before my departure from 

avant,ip. depart, m. 

London. — Though he hear what you fay, yet 
Quoique^c. entendre, v. dites,v. 

he does not underftand you. — She is never pleafed 
comprendre,v. content, adj. 

though we obey her in (every thing.) — I will tell 

en,Tp. tout dirai,v. 

it to you, provided you do not fpeak of it to your 
pourvu que,c, 

filler. — He will pay them, provided they wait a 

attend re, v. 

little longer. 

/ong-tems,d.dv. 

Pret. I wrote to your father (fometime ago,) 
ecrivis,v, il y a que/que terns, 

that he might engage Mr. W. to come here and 

afin que % c. a «<^» 

fpend the holidays with us. — That fhe might refleft 

pajfier,^. vac ance, i. 

on her own conduct, and not on that of others. — 

propre,zd}. 

P He 



( 158 ) 

He would not come to fee us, left we fhould 

voulutyV. ^ de pear que ^z. 

perceive his bad defigns. — Your uncle deiired that 

ordonneryV. 
you might fell his two horfes to Mr. B. — I fhould be 

very forry if they fell into bad hands, 
que>c. tomber y v* 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the COMPOUND 

TENSES. 

I have fpoken to my father of it, but he has not 

yet given me any anfwer. — Have I not faith- 

encore ,zdv. 

fully executed your orders ? — Has your fifter fucceeded 

in her undertaking ? — We have not yet received any 

remittance from America. — Mrs. N. told me you had 
remife r £. 

already fold the half of your goods. Why 

deja , adv. moitie> f . marchandife^ f . 

did you not pay thofe poor people ? He would 

gens 9 m. flff.pl. 

have been punifhed if I had not defended his right. — 

droit ,m. 

They have fold him four dozen of handkerchiefs at an 

mouchoir>m. a 

exorbitant price, but they have warranted them fine 
prixy m . garaniir>"v, 

and well worked. We thought you would have 

tra vailler, v. croyions> v. 

brought your brother with you. Have we not been 

mmener^v* 

obliged 



( *S9 ) 

obliged to (wait for) Mils A. ? — If you had trufted 
de attendre,v. cofifier^. 

them with your goods, they would have ftolen the 



V£>> 



greateft part of them. — It is for that reafon my 
partieyL O,pro. 

father has not (thought fit) to fend them to you. — 

juger^ v . a -p ropes 

Mr. D. had reprefented to him all the danger of it. — 

Mrs. F. has gained her caufe, but fhe has loft all 
gagner,v. . perdre y v* 

her wealth. — Had I not finifhed my work when 

bletiy m. ouvrage, m. 

fhe came in ? — You would have received your money 
e#trer $ v. 

(a month ago) if the mail had not been robbed 

il y a un mois mailed vo/er,v. 

Mrs. P. told me fhe would have paid you fome time 
ago, if {he had fold her goods, 

CONJUGATION of PASSIVE VERBS. 

Verbs paffive are very eafily conjugated ; it requires 
only that the participle paffive of the verb, which is to 
be conjugated, be joined to the auxiliary verb etre, to 
be, through all its moods, tenfes, numbers, and per- 
forms. It is to be obferved, that (in French) the parti- 
ciple paffive varies according to the gender and number 
of the noun or pronoun, which ftands as the nomina- 
tive to the verb : ex. 

Infinitive Mood. 

etre aim-<?, ee 9 to be loved. 
etre pun-/, ie y to be puniihecL 

etant 



etant 
etant 

avoir ete 
avoir ete 
ayant ete 
ayant ete 



( *6o ) 

aim-,?, ee y being loved, 

pun-/, ie 9 being punifhed. 

aim-<?, ee y to have been loved, 

pun-/, ie 9 to have been punifhed. 

aim-,?, £*>, having been loved, 

pun-/, zV, having been punifhed. 



Singular. 
Jefuis 
Jefuis 

Plural. 
Nous fomrnes 
Nous famines 



Indicative Mood. 

M. F. 

aim-<?, ee 9 &c. I am loved, 
pun-/, ie y &c. I am punifhed. 

aim-*?/, w, &c. we are loved, 
pun-//, /Vj, &c. we are punifhed. 



Compound Tenses. 

M. F. 

"j'ai ete pardonn-*?, ee 9 I have been forgiven. 

J'ai ete pun-/, zV, I have been punifhed. 

Nous avons ete zdm-es, ees y we have been loved, Sec. 

Of NEUTER VERBS. 

The conjugations of the above verbs are, like all 
others, diftinguifhed by their terminations, and conju- 
gated in the fame manner. 

Learners may eafily know a neuter verb from an ac- 
tive one, becaufe the latter generally has, or can always 
have, a direct cafe after it ; whereas the neuter verb nev- 
er has, or can have, but an indirect cafe \ for inftance, 

Dormir y to fleep, 
Ve'nir y to come, 
Voyager , to travel. 

are neuter verbs, becaufe we cannnot fay, 

Dormir une mafon y to fleep a houfe. 
Venir un livre y to come a book. 

Voyager la chamhre y to travel the room, &c. 

In the fame manner, 

Jouir y to enjoy, 
\ Profiler 9 



( ■ i6i ) 

Profter y to profit by, to take v advantage of, 
Parvenir y to attain, to reach, 

are neuter verbs, becaufe they can only govern an in- 
direct cafe : ex. 

i 

Jouir d?une grande re put a- To enjoy a great reputa-< 

tiotiy tion. 

Profiter du terns y To take advantage of the 

weather. 
Parvenir a. fan but y To attain one's end. 

As it is impoflible for the neuter verbs to govern an 
abfolute cafe, it follows that every verb of this kind, 
which governs an abfolute cafe, can no longer be looked 
upon as a neuter : ex. 

Pleurer y to weep, to bewail, 

Sortir y to go out, 

Monter y to go up, to come up, 

Plaider^ &c. to plead, 

are neuter verbs, but become active when they govern 
any object in the abfolute cafe or accufative : ex. 

Elle pleure fes peches y She bewails her fins. 

Sortez ce cheval y Bring out that horfe. 

II plaidafa caufe lui~meme y He himfelf pleaded his 

caufe. 

Bat there are fome neuter verbs which can never 

have an active fignification, and which we are obliged 

to conjugate with the verb faire y when we wifh to ex- 

prefs an action paffing from the fubject who acts : ex» 

Ferai-je y bouillir ou rotir Shall I boil or roafl that 

cette viande ? meat ? 

Faites-la bouillir, Boil it. 

Some of the neuter verbs conjugate their compound 
tenfes by the auxiliary verb avoir y to have, others by 
the verb eti ~e y to be. 

The general rule to know what neuter verbs con- 
jugate their compound tenfes with the auxiliary avoir, 
and which are the others that are conjugated with the 
verb etre y is to pay attention to the participle paffive cf 
the neuter verb which is conjugated. 

P 2 If 



( 162 ) 

If that participle be declinable, that is, if it can be 
applied to a man or a woman, or any other animate ob- 
ject, the compounds of its verbs are conjugated with 
the verb etre : ex. 



Tomber, to fall, 
Venir, Sec. to come, 



Arriver, to arrive, 

Ivlourir, to die, 

Native, to be born, 

take the auxiliary verb fore, becaufe we can fay, 

Un homme arrive, a man arrived. 

Unefemme morte, a woman dead. 

Un enfant ne, a child born. 

Un cheval tombt, Sic. a horfe fallen. 

If, on the contrary, the participle be indeclinable, 
that is, if it cannot be faid of any animate object, the 
compound tenfes of that verb muft be conjugated with 
the verb avoir : ex. 



Regnev, to reign, 
Vivre, &c. to live, 



Dovmiv, to fleep, 

Languir, to languifh, to linger, 

take the auxiliary verb avoir, becaufe we cannot fay, 

Un homme dovmi, a man flept. 

Unefemme languie, a woman languifhed, or lingered. 

Un enfant vegne, a child reigned. 

Un cheval vecu, Sec, a .Jiorfe lived. 

The verb courir, is in this laft clafs, when it fignifies 
the rapid motion of the body, moving in a certain di- 
rection with all the fwiftnefs of its legs ; as we cannot, 
in this fenfe, fay, 

Un homme count, a man run. 

Unefemme courue, a woman run. 

nor -yjefuis count, fetois couru, Sec. but fai couru y favois 
couru > Sec. 

When we fay in French un homme couru, une femme 
courue, we mean a man or woman much fought after ; 
z perfon or thing we are very eager to fee : ex. 

Ce predicateuv effort couru ; 

Cette danfeufe effort courue ; 
that is, people are very eager to hear that preacher, to 
fee that dancer. 

In 



£ *03 I 

In the above general rule are not included fome neu- 
ter verbs, which fometimes take the auxiliary avoir, 
and fometimes the auxiliary etre ; thefe are, 



Monter, to go or come up. 
Defcendre, to go or come 

down. 
Sortir, to go out. 
Refer, to ftay, to remain. 



Demeurer, to live, to re- 
main. 
Perir, to perifh. 
Paffer, to pafs, to go by. 
Echapper, to efcape. 



Monter and defcendre often govern an abfolute regi- 
men ; in which cafe they are coniidered as active verbs, 
and conjugated with the auxiliary avoir : ex. 

^'ai monte les degres, I have afcended the ftairs, 

or gone up the flairs. 
Nous avons dsfcendu la mon- "We have r f ome down the 
tagne, hill. 

When the above verbs are employed without regi- 
men, their compounds are conjugated with etre : ex. 

jfe fuis monte, I a??i up. 

Elle eft deja defcendue, She is down already. 

Sortir is conjugated with the verb etre, when it fig- 
nifles to quit, to leave the place wherein one was dwell- 
ing, or living ; but it is conjugated with the verb avoir, 
when we wifh to convey that we have been from home, 
and that we are come back a^ain : ex. 

77 eft forti de prifcn, He is out of prifon. 

yai forti ce matin a dix I went out this morning at 

heures, ten o'clock. 

Avqz-vous forti ce matin ? Did you go out this morn- 
ing ? 

Nous #'avons pas forti de We have not been out all 

tout le jour, day. 

Le roi « ? a pas forti de fa The king has not been out 

chambre, of his room. 

Demeurer and rejler take the auxiliary avoir, when 
we mean that we were, but are no longer, in a place : ex. 

j^ai demenre deux ans a la I lived two years in the 
campagne, country. 

// 



( i*4 ) 

11 a rejle vingt ans a Rome, He refided twenty years at 

Rome. 

On the contrary, they take the auxiliary etre, while 
the perfon or perfons are ftill in a place : ex. 

11 eft demeure a Londres He ^/remained in London 

pour y folliciter un eveche, to folicit a bifhopric. 

Nous fommes rejles a York We have tarried at York 

pour y Jinir nos affaires} to conclude our affairs. 

Perir indifferently takes either the auxiliary avoir 
or etre : ex. 

II eft peri deux vaiffeaux Two fhips have perifhed 

fur mer, Tit fea. 

Trots hommes ont peri par Three men have perifhed 

cette tempete, by that ftorm. 

La plupari des equipages Moft of the crews perifhed 

font peris dans les Glides, in the waves, the reft 

le rejie eji peri de miser e, perifhed with mifery. 

It feems however that the auxiliary avoir is more 
generally ufed. 

Pajfer fometimes governs an indirect cafe, or is im- 
mediately followed by the prepofition jtar, or fome other, 
attended by a noun or pronoun -, in which cafe its com- 
pounds are conjugated with the auxiliary verb avoir, 
whether it be ufed in its proper fignification or in a 
figurative fenfe : ex. 

Le roi a paffe par Kenfing- The king went through 

ton pour aller a Windfor, Kenfington to go to 

Windfor. 

Nous avons paffe devant "We went by the church. 

Veglife, 

Elle a paffe pres du pare de She went by St. James's 

St. Jacques, park. 

La couronnede Naples a paffe The crown of Naples paffed 

dans la maifon de Bourbon. in the Houfe of Bourbon. 

In all other cafes, paffer takes the auxiliary etre : ex. 

Le roi eft paffe, vous ne The king is gone by, you 

fauriez le voir, cannot fee him. 

Le 



( i6 5 ) 

Le beau terns eft paffe, The fine weather is over. 

Vos chagrins font pafes, Your forrows are over. 

We fometimes fay, ce mot eft paffe, when we mean 
that it is no longer in ufe ; but when we fay, ce mot a 
paffe, we underftand in the language, which figniiles 
that it has been received or adopted. 

P offer \s often a reflected pailive verb, when its com- 
pound tenfes follow the rule of the reflective verbs. 

Paffer, in feveral cafes, becomes an active verb, and 
governs an abfolute cafe : ex. 

Paffez cela fur le feu, Pafs thai over the fire. 

Les ennemis ont paffe la ri- The enemies have crofled 

viere, the river. 

P offer /'epee au t ravers du To run one through the 

corps, body. 

Echapper has two fignifications : fometimes it is ufed 
in the fenfe of eviier, to avoid, when it is conjugated 
with the auxiliary avoir, and governs the dative cafe ; 
fometimes it fignifies to come or go out by force or 
ftratagem from a place in which one was confined or 
fhut up : in this cafe, it takes the verb etre for auxiliary : 
ex. 

Vcus avez echappe la a un You have efcaped a great 

grand danger, danger. 

11 a echappe a la mart, He has efcaped death. 

lis font echappe s de leurpri- They have efcaped from 

fon, or, their prifon, or, made 

Us fe font echappe s de leur their efcape, 

prifon, 

On la tenoii clepuis quelques They had her for iome 

jours, mats elle eft echap- days, but fhe has efcaped, 

pee, o?, elle /eft echappe e, or, made her efcape. 

N. B. Exercifes on the neuter verbs will be found 
among the irregular whenever they occur. 

REFLECTED VERBS. 

We call refletled, or refecfive, a verb whofe fubject 
and objecl are the fame perfon or thing 5 fo that the 

fubject, 



( i66 ) 

fubject, that acts, acts upon itfelf, and is at the fame 
time the agent and the object of the action : ex. 
Je me connois, I know myfelf, 

Tu te loues, Thou praif eft thyfelf, 

II fe bleffe> He wounds himfeif, 

Nous nous chauffons, We warm ourfelves, 
are reflected verbs, becaufe it is I who know and who 
am known : thou who praifeft and who art praif ed ', he 
who wounds and who is wounded, &c. 

In order to exprefs the relation of the nominative to 
the verb with its regimen or object, we always make 
ufe of the conjunctive pronouns, me, te, fe> myfelf, thy- 
felf, himfelf, herfelf, itfelf, for the lingular \ nous, vous> 
fe, ourfelves, yourfelves, themfelves, for the plural. But 
itvfrequently happens, that, in Englifh, the fecond pro- 
noun is implied, though it muft be exprefTed in French : 
ex. 

Je mefouviens, I remember. 

Elle ne veut pas fe marier, She will not marry. 
Nous nous plaignons, &c. We complain, &c. 

The reflected verbs may be divided in the following 
manner : viz. 

Verbes reflechis par iafigni- Verbs reflective by figni- 
' flcation, fication. 

Verbes reflechis par I'expref- Verbs reflective by expref- 

flon, fion. 

Verbes reflechis diretls, Verbs reflective direct. 

Verbes reflechis indirecls, Verbs reflective indirect. 
Verbes reflechis pajfifs, Verbs reflective paflive. 

A verb reflective by fignification is properly a verb 
wherein the perfon or thing that acts is at the fame 
time the object of the action : ex. 

Je me chaujfle, I warm myfelf. 

Elle fe bleffe. She wounds herfelf ] &c. 

A verb is reflective by expreflion when we add to it 
the double pronoun without the perfon or thing that 
acts being the object of the action : fuch as, 
Je me repens, I repent ; 

11 s'en va* He is going away *, 

Elle 



( i<*7 ) 

Elle fe meuri, She is dying , 

Nous nous appercevons de We perceive our error ; 
#<///*£ erreur, 

which merely fignify je fuis repentant, il va, elle nteurt, 
nous appercevons notre erreur, 

When the conjunctive pronoun is the objective cafe 
of the verb reflective by expreflion, we fay it is a verb 
rejleclive direcl ; when the fame conjunctive pronoun 
is the indirect regimen, (that is, governed in the dative 
cafe,) we call it rejleclive in direcl : thus, 

Je mejlatte, I flatter my/elf, 

Tu te v antes, Thou boafteft, 

// fejelicite, He congratulates him/elf, &c. 

are verbs rejleclive direcl. On the contrary, 

II fe donne des louanges, He gives himfe If pratfe, 

Nous nous promettons un We promife our/elves good 

bonfucces, fuccefs, 

Vous vous arrachez une You draw one of your 

dent, &c. teeth, &c. 

are verbs rejleclive indirecf, becaufe it is as if we faid, 
il donne des louanges a Jot, nous promettons un bonfucces a 
nous, vous arrachez une dent a vous, &c. 

Verb rejleclive pafftve. This verb is fo called, be- 
caufe it not only expreffes a paffive fenfe, but that fenfe 
can only be rendered by a paflive verb : ex. 
Cela fe voit tous les jours, That is feen every day. 
Cela ne fe dit point, That is not faid. 

Ce livre fe vend bien, That book fells well. 

Ce bruit fe repand, That rumour is fpread. 

Ces fruits fe mangent en hi- Thefe fruits are eaten in 

ver, winter. 

Cet homme s 9 e/l trouve in* That man has been found 

nocetit du crime dont on innocent of the crime 

Vaccufoit, with which he was ac- 

cufed. 

It is as if they were cela ejl vu tous les jours, cela 
riejl point dit, Sec. which exactly correfpond with the 
idiom of the Englifh language. 

This 



( 168 ) 

This laft verb is of great ufe in the French language, 
becaufe as it has been obferved before, there are pro- 
perly no paffive verbs in that language, and we are often 
obliged to fupply the want of them by the above verb, 
or by the pronoun general on, to avoid ambiguity or 
falfe fenfe : if, for inftance, inftead of faying, ces fruits 
fe mangent en hiver, ou on mange ces fruits en hiver, I 
faid, ces fruits font manges en hiver, one might under- 
stand that thofe fruits are already eaten ; whereas I only 
wifh to exprefs the proper feafon for eating thofe fruits. 

Some authors call reciproque, reciprocal, all thofe 
refle&ed verbs ; but this denomination to me has ap- 
peared infufficient to well determine the nature and ufe 
of thefe verbs. Others limit the reciprocal verb to 
jfignify what two perfons or two things reciprocally do 
to each other : thus, 
Pierre et Jean fe battent, Peter and John are fighting 

or beating each other, 
Paul et Robert Raiment) Paul and Robert love each 

other, 
Lefeu et Veau fe detruiferit, Fire and water deftroy each 

other, 
are reciprocal verbs, becaufe it is as if we faid, Pierre 
et Jean fe bat tent reciproquement Pun I 9 autre, Paul et 
Robert s 9 aiment reciproquement, &c. 

This diftinction of the reciprocal verbs may be adopt- 
ed, obferving at the fame time that we often prefix the 
prepofition entre to the verb, the better to exprefs the 
reciprocity : ex, 
Pierre et Jean s'entt'ai- Peter and John love each 

ment, other. 

lis s'entrelouent, They praife one another. 

Elles s'entreha'/fent, They hate each other. 

Le^feu et Veau s'entrede- Fire and water deftroy each 

truifent, &c. other. 

f\ All the reflected and reciprocal verbs, without excep- 

p tion, are conjugated with the auxiliary verb etre ; hence 

' it may be believed how much French people are fhock> 

ed to hear any one, who has learned that language, fay, 



( i<*9 ) 

Je ;//ai ackete un cheval, I bought myfelf a horfe ; 

Je m'zvois blejfe, or I had hurt myfelf ; 

II fa fait malj He has hurt himfelf ; 

Elle j'avoit mo que de moi, &c. She had laughed at me, &c. 
too common expreffions made ufe of by many Englifh 
people who fpeak without principles \ whereas we muft 
%, 

jfe me fuis achete un chevaL 
Je 77/etois blejfe 3 or 
II s'eftjitit mal. 
Elle j-'etoit moquee de mou 

Nous nous fommes informes y We have inquired. 
lis fe font promenesy They have walked. 

// s'eitpajfe d'etranges cho- Strange things have hap- 
fes depuis voire depart, pened fince your depar- 

ture. 
// /eft pajfe bien des annees Many years have elapfed 
depuis que fai out parler fince I heard of that af- 



de cette affair e y fair. 

It muft be owned that, in the compounds of moft 
part of thefe verbs, the verb etre is but the fubftitute 
of the verb avoir ; but it is impoffible to ufe avoir as 
auxiliary to a verb which has for its objective cafe a 
conjunctive pronoun which relates to the principle of 
the action of that verb, and which precedes the auxili- 
ary \ for, though we fay, 

II a voulu fe tuer, He would kill himfelf ; 

yet, if we change the place of the pronoun, we muft 
fay, II /eft voulu tuer y which is the idiom of the lan- 
guage. 

CONJUGATION of the reflected VERBS. 

The conjugation of the following verb may ferve as 
a model for all the reflected or reciprocal verbs. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Se promener, to walk. 

Part. act. Se promenant> walking. 

M. Sing. F. 
Part. pair, promm-e^ ee> walked. 

Q Plural. 



( *79 } 

M. Plural. F. 
Part. palT. prome?i-es> ees> walked. 

Compound Tenses. 

Prefent. S'etre promene, to have walked. 
Part, paffc. Sfetant promene, having walked. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Je me promene $ I walk, or do walk, or am walking. 
Tu te proprieties. 
II fe proniene. 

Plural. 
Nous nous promenonS) we walk, &c. 
Vous vous promenez* 
Us fe promenent. 

Imperfect. Singular. 
Je me promenois y I did walk, or walked, or was walking. 
Tu te promenois. 
II fe prome?ioit. 

Plural. 
Nous nous pyomenionsy we did walk, &c. 
Vous vous promeniez. 
Us fe promenoient. 

Preterite. Singular. 
Je me promenaiy I did walk, or walked. 
Tu te prometias* 
II fe promena. 

Plural, 
IVi/Af nous promendmesj we did walk, &c 
Vous vous promenates. 
Us fe promenerent. +, 

Future. Singular. 

^ me promeneraiy I fhall or will walk. 

Tu te promeneras. 

II fe promenera. 

Plural. 

JV^i" nous promeneronsj we fhall or will walk* 

^j/j vous promenerez* 

lis fe promeneront. 

Conditional. 



L 171 ) " 

Vf." 

Conditional. Singular. 
Je me promenerois, I would, ihouldj or could walk. 
Tu te promenerois. 
II fe promensroit. 

Plural. 
iVbw.f nous promener ions , we would, &c. walk, 
^//j* vous promeneriez. 
Us fe promeneroient. 

Compound Tenses. 

M.F. 

Prefent. ^ me fuis promen-e ee? I have walked. 

Imperfect. Je m' etois promen-e ee y I had walked. 

Preterite. % me Jus pro7nen-e ee> I had walked. 

Future. Jk me ferai promen-e ee y I 111 all or will 

have walked. 
Conditional. Je me ferois promen-e ee y I fhould, &c. 

have walked. 

Imperative Mood. 
Prefent. , Singular. 
Promene-toi 9 * walk thou. 
Qiiil fe promene y let him walk. 
Plural. 
Promenons nous,* let us walk. 
Promenez vous, # walk ye. 
Qu'il fe promenentj let them walk. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. Singular. 
Que je me promhie, that I may walk. 
tu te promenes. 
il fe promene. 

Plural. 
nous nous promenions y that we may walk. 
vous vous promeniez. 
Us ie prominent. 

Preterite. 

When the verb is conjugated with a a^//V», thefe three pronouns 
are put before the verb : ex. ne vous promenez pas, do not walk ; and toi 
changed into te : ex. ne te promene pas* 



( 172 ) 

Preterite. Singular. 
Que je me promenaffc, that I might walk. 
tu te promenaffes, 
i! IQpromendt. 

Plural. 
nous nous promenajfiotis, that we might walk. 
vous vous promenajjiez. 
Us fe promenajfent* 

Compound Tenses* 

M.F. 

Prefent. Que je me yJ/V promen-e ee, that I may have 

walked. 

Preterite. Quejemefujfepromen-e ee, that I might 

have walked. 

The learner may here be again reminded, that it is 
neceffary to conjugate this verb with a negation and 

interrogation : ex. 

Je ne rne promene pas, I do not walk. * 

Vous promenez-vous P do you walk ? 

Ne fe pronibne-t-il pas ? does he^not walk ? 

Compound Tenses. 

Me fuis-je promene ? Have I walked ? or did I 

walk ? 
Ne vous etes-vous pa? chauf- Have you not warmed 
fe ? yourfelf? or did you not 

warm yourfelf ? 
Ivlon coufin shjl-il informs ? Has my coufin inquired ? 

or did my coufin inquire ? 

Voire frere ne iejl-il pas Has not your brother re- 

repenti ? pented ? or did not your 

brother repent ? 
We fay in French. 
Se promener a coeval, en To take a ride, an airing, 
caroffe, on horfeback, in a coach. 

Se promener fur Feau, fur To go upon the water, on 
la riviere, the river. 

EXERCISES 



( *73 ) 

EXERCISES upon the reflected VERBS. 

A 7 . B. Verbs marked # are irregular : fee the irregular 

verbs. 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. I rife (early) every morning. 

fe lever , v. de bonne heitre, adv. matin, m* 

- — Does not your brother remember to have 

fe reffouvenir, v. * 

feen me ? — My fifter is not well, £he applies herfelf 
tw, p.p. foeur,{. f s\ippliquer,v. 

(too much) to ftudy. — We rejoice at the good 

trap, adv. etude, f. fe rejouir, v. de 

news he has brought us. — When do you in- 
muvelle, f. apporie, p.p. fe pro- 

tend to go and fee Mrs. H. ? — Do you not 
pofer, v. de alter , v. <■& voir, v. 

repent of what you have done to her ? — I 

fe repentir y v. * de fait, p, p. 

believe your brothers are not well ; for, I have not 

croire, v, # -j- car, c. 

feen them this week. 
vu, p.p. femaine, f. 

Imp. I was riding on horfeback in the park when 

parc,m. quand,c. 

I met him. — Was he not warming himfelf 

r-e?ico?Jtrer, v. fe chauffer y v. 

when you (came in ?) — We did not imagine he 

entrer, v. s'imaginr, v. 

would fucceed fo well. — You w r ere boafling too 
reufflr, v. fe vanter,v. 

much 

t When we mean to cxprefs the ftateof a perfon's health, infhadof 
the verb etre y we mutt ufe the reflected one^ porter : 

Mafcsur ne fe porte/ax bien 7 My filter is not well. 



( *74 ) 

much of what you had done for him. — They did 

y»/V,p.p. 

not expect that they fhould meet us. 
$'&ttendre 9 v m 

Pret. I inquired after you yefterday. Did 

s" informer y v. de £/Vr,adv. 

not my fon behave well in the laft war ? — 

f/s } m.fe comporter y v. der?iier y adj . guerre , f. 

Corn was fold yefterday for a bufhel, — We 

fe vendre y v. <^> 

faw ourfelves furrounded by more than twenty 

fe voir,v»* entoure y p.p. 

perfons in an inftant. Did you net find 

en y ip. fe trouver y v % 

yourfelves obliged to go there ? — They did not 
oblige j p. p. de aller y \\ 

ftop one minute. 

iarriter y v. minute \ f. 

Fut. I will not complain of you, if you pro- 

fe plaindre y v. * pro* 

mife me to behave better. — Will your bird 

mettre y y. % de mieux y zdv* oifeau y m. 

(grow tame ?) — Shall we fiibmit ourfelves to 

s } apprivcifer y v. fe foumetire y v. * 

his judgment ? — You will ruin yourfelves if you 

Jugement y m. fe ruiner y v, 

continue (gaming.) — Will they not perceive 

continue r, v. de jouer y v. swapper cevoir y v* 

it (as foon as) they come into the room ? 
des que y c. entrer y v. chambre y £. 

Cond. If I were in your place, I would not 



a 



vex myfelf. . . Would fhe not (make her efcape?) 
fe chagrinerft* fe ' chopper y \ r . 

~~We 



( *?5 ) 

We would embark (this day) if the 

s'embarqueryV. aujourdlhui 

weather (would permit.) — Why would you expofe 
terns ,m. le permettoityV. s'expoferyV. 

yourfelves to their fury ? — They would agree 

fureur y f. s'accorderyY. 

very well if they were not fo proud. 

bierty adv. orgueilleuxy adj . 

Imperative Mood. 

I give you leave to go out, but do not 

dormer yV. permifftofiyi. de fortir^. vials , c. 

overheat yourfelf. — Let him amufe himfelf a 

s'echaujferyV. s'amuferyY. trn 

little in my garden. — Let us remember what 

peii^lw jardi/iyUi.. fe reffouvenir de>v* 

we are to do. — Endeavour to pleafe your mafter, 
f faire,v, S'efforceryV. de p/aireyV. a maitre y m. 

and do not fo often miftake in the tenfes, numbers, 

fe troniper>\. 

and perfons of the verbs. — Let them (fall afieep.) 

s'endormiryY* 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Pres. I mull apply myfelf to the French. 

llfaut que s'appliqueryV. 

language. — I will hide it, left fhe fhould 

langueyi. cacher>v. de peur que^c. 

perceive it. Provided we remember to 

swapper cevGiVyV. ^;j,pro. Pourvu quCyC, de 

alk him how his mother does. — — 

dematider y v. comment 5 adv. fe porter, v. 

(In order that) you may not boaft (fo much.) 

Afn que,c. fe vanier^. tant,adw. 

— I 

f See the reference * in the exercifes upon the third, conization,, 



{ 17* ) 

— I have told them who you are, that they may 
dity p.p. ajin que y c. 

behave better another time. 

fe comporter y v. fii^yi* 

Pret. That I might not ruin myfelf. That 

fe ruiner y v. 

he might not meddle with my affairs. -^ — That we 
fe meler y v. de 

might excufe ourfelves. — That you might not go 
s'excufer y v. s*en 

away. — That they might not repent too late. 

aller y v* fe repentir y v.* trop tard y zdv. 

Compound Tenses. 

I have inquired after you and your lifter. — He 
s' informer y \, de 

fays you have not been well while you were in 

dit y v. pendant que, c. a 

, the country. — Has not your coufin laughed at 
campagne y f. coufin y m» fe moquer y v. de 

me ? — Did we not get up at fix (o'clock ?) — They 

fe lever ,v. a heure y £. 

have perceived the trick, but it was too late. — Did 

detour ,m. 

you remember me ? — I had not applied 

fe reffouvenir y v. de s' * applique r,v. 

myfelf enough. — Had not your fifter imagined that 
affe% y adv. s > imagi?ier y v. 

they would have found themfelves obliged to go 

fe trouver y w. oblige , p.p. de 

to France ? — Many things have been faid of them 
•J- fe dire y Y. 

which 

f See the indefinite article, p. 23. 



( l ll ) 

which are not true. — We had thought curielves 

fe croiree* 
able to reilft them, but we have (been de- 

capable ,adj. de refflere* trials ^c. fe trom- 

ceived.) — Did you not hide yourfelves in order 

per^s. Je cacher % v, 

to furprife them ? — When I (fhall) have walked 

de fur prendre ^ v. Qtiandy adv. 

five or iix minutes in the garden, I will reft 

fe vepofer y v. 

myfelf. — Why did you exhauft yourfelf as you have 

S*epuifeV 9 V. 

dene ? -Our Tailors would have behaved with 

/»zV,p.p, fe comportere* 

more refoluticn* — Would you not have excufpd 

s f excufer 9 v» 

yourfelf? — When they have repented (of) their faults, 

fe repetitive. 

I will forgive them. — If I had been in your place., I 

a 

would not have meddled with their affairs. — Your 

fe met er^\* de 
friend would not have complained of you, and you 

fe plaindvee* 
never would have fallen out for fo fmall a matter, 

fe bmuilkre. chofe,£. 



CONJUGATION of the IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Thefe are called irregulars becaufe their conjugation 
deviates from the general rule, either by their termina- 
tions, or the want of fome of their moods, tenfes, per- 
fons, or numbers. 

VERB 



( 178 ) 

VERB of the FIRST CONJUGATION. 

^ ALLERy to go. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Alter, to eo. 

Part. aft. Allanty going. 

Part, pafll Alley gone. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. VaiSy vas, va ? I go, or am going. 
Plur. Alhnsy allez, vont. 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. Allots y allo'tSy alloity I did go, or was going. 
Plur. Alliens y alliezy alloient* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Allaiy alias y allay I went, or did go. 
Plur. AlldmeSy alldtesy alter ent \ or, 
Sing. Fusy fusy futy I went, or did go, 
Plur. Fumesy futesy furent. 

Future. 
Sing. Iraty irasy ira y I mall or will go, 
Plur. IrortSy irezy iront* 

Conditional. 
Sing. Iroisy trots, iroity I fhould, could, would, or 
Plur. Irionsy iriezy iroient, might, go. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vay ailky go thou. 

Plur. AllonSy allezy aillent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 
Sing. Atlley aillesy ailky that I may go. 
Plur. AllionSy alliez } aillent. 

Preterite. 



( m ) 

Preterite. 
Sing. AHaffe y allaffeS) allaty that I might go. 
Plur. AUaJfionSy allqflieZ} allaffent. 

Among the compound tenfes of this verb, it is to be 
remarked that thofe which are formed by the participle 
alle fignify that we are or were yet in the place mention- 
ed at the time w T e are or were ipeaking. Whence it 
follows that the fir ft perfon of the preterite indefinite, 

Jefuis alley I have gone, &c. 
Tu es alle y &c. 

can feldom be ufed in difcourfe ; for^ we cannot naturally 
fay that we are ftill in a place which can only be men- 
tioned in a paft time, after we have left it ; therefore 
we make ufe of the compound tenfes of the verb etre 3 
as, fai etey tu as ete y favois ite y feus ete y faurcis ete y 
&c. for when we fay, 

II ejl alle a Londres y He is gone to London, 

we give to underftand that he is ftill in London, or is 
on his way going to London : on the contrary, 

II a ete a Londresy He has been or gone to London, 
means that he has gone to London, but is returned. 

The above verb is alfo conjugated as a reflected one 
with the particle en : ex. 

S'en aller y to go away. 

Je ?nen vais, I go or am going away. 

Tu fen vasy thou goeft or art going away. 

II /en va 9 he goes or is going away. 

Nous nous en allonsy we go or are going away, 

Vous vous en allez, you go or are going away. 

lis /en vonty they go or are going away* 

Negatively. 

Je ne m'en vais pas y I am not going away. 

II ne /en va pas y he is not going away. 

Nous ne nous en allons pas y we are not going away. 

Vous tie vous en allezpas, &c. you are net going away,&c. 

Interrogatively. 



( i8 ° ) 

Interrogatively. 
S'en va-t-il P is he going away ? 
Vous en allez-vous P Z*fc. are you going away ? 8c c. 
Ne /en vcnt-ils pas P c5V. are they not going away ? &c. 

Its compound tenfes are, 

Je m ? enjuii alley I have gone away. 

Je rn'en etois alley I had gone away. 

Je nfexifus alley I had gone away. 

Je m'enferai alley I £hall have gone away, &c. 



VERBS of the SECOND CONJUGATION. 

ACQUERIR, to acquire. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Acquerir, to acquire. 

Part. act. Acqueranty acquiring. 

Part. pari*. Acquis y acquired. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. AcquierSy acquiersy acquierty I acquire, or am 
Plur. AcqueronSy acquerezy acquiereni. acquiring. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Acquero'iSy acqueroisy acqueroity I did acquire, or 

was acquiring. 
Plur. AcquerionSy acqueriezy acqueroient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquis j acquis, acquit., I acquired, or did 

Plur. AcquimeSy acquiteSy acquirent. acquire. 

Future. 
Sing. Acquerrai, acquerras y acquerra, I fhall or will 
Plur. AcquerroriSy acquerrezy acquerront. acquire, 

Conditional. 
Sing. Acquerroisy acquerroisy acquerroity I fhould, would, 

or could, acquire. 
Plur. AcquerriotiSy acquerrieZy dequerroient, 

Imperative 



Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Acquiersy acquiercy acquire thou. 

Plur. Acqueronsy acquerezy acquierent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Acquiere y acquveresj acquire, that I may acquire. 
Plur. Acquerionsy acqueriezy acquierent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Acquijpy acquijfesy acquit ', that I might acquire, 
Plur. AcquJjjJlonSy acquijjiezy acquljfent. 



QUERIR) TO FETCH. 

The primitive of the above verb is never ufed but in 
the prefent of the infinitive mood : ex. 

Envoyez-moi querir, fend for me. 



CONQUERIR, to conquer ; REQUERIR, t© 
require ; are conjugated like ACQUERIR. 



BOUILLIR, to boil. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Bouillir y to boil. 

Part* aft. Bouillant, boiling* 
Part. pail*. Bouilliy boiled. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. BouTj bousj bouty I boil, or am boiling, 

Plur. Bouillons^ bouiUeZy bcuillenU 

Imperfect 
Sing. Bouilloisy bouillois, boiulloHy I did boil, or was 
Piur; Bouillions, bouilllezy boullloient. boiling. 

R Preterite. 



( 1 82 ) 

Preterite. 
Sing. BouiHisy bouillis, bouillit } I boiled, 'or did boil. 
Plur. BonillimeSy bouillites y bouillirent. 

Future. 
"Sing. Bouillirai, boui/liras, bouillira> I fhall or will boiU 
Plur. Bmillironsy bouilHrez, bouilliront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. BouillirciSy bouiUirois, bouilliroit, I fhould, would 
iPiur. BouillirionSy bouilliriezy bouilliroient* or could, boil. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Bous, boullle> boil thou. 

Plur. Bouillons y bouillezj bouillent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. BoitiHe^ bouillesy bouille, that I may boll. 
Plur. BouillionS) bouilliez> bouilknt. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Bouilli//e, ^JmuiUijJes, bouillit, that I might boil. 
Plur. BouilliffionSy uouilliffiez^ .houilUJfenU 

This verb, as well as its compound rebouilltr y to boil 
^again, is but feldom ufed, ^except in the third perfon 
lingular or plural, and its infinitive mood, which is 
commonly joined to the verb faire : ex. 

faites bouillir cette viande, boil that meat. 



COURIR, TO RUN. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Courir> to run. 

Part. aft. Courant, running. 
Part. palT. Couru, run. 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
Sing. Coursy cours, court, I run, or am running, 
Plur. Courons.) •courezy courent* 

Imperfect 



( 1 8 3 ) 

Imperfedt. 
Sing. CouroiSj couroisy couroity I did run, or was run- 
Plur. Courionsy couruZy couroient+ ning. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Courtis, couruSy couruty I ran* or did run. 
Plur. Courumesy courutes f coururent. 

Future. 
Sing. Courraiy courras, courra, I {hall 'or will run. 
Plur. Courronsy courrezy courront*- 

Conditional. 
Sing. Court cisy courrois, courroity I ftiould, would or 
Plur. Courrionsy courriezy courroient. couldj run. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Coursy coure-y run thou. 

Phir. Couronsy courezy courent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Courey couresy coure, that I* may run. 
Plur. CouriotiSy couriezy courenU 

Preterite... 
Sing. Couruffiy courujfesy couruty that I might run. 
Plur. CouruJJionSy courufllezy courujfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

AccourWy to run to. ParcourWy to run over* 

Concourir, to concur. Recourir y to have recourse : 
Difcouriry to difcourfe*. to. 

EncourWy to incur. Secourir yto fuccour > to affift . . 



COUVRIR, to cover. 
See QUVRIR, to open, 



CUEILLIR, 



( x84 ) 

cueilliry to gather. 
Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Cueiiliry to gather. 

Part. a£t. Cueillanty gathering. 
Part, pafll Cueilii y gathered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Cueille, cue'dles, cueilky I gather, of am gather-* 
Plur. CueilloriSy cueillez, cueillent. * n g« 

Imperfect. 
Sing. CueittoiS) cuelllotSy cueilloity I did gather, or was 
Plur. CueillionS) cueilliezy cueilloimt* gathering. 

Preterite. 
Sing. CueilltSy cue'illis, cueillit, I gathered, or did 
Plur. Cveillimesy cueillitesy cueillirenU gather. 

Future. 
Sing. £ueillerai y cueilleraSy cueillercty I fhall or will gath~ 
Plur. Cueilleronsycueillerezy cueilleront. er. 

* Conditional. 

Sing. Cuei/IerpiSy cueilleroiSy cueilleroity I fliould, would 

or could, gather. 
Plur. Cuetlkrions ycueilleriezy cueilleroient* 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Cuelllesy cueilky gather thou. 

Plur. GneilktiSy €ueillez y cuvillent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Cueilfey cusillesy cuellhy that I may gather. 
Plur. CueillionSy cueillieZy cuetilmt* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Cueillijfey cueillijfesy cueillity that I might gather, 
Plur. CueilUJJionSy cueilliffiezy cueillijfent* 

The 



( «*5 ) 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Aecuelllir, to make wel- Recueillir 7 to gather to- 
come. (Very little ufed.) gether. . 



••»■■ 



DORMIRy TO SLEEP.. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Dormir, to fleep* 
Part. a£L Dormant ', fleeping. , 
Part. pafT. Dormiy flept. 

Indicative Mood^ 

Prefent. 
Sing. Dors , dors, dorty I fleep Or am fleeping. 
Plur. Dormons y dormez, dorment* 

Imperfect. 
Sing. DormotSy dormohy dormoity I did fleep, or was 
Plur. Dormknsy dormieZy dormoient. fleeping* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dor mis j dormis, dormity I flept, or did fleep. 
Plur. dormimeSy dormites, dormirenU 

Future. 
Sing. Dormiraiy dormirasy dormira r I {hall or will fleep* 
Plur. Dormironsy dormirez % dormiront* 

Conditional. 
Sing. DormirotSy dormlrotSy dormiroity I would, could 

or fhould, fleep. 
Plur. Dormirionsy d&rmiriezy dormircienty ; 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Dorsy darme y fleep thou^ 

Plur. Dormons y dor mezy dorment. 

Subjunctive Mooiv 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Dormey dormes y dorme, that I may fleep. 
Plur. Dor miens y dormieZy dorment* 

R % Preterite. 



( i86 ) 

Preterite. 
Sing. DormiJfe % dormiJfcs y dcrmity that I might fleep* 
Plur. Dormifftonsy dormiffiezy dormijfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Endormirj to make fleep. 5* rendormir y to fall afleep 
S'endormir> to fall afleep. again, 

===== * ■ 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

their COMPOUNDS. 

Where are you going ? — I am going to the 
0^,adv. 

play. 1 would go with you if I had time. — Why 

come die yi. 

are they going away fo foon ? — Will not your father 

toty adv. 

be angry if you go there without him ! — We were 

fathead]. 

going to Mifs D *s when we met you. 

cheZy'p* rencontreryV. 

-— - Thefe men went yefterday from houfe to houfe. — 

Believe me, fir, do not go to fee them. — Your fa- 
Croirey v. voir y v . 

ther told me you will go to France and Italy as foon 
direyV. 

as the war (is over.) — My fifter and I went laft 

ferajinie dernier ',adj. 

Wednefday to Ranelagh. — If you had gone (there) 

an hcur fooner, you would have heard fine mufic. 
plutot j adv. entendre yV. 

«*— Your uncle has acquired a great name in Ameri- 

ca. — 



( 137 ) 

C a. — My father went to pay him a vifit laH: week, 

rendrcyV. 

and he did not welcome him as a friend. — Go and 



«o> «<?-» 



fetch me the letter I left in my room. — Boil this 

laijfer y v* 

chicken, and roaft that goofe. — At laft we have 
poulet % m. rctir y v. oie>L Enfin^&v. 

conquered. — This water will fbon boil. — Boil 

bientotyZ&f. 

that meat again, it is not done enough. — Do not 

cuity p.p. 

run fo fail, you will be tired. They always 

vztey adv. fatigue y p.p. 

run when they go to fee their aunt. — Your brother 

taute^i. 

runs fafter than I. — When he heard that his 

vite, adv. apprendre y v. 

friend was in danger, he ran inftantly to him. — 

auffitdtyadv. 

Let us not difcourfe any more on that fubjecl. — I 

*<>> fujetyin. 

would affift him with all my heart, if I could. — This 

de pGuvoiryV. 

gentleman is a great traveller, he has run over all 

voyageur y m, 

Europe. — If you do it, you will incur your 

faire y Y. 

father's difpleafure. — That would concur to the public 
deplajfiryitkm 

good. — When children are guilty, they generally 
bieii,va. coup able y^y 

have recourfe to fome falfehood. — For wh^ 7 ^ are you 

tnenfonge ,m* 

gathering 



( 1 88 ) 

gathering thofe charming flowefs ? -~- I gather them 

jleur,f. 
for my mother. — Why do they not gather fome rofes ? 

rofe y £. 
-•—Mrs. P. would have gathered fome, but the 

gardener told her he would gather them himfelf. — 

jardinier y ra. 

Of all nations none has welcomed the poor French 

clergy better than the Englilh. — Do not make 
4:/erge,m. fair eft. 

any noife, for my fifter is afleep. — I hope fhe will 
car y c. 

fleep better to-night. — She would fleep much better 
cefoir y m. 

if fhe were in her bed. — If I do not walk a 

///, m. fe prohienery v. 

little I fhall fall afleep. — My mother, fifter, brother, 

and I, went yefterday to Croydon, to fee Mils 

£zVr,adv. Mademoifdle,f. 

H — Did you go there on foot ? No, my 



a 



mother and fifter went in a coach, and my brother 

e?/,p. «<?> 

and I on horfeback. 
a cheval % m* 



FUIRy TO RUN AWAY, TO SHUN, TO AVOID, TO FLY, 

OR FLEE. 

Infinitive Mood* 

Prefent. Fuir, to fly. 
Part. a£t. Fuyant, flying* 
Part. paflT. Fui 9 fled* 

Indicative 






( i*9 y 

Indicative Mood* 

Prefent. 
Sing. Fu'iSy fatS) fuity I fly. 

Plui;. FuyonSy fuyeZy fuient. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Fuyoity fuyoisy fuyoit, I fled, or did fly% 
Plur. FuyionSy fuyiezy fuyGient. 

Preterite. 
This tenfe is conjugated with the verb prendre and 
the fubftantivey«*Y* ; ex* 

Je pris la fuite, I j&*/ or ran away. 

Future. 
Sing. Futraiy fuirasy fair ay I {hall or will fly* 
Plur. FuiroriSy JuireZy fuiront* 

Conditional* 
Sing. FuiroiSy fuiroisy fuiroity I fhould, would or 
Plur. FuirionSy fuiriezy fuiroient* could, fly* 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Fnisy fuie> fly thou* 

Plur. FuyonSy fuyezy fuient. 

t 

Subjunctive Modd* 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Fuiey fumy faie % that I may fly*. 

Plur. FuyionSy fuyiezy fuient. 

Preterite. 
Je prifle la fuite^.&c, that I might jty* 



MENTIRy to lie. 

Infinitive Mood. 

■ 

Prefent. Mentiry to lie. 

Part. aft. Mentanty lying. 
Part* pafU Menti x \io<L 

Indicative 



( *90 ) 

Indicative Mood* 

Prefent. 

8'mg. Mens, mens, menty I lie* 
Plur. MentonSy mentez y merit ent. 

Imperfect. 

Sing. MentoiSy mentals, mentoit, I did. He, or was lying* 
Plur, Mentions y mentiez, mentoient. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Mentis, mentis, mentit,! lied, or did lie. 
Plur. Menitmes, mentiteSy mentirent. 

Future. 

Sing. Mentiraiy menilras, mentira, I fhall or will lie* 
Plur. Mentirons, mentirezy mentiront* 

Conditional. 

Sing. Mentiro'iSy. meniiroisy mentiroity I would, could 

or ihould, lie* 
Plur. Mentirionsy mentiriezy mentiroient* 

Imperative Moou. 

Sing. MenSy. mente, lie thou* 

Plur. MmtonSy mentezy mentent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Mente, mentes, mente, that I may lie.. 
Plur., Mentions , mentiezy mentent* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Mentijfey mentijfes, mentit l , that I might lie. 
Plur. Menti/JionSy mentijjiez, mentijjent. 

The compound of this verb is, 
JOhnentWy to give one the lie,, to belie, to contradift. 

MOURIR, 



( 19* ) 

MOURIRy to die. 

Infinitive Mood* 

"Prefent. Maurir, to die* 
Part. a£L Mouranty dyingo 
Part, paff, Mort, died. 

Indicative Mood. 

Preferrt. 
Sing. Meursy meursy meurty I die, or am dying, 
Phir. Mouronsy mourezy meurent* 

Imperfect. 
Sing. 'Mourchy mouroiSy mourolty I was dying* 
Plur. McurionSy mouriezy mouroient. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Mouruty fnourusy mouruty I died* 
Plur. MourumeSy mouruteSy moururent. 

Future. 
Sing. Mourmiy mourrasy monrray I fhall or will die, 
Plur. Mourro?iSy mourrezy mourront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mourroisy mcurroisy mourroity I fhould, could 

or wouldj die. 
Plur. MourrionSy ??iourrieZy mourroient. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Menrsy meurey die thou. 

Plur. Mcuronsy mourezy meurent. 

Subjunctive Mocd„ 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Meurey meureSy meurey that I may die. 
Plur. MouriotiSy mouriezy meurent* 

Preterite. 
Sing. MouruJJhy mourufjesy mouruty that I might die. 
Plur. MmruJfionSymourujflieZymouruJfeni* 

Se mouriry to be dying. 

OFFRIRy 



( *9* ) 

OFFRIRy TO OFFER. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Offrir, to offer. 

' Part. aft. Ojfranty offering. 

Part. paff. Ojferty offered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Ojfrey ojjres y offre, I offer, or am offering. 
Plur. OjfronSy ojfreZy cjfrenU 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. Ojfroisy ojfrohy ojfroity I did offer, or was of- 
Plur. Offrionsy cjfriezy offroient* fering. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Offiris, Qjffrisy ojfrity I offered, or did offer. 
Plur. Off rimes y ojfriteSy offrirent. 

Future. 
Sing. Offriraiy ojfriraSy cffrirciy I fhall or will offer. 
Plur. Ojfriro?iSy ojfrirezy cffriront* 

Conditional. 
Sing. OffriroiSy ojfriro'iSy ojfriroit. I would, could, or 
Plur. Offririonsy cjfririeZy ojfriroient. fhotild, offer. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Offresy ojfrey offer thou. 

Plur. OffronSy offrezy off rent. 

Subjunctive Mood*. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Ojfrey offresy ojfrey that I may offer* 
Plur. GjfrionSy ojfrieZy cjfrent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Offriffey ojfri/fesy ojfrity that I might offer. 
Plur. OjfrijfiQnSy ojfrjfiezy offrifent. 



{ 193 ) 

OUIR, TO HEAR. 

This verb is never ufed but in its participle paffive 
joined to fome of the tenfes of the verb avoir, to have, 
preceding the verb dire, to fay : ex. 

^'ai oui dire que, I have heard that, &c. 

In general we make ufe olapprendrc* 



OUVRIR, to open. 

This verb, as well as its compounds, 

Couvrir, to cover, Recouvrir, to cover again, 

t^ . ("to difcover, 

Decouvnr, < 7 

£ to uncover, 

is conjugated like OFFRIR, 



PARTIR, TO SET OUT, TO GO AWAY, 

And its compounds, 
Departir, to depart, to Repartir, to fet out again, 
impart, to reply, 

Se REPENTIR, to repent, 

S ENTIR, TO FEEL, TO SMELL, 

And its compounds, 
Confentir, to confent, to Reffentir, to be fenfible of, 

agree, to refent, 

Preffentir, to have a fore- 
fight of, 

are conjugated like M ENTIR. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS ANl* 

their CO MFOUNDS. 

As foon as they faw us coming, they ran away. 

voir f Vo venir* v. 

S —-Avoid 



r !«♦ ) 

Avoid bad company. ~ He does not love your' 

compaghie y Sf. 

fitter, becaufe fhe lies. — If you forgive me this time, 
farce que y c. f c ' u £ 

I never will lie any more* — I cannot believe him $ 

*<^> pouvoiryV. 

for, he contradicts himfelf at every inftant. — Tell me 
car^c, itiftant,m.Dire,v. 

what fhe has done to you ; but, above all, do not lie. 

fur y p. 

— If you do not behave better, your mother will 

fe comporteryV. 

die with grief. — Mrs. S. died at Paris on the feventh 
de chagrin y m. h *o> 

of Auguft, one thoufand feven hundred and eighty. — 
Aouty m. 

Misfortune often feeks thofe who avoid it, and 

Malheur yT&. chercher % v. 

fometimes avoids thofe who feem to feek it. — * 
qiielquefoiS) adv. fembler y v. 

Were I in your place, I would not offer her any money. 
h place ,f. 

— Why do you not open the door for your fitter ? 
Pourquoiyzdv. porie } f. 

~ Your brother was no fooner arrivedin London than 

plutdtyzdv. h 

I offered him my fervices. — Your adtions never belie 

your words. — Open the window. — I had heard you 

fenetreyf. 

were going to Holland at the beginning of next 

commencement y m. 

month. ~~ I hope you will never difcover what I have 
efperer % v» 

toil 






( m ) 

told you.— Cover my hat, and put it upon that 

dire, v. metire, v. 

chair. — I will fet out to-morrow morning at fevcn 
chaife£* 

(o'clock,) — Do not fet out with me, — Let us go and 
heure,f. 

fee Mrs. D , I have heard flie is dying. — Your filter 

repents much for having fold her books. — Gather that 

de 

pink, it fmells charmingly. — Her mother fays fhe 
mllet, m. bon^dv. 

never will conferit to it. If you do not take 

prendre^. 

tare, you will repent of your imprudence foon or 
garde, f. /0/,adv. 

late. Let us die for our country, and our death will 

tard,zdv. pairie, f. 

be glorious. — Every citizen ought to be difpofed to 
glorieux,zd}. a 

facrifice himfelf for the public good 5 it is at that 

^,pro. ^>p. 
price only that one acquires a lawful right 

legitime ,adj . droit, m* 

to tHe advantages of civil fcciety, I fhould die 

fatisfied, if I knew you were happy e — * 
content, adj . /avoir, y (by the fubj . ) 

You foon felt the effeft of it. — My coufin fet out 

ej/fet,m. 

from here yefterday morning at nine o'clock,— -I 
ici, adv. 

offer you my houfe, it is at your fervice. ■ You 

maifon, f. 

may 



{ 196 ) 

may rely upon her, fhe never will difcover 

pouvoir, v. compter yv. 

your fecrets. — I never will offer you my horfb any 

fecretyin. chevaljs\+<oi 

jnore. He will feel it in his turn, when he 

k touryva* 

is olfl 

f by the fut.) 



SERF1R, TO SERVE, TO HELP ONE TO*. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Servir, to ferve. 

Part. a<St. Servant, ferving,. 
Part. paff. Serviy ferved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Sers, fersy ferty I ferve, or am ferving. 
Plur. ServonS) fervezy fervent. 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. Servois, fervois, fervoity I did ferve, or was 
Plur. Servionsyferviezy fervoient* ferving. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Servisy fervisy fervity I did ferve, or ferved* 

Plur. ServimeSyfervtteSy fervirent. 

Future, 
Sing. Serviraiy fervirasy ferviray I fhall or will ferve* 
Plur. Servironsyfervirezy ferviront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. ServiroiSyferviroisy ferviroity I would, fhould, 
Plur. Servirionsyferviriezyferviroient. or could, ferve.. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Sersy ferve y ferve thou. 

Plur. Servons^ fervezy fervent* 

Subjunctive 



( 197 ) 






injunctive Mod:?. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Serve, ferves, ferve, that I may ferve, 
flur, ServionSyfervieZy fervent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Serviffe, fervifes, fervit, that I might ferv ev 
Plur. Servifftonsyfervijfiezy fervijfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Dejfervir, to do an ill office, to clear a table,, 
Seferviry to make ufe of, to ufe. 



SORTIR, TO GO OUT, 
is conjugated like MENTIR 



SOUFFRIRy to suffek, 
is conjugated like QFFRIR* 



TFNIRy to hold, to keep* 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Teniry to hold. 

Part. a£t. Tenant y holding- 
Part. paf£ Teniiy held. 

Indicative Mood, 
Prefent. 
Sing. Tlensy tiens, tient, I hold, oram holding, 
Plur. Tenons, tenezy tiemient. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. TenoiSy tenors, tenoity I did hold, or was hold* 
Plur. Tenionsy teniezy tenoient. ing* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tins, tins, tint, I held, or did hold. 
Plur. Tinntes, times, tinrenU 

S 2 Future; 



( 198 ) 

Future. 
Sing. Tiendraiy tiendrasy tiendra, I fhall, or will hold, 
Plur. TiendronSy tiendrezy tiendront* 

Conditional. 
Sing. TiendroiSy tiendroiSy tiendroit, I fhould, could, 

or would, hold* 
Plur. TiendrionSy tiendriezy tiendroient* 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Tiensy tiemiey hold thou. 

Plur. TenonSy tenezy tiennent.. 

Subjunctive Mood* 

Prefent. 
Que que que 
Sing, Tienney tiennesy tienney that I may hold.. 
Plur, Tenionsy teniezy tiennent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Tinffiy tinffesy tinty that I might hold. 
Plur. TinJfionSy tinffiezy tinjfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

ISahfteniry to abftain. MaintenWy to maintain;. 

Apparteniry to belong. Obteniry to obtain. 

Conteniry to contain. Retenir, to retain, to keep* 

DeteniTy to retain. Souteniry to maintain, to 

Enireteniry to keep, to en- hold, to fupport. 
tertain* 



TRESSJILLIRy to start, to leap for.. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Treffaillir y to ftart. 

Part. aft. Trejfaillanty ftart ing., 
Part. paf£ Tre£ailH> ftarted. 

Indicative 



( 199 ) 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Trefaille, tref allies, treffaille, I ftart, - 
Plur. Trejaillons, tre/Jaillez, trejaillent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Trejaillois, treJJaillois y treffailloit, I did ftarfc. 

Plur. Trejjaillions^ trejfailliez y trejfailloient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Trefaillisj trejjatllis % trejfaillit, I ftarted* 
Plur. Trejfaillimes, trejfaillites y trejfaillirent . 

Future. 
Sing. Trejfaillirai) trejfailliraSy trejfaillira y I fliall, or 

willfbrt. 
Plur. TreJfaillironS) trejfalllirezj treffailliront. .' 

Conditional. 
Sing. TreJJailllroisy trejfaillirois, treffailliroit y I fhould 9 

would, &c. ftarto 
Phir. TreJfaillirionSy trejfailliriez y trejfailliroient. 
Imperative Mood is wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Trejfattle, trejfailles, trejfaille, that I may ftart. 
Plur. TreJJdiHionSy tre£ailliez y trejfailient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. TreJfaillt(Je y trejfaillijfes y trejfaillh y that I might 
Plur. Tre^aUliJp^ns y trefJaiiliJfiez y trejfaillijfent. ilart» 



SAILLIR) to jut, to jet out, (term in ar- 
chitecture.) is conjugated as TRESSAILLIR y but 
is only ufed in the third perfon of fome tenfes and its 
infinitive mood. 

ASSAILLIRy to assault, is conjugated as a- 
bove, 

N.B* 



> ( 200 } 

N. B. SAILLIRy to gush out, (fpeaking of any 
liquids,) is regular, and conjugated as PUNIR, 



■ ■■in 



VENIRy TO COME, 

And its compounds, 

Convenir, to agree, to be- Provenir> to proceed, 

come, to fit, to fuit, Revenir, to come back, to 

Contrevenir, to infringe, . return, 

Devenir y to become,* Sefouvenir, to remember, 

Qifconvenir) to difagree, to remind,f 

Intervemr> to intervene, & reJfouvenir y to recolleft, 

Parvenir, to attain to, Subvenir, to relieve,toaffift, 

Prevenir, to prevent, to Survenir, to befall, to hap- 

prejudice, to anticipate, pen unexpectedly, to 

to prepofTefs, come to, 

are conjugated like TENIR, 



VETIR, TO CLOTHE, 

This verb is feldom ufed but in the prefent of the 
infinitive mood, and participle paflive, vetu, clothed , 
therefore the conjugation of its compound REVETIR^ 

TO INVEST WITH, TO GIVE OTHER CLOTHES, Will 

be given in lieu of it. 

* This verb, in Englifh, is moft generally accompanied by the pre- 
pofition of governing the noun or pronoun ; but it muftbe obferved*, 
that, in French, the prepofition muft be fupprefled, and the noun or 
pronoun become the nominative to the verb dcvenir : ex. 
Ne njons informer point de ce que )t Donotinquire about what will be- 

deviendrai, come of me. 

Que deviendra votre coufin, fi fon What will become of your coufin^ 

psre Vabandonne t if his father forfake him ? 

Si cela arrivoit, je ne fais ce que Should that happen, I know not 

hous deviendrionsy what would become of us* 

■f Whenthisverb, in Englifh, governs anoun or pronoun in the accu- 

fative cafe, it mull be put in the infinitive mood,andprecededbytheverb 

faire in the fame tenfe, number, and perfon, as the verb to remind : ex, 

Faites-20w fouvenir de pajjer chez Remind me to calLupon your aunt 

nfofre tante, 

Quijjc was m fersvi fouvenjr, Yes, I will remind you of it. 



( 201 ) 
Infinitive Mood*. 

Prefent. Reveiir, to invert. 

Part. aft. Revetant, inverting* 
Part. paff. Revet u, inverted- 

Indicative Mood* 

Prefent. 
Sing. Revets, revets, revet, I invert* 
Plur. Revetons, revetez, revetent. 

Imperfe&o 
Sing. Revetois, revetois, reveioit, I did invert. 

Plur. Revetions, revetiez, revetoieni* 

Preterite. 
Singo Revetis, revetis, revetit, I inverted, or did 
Plur. Revetimes, revetites, revetirent. invert, 

Future. 
Sing, Revetirai, revetiras, revetira, I fhall or will 
Plur* Revetirons, revetirez, revetiront. invert* 

Conditional. 

Sing. Revetirois, revetirois, revetiroit, Ifhould,would, 
Plur. Revetirionsp revetiriez_, revetiroient* &c. invert* 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Revets, revete, invert thou* 

Plur* Revetons ^ revetez, rev e tent ^ 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Revete, revetes, revete, that I may invefL 
Plur. Revetions, revfoiez, reveient* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Revetiffe, revetijfes, ' revetit, that I might in-*. 
Plur. RevetTfflons, revet\ffiez y revetijfenU veft 

EXERCISES 



( 202 ) 

EXERCISES upon the foregoing VERBS an^ 

their COMPOUNDS. 

Your friend Mr* H does not ferve me well. — 

ami y m. s?> 

Shall I help you to a little bit of lamb ? — 

*<s>. morceau^va. agneau>m* 

We would ferve him with all our heart, if we could. — 

pouvoir^y, 

I fhall go out in half an hour. — If we go to day 

aujourd* hui,a&v* 

to Richmond, we will make ufe of your coach. — My 

caroJfe y m. 

fifter went out this morning at nine o'clock, and is not 

mating m. 

yet returned* — Nobody knows what we fuffered in our 

■ 
laft voyage. — If I were as ill as you, I would 

*voyage,m* malade&d}. 

not go out of my room. Why do not you 

chambre> £ Pourquoi> adv. 

ferve your friends, fince you may do it ? 

pu ifq uiyC . pouvoir, v. 

Should they forfake you, what would become of 
abandonnety v. 

you ? — I would make ufe of your horfe, if you would 

be fo kind as to lend it to me. — The more we are 
avoir la bonte de 

above others, the more it becomes us to be 

au'-dejjtis de } p. 

modeft and humble. — My aunt and I came yefter* 

tante % f. 

day to fee you, but you were not at home. — I 
v?ir,v^ 

hope 



( 203 ) 

hepe you will keep your word, and come 
ejpirer, v. parole > f. 

to-morrow e — I aiTure you, Mr. R 's father holds 

deinaiti} adv. ajjurer^v. 

the firft rank in the town, but his fon will never 

rang>m. vffle, f. 

attain to his father's reputation. — Men acquire, by 

long labours, knowledge which often becomes 

travail y m* lumiere, f. 

fatal to thern. ■ I maintain, and will alwavs 

funefie y adj. 

maintain, that you will not be happy without 

heureux^dj. Jam ■, p. 

virtue. — We were coming to fee you, but you have 

anticipated all my defigns. — She leapt for joy when 

de 

flie faw her. — At laft fhe has agreed to pay her 

jEVy?«,adv. * de 

an annual penfion of twenty pounds. — Her mother 

ftarted up at thofe words, and became furious. — — . 
a> p. parole, f. furieuxyzd!}. 

Come on Friday morning at nine o'clock. 
Vetidredij m. 



*o% 



This houfe will belong to me after her death.— 

apres^p. mort, £ 

tou will obtain leave to go out another time, 

permijion, f. de foisf. 

if you come back foon. This box contains all 

l>ientdt,zdv. boite£. 

my jewels. 1 agree Mifs N. is the prettieft of the 

bijoux,m. pi. 

* See &e neuter r?tU for the formation pf the compound tenfes, 

y family, 



' ( 204 ) 

family, but {he is fo proud that I know not what will 

become of her, — Who' knows whether they will re- 

j fa voir ,v. ft , c. 
member it or not ? — They afiaulted the town in the 

au 

middle of the night, and all their officers, even 
milieujXL. tneme&dv. 

the general, agree that they have acquired much glory. 

— Remember that if you infringe the law, you will 

incur the punifhments decreed by the law. 
peine, f. porte, p.p. 

Your illnefs proceeds from a great heat. The 

maladie^L chaleurf.. 

firft time you come to fee me, I will keep you 
(by the fut.) voir f v* 

two or three days. — Mr. B. defired me to tell you 
jour,m. prier^v, de 

that he will not come back to-day. When the 

furgeon had opened his vein, the blood guflxed 
chirurgien 3 m. fang f m* 

out with an extraordinary impetuofity. — That poor 

man will blefs you, if you give him new clothes*— « 
benir y 

He is fo prepofTefFed againfi me 5 that he will not 

contre^. vouloir^ v. 

agree he is in the wrong. — We would certainly 

certainementfi&v* 

have come back yefterday, had we had time.— You will 

hier y adv. 

becone a great man, if you continue toiludywith 
grand r ,adj. continuer??. de 

1 the 



( 205 ) 

the fame afliduxty. — — He would have come to fee us 
ajfiduite, f. * 

laft week, if it had not rained. — The firft time 
femainefi* ^>/&,p.p. foisfi. 

I go out, remind me to call on your broth- 
(bythefut.) de paffer^. chezjp. 

er. -That hat would fiiit you very well, if you 

Were a little taller. w Do not go out to-day, you 

will fuffer much if you do. — I fhould not fuffer 
beaucoupfiAv. faire,v. 

(fo much) if it were fine weather. — Why do you 
tantyzdv. faifoit y v. 

not abftain from drinking ? — The king has invefted 

that nobleman with all his authority. — You may 
feigneurjtti.de pouvoir y v* 

fet out this morning, but remember to come back 

de 

at night. - — —Were I in your place, I would detain 
cefoir, m. place ,£. 

him here a little longer ; for, he always keeps 

long-temsfidv: car y c. 

himfelf fhut up in his houfe. — I do not think that 
mferme 3 pjji\ croire } \~. 

colour fuits your fifter. — When will fhe return 

Quandfidn 

from the country ? — She wrote fhe would come next 
campagm£. 

Saturday, if the weather were fine; 

tems,m. 



$ VERBS 



( 206 ), 






Sing. AJJleds, 
Plur. AJfeyons, 

Sing. AJfeyols, 
Plur. AJfeyions, 

Sing. AJffs, 
Plur. Afsfmes, 

Sing. Affeyerai, 



¥ERBS of the THIRD CONJUGATION. 

asseoir, to sit down. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. AJfeoir, to lit down. 
Part. aft. AJfeyant, fitting down. 
Part. paff. AJJis, fat down (or feated.) 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
qffieds, qffied, I fit down. 
ajjeyez, ajjeient. 
Imperfeft* 
affeyois, ajfeyoit, I did fit, or was fit- 
aJfeyieZ) ajfeyoient. ting down* 

Preterite. 
qffis, a/fit, I fat down. 

a/sites, -affirent. 

Future. 
ajfeyeras, ajfeyera, I fhall or will fit 
Plur. Affeyerons, affeyerez, ajfeyeroiit. down. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Affeyerois, ajfeyerois, ajjeyeroit, I fhould, would, 

or could, fit down, 
Plur. AJJeyerions, aJfeyerieZy ajfeyeroient. 

Imperative Mood. 
AJJledsy ajffeie, fit down, 
ajfeyez, affeient. 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
que que 

■■a/fetes, affile, that I may fit dolvft, 
affeyiez, affeient. 

Preterite. 
afftffes afsit, that I might fit down, 
Plur. Affiffwns, qffiffiez, ajjiffent. 

AJfeoir is moft generally conjugated as a refleftive 
verb* which may eafily be done, by the learner adding 
a double pronoun to the different tenfes, and forming the 
compound ones by the verb etre, as infe promener ; ex. 



Sing. 

Plur. Ajftyms, 



Que 
Sing. Affeie, 

Plur. AJfeyions ^ 



omg, 



t e* 






C 207 ) 

Je Tctajfieds, tu fqffieds, it dajft'ed'y 

Nous nous affeyonsy vous vous ajfeye% % ils s'ajfeient. 

Compound Tenses. 
Je mefuis affis, tu t' es ajfisy iU'eJtajfis y. 

Nous nous fommes ajjisy vous vous etes atfts, &c. 

The compound of this verb is* 

Se raJfeoir y to fit down again. 



I — P WJ » 1 HI 



SEOIRy TO FIT WELL, TO BECOME, TO SIT, 

the primitive of ajfeoivy is never ufed in the prefent of 
its infihitive mood ; and in its other tenfes is conjuga- 
ted as follows : 

Part. act. Scanty fitting well, fitting, or becoming. 

Part. paiT. Sis, never ufed but in the fenfe of lituated, 

or lying. 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. II fied y ils fieenty it becomes, they be- 

come, &c. 
Imperfeft. I/feyoit, ilsfeyoient, it was becoming, &c. 

Preterite wanting. 

Future. Iljiera, ilsjieront, it, or they will become. 

Gond- Ilfieroity ils fieroie?it> it, or they would 

become. 
The other tenfes are never ufed. 



SURSEOIR, to supersede, to put off, a com- 
pound of feoir, is only ufed in law, and is thus conju- 
gated : 

Part. act. Surfoyant, 
Part. pafT. Surfis„< 
Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
Je furfois, feY. nous furfoyons, &c 

Imperfedt. 
Je furfoyoisy t*?c. nous furfoy ions y tsfc* 

Preterite. 
Je furftsy toV. nous fur simesy l*?c. 

Future. 
Je furfeoiraiy &c. nous furfeoirons y &c. 



( 208 ) 



Conditional. 
J'Mfeoirois, &c. nous furfeoirionsy & c% 

Imperative Mood. 
Surfois, bV. furfoyonsy &V. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. 
Que je furjeoie, &c. que nous furfoyionsy feV. 

Preterite. 
Quejefurjife, (sfc. que nousfurft/JionSy &c. 



DeCHOIR, to decay, to decline. 
Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Deehoir, to decay. 
Part. aft. wanting. 
Part. paff. Dechuy decayed. 
Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 

Sing. DechoiSy dechoisy deehoity I decay. 
Plur. DechoyonSy dechoyezy deehoient. 

Imperfect is wanting. 

Preterite. 
Sing. DechtiSy dechusy dechuty I decayed, or did de- 
Plur. DechumeSy dechutesy deckurent. cay. 

Future. 
Sing. Decherraiy decherrasy decherrciy I fliall, or will, 
Plur. Decherronsy decherre%, decherront* decay. 

Conditional. 
Sing. DeeherroiSy decherrois y deeherrcity I fhould, 

would, or could, decay. 
Plur. Decherrionsy decherriezy decherroient. 

Imperative Mood is wanting. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Dechoiey dechoiesy dechoiey that I may decay. 
Plur. DechoyionSy dechoyiezy dechoient. 

Preterite. 



( 209 ) 

Preterite. 
Sing. DechuJJe, dechujfes, dechuty that I might de- 
Plur. DechuffwnSy dechtiffiez> dechujent. cay. 

CHOIR y the primitive of the above verb, is obfo- 
lete. 

JSCHOIRy to fall out, to chance, is conju- 
gated like DECHOIR. Its part. aft. is echeant. . 

MOUVOIR, to move. 
Infintive Mood. 
Prefent. Mouvoir^ to move. 

Part. act. Mouvanty moving. 
Part. paff. jfcf /,, moved. 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
Sing. Metis j meusy meuty I move, -. 
Plur. Mouvonsy monvezy meuvent. 

Imperfect.. 
Sing. Mouvohy mouvoisy mouvoity I did move, • 
Plur. Mouvlonsy mouviezy mouvoient, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Musy musy muty I moved, or did mover, 

riur. IVlumesy mutes, murent. . 

Future. 
Sing. Mouvraiy mouvras 3 mouvraj. fnail,orwiiLmove • 
riur. Mouvronsy mouvrezy mouvronU 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mouvroisy mauvroisy mouvroiiy I fhbulcL could 

pi„- M . . or -would, move,., 

riur. Mouvnonsy mauvriezy mouvroient* - 

q . Imperative Mcod. 

S ng * njr Meus > meu ™„ move thou. 

riur. Mouvons'y mouvez, meuvenU , 

Subjunctive Mood, 
Prefent. 
Que que- que 

I-WX^MquvwiS) motmezy nieuytnt* 

T 2 Preterite 



( 210 ) 

Preterite. 

Sing. Muffe, mutfes, mut, that I might move, 

Plur. Mujfionsy mujfiezy mujfent. 

The compound of this verb is, 
Emouvoiry to flir up, to move. 



POUVOIR, TO BE ABLE. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Pouvoir y to be able. 

Part. act. Pouvanty being able. 
Part. paff. Pu, been able. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

Sing. Puis or peux, peux, peuty I am able, I can, or 

Plur. PouvonSy pouvezypeuvent* may. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Pouvoisy pouvois y pouvoity I was able, or I could. 
Plur. Pouvionsy pouviezy pouvoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pusy pusy puty I was able, or I could. 
Plur. PumeSy putesy purent. 

Future. 
Sing. Pourraiy pourrasy pourrcty I fhall, or will be able* 
Plur. PourronSy pourrezy pourront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. PourroiSy pour rots ypoarr alt y I fhould be able, I 

could, or might. 
Plur. Pourrions ypotirriezy pourroient. 

Imperative Mood wanting.. 

Subjunctive Mood* 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Smg.Pui/fey puiffesy puiJTey that I may be able, 

Yhxr.PuiJJlonSy putfjiezy puijfenty or I may. 

Preterite. 

Sing. P'uffiy fuffefy puty that I might be able, or 

liar. PuJJionSy (uffie& % puJfenU I might. 



Plur 



When 






( 211 ) 

When the words can, may, could] or might, exprefs 
an abfolute or permiilive power, or a poffibility of do- 
ing a thing, can and may are rendered by the prefent 
tenfe of the indicative of this verb ; ex. 

Je puis vous vendre un bon I can fell you a good horfe P 
cheval,fi vous en a'vez be- if you want one. 
Join d'un. 
Vous pouvez alter au bal, You may go to the ball, but 
maisreveneza dix heures. come back at ten o'clock. 

N. B. May, exprefnng a wiili, is rendered by the 
prefent tenfe of the fubjunftive : ex. 

TuiffiQZ-vous etre heureux ! May you be happy ! 

Could is rendered by one of the following tenfes, viz, 
the imperfect, preterite, compound of the prefent, or 
conditional ; and might by the laft tenfe : ex. 

Je ne pouvois pas mieux I could not do better. 

faire, 
II ne put pas venir avec He could not come witlv 

nous la Jemaine pajfee, us laft week. 
Vous pourriez vous tromper You might miftake as well : 
auJTi bien que luij as he. 

Could, or might, being joined to the verb to have, im- 
, mediately followed by a participle paffive, muft be ren- 
\ dered by the compound of the conditional of the above 
rj/j verb, with the participle turned into the prefent of 
[ the infinitive mood : ex. 



^aurois pu vous le dire I could have told it to you 

hier au foir, laft night. 

Vous auriez pu le faire en. You might have done it in 

trois jours, three days* 



SAVOIR, to know fomething, 

Infinitive Mood* 

Prefent. Savoir, to know. 

Part. act. Sachant, knowing- 
Fart. palT. Suj known. 

Indicative 






( 212 ) 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing,. Sail, faisy fait, Iknow. 
Plur. SavonSy favezy favent. 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. Savoisy favohy favoity I did know, or knew, 

Plur. SavionSy faviezyfavoient. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Susy, fusy futy I knew, or did know, 
Plur. SumeSy fiiteSy furent. 

Future. 
Sing. Sauraiy faurasy faurciy I fhall, or will, know, 
Plur. Sauronsy faurezy faurouL . 

Conditional. 
Sing. SaurotSy* faurotSy fauroity I ftiould, would, or 
Plur. SaurionSy fauriezy fauroient, could, know. 

Imperative Mood. 

Prefent. 
S aches y fachey know thou. 
Jachezy fachent. 



Sing. 

Plur. Sachonsy 



Subjunctive Mood.* 

Prefent. . 
Que que que 

Sing. Sacheyf facheSy fachey that I may know, 
Plur. SachiotiSy Jachiezy fachent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Sujfty fitffssy futy that I might know, 
Plur. Sifjlonsyfujffiezy fuffent. 

* This tenfe, conjugated negatively, is often Englifhed by cannot : ei^ 
Je ne faurois vous U dire, I cannot tell it to you. 

f we fometimes employ the prefent of the fubjun£fcive of this verb 
inftead of the indicative ; but it is never to be ufed without the 
aegation pas> and mofl commonly in anfwering a quefticn : ex. 

Le roitra-t-il a la comedie f Wili the king go to the play ? 
Fas auejc fechf* J^Ot that I know of. 

FJLQIR, 






( 213 ) 

valoir, to be worth, 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Valoir 9 to be worth. 

Part. aft. Valant^ being worth. 
Part. paiT. Valu, been worth. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

Sing. Vauxy vaux, vaut> I am worth. 
Plur. ValonSy valezy valent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. ValotSj valohy valoity I was worth. 
Plur. Valionsy valiez^ valoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. ValuSy va!us y valuta I was worth. 
Plur. Valumesy valutes, valurent. 

Future. 
Sing. Vaudraiy vaudras> vaudra^ I {hall, or will, be 
Plur. VaudronS) vaudrez, vaudront. worth 

Conditional. 
Sing. VaudroiS) vaudrois, vaudroit, I fhould, &c. be 
Plur. VaudrionS) vaudriez y vaudroient. worths 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vauxy vaille, be thou worth*. 

Plur. ValonSy valezy vaillent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Vailhy vailleSy vaille, that I may be worths 
Plur. ValionS) valiez, vaillent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Valujfe y valuffes> valuty that I might be worth, 
Plur. ValufflotiSy valufliez, valuflent. 

Thfr 



( 214 ) 

The compound of this verb is, 

PrevaloiVy to prevail, which is conjugated as VA- 
LOIR -, but we fay much better in the prefent tenfe 
ofthe fubjun&ive, 

Qtieje prevail, es> e ; ions y iez> ent, 



WW 



VOIR> TO SEE. 

Infinitive Mood* 

Prefent. Voir, to fee. 

Part. aft. Voyanty feeing. 
Part. paff. Vu> feen. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent^ 
Sing. Vols, voisy voity I fee. 
Plur. Voyonsy voyez, voient. 

Imperfedl. 
Sing. Voyoisy voyois y voyoity I did fee* 
Plur. Voyionsy voyiez y voyoient.. 

Preterite- 
Sing. Visy visy vity I faw, or did, fee*- 
Plur. Vimesy vztesy virenU 

Future. 
Sing. Verraiy verraSy verra, I fhall, or will, fee* 
Plur. VerronSy verrezy verront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Verroisy v&rroisy verroity I ihould, &c. fee.- 
Plur. Verrionsy verriez, verroient*. 

Imperative Mood; 

Sing. Voisy voiey fee thou. 

Plur. Voyonsy voyez, volenti 

Subjunctive 



( 215 ) 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Vote 9 voiesy voie, that I may fee# 
Plur. Voyionsy voyiezy voient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Viffe, vifesy vity that I might fee. 

Plur 4 . V'iffionSy vifftezy vijfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

EntrevoWy to have a glimpfe of. Prevoir y to forefee, 
Revoir y to fee again. Pourvoiry to provide* 

PR&VOIR differs from VOIR in the future : ex, 

Sing. Prevoiraiy prevoiraSy prevoira, 

Plur. PrevoiroiiSy prevoirezy prevoiront* And, 

Conditional. 
Sing. PrevoiroiSy prevoiroisy prevoiroii. 
Plur. Prevoirionsy prevoiriezy prevoiroient, 

POURVOIR makes in the preterite* 

Sing. PourvuSj pourvuSy pourvut. 
Plur. PourvumeSy pourvut esy pourvurent* 

Future. 
Sing. Pourvoiraiy Pourvoirasy pourvoira. 
Plur. PourvoiroiiSy pourvoirezy pourvoironi* 

Conditional. 
Sing. PourvoiroiSy pourvoiroisy pourvoiroit. 
Plur. Pourvoirionsy pourvoiriezy pourvoiroient* 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pourvupy pourvuJJes } pourvut. 
Plur. Pourvufjlonsy pourvuffiez f pourvufletit. 

rOULOIR, 












( 216 ) 

VOULOIR, to be Willing* 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Voukir^ to be willing. 
Part. a£h Voulanty being willing. 
Part. palT. Vouluy been willing. 






Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Veux, veux, veut> I am willing, or I will* 
Plur. Voulonsy voulez> veulent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Vouloisy voulotSj vouloit y I was willing, or t 
Plur. Volitions , vouliez> vouhient. would * 

Preterite. 
Sing. VouluSy voulusy voulutj I was willing, or I 
Plur. Voulu?nes 9 voulutesy voulurent. would* 

Future. 
Sing. Voudraij voudras^ *voudra 9 I fliall be willing, 
Plur. Voudrons^ voudrezy voudront. or I will. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Voiidroh) voudroisy voudroity I fhould be wil* 

ling, or I would* 
Plur. Voudrionsy voudriez, voudroient. 

Imperative Hood is wanting^ 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que Que que 

Sing. Veuilky veuillesy veuilky that I may be willing* 
Plur. VoulionSy voutiezy veuillent* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Voulujje, voulu/feSy vculuty that I might be 
Plur. Voulujfions^ voidujjiezy voulujfent. willing* 

When the words will or c vould exprfcfs a will, choice, 
Or deliberation, in the agent, and can be turned by choofe 
or chofe y will is rendered in French by the prefent of 
the indicative mood, or future of this verb : ex. 

7> 



( 21Y ) 

Je veux v aller et lui parler I will, or choofe to, go there 

moi-meme, and fpeak to him myfelf : 

line veut pas manger ? , He wi// not eat, or does 

not choofe to eat : 
and would by one of the following tenfes, viz. the im- 
perfeft, preterit e, conditional, or compound of the pres- 
ent : ex. 

Sije voulois,y* vous dirols If I would, or chofe, I could 

011 elle demeure, tell you where fhe lives. 

// voulut abfolument partir He would abfolutely, or ab- 

hier, folutely chofe to, fet out 

yefterday. 
Que voudriez-vous que je What would vou have me 
fiffe? _ • do. 

When would is joined to the verb to have/immedi- 
^Sately followed by a participle paffive, they are to be 
y Irendered by the compound of the imperfect, or com- 
J pound of the conditional of the above verb, with the 
, I participle paffive turned into the prefent of the infini- 
yA tive mood : ex. 

5/yavois voulu lui parler. If I would have fpoken to 

him, or had I chofe n to 
fpeak to him. 
Vous rc'auriez pas voulu You would not have taken 

prendre les amies, fi> C5V. up arms, If, &c. 
Nous aurions pu Varreterfi We could have flopped 
nous euflions voulu, him if we would, or had 

chofen. 

EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS AND 

their COMPOUNDS. 

Why do you not fit down, fir ? — - You 

Pourquoi, adv. 
come to fee me very feldom. — — Let us fit down upon 

raremeniyzdv. 

the grafs. — Do not make (fo much) noife, I cannot 

herbe,L faire, v. idnt, adv. 

learn my lcfTon. — Do you know what has hap- 

apprendre, v. arr i„ 

U pened 



( 218 ) 

■pened to her? — As foon as he faw he could not 
ver y v. Aujfitot que, c. 

make her hear reafon, he went away. "We 

entendre ft.* s* en alter yV. 

went there ourfelves, and we foon knew what fhe 

bientotyzdv. 

alked. — See the letter fhe wrote me. — We will not 

ecrire>v. 

fit down till you have determined to fet out — ■ 
que ne Je deter miner ft. a 

The firft time I faw your filler, fhe pleafed me. — 
fotSy f. p/aire y v. 

I would fit down upon the grafs, if it were not fo 

damp. Mrs. P. defired me to tell you fhe could 

humide^dj. prier y v. dire y v. 

not come to fee you this week, but fhe would cer- 

femaineyi. cer- 

tainly come at the beginning of next 

tainementy adv. commence?nent , m. 

month. — — Cannot you lend me three or four 

moiSy m. pretery v. 

guineas ? — ■ — If I would, I foon could know 

gmneeyf* bientoty adv. 

whether Mrs. D. has feen your aunt or not. 

l Jiy c. tantey f. 

The laft time I was in the park, I could not diftin- 

guifh her on account of the trees that were between 
a caufey p. 

her and me ; (I had only a) glimpfe of her. — — 

je n! ai fait que 

This cloth is not worth five {hillings a yard, but its 
drapym* 

colour 



( 219 ) 

colour becomes you very well. — Do not you fee the 

defe&s of it ? — When you know your leffon, 
defautjn. (by the fut.) 

come and repeat it to me, — Did you not know that 
<<>> fepeterjj, 

Mr. A. was to marry Mifs B* ? — I knew % but 

epcuferyV. maisyC* 

I was not willing to tell him of it, — I believe you 

parlerft* 

could learn your leffons much better* if you 
appr^tdre^v. BettucQUp&dv* 

would. — Could you lend me your horfe for two or 

preterm* 

three days ? — If your brother come with me, will he 
jour^m. avecjp* 

be able to follow me ? This room can contain 

fuivreft* 

about a hundred people. — Could they fee fo great an 
environ^, performed 

alteration., without being vexed (at it ?)■ — It is 
cbangement y m. fans>x>* Jache^.p. £#,pro. 

better to be unfortunate than criminal. — He is 

malheureux 3 adj. 

incapable of commanding others who cannot command 

himfelf. — His beft coat was not worth two-pence 

habit 5 m. fouja\ m 

when he arrived from Germany. — We faw them ye£-' 

Allemagne^. hi* 

terday They did not forefee what would happen to 

^r,adv. arriver^w 

them. — We ought to make a judicious choice 

devoir y v. faire^v. judicieux&d). choix,m. 

oi 



( 220 ) 

of thofe friends to whom we intend to give our con- 

vouloirfi* ccn- 

fidence.— Do you know where Mifs B. lives ? — Yes, 
fanceyL <?/.,adv. demeurer^. 

I do (know it,) and I fee her every day at her window. 

fenetrej. 

— Why will you net tell it me ? — She would marry 

efpouferjr. 

him in fpite of all her relations. — It is for that 

eu y p. depityVQ* parent^m. C^pro. 

reafon her father fays he will never fee her again. — 

dire,v. 

All the fineft talents reunited are not worth a virtue* — 

Virtue is a quality which we cannot praife too much. 

0;/,pro. Iouer,v. trop,<idy. 

— Severity and rigour may excite fear, but not 
SeveriteS. rlgueur^i. cramte>{. 

love — You faw with what goodnefs fhe received him. 
amour y m. bonte>L rccevoir y \. 

— I would not tell her what I think about it, for fear 

deft* 

of giving her any fubjecl: of complaint. — If you forefee 

plaintext* 

the danger, why do you not endeavour to avoid it 

tdcher y \. de eviter>v. 

— - They were willing to withdraw, but your brother 

fe retirerft. 

hindered them (from it,) and defired them to fit down 
empecher>\. prier y \. de 

again. — You can fpeak to Mr* B. whenever you 

parler>v. quand&dv. 

pleafe, but I may not take that liberty. — You 
vouloir^w prendre^.. 

know 



( 221 ) 
know the efteem and friendfbip that I have for him ; 

you know that his father is one of my oldeft friends j 

widened], 

you yourfelf know the merit of both. — — He would 

not fell me thefe buckles under four 

r vendre 9 v. boucle> f. a moins de, p. 

guineas. — I will not fee your brother (any more*) 

but I will fee you again as foon as I can. — < • 

(by the fut.) 

Every body thinks that if they would have purfued 

ftourfuivre^v. 

the enemy briikly they might have ended the 

vigoureufemenifi&v. * finirfj. 

war on that day. — Should we fee ourfelves reduced 
*<=* reduireyV. 

to fo great difficulties ? — If I would have believed 

croirej v. 

him, he would have perfuaded me to go to Italy with 

de 

him. — He could have done his work in lefs than 

faire, v. en, p. 

ten minutes, if he had not amufed himfelf by reading. 

s 9 /i7nufer>v. a lire y v. 

— If you want that book, you may take it, it is 

avoir befoin de 

at your fervice. — If he fold all his horfes now, the 
a 

beft of them would not be worth ten guineas. —We 






might have danced till (twelve o'clock) if that 

jufquh) p. minuit^m* 

U 2 had 



( 222 ) 

had not happened. — Oh ! my children, may you be 

happy, ^ and never bewail the moment of your 
t>eureux 3 ad}. pleurer, v. 

birth ! — I fpoke to her (a long while,) but could 
naijfance, f. long-tems, adv. 

not perfuade her to come with me. May I go 

de 

and fee him ? Yes, but come back as foon as 

^ aujltot que> c. 

you can. 
(by the fut.) 



VERBS of the FOURTH CONJUGATION, 

ABSOUDRE) to absolve, to acquit. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Abfoudre> to abfolve. 

Part. act. Abfolvanty abfolving. 
Part. pail*. Abfousy abfolved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. AbfouSy abfoitS) abfout, I abfolve. 

Plur. AbfolvonSy abfolvezy abfolvent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. AbfolvoiSy abfolvoi'Sy abfolvoity I did abfolve*. 
Plur. AbfolvionSy abfolvieZy abfolvuient* 

Preterite is wanting. 

Future. 
Sing. Abfoudraiy abfoudrasy abfoudray I fhall, or will, 
Plur. Abfoudronsy abfoudrezy abfoudront*. abfolve. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Abfoudroisy abfoudrois-y abfoudroit, I fhould, &c 
Plur. AbfoudriotiSy abfoudriezy abfoudroient. abfolve. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Abfousy abfolvey abfolve thou. 

Plur. Abfolvonsy abfo/vez } cibjolvent. 

Subjunctive 



( 223 ) 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Abfolve, abfolves, abfolve* that I may abfblve* 
Plur. AbjolvianSy abfolvie& y abfolvent. 

Preterite is wanting, 

SOUDRE, to solve, the primitive of this 
verb, is only ufed in the prefent tenfe of the infinitive 
mood. 

The other compounds are, 
Dlffaudre^ to diflblve, Refoudre, to refolve. 

Diffoudre has the fame tenfes wanting as abfoudre y 
Refoudre has its participle paffive, refolu : its preterite, 
Sing. Refolusy refo/us, refolut. 

Plur. RefolitmeSy refolutes y refolurent. 

Subjunctive Moor*. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Refolujje, refoIuJps> refolut. 

Plur, RefoluJftonSy refolujjwzy refolujfenU 



ASTREINDRE, to oblige, 
ATTEINDREy to reach, to hit, to attain,. 

to overtake, and 

AVEINDRE, to reach, to fetch out, 

are conjugated as CRAINDRE. 

The three foregoing verbs grow obfolete* 



ii .> nwm i pi» i» ui 



BATTREy TO BEAT. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Battre, to beat. 

Part.- aft. Battapt> beating. 
Part. paff. Baitu } beaten. 

Indicative 



( 224* ) 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
Sing. BatSy bats, bat, I beat, or am beating. 
Plur. BattonSy battezy battent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Battels , battoiSy battoit, I did beat^ or was beat- 
Plur. BaitionSy battiezy battoient. i n g»- 

Preterite. 

Sing. Battisy baitiSy battity I did beat, or beat* 
Plur. Battimesy battiteSy battirent. 

Future. 
Sing. Battraij battrasy battray I fhall, or will beat.^ 
Plur. BattroriSy battrezy battront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Battroisy battroiSy battroity I fhould, &c. beat* 
Plur* Battricnsy battriezy battroient. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. BatSy batte, beat thou. 

Plur. BattcriSy battezy battent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. - 
Que que que 

Sing. Battey batteSy batte y that I may beat* 
Plur. Battionsybattiez, battent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Battiffiy battijfesy battity that I might beat* 
Plur. BattifJtonSy battiffieZy battiffent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Abattrey to pull down. Rabattre y to abate, to beat 

Gombattrey to fight.- down. 

Debattrey to debate. Rebattrey to beat again, 

Se debattrey to ftruggle. 



BOIREy to drink. 

Infinitive Mood* 
Prefent. Botre, to drink. 
Part. a£t. Buvanty drinking. 
Part. paiT. Bu } drunk. 



Indicative 



( 



225 ) 



Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Bois, bois, boit, I drink, or am drinking* 

Plur. BuwftSy buvez, boivent. 

Imperfect. 
buvjis, buvoit, I did drink, or was 
buviez, buvaie?ii. drinking. 

Preterite. 
bus, but, I drank, or did drink, 

butes, burent. 
Future. 
boirasy boira, I fhall, or will drink. 
boirez, boiront. 

Conditional. 
boirois, boiroit, I ihould, &c. drink. 
boiriez, boiroient. 
Imperative Mood. 
BotSy boive, drink thou* 
buvezy boivent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. - 
que que 

bohesy borne, that I may drink* 
buviezy boive nt* 

Preterite. 
bujfesy bitty that I might drink. 
bujjiezy bujferrt. 

N. B. Boire dans que/que To drink out of fomethlng, 

chofey 



Sing. Buvois, 

Plur. Buvionsy 

Sing. Bus, 

Plur. B times y 

Sincr. Boirau 

Plur. BoironSy 

Sing. Bolrois, 

Plur. BoirioriSy 

Sing. 

Plur. Buvonsy 



Que 

Sing. Boive y 
Plur. Buvionsy 

Sing. Bujpy 
Plur. Bujfionsy 



BRAIREy to bray. 

This verb is feldom ufed except in the prefent tenfe 
of the infinitive mood, and the third perfon lingular 
and plural of the prefent, future, and conditional, of 
the indicative mood. 

Infinitive. Braire y to bray. — Prefent,. Indicative. 
II braity Us braient.~—¥uture. II braira y Us brairont. — 

Conditional* 



( 226 ) 

Conditional* II brairoity Us brairoient. « — This verb* 
exprefTes the difcordant cry of an afs. 



BRUIREy TO ROAR, TO MAKE A GREAT NOISE. 

This verb is only ufed in the prefent of the infini- 
tive mood, and in the third perfon of the imperfect 
of the indicative : il bruyoit 9 ils bruyoient. . Its participle 
act. bruyanty is often but a mere adjective. 



m »i» "«J 1 » l lniw aiia »t UL- l i^W — 



CEINDREy to gird, 

And its compound, Enceindrey to enclofe, to encompafs, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE* 



CIRCONCIREy to circumcise, 

is conjugated like CONFIREy 

but has its principle paffive ending in is inftead of ifi 



conclurey to conclude. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Conclurey to conclude. 
Part. aft. Concluant, concluding. 
Part. paff. Conchy concluded. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

Sing. ConcluSy conclusy concluty I conclude. 
Plur. ConcluonSy concluezy concluent* 

Imperfect. 
Sing. ConcluoiSy concluoisy concluoity I did conclude. 
Plur. Conditions y concluieZy concluoienU 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conclusy conclusy concluty I did conclude, or 
Plur. ConclumeSy conclutesy conclurent. concluded. 

Future. 
Sing. Concluraiy concluraSy conclura 9 I fhall, or will, 
Plur. Concluronsy conclurez y concluront* conclude. 

Conditional- 



t 



227 ) 



Conditional. 
Sing. ConclurotSy conclurois, concluroit, I fliould. Sec, 
Plur. Conclusions, concluriez, concluroient* conclude. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Conclus, conclue, conclude thou* 

Plur. Concliions, concluez, concluent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Concluft conchies, conclue, that I may con~ 
Plur. Concluions, concluiez, concluent. elude. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conclujfe, concluffes, conclut, that I might con- 
Plur. Conclusions, concluffiez, conclujjent. elude. 



CONDUIRE, TO CONDUCT, TO lead, to carry. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Conduire, to conduct. 

Part. act. Conduifant, conducting. 
Part.paff. Conduit , conducted. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Conduis, conduis, conduit, I lead, &c. 
Plur. Conduijons, conduifez, conduifent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Conduifois, conduifois, conduifoit, I did lead, 
Plur. Conduifions, couduifiez, conduifoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Conduifis, conduifis, conduifit, I lead. 
Plur. Conduisimes, conduisites, condwjirent* 

Future. 
Sing. Conduirai, conduiras, condaira, I {hall, or will 
Plur. Conduirons, conduirez, >conduiront. lead.. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Conduirois, conduirois, conduiroit, I fliould, &c* 
Plur. Conduirions, conduiriez, conduiroient* lead. 

Imperative 



Sing. 
Plur. 



( 228 ) 

Imperative Mood. 
Conduts, c:ndulfey lead thou, 






Sing. 
Plua. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



ConduifonSy conduifezy condu'rfent. 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Conduife, conduifeS) conduife y that I may lead. 
ConduifiotiSy condutfiezy conduifent. 

Preterite. 
Conduijijfe y condw/iJfes> conduistt, that I might 
CondtiiJt/fionSy conduififficzy conduifjjent. lead. 

Its compound is, 
Rec&nduirey to lead again. 






Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



CONFIREy to preserve. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Confirey to preferve. 

Part. aft. Confifanty preferring. 

Part. paff. Confity preferved. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

confisy cottfity I preferve. 
eonjifezy confifent. 

Imperfeft. 
confifohy cotififoity I did preferve 
conffiezy coiififoient. 

Preterite. 

confisy confity I preferved. 
confitesy cotrfirent. 

Future. 
ronfirasy confra y I {hall., or will pre- 
Conjlronsy confrezy confront. ferve. 

Condition?!. 
cmnrmsy cvnfiroity I fhould, &c. pre- 



CotlfiSy 

ConfifonSy 

ConftfoiSy 
ConfifonSy 

Confisy 
GonfimeSy 

Confer aiy 






Sing. ConfroiSy 

Piur. Confirionsy confiriezy confiroient. 



ferye. 

Imperative 



( 229 ) 

Imperative Mood, 

Sing. Conjis, cwfifei preferve thov^ 

Plur. Confifcns cmfife& % confifent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Confife, confifesy confifey that I may preferve, 
Plur. Cojififtonsy confifiez 3 confifent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Confiffh) confiffes, confit, that I might preferve. 
Plur. ConfifionSyConfifieZy confiffent. 



CONNOITREy to know, to be acquainted 

WITH, fomebody. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Connoztre 3 to know. 

Part. act. C6nnoiffant 3 knowing. 
Part, paff. Connu, known. 

Indicative Mood. 
Sing. Confiois, connois, connoit, I know. 

Plur. ConmiffbnS) conmijfez % connoiffhnt. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. ConnoiffbiS) coKnoiJfois, connoiffoity I did know*. 

Plur. Connc'JJictiS) connoiffiez y cdnttoiffoienU 

Preterite* 
Sing. Connusy amnuiy connuiy I knew, 
Plur. ConnumcS) connutesy connurent. 

Future, 
Sing. Connor traiy connvztraSy CG?inokra 3 I (Kail, fee 
Plur. Connor irons } connd£tre% 9 contioitrotit. know 

Conditional. 
Sing. C vino z trots, connoztroisy connoztroity I ftiould, £ce. 
Plur. ConnoztrionSyConnoztriez, connoitrolent. know. 

Imperative Mocd, 

Sing. Connoisy connoijfe, know thou. 

Plur- Connoijfons, connmffez, connoiffhnt* 

X SUBJUNGTI 



->- . • 
• •• 



( 230 ) 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Connoiffe, connoiffes, connoijjiy that I may know. 
Plur. Comiofffionsjconnoiffiez) connoijjent. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Connujfe, ccnnujfes, connut, that I might know 
Plur. ConnuffloriSyConnuJJtez^ connujfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Meconnoitre, to take for Reconnoitre, to acknowl- 

another. e dg e > to know again. 



rj.mw.uni w ■ ■ , 



CONSTRUIRE, to construct, to build, 
is conjugated as CONDUIRE. 



CONTRAINDREy to constrain, to compel, 

to force, 

is conjugated as CRAINDRE* 



COUDREj TO SEW, TO STITCH. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Coudre> to few. 

Part. act. Ccu/ant, fewing. 
Part. palT. Coufu, fewed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Couds , couds) coud, I few, or am fewing, 
Plur. CoufcnSy coufez, coufent. 

Imperfett. 
Sing. Coufoisy cciifb;s } coufoit> I did few, or was few- 
Plur. CoujlonSy couftezy r oient. ing, 

Preterite. 

Sing. Coufis coufiiy I I L 

Plur. Cousi rent* 

^ture. 



( 231 } 

Future. 
Sing. Coudraiy coudrasy coudra> I fhall, or will few. 
Plur. CoudronSy coudrezy coudront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. CoudroiSy coudroiSy coudroity I fhould, &c. few. 
Plur. CoudrionSy coudriezy coudroient K 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Coudsy coufey few thou* ', 

Plur. CoufotiSy toufezy coufenU 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Pr'efent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Coufey coufeSy coufey that I may few* 
Plur* CouJionSy coufiez y coufent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Couflffey coufiffesy cousity that I might few* 
Plur. Coiiftfftons y coufiffiezy coufffent. 

Its compounds are, 
Decoudrey to unfew. Recoudrey to few again. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 

AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

I know feveral perfons in this country who 
plujieurs ,adj. paysyVd. 

fpeak as good French, as if they had been brought 
bie?iy2L&v. 

up in France. — — Do you know Mr. A. ? 

«y^«>p.p. 

Yes, we know him very well , and, though he be 

OuiyZ&v. 

rich, I afiure you he is not the more charitable for 

it. ■ He has been beaten (foundly) ■ If you 

comme tlfaui. 

knew the queftion, you would refolve it in two 
quefiiotiy f. 

words. 



( 232 ) 

words. — I will foon conclude, if you think as 

mot,m. comme^dvv 

your brother does. — We fhould beat them, if tfiey 



*-&>, 



did not fight in their own . country. — — Do not 

propre 9 adj. 

beat him any more, he acknowledges his fault. 



l^O 



faute^ f. 

We ran for above two hours \ but, atlaft,. 

pendant ft* plus flkyadv. enfin &&?.*. 

your'brother overtook him, and brought him back. — 

ramenerjj* 

You would never fee him again, if you knew him. — 

He ftruggled a long while, but he was foon obliged 

terns >m. 

to (cry for) mercy. — This mortification has pulled 
de demanderfi .grace ) f. 

down his pride, I affure you •, however, the judge 

cependant&dv. 

has acquitted him of the accufation falfely 

faujfement, adv. 

brought againft him. — Mr. R. told me fome time 
intents y p.p. contre^, 

ago that he would build a fhip on a new plan. — — 

What will you drink ? — I will drink nothing but 

ne que 

water. — -« — Do not drink fo much. If your fa- 

tantfid. 

ther were here, you would not drink (at all.) — — • 

du tout. 

Let us fill our glaffes and drink our friend's health. — ► 

verre y xs\* fante } f*. 



( 233 ) 

We beat them becaufe our troops were better dif- - 

parceque>c dif~ 

ciplined than theirs. — — Come with us, we fhali 
cipline, p.p. 

fee whether fhe will know you again or not. — If you 

knew her, I am certain fhe would pleafe you. 

p!aire>v. 

The Englifh drink as much - tea as the Venetians 

autantyadv. the^m. Ve?iitien,m.. 

drink coffee. < After tea we conduced the ladies 
cafejca. , 

to the concert. When they had explained to us 

all that had paffed, we acknowledged we (were in the 
fe paffer?** avoir 

wrong.) Your brother's coat was torn,, 

tart. dechirerjv* 

but our tailor fewed it up again very fkilfiilly, , 
taiUeur>m, adroit 'extent, adv. - 

— Unfew that gown. I will few it to-mor- - 

towu The Jews and Mahometans circumcife • 

Juif 3 m» Mahomet ariyva. 

their children a few days after their birth. — Why 

peufidv. . naijfance^. 

do you not preferve fome fruits this year ? — He could i 

annetyf. 

not know you if he faw you now. Did you afk 

a-prefent,zdv. 
him whether he were acquainted- with any of thefe 
fa- 

Iadie$ ? ~T- l know M*« Y. but I do not truft to i 

fejier,v. 

X 2 hka> - 



( 234 ) 
him. You will force your father to punifh you, 



a 



if you do not behave better. - The l'aft time 

fe comporter,v. 

we went to Vauxhali, we drank three bottles of Cham- 
paign wine. The enemies beat us on the eigh- 
ty 

teenth, but we beat them again two days after. 



What will you drink, ladies ? — We fliall willing- 

madame y £. volon- 

ly drink fome wine y for, we have not drunk 

itersfidsr. 

any fince our departure from France. Drink, 

depuis, p. depart } m. 

faid ihe to me, out of that cup, the only token 

coupe ,f. feulyzd], marque ,£ 

which your father has left us of his love. 1 

laijfer^. ajfebHonJi. 

would have preferved fome fruits this year, but fugar 

is too dear. — Thence we concluded you could 
trophy. De /^,adv.. 

not come to-da/r, — I know nobody in this neighbour* 

voifi- 

hood. — I knew your lifter again as foon as I faw her,. 
nage 9 m. 

D ' 

— Though you ihouid take three dozen of them, 
GuatfdyQ* douzdine y im 

I could not abate a farthing. — The wind was fo 

liardyvn, vent,m. 

great it has thrown down one or two trees in oiar 



garden*, 



a 



CRJIND&E: 






( £S5 ) 

CRAINDREy *fo fear, to be afraid 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Craindre, to fear. 
■Part... aft- Craignanty, fearing. 
Part. palT. Crainty feared. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Grains, cralm , crainty I fear, or am afraicL 

Plur. CraignonSy craignez y craignent. 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. Graignoisy craignoisy craignoity I did fear, or 
Plur. GraignionSy craigniezy craignoient* was afraid.. 

Preterite* 
Sing. Craigms,. craignisy craignity I feared. 
Plur. CraignhneSy craigniieSy craignirent. 

Future. 
Sing. Craindrai^ cfdihdras, c raindra> I ftiall, or willy. 
Plur. CraindronSy craindrezy craindroni. fear. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Craindroisy craindroisy craindroify I £ho.uld 3 &o 
Plur. CraindrionSy craindriezy craindroieni*. fear,, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Grains , craigne> fea$ thpiL 

Plur. CraignonSy craignezy craigner: 

Subjunctive Mood, 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Graigney craignesy craigne^ that I may fear 
Plur, GraignionSy craigniezy craignent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Craigni/py craignijfesy craignit* that I might 
Plur* Craignifihwy craignifliezj crwgnij/hrl. £ez? 



( 2&6 ) 

CROIRE, TO BELIEVE. 

» * 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Croirey to believe*. 

Part. a£L Croyanty believing. 

Part. pafT. Cru y believed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Croisy croisy croity I believe* 
Plur. Croyonsy croyezy croient. 

Imperfedt. 
Sing. CroyoiSy croyoisy croyoity I did believe* 
Plur. Croyionsy croyiezy croyoient* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Crus> cruSy cruty I believed. 
Plur. CrumeSy cruies, crurent. 

Future- 
Sing. Croiraiy croirasy crciray I Avail, or. will, believe, 
Plur. Croiransy. croirezy croiront. 

Conditional., 
Sing. CroiroiSy croiroisy croiroity I fhould, &c. believe, 
Plur. CroirionSy eroiriezy croiroient. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Croisy croie y believe thou* u 

Plur, Crayons y croyez y croient. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Croiey croiesy croiey that I may belie vs. > 
Plur. Croyions 3 croyiezy croient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. CruJJiy crujfesy cruty that I might believe ■ 
Plur. Cruffionsy crujftez^ cruJTent* 

CRQITRE; 



( 237 ) 

CROITRE, to grow, 

And its compounds, 
Accroitre, to accrue, Recroitre, to grow agam 3 

Decroitre, to decreafe, to 
grow lefs, 

are conjugated like CONNOITRE. 



CUIRE, TO BAKE, to boil, often Engtijhed if 

TO DO, 

And its compound Recuire, to boil again, 

DEDUIRE, TO DEDUCT, TO ABATE, 

and DETRUIRE, to destroy, 
are conjugated like CON DU IRE, 



DIRE, TO SAY, to tell. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Dire, to fay. 

Part. act. Difant, faying* 
Part. paiT Dit, faid. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefect. 
Sing. D£r, *&•, dit, I fay, or am faying. 
Plur. DifotiSy dites x % difent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Difoisj difois, difoit^ I did fay, or was faying, 
Plur. Difions, dijtez, difoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Dis, dis, dit, I did fay, or faid, 
Plur. Dime*, dites, dirent. 

Future. 
Sing. Dira't, dirai, dira, I fhalls or will, fay* 
Plur. D irons, direz, dirent. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Dirois, dirois, diroit, I ihould, &c. fay. 
Plur. Dirionsy dirkz^ diroienU 

Imperative 



( 238 ) 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Disy dife, fay thouv 

Plur. DifonSy dites* diftnU 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Dife 9 difesy difey that I may fay. 

Plur. Dlfionsy difiexy difenf* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Diffe> diffesy dity that I might fay. 

Plur. pi/JionSy dl/jiezy dij/hnt. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Contredirey to contradict. Interdirey to interdict, to 
Se dedirey to unfay,to re- forbid. 

tra£t, to recant. Predire y to foretell. 

Medire dey to flander, to Redire y to fay, or tell, a-* 

fpeak ill. gain. 

Maudirey to curfe. 

JECLORREy TO HATCH, TO OPEN, TO COME 

TO LIFE. 

This verb is feldom ufed but in the infinitive mood, 
Drefent tenfe, and the third perfons of the following 

tenfts. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. EeJorre y to open, to hatch, to come to life. 
Part. pafT. Eclos. 

Indicative Mood. 
Sing. Ileclot. 
Plur. Ilsechfent* 
Future. 
Sing, II eclorrer. 
Plur. lis eclorront* 

* All the above compounds {RedWt excepted, which is conjugated 
like its primitive) make if ex, inftead of ties ; asd Maudire doubles its 
/through the whole verb ; ex. JV<w/ maudijbns, vous maudijfez y Us mau~ 
diJTenty&c*, 

Conditional. 



( 239 ) 

Conditional. * 

Sing. // eclovroiU 
Plur. lis echrroient. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. « 
Sing. Qitil eclofe. 
Plur. Qitils eclofent. 

It is only ufed when fpeaking of oviparous animals* 
or of flowers. 

The primitive of the above verb is Clorre^ to fhut, 
to furround, and another compound, Enclorre y to fhut, 
to furround, with walls, hedges, or ditches. 



EC R IRE, TO write. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. Ecrire> to write. 

Part. act. Ecrivant, writing. 
Part. paff. Ecrit, written. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Ecr'iS) $cris y ecrit, I write, or am writing, 
Plur. Ecrivotif) ecrivezy ecrivent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Ecrivo'iSj ecrivotSy ecrivoit, I did write, or was 
Plur. Ecrivionsy ecriviezy ecrivoient* writing, 

Preterite. 
Sing. Ecrivisy ecrivisy ecrlvity I wrote, or did write. 
Plur. EcrivimeSy ecrivitesy ecri-virent. 

Future. 
Sing. Ecriraiy ecrirasy ecrircty I fhall,or will, write. 
Plur. Ecrironsy eerirezy ecrironi* 

Conditional. 
Sing. Ecrlro'iSy ecriroisy ecriroity I fhould, &c. write. 
Plur* EcririottSy ecririezy ecriment. 

Imperative 



( 240 ) 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. EcriSy ecrive y write thoti^ 

Plur. Ecrivo'nS) ecrivez, ecfivent. 

Subjunctive Moos* 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Ecrive> ecrives> ecrive, that I may write? 
Plur. EcriviotU) ecriviez, ecrivent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Ecriviffe> ecriviffes> ecrivit^ that I might write; 
Plur. EcriviJfiotiS) ecrivifftezy ecriviffent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Decrire, to defcribe. Profcrire^ to profcribe, td 

Infcrtre^ to infcribe. outlaw, to banifh. 

Prefcrire^ to prescribe. Soufcrire, to fubfcribe. 

Tranfcrire y to tranfcribe c 



Pf»«^Tl^» ». i .J ' r - - - y mm**- i' | 



ENDUIRE, to do over, 
is conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



0m u mm m i m i — »■- 



ETEINDRE, to put out, 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE* 



EJfCLURE, to exclude, 
is conjugated like CONCLURE. 

Its participle paffive is exclus. 



I— li ii ■ "* 4 « wii' i m ■ ' ' i i*mwiwt 



faire, to make, to do, 

Infinitive Mood, 

Prefent. Faire to make. 

Part. aft. Faifant, making; 
Part. paff. Fait, ma&e.- 

Indicative 



( 241 ) 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Fais, fais, fatty I make, or am making. 
Plur. Faifons, faiteSy font. 

Imperfecl. 
Sing. Faifoisy faifois, faifoity I did make, or was ma** 
Plur. Fatfions, Jafiezy faifoient. king. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Fis, fis, fit, I made, or did make. 
Plur. Fimesyfitesy firenU 

Future* 
Sing. Feral, feras, fera, I fhall, or will, make. 
iPlur. Ferons'y ferezy front. 

Conditional. 
Sing. FeroiSy JeroiSy feroity I mould, &c. make* 
Plur. FerioriSy feriez y feroient. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Fais, foj/e, make thou. 

Piur. Faifonsy fakes, faflent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent, 
Que que que 

Sing. FaJfe, fijf^ f a F e > t ^ ia - 1 m <T m ^^ e 
Plur. Fcjfions, fajjiez, fajfent. 

Preterite* 
Sing. Fljfe, fijT es * fit, that I might make, 
Plur. Fifjions, fijfez, JiJJeHh 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Conirefaire, to counterfeit, Refaire, to do, or make 

to mimic. up 5 again. 

Defaire, to undo. Redefaire, to undo again, 

Se defaire, to get rid of. Satisfaire, to fatisfy* 

to part with. Surf aire, to exael, to a{fc 

too much. 

Y FEINDRIs: 






( 242 ) 

EINDRE, TO FEIGN, TO DISSEMBLE, 
-TO PRETEND, 

is conjugated like CRA1NDRE. 



FRIRE, TO FRY. 



This verb is more elegantly ufed in its prefent infin- 
itive with the verb faire conjugated : ex. 

Faites frire cepoijjon. Fry. that fifh. 

. Its participle paffive is frit, fried. 



Mi. n | w"r,wiii ) P^"i ■ ■ ■ g p< — iii i i ■ >■ * « 



INDUIRE, TO INDUCE, 
INSTRUIRE, TO INSTRUCT, 

zndlNTRODUIRE, to introduce, 
are conjugated like CQNDUIRE. 



JOINDRE, to join, 
and its. compound, E?ijoindre y to enjoin^ 
are conjugated like CRAINDRE. 






LIRE, TO READ, 

Infinitive Mooo. 

Prefent. Lire, to read. 
Part. aft. Li/ant, reading. 
Part. parf. Lu y read. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. 'Lis j Us, lit, I read, or ara reading. 
Plur, Lifons, lifeZ) lifiiit. 

Imperfect 



( 243 ) 

Imperfect. 

Sing. Li/bls, UfiiSy lifoit, I did read, or was reading 
Plur. LifwnS) lifiez, lifient. 

Preterite. 
Sinp\ Las, his, fat* I did read, or read. 
Piur. L tunes, lutes, hirent. 

Future. 

Sing. Llrat, liiras, lira, I Ihall, or will, read. 
Piur. Lirons, lirez % liront. 

Conditional. 

Sing. Lirois, lirois, liroit, I fhould, would, &c. read*. 
Piur. LirionSy liriez, - liroienU 

ImpePvATive Mood, 

Sing. Lis, life, read thou* 

Piur. Lifons, lifez, lifent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Life, lifes, life, that I may read, 
Plur. Li/ions, lifez, lifent* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Luffe, luffes, lut, that I might read, 
Plur. Lu/ftons, lujfez, luffe nt. 

Its compounds are, 

Elire, to elect. Retire, to read again. 



LV1RE, TO SHINE, 

and its compound Rehire, to glitter, 

are conjugated as CONDUIRE -, 

But take no t at the end of their participle paffive :ex, 

Lui, fhined, 

METIRE, 



( 244 ) 

METTRE* to put. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Mettre, to put. 
Part. aft. Mettanty putting* 
Part. palT. Mis 9 put. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefect. 
Sing. MeiSy mets, met, I put, or am putting. 
Plur. MettonSy mettez } mettent. 

Imperfect 
Sing. Mettoisy mettoisy mettoity I did put, or was put* 
Plur. MettionSy mettlezy mettoient. ting. 

Preterite. 
Sing. MiSy misy mit> I did put, or put. 
Plur. Mimes ^ mites, mirent. 

Future. 
Sing. Mettraiy mettrasy mettra, I fliall, or will, puU 

Plur. Mettronsy mettrezy mettront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Mettroisy mettroisy mettroity I fhould, would, 
Plur. MettriotiSy mettriezy mettroient. &c. put* 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. MetSy mettey put thou. 

Plur. Meltons y mettez y mettent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Mettey mettesy mettey that I may put. 
Plur* Mettionsymettiezy mettent. 

* Mettre, when conjugated as a reflexive verb, expreiTes a begin* 
ning or continuation of an a<5tion or application ; it is then con- 
flantly followed by the particle a and an infinitive mood. It is ren- 
dered, in Englifh, by the verb to begin : ex. 
Toutes lesfois qiiil la <voit 3 il fe met Every time he fees her, he begins 

a rire, laughing* 

Jl s'eft mis tout de ban a etudier, He has begun tofludy in earneft 

Preterite. 



( 245 ) 

Preterite. 

Sing. Mi/ft, tmpSj trJt, that I might put. 

Plur. M'ljjionS) mijjiez, mijfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Admeiire^ to admit. Permeitre, to permit. 

Gommetire, to commit. Prcinettre^ to promife.* 
Comprometire y to compro- Remettre^ to deliver up, to 

mife. put back again, to re-- 

Demettre, to turn out, to collect, to put off. 

remove. Soutnettre^ to fubmit. 

Se domett re de, to refigii. Tranfmettre* to tranfmift 
Qmettre, to omit. 



MOUDREy TO GRIND. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Moudre, to grinds 
Part. act. Moulant* Grinding. 
Part pafT. Moulu, ground. 
Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
Sing. Mous, mous, moid, I grinds or am grinding, 
Plur. Mentions, moulez, moulent. 

Imp erf eel. 
Sing. Mouloisj mouloiSy mouiozt } I did grind, or was 
Plur. Moulions, mouliez, mouloient. grinding 

Preterite. 
Sing. Moulus, moulusj mwlut % I ground, or did 
Plur. Moulumes, moulutes, monlurent. grind. 

Future. 
Sing. Moudral, moudras, moudra\ IfhaH,or will, grind, 
Plur. Moudrons, moudrez, twudront. 

* The participle of this verb (promifmg), when ufed adje&i vely, and 
expreffing the mental qualities of fomebody,is rendered in French, by 
f»iJ>romtt, or promettoit, beaucoupj gt deiU it y a, or avcit, beauccup m 
tfpertr : ex. 

Major A. etoiivn vffcier qui pro- Major A. was a very premlfmg of- 
mettoit beaucoup, or dont il y jiccr, 
avoit beaucoup a efptrer. 

"Y %' Conditional, 



( 246 ) 

Conditional. 
Sing MoudroiSy moudroiSy moudroity I ftiould, would* 
Plur. Moudrionsy moudriezy moudroieni. &c. grind. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Mousy mouky grind them* 

Plur. MoulonSy moulezy tnoulent. 
Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Mouky monies y mouky that I may grind. 
Plur. MoulionSy mouliezy moulent. 

Preterite. 

Sing. Moulujpy moulujfesy mouluty that I might grinds 
Plur. MouluffionSy mouluffiezy moulujjent* 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Emoudrey to whet. Remoudrey to grind again. 



t m tn i 'i , wn m.n » n 



EXERCISES upon the foregoing VERBS 

AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

Do not fear to tell her what you think of it. — I 
de fienferyV. 

will fpeak to her to oblige you, but I know fhe does^ 

pourfp. 

not fear me. — Why do you not believe me ? — They 

(are afraid) of being expofed to fome dangers. — We 

eire^i. 

•would not believe him, though he fhould tell the 

quand yC, 

truth. — You fhould not fpeak fo imprudently before 
verite^L devanty]>» 

Mr* I kx*ow not whom?, who flanders every body. 

Theft 



( 24T ) 

Thefe flowers would grow much better if you watered; 
fieurji. arrofer>v* 

them oftener. — Put out the candle, and do not pretend 



to fleep. — Were I in town, I would tell them all that 
de en$. 

I know (about it) — Say nothing to her, believe me, 
*7*,pro. ne rien 

— I will tell it to you to-morrow, — I efteem your 

eftimerft. 

daughter much, becaufe fhe told me fincerely that fhe 

would do neither. — They, who fay all they know, will 

readily fay what they do not know, — Tell the 

volontiersfidv* 

truth with modefty : they, who do not love it, will 
always refpoft and fear it. — If I fee your father, fliall 
I tell him you are afraid of not fucceeding ? — Do you 

think me capable of forgetting my friends fo foon ? — - 

oublierf?. 

You always contradict me when I fpeak. ■ ■■ It is 
prudent and humane not to fpeak ill of any body \ but 

it is a meannefs to fpeak ill of your benefactors. — 
bajfejfe^i, bienfatieur^x^ 

We often do good to thofe who are not worthy 

ef it, and harm to thofe who do not deferve it. — * 
maljm. merit er y v+ 

ill you tell me ; after this, that I am not your 

friend I 



( 248 ) 

friend ? — I hope fhe will not tell them what happened 

to me yeilerday. — I was telling it yeflerday to feveral 

friends of mine, and every body began crying. — —> 

I do not like Mifs D. becaufe fhe fpeaks ill of every 

parce que y c. 

body. — Her fatherhas tranfmitted her all his fortune, 

but not his virtues. — Sylla profcribed above four 

plus #V,adv. 

thoufand Roman citizens. — Does Mr. R. write to you 

citoyetijCTL. 

(now and then) from Paris ? Do you know his 

de terns en temsyzdv. 

direction ? — Would you not write to him if you knew 
adrejje,£. 

it ? — We were writing while they flept. — If 

pendant que y z. 

your brother come here, detain him, and tell him that 

I have fomething to fhew him. — - The laft time they 

a fair e voir 

wrote to him, they defired him to fend them the invoice 

prier^v. de failure fi» 

of the goods, and he has ftiil omitted it in this. 

encore ,adv. 

letter. — What are you doing now ? 1 am ma- 

maintenantyzdv . 
king a cap for your filler. — Do not do that, I will do 

it myfelf. — I would do it with all my heart, if I could* 

de 

— What would you have done, if you had been in 

J*fi* ^P s 



{ 249 ) 

my place? — Why do you not fry that fifh ? — The 

fiaft time you come to fee me, I will fhew you 
foisyi. (by the fut.) 

fome flowers in my garden which will furprife you. 

furprendrejf. 

— Silk-worms generally hatch at the beginning of 
Soieyi. ver>m. 

the fpring. Before the invention of water and 

priniemSyVd. 

wind mills our forefathers were obliged to grind 

ancetre^ii* de 

corn in mortars. Thefe rofe-trees grew per- 

grainm* mortler>m. rq/ier ym. a vue 

ceptibiy, and thofe tulips would foon open, if it 
d'ceily adv. 

were a little warmer. — —Though they fhould 
fai/iit 9 \. chaud&dj. QuandyZ. 

deduct ten per cent, they ftill would get 

encoreyzdv. gagner y v. 

enough. — I never buy any thing at Mr. P — 's , 

acheteryV. 

for, he always afks too much for his goods. ■ - 1 

car > c ' marchandifeyL 

will undo my gown tomorrow, and do it up again 

immediately. — The firft time you mimic any 
fur4e-champ#Ay. (by the fut.) 

one, I will punifh you feverely. — I would introduce 
your lifter to Mrs. F. if I knew her. — She would 
confent to that, if you would promife her to come 

here* 



C 250 ) 
here. — Tiiey were playing while you inftru&ed then; 

— You truly join what is ufeful to what is 

vraimenty adv. 

agreeable. —Did not our foldiers join dexterity to 

adrefle& 

valour ? — If you do not take great care of your 

prendre^. 

flowers, the froft will deftroy them. — Mr. S. fays 
ge/ee>£. 

he will get rid of his horfe at the beginning of 

conwiencetnentyiru 
next month. — You would" put out the fire, if, &c. 

*— Ufido that, and make it up again before dinner. 

— Your daughter joins to the love of ftudy the defire 

of furpaffing her companions. Always, virtuous, 

compagneji. 

ftill handfome, fhe makes her felf more enemies 

tou/eurs y zdy. 

than friends \ but a day will come, when every body 

que y z. 

will do her the juftice fhe deferves. — She reads 
rendre>Y. meriter^. 

the Hiftory of England every day from three o'clock 

heurtfi. 

to five. — I will read your letter as foon as I 

jufqtf a, p. 

am dreiTed. — The inhabitants of W ■ 

(by the fut.) habitlejpjp. 

have. ele£led Mr. X. for their reprefentative in parlia- 

reprefentanty m. 

ment* 



( 251 ) 

merit, 1 was reading Marmontel's Tales when you 

Conte>m. 

came in. — Mr. R. wrote to me fome time ago, that, 

■en/rer y w 

when he was in London, the Earl of E told 

Comte y m. 

him we fhould foon fee a great change in the 

changementym. 

miniftry. He often writes to me, and always con- 

minijTevefXi. 

eludes his letters thus : (Be fo kind as to) fend me fome 

Avoir la bonte de 

news, whatever they be. — Put thefe books in their 

places again. — I believe he did it through fpite. — « 

par 9 p. depjtj m\ 

Shall I put another trimming to your gown ? — I read 

garmture y i. 

laft year a very good book, but I cannot remember the 
author's name. — What grammar do you read ? ■ 



Whatever merit a mafter has, he cannot fucceed in 

teaching young people, if he do not join practice to 

theory. — I would put all your china in that clofet, 

porcelaine^. cabinet ym. 

if I had the key of it. — You could not do it in ten 



days, if I did not help you. — We would not per- 

aider y v. 

, tnit him to go out, though they \v ould. — Why do you 
de quandyZ. 

not 



( 252 ) 

not abftain from wine, fince it hurts you ? — He 

pul/que^c. faire maL 

promifed to pay me the tenth of this month, but he has 

now put me off to the third of December. — He Tub- 

mitted to it with the greateft patience. — You promife 

enough, but you feldom keep your word. — Mr. 

rarement) adv. temr y v. 

D. is a very promiling young man. — It is he who 

O,pro. 

told me, that, before the invention of water and wind 

mills, the ancients ufed to £rind corn in mor- 

de grain>m. rmr^ 

tars. — "Will they not admit Mr. Z. into their fociety ? — 
tier>m. 

The Englifh fleets have performed actions worthy to 

faire {V. 

be tranfmitted to pofterity. — Your brother promifes 

me every day to amend, but, &c. — Were I their 

defe corriger,v. 

mafler, I would not permit them to go out to-day. — I 

de 
was writing to you when your fervant brought me your 



letter. 



NAITRE r to be borW, to rise, 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Naztre, to be born. 

Part. aft. Naiffknt, being born, rifing. 
Part. pail*. Ne } been born* 

Indicative 



( 253 ) 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

'Sing. NatSy nais % natty I am bonl. 

Plur. NaiffonSy naijfezy naijjent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Naipblsy naiffhis, naiffbit, I was born. 
Plur. NaiJJtoriSy naiffiexy naiffoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Naquisy naqais, naquity I was born, 
l*lur. NaquimeSy nazfuites, naquirent. 

Future. 
Sing, l^aitraiy naiiraSy naitrcty I fliall, or "will, be borfc 
Plur. NaitronSy naitrezy naiiront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. NditroiSy naitroisy naitroity I ihould, &c. be 
Plur. NaitrioriSy naitriez y naitroient. born= 

Imperative Mood. 

.Sing. Nats, naijje y be thou born*. 

Run NaiJJbnSy naljfezy 'naiflent. 

Subjunctive Mood, 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

,Sing. Naijfty naiffesy naijfey that I may be born, 
Plur. Naijffionsy naiJJteZy naijfent. 

Preterite, 
Sing. Naquiffty naquiJfeSy naquity that I might be 
Plur. NaquiJJionSy naquiffiezy naquiffent. born^ 

The compound of this verb is, 

Renaitrey to be born again, to revive. 



NUIREy TO HURT, 

is conjugated like CQNDUIREy but makes, in Its 

participle paflive, nuu 

Z 01NDRS> 



( 254 ) 

OINDRE, TO ANOINT. 

This verb is feldom uled, except in fpeaking off- 
ered ceremonies wherein oil is made ufe of. It is con- 
jugated like CRAINDRE. 



PAITRE, TO FEED, TO GRAZE, 
PAROITRE, TO APPEAR, TO SEEM, 

and its compounds, 

• Comparative, to appear, to Dlfparoitre, to difappear^ 
make one's evidence, 

are conjugated like CONNOITRE. 



PEINDR-E) TO PAINT, TO DRAW, 

PLAINDRE, to pity, 

and Se plaindre, to complain, 

are conjugated like CRAINDRE, 






LU II..H.MIIW 



PLAIREy TO PLEASE- 

Infinitive Mood. 

P efent. Plaire, to pleafe. 

art. aft. Plaifant, pleafing* 
Part. palT. Plu, pleafed. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Plats', plats, plait, I pleafe, 
Plur. Plaifons, plaifez, plaifent* 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. Plaifois, plaifois, plaifoit, I did pleafe, or was 
Plur. Plaifions, plaifiez, plaifoient. pleafing. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Plus, plus, plut, I pleafed, or didpleafe, 
Plur. Plumes, plutes, plurenf. 

Future. 
Sing. Plairai, plalras, plalra, I fhall, or will, pleafe, 
Plur. Plairons, plairez, plairont* 

Conditional 



( 255 J 

Conditional, 
Sing. Plalrois, plalrois, ptdirqii % I fhould, would, &Cv 
Plur. Piairions, plairiez, piairoient. pleafe* 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing* Plais, pt&tfey pleafe thou* 

Plur. Plaifons, plaifez, . plalfent. 

Subjunctive Mood* 
Prefent. 
Que que que 

Sing. Phife, plaifes, phi[e^ that I may pleafe. 
Plur. Piaijtons, plaiftez, plaifent* 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pluffe, pluffes, plut, that I might pleafe. 
Piur. PluJJtons, plujjlez, pluMnt, 

The compounds of this verb are, 
CompTdire 9 to humour. Deplaire, to difpleafe, 



PRENDRE, TO TAKE. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Prendre, to take. 

Part. aft. Prenant, taking. 
Part. paiT. Pris, taken. 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 
Sing. P rends, prends, prend, I take, or am taking. 
Plur. Prenons, prenez, prennent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Prenois, prenois, prenoit, I did take, or was 
Plur. Prenions, preniez, prenoient. taking 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pris, pris, prit, I took, or did take. 
Plur. Primes, prites, prirent. 

Future. 
Sing. Prendrai, prendras, prendra, Ifliall,orwill, take, 
Plur. Prendrons, prendrez, prendront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Prendrois, prendrois, prendroit, I fhould, would, 
Plur. Pre/idrbns, prendriez, prendroient. &c. take. 

Imperative 



( 256' ) 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Prendsy prenne, take thou,, 

Plur. Prenons, prenez y prenncnt. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing, Prenne y premies, prenne, that I may take, 
Plur. PrenionS) preniez, prennent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Pri/pj priffes, prit, that I might take. 
Plur. PriJJionSy prijfiez, prijfimt. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Apprendre, to learn. Entreprendre, to undertake. 

- ' des nouvellesy to Meprendre, to miftake, to 

hear of. be deceived. 

Comprendre, to apprehend, Reprendre, to take again, 

to underftand, to in- to chide, to rebuke. 

elude. Surprendre, to furprife. 

Defapprendre, to unlearn. 






PRODUIRE, TO PRODUCE, 
REDUIRE, TO REDUCE, TO BRING TO^ 

are conjugated like CONDUIRE. 



«r*r- ^ ' » • < ■• ■■:- v- «>:*a^gTar t*.Z( W W Jmimim 



RESTREINDRE, to restrain, 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE. 



MJtm '»mniiM «i < jjj h 






RIREy TO LAUGH. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Rire, to laugh. 
Part. aft. Riant, laughing. 
Part. paff. Ri } laughed. 



Indicative 



( 257 ) 



Sing. R'tS) riSy 

Plur. RioftSy riez } rient. 

Imperfeft. 
ts 9 



Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
rity I laugh, or am laughing, 



rzoiSi 



Sing. RioL 

Plur. Riionsy riiezy 



rloiiy I laughed, or was laughing. 
rioient. 



Sing. Ris, 
Plur. Rimes y 

Sing. Riraiy 



ns< 



Preterite. 
r/V, I laughed, or did laugh, 
r/fcr, rirent. ■ 

Future. 
r/ra^ r/Vvz, I fliall, or will, laugh. 
Plur. RiroriSy rirezy rirofit. 

Conditional. 
Sing. Riro'iSy riroiSy rirolty I fhould, could, &c. laugh. 
Plur. RirionSy ririezy riroient. 

Imperative Mood. 
Sing. Risy rity laugh thou. 

Plur. RlonSy riez, rient. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. 



Que 
Sing. Riey 
Plur. Riionsy 



que 

tie, that I may laugh, 

rient. 



Sing. Rijpy 
Plur. Riffionsy 



que 
riesy 

riiezy 

Preterite. 
rijfesy rity that I might laugh* 
rlffiezy rijjent.' 

The compound of this verb is, 
Sourirey to fmile. 



SEDUIREy to seduce, 
is conjugated as CONDUIRE* 

Z 2 / SUFFIRS r 



( 258 J 

SUFFlREy TO SUFFICE, TO BE SUFFICIENT 

is conjugated like CONFIRE y but its participle paffive 



SUIFREy TO FOLLOW. 

Infinitive Moo s d. 

Prefent., Suivre, to follow. 
Part. aft. Suivant, following.. 
Part. paiT. Suivi, followed. 

Indicative Mood.- 

Prefent. 

Sing. SutSj S u }l>. fa** I follow, or am following*. 

Plur. Suivonjj^fuinSezy fuivent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Suivoisy fuivois } fuivoity I did follow, or was 
Pfur. Suivions, fuiviezy fuivoient. following. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Suivisy fuivisy fuivity I followed, or did fol- 
Plur. Suivimesy fuivhesy fuivirent. low* 

Future. 
Sing. Suivraiy fuivraSy fuivra, I fltaall, or will, follow. 
Plur. SuivronSy fuivrezy fuivront. 

Conditional. 
Sing. SuivroiSy fuivroisy fuivroity I fhould, &c. fol- 
Plur. Siiivrions, fuivriezy fuivroient. low-, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Suis, fuivey follow thou. 

Plur. BuivonSy fuivezy fuivent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Suivey JuiveSy fuivey that I may follow. 

Plur. Bulvionsy fuiviezy fuivent*- 

Preterite^ 



( 259 y 

Preterite. 
Sing. Suiviffe, fuivijfes, fuivit, that I might follow, 

Piur. SuiviJJions, fuivijjiez, fuivijfent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 
Senfuivre, to follow from. Pourfnivre, to, pursue- 



Se TAIREy to hold one's tongue, 
is conjugated as PL AIRE, 



TEINDRE, to die, 
is conjugated like CRAINDRE* 



TRADUIRE, to translate, 

is conjugated like CONDUIRE, 
I 



TRAIRE, to milk. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Traire, to milk. 
Part. aft. Trayant, milking. 
Part. paiT. Trait, milked. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 

Sing. Trais, trais, trait, I milk, or am milkingo 
Plur. Trayons, trayez, traieni. 

Imperfedt. 
Sing. Trayois, trayois, tray ok, I did milk, or was 
Plur. Trayiomt trayiez, trayoient. milking* 

Preterite wanting, 

Future. 
Sing. Trairai, trairas, traira, I {hall, or will^ milkc 
Plur, Traironfy trairez> traironi* 

Conditioner 



6 260 ) 

Conditional. 
Sing. TrairotSy trairoisy trairoity I fhould, &c. milk. 
Plur. Trairhnsy trairiezy trairoient. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Trais } traie, milk thou. 

Plur. Trayonsy trayezy. traie it. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Traie y traiesy traie } that I may milk* 
Plur. TrayionSy trayiezy traient. 

Preterite is wanting. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Aljlrairey to abftraft. Rentraire, to finedraw, 

Diftrairey to diftraft. Saujlraire 3 to fabtraft. 

Extrairey to extract. 



VAINCREy TO VANQUISH, TO CONQUER. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Prefent. Vainer e-y to conquer. 

Part. aft. Vainquant, conquering. 
Part. paflT. Vaincu^ conquered. 

Indicative Mood. 

Prefent. 
Sing. Vaincsy vaincsy vainc,* I conquer. 

Plur. VainquonSy vainquezy vainquent. 

Imperfeft. 
Sing. VainquoiSy vainquoisy vainquoity I did conquer ; 
Plur. VainquioriSy vainquiezy vainquoient. 

Preterite. 
Sing. VainqutSy vmnquisy vaitiquity I conquered* 
Sluif. VainquimeSy vainquiteSy vainquirent. 

* The fingular is very little ufed, 

Future* 



(' 2«I ) 

Future. • 
Sing. Vainer ai y vainer as y vainer a > I fhall, or will con^ 
plur. Vaincrons, vaincrez, valncront. quer. 

Conditional. 
Sing; Vaincrois.y vaincroisy vaineroiiy I mould, &c. 
JMur. Vaincrions, vaineriez, vaincroieni. conquer, 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vaincsy vainquey conquer thou* 

Plur. VainquotiSy vainquezy vainquent* 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 

Que que que 

Sing. Vainque, vainquesy vainque, that I may con- 

Plur. VainquionSy vainquiezy vainquent. quer. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vainquiffey vainquijesy vainquity that I might 
Plur. Vainquijftonsy vainquijjiezy vainquijfent. conquer. 

The compound of this verb is* 
Convaincrey to convince. 



VIVRE^ TO LIVE. 

Infinitive Mood~ 

Prefent. Vivre y to live 
Part. aft. Vivanty living. 
Part. paff. Vecuy lived. 

Indicative Mood. 
Prefent. 



Sing. Vis y visy vit % I live, or am living* 

Plur. Vivonsy vivez, vivent. 

Imperfect. 
Sing. Vivoisy vivoisy vivoity I did live, or was living* 
Plur. Vivionsy viviez > vivoient* 

Preterite 



( 262 ) 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vecus, vecus, vecut, I lived, or didliv, 
Plur. VecumeS) verities, vecurent. 

Future. 
Sing. Vivrai, vivras, vivra, I fball, or will, live. 
Plur. Vivrons, vivrez, vivront* 

Conditional* 
Sing. Vivrois, vivrois, vivroit, I fhould, would, &c. 
Plur. Vivrions, vivriez, vivroient. live. 

Imperative Mood. 

Sing. Vis, vive, live thou. 

Plur. Vivons, vivez, vivent. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Prefent. 
Que, que, que, 

Sing. Vive, vives, vive, that I may live. 

Plur. Vivians, viviez, vivent. 

Preterite. 
Sing. Vecujfe, vecuffes, vecut, that 1 might live-: 
Plur. Vecujftons, vecujjiez, vecuffent. 

The compounds of this verb are, 

Revivre, to revive. Survivre, to outlive. 



EXERCISES ON THE FOREGOING VERBS 
AND THEIR COMPOUNDS. 

My brother was born in Paris on the eighth of Feb- 

a «* Fe- 

ruary, one thoufand feven hundred eighty one. — The 
vrier,m. 

fame men, who feem not to fear death when they 

lorfqueyZdv. 

are in good health, often dread it when they are 

redouter y v* 

fick*. — What does your iifter complain of ? — The 

fwallows 



( 263 ) 

fwallows generally difappear towards the end of au~ 

hirondelle£. au<* 

tumn. — You do not feeni to pay any attention to 
tomne,L faire,v. 

what I fay to you- — This man paints very well, I aC- 

fure you. — Why would you hurt him, he never 
furer y v. 

did you any harm ? — I fhould pity and fuccour him 
faire^sf. mal,m. 

if it were not his fault. — You fhall difappear as 

foon as you have executed my orders. — The laft 
(by the fut.) 

time I faw your fifter,fhe appeared tome thoughtfuland 

penjifa$y 

melancholy. « She is a lady that pleafes every body. 

melancholique&&). 

— She appears quite young : how old is fhe ? — Does 

flie not learn drawing? — Your brother has not inclu- 
dejftin y m. 

ded his tailor's bill in the account which he 

tallleur^ m . me ] moire ' 5 m. 

has given me. — I fee you do not complain of him 
rendre y v. 

without a caufe. — I really am furprifed (at it,) but 

c7z,pro. 
he always fmiles at every thing I tell him.— As fur- 

;prifmg as this feems to you, yet, it is true.— 

cependani ,adv. 
At laft the enemy furprifed, defeated, and difperfed, 



i//iper 9 v* 

them. 



/ 



( 26* ) 

9 

•them, in the fpace of twelve days. ■■ Children 
ejpace>m. 

Teldom unlearn, wlren they continually 

rarementfi&v. Iorfque y c. continuellement^&Xt 

exercife their minds to ftudy. — — If my brother do 

L exercer?i. 

not come this week, as he promifed me, if you will, 

we will go and fee him in the country. Does not 

Mrs. H. appear much concerned at her daughter's 

ajfligeft.y. de 

death ? When you fee Mrs. B. I am 

(by the flit.) 

certain fhe will pleafe you. Did you never 

fee her ? The children, who fhall be born 

from this happy marriage, will be the delight 

d£fie'es,fspL 

of their father and mother. — She joins to the qualities 

of the body thofe of the mind. — Take fome pears, and 

carry them to your brother.— Every time I fee him, I 

take him for a foreigner. — My fifter and I learn French^ 
etranger y m. 

and underftand very well all that (is faid) to us in that 

on dit 

language. — Though you fliould learn all the rules, thef 

QuandsC. 
would not (be.fufficient) without practice. — I did not 

underftand 



( 265 } 

tinderftand what you faid. — Do not undertake to un- 
cle de~ 

deceive her ; believe me, you will loofe your time. — 
tromper y v. 

Virtue procures and preferves friendfhip, but vice 
obtenir>v. confcrverff* vice 9 m* 

produces hatred and quarrels. — If you complain to 
haine£. querelle y i. 

the mafter, I will complain to the miftrefs. — Though 

you fhould undertake to prove the contrary, fhe would 

de 

not believe you. — Why did you not take the fame road 

las we ? — He (is not pleafed) in his iituation, he now 
que fe p/aire,v. 

fees all the dangers of it. — He has fuffered much, and 

none of his friends has pitied him. — The idea of 

ideeji.. 

his misfortunes purfues him every where. — When did 
malheur 3 m. par-tout, adv. 

you hear of him ? — Captain D. told my father that he 

had feen him and fpoken to him zt Madras. — We of« 

ten miftake when we judge of others by appear- 
fe mepre?idre y v. jugerjf. 

ances, and often a perfon difpleafes us by the very 

meme&dj. 
quality by which another hks pleafed us* — The people 

who often feem themoft zealous, are not always the moft 

2^/^adj, 
A a conftani* 



( 26G ) 

xonftant.— Leave me that book a little longer, do riot 
LaiJ/er,v. 

lake it again. — That appletree produces no fruit. — 

pommier 3 m. 

, We were reduced to the laft extremity when they re- 
took our fhip. — Go and fpedk to Mr. : but, 



<<£>> 



above all, do not laugh. — Would you not laugh, if you 
/#r,p. 

were in my place ? — We laughed much yefterday at the 



a 



play. — She was an agreeable lady, Ihe was ever 

toujours&dv. 

fmiling when any body had the honour of fpeaking to 
her. — He feduced her by his fine promifes. — What- 
ever he may undertake, he never will fucceed, he is 

too much addicted to the pleafures of this world. — 

adonne $ p.p. 

Young people tell what they do, old people what 
gens,m, C^f. vieil/ard,m. 

they have done, and fools what they intend to 

fot y m. fe propofer.v* 

do* -~— We ' learn much more eafily the 

facikmentfidv. 

Ihings which we under ftand than thofe which we do not. 



If we go together to my brother's, will you be 

able to follow us ?*— I will follow you ftep by ftep.'— 

pas a pas,adv- 

Why 



( 267 ) 

Why do you follow me as you do ? — You may fet 

. comme 

out when you pleafe, we will follow you. — Hold your 
tongue, you dp not know what you fay. — What books 
do you translate ? — My matter fays I ihall foon tranfe 
late Marmontel's works. — We fhould have conquer- 
ed them if we had fought. — They have debated the 
queftion a long time, without being able to refclve it, 
— They were quite tratifported with joy when they 

heard of the happy news of peace. — Every thing 
fmiles in nature at the return of fpring, 

As long as her father and mother live, they 
Tant que y zdv. (by the fut) 

never will confent to her marriage with Mr. R. — You 
will not live long if you drink fo much. — She lived 

about four years after her hufoand's death. — — 
environ^. apres^. 

George III. the eldeft fon of Frederic, prince of 

aine> adj. 

Wales, was born on the fourth of June, 1738, and 
GalleSy f. 



«o> 



was proclaimed king of Great Britain on the twehty- 

proclamer>v. 



<-o» 



fixth of October, 1760. —Let a man live in any 

country 



( 26a ) 

country whatever, he is lure to be refpefted and well 

de 

treated every where, if his behaviour and manners be 

ruled by the principles of found policy, and the 
reg/er,v. politique^ 

laws of the country he lives in. 



MSKtBtsmsLSzrssfv&attmmnBtsm 



Of IMPERSONAL VERBS, 

Verbs which relate to no perfon or thing, and which, 
as has been before obferved, are only conjugated in the 
third perfon lingular, are called imperfonal verbs : they 
generally are preceded by one of the following pro- 
nouns, 11 or on : of this number are, 

II tonne. It thunders. 

II plenty It rains. 

On dity People fay, or it is faid, &c. 

To which may be added feveral other verbs, which 
become imperfonal when employed in the fame man* 
ner : ex. 
II vous convient d'etre mo- It becomes you to be mod- 

defte 3 eft. 

II fait bcaiiyfroidy &c. It is fine, cold, &c. 

II Jemble^ It feems. 

II s'enfuit que, It follows that* 

II vaut mieuxy It is better, &c. 

Thefe verbs, like others, whether regular or irregu- 
lar, have their different tenfes, and are conjugated in the 
fame manner as the perfonal verbs from which they are 
derived. The learner having gone through the other 
conjugations, the verbs of this clafs may the more eafily 
be difpenfed with. It will only be neceffary to feleft one 
that is not derived, and fhew the manner of conjuga- 
ting it, only premising, that the compound tenfes are 
formed, like others, by joining the participle paffive to 
one of the tenfes of the auxiliary verb avoir, to have. 

CONJUGATION 



( 269 ) 



Prefent* 
Prefent. 



CONJUGATION of the IMPERSONAL 

VERBS. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Prefent. Plenvoir y to rain. 

Part. aft. Pleuvanty raining. 
Part, paffl P!u, rained. 
Indicative Mood. 
Affirmatively. 
II plenty it rains., it does rain. 

Negatively. 
II ne pleut pasy it does not rain. 

Interrogatively. 
PleuUil ? does it rain ? 
Ne pleut-i! pas ? does it not rain ? 
7/ pleuvoity it rained, or it was raining, 
II pi ut y it rained. 
Ilpleitvrciy it ihall, or will, rain. 
Conditional. II pkuvroity it would, fhould, &c, rain. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. Qu'ilpleuve, that it may rain. 

Preterite. Quil pluty that it might rain. 

The following being the firft conjugation, I fhali 
only give the third perfon, prefent tenfe, of the indic- 
ative mood m y the karner may eafily find cut the reft. 
II arrivey it happens , from arrivery to happen. 



Imperfeft. 

Preterite. 

Future. 



it drizzles 



II briiiney 
II eclairey 
I! geLy 
II greky 

II importe* > . 
% * y it concerns \ 

II nelgey it fnows ; 

II tonne y it thunders ; 



it lightens ; 
it freezes \ 
it hails ; 
matters ; 



hritinery to drizzle. 
eclairery to lighten, 
pe!ei\ to freeze. 
grt'lery to hail. 

importer. 

neigery to fnow. 
tenner y to thunder. 



The verb AVOIRy to have, conjugated imperfonally 
with y, the adverb of place. 

Infinitive Mood. 

Y avoir y there be, 
A a 2 Indicative 



( 270 ) 

Indicative Mood* 

Affirmatively. 
Prefent, II y a, there is,* there are. 

Negatively, 
Prefent. II rfy a pas y there is not, there are not. 

Interrogatively. 
T a-t-il ? is there ? are there ? 
Imperfeft. II y avoit % there was, there were. 
Preterite. II y eui^ there was, there were. 
Future. II y aura> there lhall, or will, be. 

Conditional. II y auroit^ there fhould, would, &c. be* 

Imperative Mood. 
Qiill y ait> let there be. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. Qt/i/ y mt y that there may be. 

Preterite. Qt/ii y eut y that there might be.. 

Compound Tenses. 
II y a eiiy there has, or have, been. 
II y avoit eu y there had been.. 
II y eut eU) there had been. 
II y aura eu^ there fhall, or will, have been.. 
II y auroii eu^ there fhould, &c. have been. 
Qi/il y ait eu> that there may have been. 
Quit y eut eu> that there might have been. 

This verb il y a 9 Sec. when ufed to denote a quantity 
©f time, is fometimes rendered in Engliih by it is 3 it 
was, &c. when the Engliih prepofition Jmce is ren- 
dered (in French) by que : ex. 

Conbien y a-t-il que voire How long is it Jince your 
pere eft arrive f father arrived ? 

But, in all cafes where the Englifh phrafe can be- 

rendered negatively, que muft be accompanied by'tha 
negation tie : ex. 

* There w, immediately folio wed by the negation mo and a partici- 
ple active., mud be rendered by en ne pent pas. on nefavroit : ex. 
On ne peut pas, or, on ne fauroit, . There is ro going- out to day be-* 
Jbrtir aitjoxrd' but a canfe de la cauie of the rain ; that is, one 

phis% fawots &c # 



( 271 \ 



H y a long-tems que je ne It is a long while fince I 
i^j* #i to, faw you, <?r I have not 

feen you this long time. 
It often happens that the verb there is, or it is, &c. is 

underftood ', in this cafe, one of the words ago, thefe y 

or for thefe, is expreffed as its fubftitute : ex. 

II y a trois mots que fetois I was in France three 



en France, or fetois en 

France il y a trois mois* 

II y a quatre ans que mon 

frere ejl mori, or mon 

frere ef mart il y a qua- 



months ago. 

My brother has been dead 
thefe four years. 



ire ans,* 



II y a fix mois que mon pere 
eji malade, 



My father has been ill 
thefe fix months. 
It alfo happens, that neither the verbs, nor any of the 
words ago, thefe, &c. are expreffed in the fentence : ex. 
II y a a-prefent neuf ans que My aunt has now lived 



ma tanie demeure dans ce 
voifnage, 

II y avoit deux ans que ma 

etoit en France 



r osur 



J 
quand fy allai, 

N'y avoit-il pas fix mois 
quelle demeuroit avec 
nous quand elle mourut ? 

II n'y a pas plus d y une heure 
que nous pechons ici, 

II y aura fix ans a Noel que 
voire frere eft chez III. 
0~— . 

N'y aura-f-il pas un an an 
mois d'Aout prochain que 
voire feeur efl a Paris ? 



nineyears in this neigh- 
bourhood. 

My lifter had been two 
years in France when I 
went there. 

Had fhe not lived fix 
months with us when 
fiie died ? 

We have not been above 
an hour fifhing here. 

Your brother will have 
been at Mr. Q's : fix 
years at Chriftmas. 

Will not your filter have 
been a year at Paris 



next jMuguit 



a ? 



* From thefe two inftances it maybe ohferved that, if the verb it y a, 
&c. begin the fentence the word que muil immediately follow the noun 
of number ; but, if it be tranfpofed, 5 ,e muft be Grafted; The full con* 
ftrucHon is to be preferred. The leamermuft. at the fame time obferve, 
that rn the above fentences the verb which in En;Iiin ; is in the com- 
pound of the prefent. is rendered in French by the prsfent of the in- 
dicative ; and when in the compound of the im^erieft by the imper* 
feft of the fame mood, 

N.B 



( 272 ) 



N. B. The learner cannot pay too great attention 
to the conftru£tion of the preceding fentences. 

The verb etre, to be, becomes imperfonal, when fol- 
lowed by zfubflantive, or one of the pronouns per/anal, 
pojfeffve, or demonflrative, and is always conjugated 
with the pronoun demanftrative ce, whether fpeaking 
of perfon or things : ex. 

CVy? la loi qui Pordonne, Itisthelaiv that prefer ibes it. 
Cejl moi qui Pai fait, It is /who have done it. 

Ceft une cbofe trifle, It is a fad thing. 

CV/?unefacheufeextremite, It ha dreadf id extremity. 
C y e/I, or ce font, eux qui It is they who have done it. 

Pont fait, 

From thefe tw r o laft inftances, it appears, that it is, 
&c. followed by a noun or pronoun of the third perfon 
plural, may be rendered in French two ways , but 
when it k, &c. is ufed in afking a queftion, it is always 
put in the lingular, though the noun or pronoun be in 
the plural number : ex. 
EfW* eux qui Pont fait ? Is it they who have done it ? 

He, fhe, they, immediately followed by who, whom, 
or that, and fuch as, whether feparated in Englifh or 
not, but implying people in general, are often made 
into French by the imperfonal e'eft, with an infinitive 
followed by que de before an infinitive : ex. 

Ueft etre fou que de perdre He is a fool who lofes his 

le terns a ces bagaiielles, time in tbofe trifles. 

Cejl etre heureux que d'e- Such as are fatisfied with 
tre content de fon fort, their lot are happy. 

But, if the fentence be negative, defi ne pas muft be 
ufed, and the above rule followed for the reft of the 
fentence : ex. 

He does not know the court 

who relies on the prom- 

ifes made there. 

Such as love nobody do 

not enjoy the pleafures 

cf friendship. 

This 



C'eft ne pas connoitre la 
cour que defefer aux 
promeffes qu'en yfait, 

C'eft ne pas gouterlesplai- 
firs de Pamitie que de 
ii aimer perforins^ 



( 273 ) 

This verb etre, to be, becomes alfo imperfanal every 
time it is followed by a noun adjective ufed in a vague 
indeterminate fenfe, and relates to no particular ob- 
ject ; in which cafe the verb is generally preceded by 
the pronoun il : ex. 

II eft etonnant que, &c. It is furprinng &c. 

II eft 7-ieceffaire, &c. It is neceflary &c. • 

II eft dangereux de, feV. It is dangerous, &c. 

II eft extraordinaire ^ &c. It is extraordinary, &c. 

When the Englifh verb to be is ufed, to denote the 
ftate of the weather, it muft be rendered by the third 
perfon lingular of the verb fjire, to make or do. 

77 fait beau terns. It is fine weather. 

II fait chaud, It is hot. 

11 tie fait pas chaud } It is not hot. 

Fait-// chaud P Is it hot ? 

Ne fait-ilpas chaud ? £sV. Is it not hot ? &c. 
See the verb FAIRE. 



The learner muft obferve, that the following verb is 
abfolutely imperfonal throughout all its tenfes, and that 
nothing is more difagreeabie than to hear young people 
fay jefautj 'uous faut, on faut, &c. to prevent which, 
as much as poffible, fome examples are here fet down. 

Infinitive Mood. 
Affirmatively. Singular. 
Prefent. Falloir, to be needful, requiiite; neceflary. 
Part. paff. Fallu, been needful. 

Indicative Mood. 
Affirmatively. Singular. 
Prefent, Ilfaut queje faffe, I muft do. 

Ilfaut que tu faffes, thou muft do. 
Ilfaut qu'il faffe, he muft do, 
Ilfaut qu'elle faffe, {he muft do. 

Plural. 
Ilfaut que nous faffions, we muft do. 
Ilfaut que vous faftlez, you muft do. 
Ilfaut qu'ils, or elks, faffent, they muft do. 

Negatively, 



( 274 } 

Negatively. 
It ne faut pas que je faffe, I muft not do. 
II ne faut pas que vous faffiez, you muft not 

do, £cc. 
Interrogatively.. 
Faut-il que je faffe 1 muft I do ? 
Faut-il que. vous falfiez ? muft you do ? 
Ne faut-il pas que je faffe ? muft I not. do ? 
Ne faut-il pas que vous faffiez ? muft you not do ? 
Imperfect. IlfaUoit qu'il ecrivit, it was neceflary, &c. 

for him to write* 
Preterite. Ilfallut qi/il^nh^ he was obliged tofetout. 
Future. Ilfaudra quit vienne, he muft come, he fhall 

be obliged to come. 
Conditional. Ilfaudroit que /allaffe, I ftiould go, or it 

would be necefTary for me to go. 

Subjunctive Mood. 
Prefent. Qt/i! faille, that it may be neceflary, &c^ 
Preterite. Qi/il fallut, that it might be neceflary, &c # 

As to the compound tenfes of this verb, they are 
formed by adding its participle paffive to the third per- 
fon Angular of any of the fimple tenfes of the verb avoir y 
to have : ex. II a fallu, il avoit fallu, CSV. 

This verb, being ufed before the verb to have, fol- 
lowed immediately by a noun fubftantive, may be ren- 
dered without expreffing the auxiliary verb ; inftead of 
which, infert one of the following pronouns, me, te, 
lui, nous, vous, or lear, according to the number and 
perfon : ex. 

II me faut des livres, I muft have books, or I 

want books. 
// hxifaut tin chapeau, He or fhe muft have a hat, 

or he or fhe wants a 
hat, &c. 
But, if the verb to have be expreffed, it muft be ren- 
; dered by the fubjunftive mood : ex. 

II faut quefzie des livres, I muft have books, &c* 
This method however is not io elegant as the former. 

From 



275 J 

. From the foregoing inftances, it Is eafy to fee, that, j 
trfaen the verb falloir, is ufed in the prefent or futttre /^ 
tenfes of the indicative mood, the following verb muft 
be rendered by the prefent of the fubjunctive : ex. 

II faut, or il faudra, que I muft do, I lhall be obli- 
ie fafle, ged to do, or it will be 

necelfary for me to do. 

When falloir, is ufed in the imperfect, preterit e ? or 
conditiona. of the indicative, the verb following it muft 
be rendered by the preterite of the fubjunclive : ex. 

Ilfalloit, or il fallut, que I was obliged, or it was ne- 

je parlaffe, ceffary for me, to /peak. 

II faudroit que je vendiffe, I fhould be obliged, or it 

would be neceifary for 
me, to fell. 

The fame obfervation is to be made on the verb va~ 
loir mieuX) to be better, ufed imperfcnally ; and the ad- 
jectives, bofij difficile, impojjible, ntcejfaire, a-propos, 
&c. joined to the verb fore, ufed in the third perfon 
lingular only. ^> 00 ' 

Before the conclulion of this feclion, it will be proper 
to fay fomething about the pronoun general on, which 
commonly precedes an active verb ufed imperfonally in 
French, and in Englilh is made by a paffive verb : ex 

On via permis de chanter -, I have been permitted, or 

allowed, to fing. 
On lui a defendu defortir, He has been forbidden to 

go out. 
In this cafe, the verb, w r hich, in Englilh, is in the 
paffive voice, muft, in French, be turiied into the ac- 
tive, and tranflated as if there were, in Englilh, 

One has allowed me to ling, one has forbidden him 
to go out : ex. 

Onji a pas encore regit la The news have not been 
muvelle, received yet, that is, one 

has not yet received the 
news. 

On 



( 276 ) 

On rapporte que les Rujfes It is reported that the Riife 

ont battu les Turcs, fians have beaten the 

Turks. 

On le dit) mats on ne le It is faid fo, but it is not 

fait pas encore pour fur y yet known for certain. 

On croit que la Suede a It is thought Sweden has 

declare la guerre a Id declared war againft 

R-uJfie> Ruffia. 



EXERCISES upon the impersonal VERBS. 
Does it rain ? — No, fir, it is fine weather. — Is it 

hot very cold ? — It is neither cold nor hot. — Was 
frdidjxi. wz,adv. #z,adv. 

it not you that told me (that) there was a man below 

en bas&dv* 

who aflced to fpeak to me ? — No, madam, it 

demander,v. h 

was not L- — If it did not freeze, I would go to fee them 

to-day. — — Believe me, it is better for you 

aujourd'hui&dv. valoir fti?eux,v.* 

to go there to-morrow ; for, it will fnow foon. — It 
deinain&Av. car, c. bientot^zdv* 

is a year fince I met your brother in Italy. — Where is 

he now ? — It is not known ; for, we have not heard from 

him thefe two years. — Was there not formerly a 

autrefois, adv. 

(coffee-houfe) at the corner of this ftreet ? — I had been 
cafe y m. coin y m rue,£. 

* After the words better- necejfary, re?clful, expedient, &C. joined to 
the verb to be, conjugated imp2rfonally,theprepofitionyer is toberen- 
dered by que, with the following verb in the fubjuncStive mood, either 
prefent or preterite, according to the tenfe cf the preceding verb. 

four 



( Wi ) 

vcur years in England when that happened. — I have 

arriver>v. 

not feen your lifter thefe four months. — If you go to 

Coxheath to-day, you muft come back to-mor- 

aujourd'hui 9 adv. revenir, v. 

row. — We had been playing at cards for two hours 

when you came in. — He has been in London thefe 
entrerff. 

five years, and it is faidhe there enjoys a coniiderable 

employment. — My father and mother had not been 

gone out above a quarter of an hour when he arrived* 
/ir///,v. plus ,adv. 

— Some people have no pity on their poor (fellow- 
gens,ipL de fem- 

creatures.) — More virtue is requilite to fupport good 

blable. 

fortune than bad. -^ They are ftrangers to the charms 
of fociety who fhuri company. — Thomas will have 

been at Mr. H 's academy two years the tenth of 

next month. - — Had not Mn D. been four years in 

Spain when his lifter was married ? — Mr. N. had on 

n e 

ly learned French four months when he wrote me a, 
que 

letter in that language. W I allure you that there is a 

affurerfj. 

great deal of pleafure in teaching diligent fcholars.— 

Bb Uow 



( 2*78 ) 

How long is it fince you wrote to your mother ? ■— . 
Combieriy adv. 

It* is3 *but4 two5 months*. — I would have written 
tie que mois y m. 

to you a month ago, if I had known your direction. 

„ . , r favoir y v. adrefej. 

He is the fame man whom we faw a quarter of an hour 

ago. — It is not fo cold now as it was at the beginning 

of this month It isfaid there will not be fo much 

tantyzdv. 

danger in travelling as there was before. You 

a voyager y \. que auparavant. 

muft have been well acquainted with the places 

endroity m. 

to expofe yourfelf in that manner. — You may go 
pour y c. deyip. 

to London this morning, but remember that you muft 

be back at three o'clock. — Would it not be better for 
de retour 

you to gound fpeak to them yourfelf, than to fend 
^ de euvoyer y v. 

your fervant ?- '» ■' — ■ — Shall I be obliged to carry 
domejlique yVd. &f. falloiryV. mener y v. 

them there ?■— There is no going out to-day, it is too 

warm. — You muft get up to-morrow morning at 

fe lever yV. 

four o'clock-. — Will it not be better for you to be 
there too foon than too late ?•— Cuftom muft not al- 
ways prevail over reafon. ■*• Some people fancy that 
fur ,p c s'imagineryX . 

the^ 



( 279 ) 

they can learn a language without ftudying. — They are 

fans^ 

idle, who do not know the value of time. — Let there 

be danger or not, I will (go homje.) — Do you think 

fe en reiournerff. crcire^ 

(that) it is hotter in Italy than here ? — I fhall want 

en$. Italie^. 

(or, Imuft have) paper, pens, and ink. — If he be- 

haved well, there would not be a ma$. (in the) world 
€o?nporter,v. an monde&i* 

that I fhould efteem more. — Much art and nicety are 

requifite to pleafe every body. — They obey the com- 
pour^. 

Hiands of God who love their neighbours, and do not 
reproach them with their fmall" defeats. — I have already 
told you that nobody in the world has prepoiTefTed me 

againft you -, how many times muft I repeat it to you ?— 
contre^. 

(How long) is it fince your brother went to France ? 
CombienyZ&v. ejl allejr. 

— It may be four months. —Have the letters 
pouvoir } \. 

been received which were expected yefterday ? It 

greatly concerns children to avoid bad company, 

beaucoupyzdv. etifant y m. de eviter } v. 

— - I was in England ten years ago. —Every body agrees 

there 



( 280 ) 

fine women in Great Britain, but there is not 

fogwdwine as in France. — It may be two yeara 

fmce Mr. Robert fet out for the Indies. — Was it not 

partir,v K 

you who wrote^ to Mifs £ — ? — No, it was Mifs 
ctvez ecrit,v* 

Rofe's filler. — It does not matter whether it is my 

fervant or yours who carries it — How long is it fince 

porter,v. 

you were iji England ? — You do not feem to be 

paroitre^x. 

as lively as you were three years ago. — Muft I not 

enJQue&di). 
fhew you my work ? — If there were any real vir— 
montrer y v. 

tue in the world, fhould we (meet with) fo many falfe 

trouver>v. 

friends ? — No object is more pleafing to the eye than 

p/aire,v. 

the light of a man whom you have obliged, nor (is) 

vue^i. 

any muxic fo agreeable to the ear, as the voice of a 

Oreille^ f. voixjf* 

man who owns you for his benefactor. 

reconnoitre ft. 



r « " ■ ■ wp 



SECT. V. 

Of PARTICIPLES. 

Participles are either active or paffive. The partici- 
ple atlivey in French, always ends in ant ; ex. parlanty 
gunijfant : and, in Englifli, in ing : ex. /peaking^ pun- 

i/hingy 



( 281 ) 

ijhing, Sec. It is always, in its own nature, indecli- 
nable : ex. 
Je vois des hoimnes et des I fee men and women com- 

femmes venant a nous, ing to us. 

When the participle active is preceded by another 
verb, an article, or a prepoiition, it niuft be rendered 
in French by the verb in the infinitive mood : ex, 
La grace de Dieu nous em- The grace of God keeps 

peche de pecher, us from finning* 

Faut-il que je parte fans le Mult I fet out without fee- 

voir ? ing him ? &c 

It is fometimes ufed as a fubftantive : ex. 
La pauvrete du corps eft la The impoverifhing of the 

richefle de Vdme^ body is the enriching of 

the fouL 

N. B. There are fome active participles which, by 
ufe,have been converted into fubitantives or adjectives ; 
as, msdifant) flanderer ; ignorant^ ignorant, &c. which 
are declinable, 

The participle paffive is fometimes declinable and 
fometimes indeclinable* 

It is declinable, 

Firft, When it is joined to the verb etre, to be, 
forming a paffive verb, and agrees with the nominative 
cafe of the verb in gender and number : ex. 
Monfrere eft aime, My brother is loved, 

Mafoeureft aimee, My fifter is loved. 

Mes coufins font partis, My coufins are gone* 

Mes confines "font parties, My coufins are gone. 

Secondly, When it is joined to' the verb avoir > or 
fare] forming the comppimd tenfes of an active or re- 
flected verb, immediately preceded by a pronoun which 
it governs in the : accufative cafe 5 it muft then agree 
with. the gender and number of the fubftantive to which 
that prono.un refers : ex. 

J'ai parle^ a voire frere, et I fpoke to your brother, and 
Yai prie devenir diner defired him to come and 



em moiy dine with- me. 

B b 2; * Gonnoifft 



1 'u'-f 



( 282 ) 



Connoiffez-vous Madame 
Wrighten ? Oui>je Yai 
vue, et Yai entendue 
chanter plujleurs fcis, 

jf'ai lu tous les livres que 
vous m'avez pretes, 

Ave%-vous vu les marchan- 
difes quefai re<jues ? 

Jldademoifelle R.apajfedeux 
ou trois jours avec vos 

L foeurs, et les a xuespein- 

j dre. 

Vous ncYavez fouvent prie, 
or priee, de &c. 

Elles fe font repenties de 
leurs fautes> 



Do you know Mrs. 
Wright en P Yes, If aw 
her, and heard her dug 
many times. 

I have read all the bocks 
(which J you lent me. 

Did you fee the goods 
( which J I have received ? 

Mifs B. fpent two or three 
days with your Jj/lers, 
and faw them painting. 

You often deftred me to,, 

&c. 
They have repented of 
their faults. 
In the above inftances the pronouns are governed by 
the verbs avoir or etre and the participle paffive. 

Du y (when not made by owed,) pu> and voulu> are 
excepted as being always indeclinable. 

The participle paffive is indeclinable in the following 
cafes : 

Firft, When the contrary to the «bove rule happens \ 
that is, when the pronoun, though preceding the par- 
ticiple paffive, is governed by another verb : ex. 
Plujleurs perfonnes fe font Several perfons came to 

the door, the fentinel 
lei them pafs. 
It is a fine fong, I heard, 
it fung two or three 
times. 
The language you began: 
to learn is very ufeful.. 



prefentees a la porte> la 

fentinelleles a laiffepa/fer. 
GeQ une belle chanfo?i, je 
A j Yai entendu chanter deux 
f jdu trots fois. 

JLa langue que vous avez 

commence d'apprendre 

ejl fort utile, 
jf'yfuis a He avec elle, et Yai 
I vu peindre. 




I went there with her, and 
faw her picture drawn. 



In the above inftances the pronouns are not governed 
by the participle paffive, but by the verbs pq/fer, ehan* 
Ur 9 apprendre^ and peindre*. 



Secondly^ 



( 283- ) 

Secondly, When it is immediately followed bya< 
noun (either fubftantive or adjeftive) in the accufative 
cafe, or by another participle paffive, though it fhould 
be preceded by a pronoun : ex. 

Les Anglois fe font rendu The Englifli have made 
fameux dans cetie guerrc y themflves famous (in) 

this war. 
Les Efpagnols fefont trouve The Spaniards found them- 
obliges de lever lejiege^ y^/^jobligedtoraife the 

fiege. 
Mafozur^ejl cafse le bras^ My fifter broke her arm,. 

And, laftly, when the auxiliary verb and the parti- 
ciple paflive are ufed imperfonally : ex. 

Lespluies qu'il a fait, The rains we have had. 

In order to illuftrate the application of the above 
rules in a lingle example, we muft write, 
J' at recu les lettres que vous I have received the letters 
irfavez ecrites au fujet which you wrote to me 

de F affaire que je vous a- withrefpe£t to the affair 
vols propofee : et y aprej which I had propofed to 
les avoir lues avec atten- you : and, after having 
ticnfaireconnu, comme read them with atten- 
vous , que y ftje Vavois en- tion, I perceived^ as you 

treprife, fj auroistrouvQ did, that, if I had under- 

des objlacles que je n'avois taken it , I fhould have 

pas prevus* met with obftacles that 

I had notforefeen. 
In this period, regit is indeclinable. \ becaufe, it is not 
preceded by any regimen ; ecrites is declinable, and: 
agrees in gender and number with its abfolute regimen 3 
or accufative, expreiTed by the pronoun relative que 9 
which precedes the verb and relates to lettres ;. propofee 
likewife agrees with que, by which it is preceded, and 
which relates to the word affaire - lues is declinable on 
account of its regimen les, which precedes it and relates 
to lettres : reconnu is indeclinable, becaule it is not pre- 
ceded by any regimen to which it can relate ; entreprife^ 
on the contrary, is declinable, and takes the gender and 
number of the conjunc~iive pronoun l\ which is its ab- 
folute 



( 284 j 

folute regimen and its antecedent, relating to affaire • 
trouve is indeclinable, becaufe it is not preceded, but 
followed, by its abfolute regimen objlacles ; prevus, on 
the contrary, is declinable, becaufe it is preceded by its 
abfolute regimen aue^ which relates to objlacles. 

If cuftom, in any cafe, has deviated from the prece- 
ding rules, it is fufficient to obferve that they have the 
fanclion of the beft authors. A little practice will foon 
remove many of thefe apparent difficulties. 

Promiscuous EXERCISES on the foregoing 

RULES. 

I have not yet received the goods which 

man handife£. 

you fent me by the fhip Goodwill. «~ Ladies, 

vaiffeau y m, 

Jiave you returned him the letters which he ha4 defired 

rendrefi.. prier i v c 

you to read ? — They are people truly fear- 

gens^l* vraimefit.zdv. crain- 

ing God and loving virtue. Where did you 

dre,v. Ou,adv. 

buv thefe gloves ? — I bought them in France. — 
acheter>\. gant,m. 

She met our father and filter (as fhe was) coming 

en 

here. — Alexander conquered Afia with the troops 

zVz,adv. 

whom his father Philip had difciplined. The 

faults which he had committed greatly in- 

beaUcoup&fcj. aug- 

creafed his prudence. There is a real ad- 

met:ter{v* 

vantage in being learned, but . fcience muft not in-- 

ipire 



( 285 ) 

fpire pride. His brother, remembering the in- 

Je rejfouvenir^. des * 

juries he had received, refufed to fee him* 

refufer^v. de voir,"?. 

Louis the Great had efpecially the fuperior and rare 

talent of knowing and choofing men of merit* — — 

He has {pent all the treafures which his father had 

trefor,m* 

amaffed with fo much care and labour. — I {hall nev- 
er forget the good actions which I have feen you. 
oub/ier,v. 

do. — The defending of a bad caufe is worfe than 

the caufe itfelf. Your mother, having given the 

neceflary orders to my fifter, fet out for London 

fiartir>v. 

without fpeaking a word to me. — The refolution 
fans*p. dire,\. mot y m. 

which {he has taken of going in thecountryfurprifes 

<z,p. etotwer>v, 

me very much ^ I have fpoken to her myfelf, but I 

have not been able to learn the reafons which have 

engaged her to it. — Mifs Farren was an excellent ac« 

trefs, I have feen her play feverai times. Qf all 

the letters which my brother has received (to-day,) 

aujourd' hui*2.&Vo. 

there is not one (of them) for me. — The reafons 

raifanf.. 

which 






( 286 ) 

which you have given me have fatisiied me. — I am 

very forry for the trouble that affair has given to 
fache^L&y de peine £> 

your aunt. — The goods, which you have ordered 
tante£. marchandife£. 

me to fend, are arrived j permit me to fhew you 
de niontrer y v. 

the letters which we have received from Germany.— 

He was hanged for having robbed Mr. D. — What 
pendre y v. vo/er y v. 

books have you loft ?— — The fable I gave to you to 

perdre,v. cc 

tranflate is not difficult. — At laft he has returned 
traduire>v. Enjin&Av. rendre,v. 

all the fums which I had lent to him, and which he 
Jomme^L 

has owed me fo long. — If you can come with mc, 
devoir^?* 

I will fhew you the lady whom I have heard fing, 

damef.. entendre?!. 

— Your lifter has rendered herfelf celebrated by her 

celebre 9 ad). 

wit and beauty. — She obtained from the king all 
ejpritgix? 

the favours fhe would. —What fluff have you cho- 
grdce>L etoffeJL. cho'u* 

fen ? — Have you already read the books I faw you 
Jtrji* deja^dv. lire, v. 

buying ? — Not yet •, for, I have fent them to my 
PaSyzdv. 

filler, who is in the country. — They have found 



V 



themfelves 



( 287 ) 

themfelves unrounded by foldiers, who carried them 

conduirejt. 

to prifon, where they have been detained for 

enjp. retenir,v \pendant ,p. 

eight days, but they hav e been found innocent of the 

crime with which they were accufed, and, at laft, 
de 

(acquitted.) — — -Ifhould defpife a man who is ca- 

(renvoyerjV.abfous,J mepriferfj. 

pable of deceiving his friends. — The fine actions 

tromperyi. ami,m. beau fid). 

your brothers have done in America deferve 

fairejr. enjp. merit er ft. 

great praifes, and want to be well related. — 

demander{V. de recounterft. 

Their general has fhewn them all the gratitude he 

temoignerff. 

ought. — I have loft the books which you have feen 

me buying.— -The three country-houfes, which your 

father is faid to have bought, are extremely fine and 

well fituated. — The hiftory which I have begun to 

a 

read is not entertaining. — After having (waited for) 
amufantfid}. attendre,\. 

her (a long while,) (he (fent me word) that fhe was 
long terns ,adv. envoyer dire, v. 

not ready to go out.— -She has written more books 
pretfid], hfortir>v. 

than you ever have read* — She fpends all her time 
jue ne pajfer^ t 

m 



( 288 ) 

/eading or writing. — The foldiers, whom they 
a 

have obliged to fet out, are come back already. ■ 

a, p. revenir,v. 

Did you not fee them coming ? — The rain we 

voir,v. p/uie,f* 

have had this week has prevented me from going 

empecher,v. 

into the country. — The city of Liverpool has ren- 
a vilkyf* 

dered itfelf flourifhihg by its trade. — - — My fifter 
jloriffant,^]* commerce ,m. 

has bought herfelfafine gown. - — ~ — My mother 
acheter,\+ 

takes an infinite pleafure in admiring the fituation 
prendre,^. fituation,f* 

of your houfe. — The letter you have written to me 

in French was tolerably well 5 I have fhewft 

pajfablemehijZ&v. montrer,\\ 

it to your aunt, who is much pleafed (with it.) 

tres,adv. contented), en^xo* 



SECT. VL 

INDECLINABLE PARTS <>f SPEECH. 

/ 

1 

Under this head ate comprehended adverbs ; prepofe 
tions, conjunctions^ and interjections. 

Of ADVERBS. 

Adverbs have been diftinguiflied, according to thei? 
feveral fignifications, into adverbs of place, time, quel* 
ity, quantity 9 number , order, affirmation, negation, dcubt % 
interrogation, comparifon, collecjion, feparation, &c. But 

this 



( 289 ) 

■this clarification, however ingenious, is far from being 
exact : it was therefore judged, that, if thofe of the 
moft frequent ufe, and which, when compounded, form 
a particular idiom, were carefully felefted, and arranged 
in an alphabetical feries, it would be more to the ad- 
vantage of the learner. 

TABLE of ADVERBS. 

Abondamment) abundantly, plentifully. 

a F Abandon, at random, in confufion, in difofdefr. 

d'Abord, at firft, immediately. 

Abfoiument, abfolutely. 

d Accord, grant it, done. 

Agreablementy pleafantly, comfortably. 

Ainfty ( de meme,) fo. 

Aifement, eafily. 

mal Aifement, much ado. 

dans un An dici, a year hence. 

FAnnee qui vient, the next year. 

Anciennement, ) r . , , 

A j. r - c formerly, anciently. 

Autrefois ', ^ * 7 

en Ami> friendly. a ^ 



a F Amiable, amicably. &^> <CAw>.,- 



... ■ 



Arriere. 7 t ^ i 
backwards. 



a reculons, j 
AJJeZy enough. 
AjTurement, certainly. 
Aujourd'hui, to-day. 

Time C d* AujourdPhui en hint, this day fe'nnight. 

to come. £ d 9 An jour cFhui e?i quinze, this day fortnight. 

fily a AujourdJhui huit jours, this day week, 

Time J .. „.-„.. . this day fe'nnight. 

oaft ' ^ a Au J 0lJ ' ycJ ~ " m oumze jours, this day fort- 

night. 
il y a Aujour&hui un an, this day twelve 

months. 
Autant, as much, as many. 

d* Autant plus, fo much the more. 

d y Autant moins, fo much the lefs. 

C c fait 



( 290 } 

tout Autanty C • n • n i 

tout Auf h I Juft as > J uft as much > eyer Y wh *« 

^ FAvenir> for the future, hereafter. 

^ rAngloife, after the Englifh manner, fafhion, or way. 

a l y Italienne y after the Italian, &c. 

a la Frangoife, after the French, &c. 

a la Turque, after the Turkifh, &c. 

\ ~1 „ z? r below, down. 

en Badinant, for fun. 

Beaucoup* 7 i i , 

e>. £ much, many, a great deaL 

JSzeriy ^ ' ' o 

a Beaucoup presy nothing lb near. 

de Beaucoup y by much. 

Bieny well, very. 

de Bon cosury heartily. 

de Bonne heurey betimes. 

de Bonne foi, 7 r i 

r x • / . .> imcerely* 

jincerementy j) ' 

^ Bon jeu } fairly. 

*& i?0/2 matiny early. 

de Bouchey by word of mouth. 

a la Bonne heurey in good time, luckily, w ell and good* 

a Bon droity defervedly. 

a Bon marchey cheap. 

u Bride abattuey full fpeed. K 

Ca et lax to and fro. 
a Caufe de quoi ? on what account P 
^ - a Cela pres y that excepted. 

Cependanty'm the meanwhile, neverthelefs. 

a Chevaly on horfeback. 

Combieny how much, how many, how,* how long, 

* Hgzv much, hozv many, Aozv, are rendered in French by que, before 
an admiration : ex. 

Que vous etesjolie / How pretty you are ! 

Combien 



( 291 } 



> 



how long ?'*' 



Combien y a-t-il que, or ~\ 

Combien de terns y a-t-il que, | 

Combien y avoit-il que, 

Depuis quand, 

Combien de terns, 

pendant Combien de terns, 

dans Combien de terns, how long will it be before ? 

Comme, as, like. 

Co mine il faut, foundly. 

Comment, how. 

a Contre-coeur, againft one ? s will. 

a Contre-fens, the contrary way., in a wrong fenfe* 

a Contre-tems, unfeafonably. 

a Corps perdu, hand over head, defperately, 

a Cote, ""J 

Vf C T y tafide- 

a part, 

a quartier, J 

* We make ufe of combien y a-t-il que, or depuis quandy when the 
action mentioned in the interrogation has not yet ceafed ; then the verb, 
which (in Englifh) is in the compound of the prefent, muft be ren- 
dered (in French) by the prefent of the indicative mood : ex. 
Combien y a-t-il que vous apprenez , Hoiv long have you learnedFrench ? 

or depuis quand upprenez-vous, le 

Francois ? 
Combien y a-t-il que <vous etes, or FIoiv long have you been in London ? 

depuis quand etes-uous, a Londres ? 

If the verb (in Englifh) be in the compound of the imperfect, it 
is to be rendered (in French) by the imperfect of the indicative : ex. 
Combien y avoit-il que votts appre- Hoiv long h&dyou. been learning 

niez, or depuis quand appreniez- French when you wrote to me ? 

<vous, le Francois quand vous rn e- 



crwiies f 



Combien y avoit-il que vous etiez y Hoiv long had you been in Paris 

or depuis qu and etiez-vous a Fa- when he died ? 

ris quand il mov.rut ? 

But, if the action have entirely ceafed, we make ufe of pendant com* 
bien de terns, with the following in the compound of the prefent : ex. 
Pendant combien de terns avez-vous Hoiv long did you learn French ? 

appris le Francois ? 

Pendant combien de terns avez-vous Hew long were you in London P 

ete a Londres ? 

N. B, Hoiv long, in the fenfe of for luhat time, is alfo rendered by pen- 
dant combien de terns, with the verb in the fametenfe as it is in Englifh : ex; 
Pendant combien de terns voire tionv long does your lifter intend to 

fceur fe propofc-t-elU di refier en flay in- Italy I 

Italic f. 



( 292 ) 

a Cote Pun de P autre, ahreaft. 

de ce Cote-ci, on this fide. 

de ce Cote-la, on that fide, 

de Cote et d? autre, up and down, about, 

de tous Cotes, on all fides, on every fide,. 

Coup fur Coup, one after another,, 

Davantage, more. 
Dedans, 7 • i • 
en Dedans, j Wlthm > inw *rdly. 

Dehors, ^ . , 
en Dehors, \ 
Deja, already. 
De?nain, to-morrow. 
le lendemain, the day after. 
apres Demain, the day after to-morrow. 
Dernieremeni, lately. 
ci-De£us, above. 
-/ par DeJJus, over and above. 



DeJJb 



ous. 



underneath, 



au DeJJous, 

a Decouvert, openly. 

a Demi, 7 \ 1f i_ i i 
% .J. > hair, by halves. 
a mottie, y J 

a Dejfein, on purpofe, designedly. 

a Droite, on the right. 

a Double entente, with a double meaning- 

Encore, again, yet, as yet. 

Enjin, at laft. 

Enfuite, afterwards, then. 

Entierement, entirely. 

Exbres, on purpofe. 

a PEcart, out of the way. , 

a Pentour, round about. 

a PEnvers, the wrong fide outwards, 

a PEnvi, in emulation. 

aux Environs, thereabout. 

En nulle maniere, in no wife* 

En 



( 293 ) 

Enpleinjour, or") . , i 

7- / • • j- t at noon, at mid-day. 
hnplein midi, y J 

En terns et lieu, in a proper time and place* 

En tout cas, whatever may happen. 

En un din d'oeil, in the twinkling of an eye, 

Enfurfaut, fuddenly. 

Facilement, eafily. 
Fidelement, faithfully. 

, > File, in a File. 

a la Fois, together. 

combien de Fois ? how many times ? 

une Fois y once. 

deux Fois, twice. 

tant de Fois, fo many times* 

Fort, very. 

Fort et Ferme, ftoutly. 

a Fond, thoroughly. 

de Fond en comble, from top to bottom, to all intents and 

de Front, abreaft. purpofes* 

Galamment, genteelly, gallantly. 

Goutte a Goutte, by drops . 

Gueres, (with ne before the verb,) little, but little. 

a la Hate, in hafte. 

eti or J 

p h Haut, up there, above flairs. 

d'Heure en Heure, hourly, every hour* 

Hier, yefterday. 

Hier aufoir, laft night. 

avant Hier, the day before yefterday 

% 

let, here. 

Li autour, hereabouts. 

Id pres hard by. 

d'Ici, hence. 

£ lei en quinze jours, within a fortnight* 

Cc^ par 



( 294 ); 

par Ici, through here, this way. 
par Icipar la, here and there. 
/ a Flnjlant, immediately, inftantly. 

Jamais, ever^ 

ne — Jamais, never. 

a Jamais, for ever. 

Jujiement, juftly, exadtly. 

Jufqu'a quand ? how long ? 

Jufquici, hitherto, as far as here* 

Jufques-la, fo far, as far as that. 

JufqiiQU ? how far ? 

de Jour, in the day-time. 

de Jour a autre, orl r i i t-*i 

de Jour en Jour, j fr0m da ? to d ^ ^ 

de deux en deux Jours, T 

de deux Jours Fun, or, > every other day. 

tons les deux Jours, j 

dans quinze Jours, in a fortnight. 

La, there, thither. 
La autour, thereabouts. 
v La has, yonder. 
de La, (en,) thence. 
par La, through there, that way^ 
Loin, far. 

de Loin, afar off, at a diftance^ 
Long terns, a long while, 
Lors, then, at the time. 

f rs \ jthen. 

pour loot's,} 

des Lors, from that time.. 

Mai, ill, wrong. 

Maintenant, now. 

Mediocrement, indifferently. 

Meme, even, yet. 

de Meme, fo, in the fame mannen 

Mieux, better. 

de Mieux en Mieux > better and better* 

Moinsi 



( 295 ) 

Moins, lefs. 

Moins Moins y the lefs the lefs. 

a MoinSy for lefs, at lefs. 

au Moins l att heleaff. 

tout au Alotnsy J 

en Moins de rien, in a trice, 

Naivetnenty plainly, ingenuoufly. 

Naturellementy naturally, by nature* 

au Nature I \ to the life. 

Ne — ni — niy neither— —nor, 

Non pasy or pointy 1 

at i r^o, not. 

de Nuity by night, in the night-time. 

Obligeammenty kindly, obligingly.. 

Oil ? where ? 

(TO 11 ? whence ? 

par Ou ? through what place ? which way ? through 

Ouiy yes. which ? 

d } Outre en Outre 9 through. 

Pas a Pasy ftep by ftep. 

de Part et d' autre y on both fides. 

nulle Party no where. 

a Peine y hardly, fcarcely, 

Pele-mehy helter-fkelter. 

Peut-etrey maybe, perhaps. 

Peuy little. 

Peu a Peiiy by little and little, by degrees. 

ci Peu f)rcs ~) 

>> e> j l r ^ r almoft, very near, thereabouts - . 
a £*eu de chofepresy j 7 r 3 

dans Peiiy in a fhort time. 

depuis Peuy lately, not long ago, a little while ago. 

a Piedy on foot. 

a Pieds nudsy bare-feet. 

au Pis-allery let the worft ccme to the worft. 

de Pis en PtSy worfe and worfe. 

dc Plein grey with a good will, freely. 

de Plein piedy on the fame floor. 



( 296 ) 

a Pleines mains, largely. 

Plus, more, above. 

Plus Plus, the more ■ ■the mor§* 

Plus qu'il n'enfaut, more than enough* 

au Plus, tout au Plus, at the moft. 

de Plus en Plus, more and more. 

h Plus forte raifon, much more fo* 

Plutot, fooner. 4 

Point du tout, not at all. 

a Point nomine, feafonably. 

tout a Point, in the nick of time*- 

a Propos, feafonably. 

Pourquoi ? or que ne ? why. 

dePres, near, nearly, narrowly. 

Premierement, orl r n. • » r n t 

D • /• r krft, m the firlt place; 
en rremier lieu, j r 

des a Prefent, from this time* 

Prefque, almoft, hardly. 

Prefque toujour s, moft commonly. 

de Propos de liber e, on purpofe, purpofely, deliberately^ 

Par cas fortuity by chance, accidentally. 

Par derriere, behind. 

Par dejfus le mar che,dnto the bargain. 

Par en has, downward. 

Par en haut, upward. 

Par malice, through ill-nature. 

Par me garde, unawares. 

Par terre, upon the ground. 

Quand ? when ? 

depuis Quand ? how long is it fince $ 

Que F why ? how ? 

QuelquefoiSy fome time. 

a Quoi bon ? to what purpofe ? 

Rarementy feldom. 

au or du Rejre, as to the reft. 

a Rebours, the wrong way. 

a la Renverfe, ) , , , , , . 

v n . , J r backward, upon one s back* 



£ 



( 297 ) 

a Rez de chaujfee, even with the ground 

Sens devant derriere, prepofteroufly. 

Sens dejfus dejjbus, topfy-turvy. 

de tons Sens* or 1 , 

j i o c every where. 

de tons les oens, J J - 

Separemeni, feparately. 

Settlement, only.* 

de Sangfroid, in cold blood. 

de Suite, together, one after another 

dans la Suite 

par la Suite 

Sur-le-champ, directly* upon the fpot, 



uite, 1 

•^ h afterwards. 

ite, J 



. \ M . Moon. 

tentot}} 



Tant, fo much, fo many. 

Tant mieuxySo much the better. 

Tant pis, fo much the worfe. 

Tantot, by and by, fometimes. 

Tantot Tantot, fometimes — — fometimes. 

Tot, 

hientot, 

Tot ou tard, one time or other. 
7\ Tant foit peu, ever fo little.. 

Tard, late. 
% a Terns, time enough, in proper time. 

de long Terns, for a long time, this long while. 

de Terns en Terns \ orl , + c 

j r N ^ r now and then, trom time to time, 

de lems a autre, y 7 

a Tort, wrongfully. 

a Tort ou a droit, right or wrong. 

Y^ a Tort et a Travers, at random. 

Trop, too much. 

Toujours, always, no w-a-days. 

pour Toujours, for ever and ever. 

Tous les jours, every day. 

Tour a Tour, by turns. 

' Only is alfo exprefTed, in French, by ne before the verb and que 

after it, when.it becomes a conjunction. 

Tcut. s , 



C 298 ) 

Tout, quite, wholly, thoroughly, entirely.* 

Tout a coup, fuddenly, on a fudden, all at once. 

Tout bas, foftly, with a low voice. 

Tout d'un coup, fuddenly, on a fudden, all at once. 

Tout a fait, quite. 

Tout a Vheure, this minute, prefently- 

Tout droit, ftraight along. 

.^ Tout de bon, in good earneft. 

Tout de long, all along. 

Tout franc, frankly, freely. 

Tout haut, aloud. 

Tout outre, through and through. 

% Tout bout de champ, 1 

v rj, ^ h at every turn. 

a lous coups, J J 

a Tous egards, in all refpedls. 

de Toutesfes forces, with all his Q* her mi: 

par Tout, every where. 

par Tout ou, wherever. 

Vite, 1 

Vitement, S 

VivementSi ^ - , 

T/ -.r 7 > to the quick* 

a Vide, empty. 
auplus Vite, with all fpeed. 
Void, here is, behold. 
Voila, there is, behold- 
a Vue d'ceil, perceptibly. 

T, there, therein, within, thither. 



WJW 



EXERCISES on the preceding ADVERBS, 

Your fifter left all her things in disorder. — * 

laijfer,v^ 

* This adverb takes the nature of a noun adje&ivej and becomes 
declinable in French, when placed before another adjective femi- 
nine beginning with a confonant : ex. 
Qesfemmes paroijfoient tout effrayees Thefewomen feemed quite frigh- 

et toutes conjternees) tened and quite diimayed. 



( 299 ) 

I hope you will not do fo. — You did not know me 

AT FIRST. A YEAR HENCE VOU Will (be able) to 

fpeak French tolerably well. — My father fays I 
fhall go to* France the next year. — Your broth- 

er and mine have fettled their affairs amicably. — 

reg/er,v» 

She dreffes herfelf quite after the English 
s'habillerft. 

fashion, but flie lives after the French way. 

vivre,v. 

— Your lifter has a cap after the Turkish 

bonfiet^m. 

fashion. — If it be fine weather, I {hall be {back) 

de retour 

this day fortnight. — You may fay what 

pouvoir^v. 

(you pleafe,) but fhe is nothing near fo handfome 
il vous p/aira } v. 

as her lifter. — We will get up early, and fet out 

fe /ever y v. 

betimes. — I wifh you a great deal of pleafure. 

— It (is better) to tell it him by word of mouth 
valoir mieuXyV. 

than to write to him. — I was fo much the more 

convinced of what you told me, that I difmiffed him 

renvoyer y v+ 

this day month. This day week I was 

(at your houfe.) — If you do not do it heartily, I 

chez vous 

will do it myfelf. — We faid it for fun. — That 
excepted, he has bought it very cheap. — Have 

* See the article indefinite. 



( BOO ) 

I not won fairly ? — You fee to how many 

gagner>v. 

dangers and how many reproaches we are liable. — 

expofe$. p. 

How dare you run about whilft your mother 

pendant que, c. 

(is waiting for) you ? — Mifs B. is handfome « never- 
attendre,v. 

theless I do not love her. — Put that aside. — He 

arrived very unseasonably.- — We went there 

against our will. They drank three bottles 

of wine one after another. — Let us walk on 

this side. — We learn on every side that peace 

(will take place) very soon. — Have they not been 
avoir y v. Iieu,m. 

beaten soundly ? — Come to-morrow morning 

to fee me. — I was lately (at your houfe,) and your 

brother took all that I faid to him in a wrong 

sense. — I have heard that your iifter will be married 

in a short time. — She was within, and I was 

without. — We were more than half dead. — Take 

all thefe papers and put them out of the way. — 

5Tou have put on your waiftccat the wrong side 

outwards. — I was flopped at noon. — We will 

tell him what we think in a proper time and 

place. — He did it in the twinkling of an 

eye. — I have written to your brother twice, but he 

has not yet anfwered my letters. — How many 

repondre^j. a 

times mall I be obliged to bid you (to) go there ? 

de dire } v. de 

— How 



( 501 ) 

^-Hovvi troublefome^ you^ are 3 ! — My brother kftGft? 
importuned}. 

the French thoroughly. — How long have yot: 

been in England ■? — How long did he learn French ? 

— How long had you been in Italy when you wrote 

to me ? — I have told vou so many times to write to 

your mother, that I am quite weary of repeating 

.fatigue,?.?. 

it. — Give him but little wine. — Is Mr. D. up 

stairs ? — Come this way.— How many miles 

are there from here to Hampton-Court ? •-— There 2 

muft 1 be 3 a great deal of game hereabouts. 
il aoityV* 'gibierjxi. 

—I will call upon your brother within a fort- 
paffer i v.che%^. 

night. — Come back immediately. — How forty 
Revenir,v. fdche&$ h 

I am for having difpleafed you ! — I never will fee him 
de 

again.— How far will you go ?— My mafter comes 
here every other day.— How long have you 

learned mathematics ? - — How far is it hence ? 

I mail go to Richmond in a fortnight.— How 
long do you intend to ftay there ?— If you <r 

fe propofer^v. refer ft* 
that way, you may ' call at Mr. H— \ 

pouvoir.x.pajfer^ chez,?. 
—How much I fhould be obliged to you if you would 
grant me that favour !— From that time I f aw 
him no more— I do not believe that he ever will 

follow your advice.— They are now in England.— He 
confeilyin. 

D d wiD 



.( 302 ) 

'Will not doit fob. less. — Thence I went to France, 
and soon after to Italy . — How long were you in 

apresjp* 

Germany . ? — She has written three letters in a trice. 
Alkmagne^L 

k — Virtue is amiable even in an enemy; — You 

clansfp. 

work better jhan your fifter. — She reads French 

better and better, but fhe writes worse and 

worse.— — The less you work, the less you 

will improve. — There are now in America 30,000 

faire des pr ogres. 

men at the least. — Did you fee Mifs Nicole's 

picture ? — It is drawn to the life.— tI (afked for) 
£ortrait } m. fait y p.ip. demander } v* 

a glafs of wine, and not a glafs of water. — How 
verrejxi. 

long have your brothers been at Mr. L— *s academy ? 

— Where did you meet them ? — Did not they tell 

you whence they came ? — Which way are they 

gone ? — I will neither fee them nor fpeak to him.— » 

The hole, through which they (made their efcape,) 

s'echapperfj. 
was fo fmall, that I do not know how they could get 

out. — I will follow you step by step. — Have you 

dined ? — Not yet.- — At last the rebels retired 

fe retireryY* 

into the woods with a great lofs. — The fight was 

dans^. bois,m. perte } L combat ^xa. 

.cruel and bloody, and (was kept up) a longtime 

fatiglant&&} . fe maintenir y x* *o> 
with an equal advantage on both sides.— If you give 

,me a verb, I will learn it uttjle by mttle.— She 

is 



( 203 } 

is as tall as you, or thereabouts. — Why did iiGt : 
you come sooner ? — How long has that gentleman 
been waiting for me ? — I have written three letters, 
neither more nor less.-— You- are ABOVE twenty^ 
years old. — You give me more than enough.— 
You come very seasonably.- — You are hardly 
ever at home." — How long did Mrs, B. wait for me ? 
— They killed him purposely. — How long has he 
been dead ? — I met himBY chance. — You fludy more 

than ever. — He gave me three yards of muflin 

• mouffelineS. 

into the bargain. — If I have done that . *o 

oblige you, I will much more so do it for her. — 

The more we are above others, the more it 

au-dejjus, de,p. 

becomes us to be rnodeft and humble. — Virtue reigns 

so much the more sovereignly as it does not 

reign by force and fear. — We dine most commonly 

between three and four o'clock. — Our eating-room is 
entre^. 

even with the ground. — Shall I begin upwards' 

or downwards ? — Begin upwards. — He has 

torn my book out of ill-nature. — When 

dechirer>v. 

fliall I have the pleafure to fee you ? — How long had 

de 

your friend been in his regimeftt wheii he died ? — How 



a 



long was he ill ? — To what purpose fhall I write 

to him ? — Why do you walk backwards ? — ■ 

marcher y v a 

You 



( 304 ) 
jfou a£LDOM come to fee us.— Do directly what 



VSH 



I bid you. — She has left all things topsy-turvy * 

dire 9 v. 

— He committed the murder in cool blood. — 

meurtreiteit 

We will dance by turns. — Do you believe it in 

GOOD EARNEST ? Go STRAIGHT ALONG. WHY 

do not you come to fee us now and then ? — Some- 
times I am at my uncle's in London, and some* 
chezjg. a.,ip. 

times at my grandfather's m the country. — You 
arrive too late. — She fpeaks at every turn 

without knowing what Ihe fays. — Have patience,. I 
jans^. f avoir ,v. 

hope you will fucceed one time or other. — I have 

(looked for) you every where. — She c#n find it 

chercher^ v. 

no Where. — He ftruck me with all his mighIt. 

frapperf?. 

— She is better than her fifter in all respects.-— 

I will follow you wherever you go. — Her 

* (by the fut.) 

misfortunes touch me to the quick. — My fifters 

malheur^m.. 

were quite tranfported with joy when they heard the 

de,ip.. 

happy news of the victory. — Go with all speed 

to Mrs. Lucas, and tell her to come direqtly.— - 
chez>\). de 

Here is my room; and there is yours, 

SECT 



{ SOS ) 

SECT. VII. 
Of PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepofitions are divided into the tliree following 
claffes. Firft, thofe that govern the genitive or abla- 
tive cafes. Secondly, thofe that govern the dative. 
And, laftly, thofe that govern the accuiative. 
/sFirft, the following govern the genitive or ablative. 
Autour de, about;, round. 
a Cauf e de, becaufe of, on account of. 
a Caufe de vous, delui, d'elle, de nous, &c. on your, his* 
a Cote de, aftde, by. her, our, &c. account* 

a Convert de, free, fecure, or fcreened, from. 
a Fleur de, clofe to, even with. 
a Force de^ by dint of. 
a Mains de, under. 
a Raifon de, at the rate of. 
h PAbrl de, fhei tared from. 
a VEgal de, to, in comparifon. 

a PEgard de, with regard, with refpeel; 5 as to, con- 
a la Faveur de, by means of. cerning, 

a PInfgu de, without the- knowledge of, unknown to, 

a la Maniere de,l . c r r . 

s , t\/[ j J > in or aiter the manner- or xamion, 

a POppofitede, orl . n 

Visfvhde j °ver agamfr. 

au Decade,! ,. r , 

t\ v j X on this fide. 
en Vega ae, J 

an Dela de, on that fide, on the other fids.'- 

ait Dehors de, out, without. 

an Dejfus de, above, over, upon, 

an Dejfous de, under, below. 

an Devant de, before. 

aller au Devant de, to go to meet. 

au Derriere de, behind, on the back part. 

au Dedans de, in, within. 

au Lieu de, inftead of. 

* This proportion is fometimes Engli fhed by i&ith : ex. 
II fleur e a force de rire, He cries iviih laughing". 

v. D d 2 



( 306 ) 

au Milieu, de, in the middle of. 

mu Prix de, en comparaifon de, in comparifon, for to*. 

aux Environs de, about, round about. 

Enfuite de y after. 

Faute de> for want of. 

h la Hauteur de> (fea-term,) offv 

Hors de> out. 

le Long -de, along. 

Loin de> far from. 

PreSy or Proche de, 7 • * , 

Auprh de, 5 near ' 0r ni S h > ^ 

pour l y Amour de moi, de lui> d'elle, de vous, life, for my* 

fake, for his, her, your, fake, &c> 

tout Aupres de, clofe, hard by. 

Secondly* The following govern the dative. 

Conformementy according, purfuant; 

Jufqu y a* or :?*..,! ., r 

% b J r < f till, until, even to, as far as, to. 

jujques a> j 

Par rapport a y with refpe£t to, on account. 

Quant a, as for* as to. 

Thirdly, The following require the accufative* 

Apresy aft en 

d'Apres, after.*" 

Avanty before. 

tAveC) with. 

a Tr avers , crofs, through., 

Chez, in, to, at, amongft. 

Chez tnoiy chez toiy chez luiy chez elle, chez nousy &Cy at or 

Contrey againft* to my, thy, his, her, our, &c. houfe° 

J Dans y in, into, within.f 

DeputSkf 

* We make ufejof this prepofition iii the following fenfe only. 

II peint cTapres un bpnmaftre, He paints after a good mafter. 

f The ufe of theie two prepohiions requires fome attention from the 
learner, who is to obferve, that dans always conveys a limited idea, and 
is followed by the article : ex. 
Jl eft dans la maifon. He is in the room. 

Mettez-le dans la bo'tte. Put it in the box. 

Mntrez dans la chambre^ Walk into the room.. 

Nous fommes dansr la province <te Y/e are in the county of Surrey. 

Surrey} 

En % 



( 307 



Depuis, fince, from. 

Derriire y behind. 

DeSy from. 

Devant, before. . 

de DejfitSy from the top. 

de Deffbujy from under, from beneath. 

JDuranty during. 

Etiy in, into, like, as, at.f (See the preceding page. ) 

Eufrey between. - 

Enversy towards, with regard to* 

Environ^ about. 

Exceptey T 

Horsy [-except, but, fave r . 

Hormisy j 

Moyennanty for,* provided. 

Nonobftant*~} . , r ,. - r-<*^ 

■n /T , J ~, ' > notwithftandinsj, m ipite, 
Malgre. 3 

Qntrey befides. 

Par, bv, through. 

/^r Deghy on this fide* . 

par Hela y on that fide. 

jtar Derriene y j behind; 

^r DeJfuSy about, over. - 

par Dejfousy under, below* . 

Parmiy among. 

Pendant , during, for, 

Poury for. 

Stf/zj-, without.* 

En, on the contrary, conveys a very determinate idea, a<nd feldom 
admits of the article, whether expreffed in English or not : ex. 
Eile ejl en Angleterre, She is in England. 

Nous logeons en ch ambr'e garnie. We lodge in ready-furnilhed lodgings, 
Eire en paix, en guerre^ To be i/z or a* peace, i// or of war. 

life conduit en roi, Ke behaves like a king. 

* This prepoiition- is fometimes rendered (in Engliih) by the pre- 
terite of the fubjunclive, or compound of the imperfect, of the yerb 
to be preceded by the conjunction?'/, and fometimes by but for : ex. 
Sans wousijenefaUcfr que je dc* If it *wete not for you, I do not 

viendrois ; .- know what would become of me. 

Sans hi, men f re re auroit [etepuni ; Had it not bun for him, my broth- 
er would have beenpunifhed 
£ans elle 'yjeferois mori de film ; But for her, I fnould have, beea 

AarvecL 

Satifc 



( 30'S' ) 

Sauf, faving, but with. 

Se/on, 7 j* 

o . > according to» 

ouivant, 3 

&w, under. 

S«r, upon, about. 

Touchant, concerning, about. 

Vers, towards, to. 



w 




OBSERVATIONS on some PREPOSITIONS; 

Above. This preposition, when preceding a noun 
expreffing time or number, fo as to be turned by more 
than or longer than, is to be made in French by plus de 
ex. 
Le combat dura plus de The fight lafted above two 

deux heures, hours. 

At is moft commonly rendered by a, and fome- 
times by one of the French articles, au, h la, a V, aux, 
according to the gender and number of the noun fol- 
lowing : ex. 

Nous etions a diner. We were at dinner. 

Vous rietiez pas au logis, You were not at home* 

or chez vous, 
Je vous payer at a la fin de I will pay you at the end 

Yannee, of the year. 

II ejl alle a Peglife, He is gone to church. 

On dit que vous jouez \fres~ It is faid you play very well 

bien aux cartesy at cards. 

After nouns or verbs denoting anger y derifiotiy joy^ 
provocationy rejeniment, forrovu, furprife, or concern, at 
is rendered by one of the following articles, de, du, de 
Idy de V, des : ex. 

life moque de vous, He laughs at you. 

"Je me rejouis du bonheur I rejoice at the good for- 

qui vous ejl arrive, tune that has befallen you. 

Nous fommes furpris de ce We are furprifed at what 

que vous dites, you fay. 

-Ais.madeby chez when, in Englifh, it precedes the 
word houfey either exprelTed or underftocd : ex. 

fetoh 



( 309 ) 

~fetois chez voire frere, I was at your brother's * 
Elle eji- chez fatante, She is <*/ her aunt's, 

that is, at your br other Yhoufe, at her aunt's houfe. 

A r . B\ The fame rule is to be obferve J with refpect 
to the prepoiition to. x 

yf By, when it precedes a verb in the participle active, 
is rendered by en : ex. 
Vous parlerez bientot Fran- You will foon fpeakFrench, 

fois en vous appliquant by applying fo. 

ainfi, 

By, after the verbs to fell, to buy, and the like, pre" 
ceding a. noun of weight or meafure, is made into French 
by a, auya la, a /', aux, according to the gender and 
number of the following noun ; ex. 
Nous ne vendcns rien a la "We. fell, nothing by the 

livre, pound. 

Vous achetez toujour s a. You always buy by the 
Yaune, ell. 

The above prepoiition, immediately following the 
verbs to kill, to wound* i-o knock down, and the- like, is 
mode into French by d y un coup de, when it exprefies tire 
effect, blow, thruft, ftroke, firing* &c. of an instrument 
by which a man was either killed, wounded, &c. provi- 
ded the blows have not been repeated : ex. 
11 fut blefc d'jrn coup de He was wounded by nn 

fee he, arrow. 

II fut ajfomme d*un coup de He was knocked down by 

pierre. a ftone. 

lis furent tues d'un coup They were killed by a 

de canon, cannon-ball. 

If the blows, Strokes, t-hrufts> &c. have been repeat- 
ed, we make-ufe of h coups de, in which cafe it is moft 
commonly rendered in Englifh by the prepoiition with : 
ex. 
lisle tuerent a coups de They killed him with dx- 

fteches. rows. 

& I'affbmma a coups de bd- He knocked him down 

tor^ with a-ftick.- 

For,, 



( 310 ) 

V ^9% a f ter refletled verbs? as alfo thofe which identfte' 
thankfgiving? &c. is rendered by one of the following 
articles, de? du? de la? des : ex. 

jfe me rep em de ce que fai I repent for what I have 

fatty done, 

II m* a prie de vous remer- Hedefiredmetothankyou 

cier de la part que vous a for the part you took in 

vez prife dans fori affaire? his affair. 

From, preceding the name of a man or woman? or 
one of the perfonal? poffeffive? relative? or interrogative? 
pronouns, after the verbs to go? to come? to fend, &c. is 
generally made in French by de la part de? or de ma? de 
fa, de notre? de voire? de leur? part :■ ex. 
De la part de qui venez- From whom do you come ? 

vous P 
ye viens de la part de I come from Mr. D — . 

M. D , 

Allez de ma part chez Ma- Go from me to Mrs. 

dame R , R *s. 

y/ In, after words denoting jtazVz, hurting? or wounding? 
ancf preceding one of the poffeffive pronouns in con- 
junction with any part of the body, is to be rendered by 
one of the following articles, a? au? a la? % V ? aux? and 
the poffeffive pronoun left out : ex. 
J'ai mal a la the? I have a pain in my head. 

II etoit bleffe au bras et non He was wounded in his 
a la jambe? arm, and not in his leg. 

In? when placed before the article the? preceding a 
noun denoting apart of time, is not to be expreffed at 
all in French : ex. 

Vous le trouvrez toujours You will always find him 
t chez lui le matin? at home in the morning » 

y* On or upov. This prepofition is made by de? after 
the verbs to depend? to live? to fubftfl? and the like : ex. 
II vit depain et d'eau? He lives on bread and water : 
and by one of the following articles, de? du? de la? deV? 
des? after the verb to play? preceding the name of an 
inftrument ; ex* 

Vous 



( 311 ) 

Yousjouez du violon, de la You play on the fiddle, on 
fiiite -, the flute. 

Before the days of the week and the names of the 
months, preceded by a numeral adjecltive, the above 
prepofition muft not be expreffed : ex. 
Venez Vendredi de bonne Come on Friday early. 

heure, 
Cela arriva le dix-huit du That happened on the 

tnois dernier •, eighteenth of laft month. 

On, preceding the words Jvot, horfeback, meaning the 
ftate of walking or riding, is rendered by a : ex. 
J etois a pied r , et elle etoit a I was on foot, and fhe was 

cheval ; on horfeback. 

Over is made by the participle paffive of the verbs 
Jimr,pafer,achever,when it denotes anadtion ended: ex. 
Votre frere partit Jes que Your brother fet out a s 

la pluiefut paffee, foon as the rainwas over t 

With is to be rendered by dans when it is ufed be- 
fore nouns denoting the purpofe, defign, or motive y in 
the agent : ex. 
Ille Jit dans I' attente d'etre He did it with an ex- 

bien recompenfe, peftation of being well 

rewarded. 
Mon frere ejl alle chez My brother is gone to your 

vous dans le deffein de houfe with a defign of 

bien vous gronder, fcolding you well. 

But it muft be made by de after the following verbs, 
tojlarve, to die, to do, to difpenfe, to meddle, to encompafs^ 
to furround, to loadyto accuje, to cover, toflrike, and thofe 
denoting fulnefs \ likewife after the following adje£tives* 
amorous, charmed, pleafed, difpleafed, endowed, &c. ex. 
Elle meurt de froid et de She ftarves with cold and 

faim, hunger. 

Us ne favent que faire de They do not know what to 

leur argent, do with their money. 

Jefuis content de ce quefai % I am pleafed with what I 

have. 

With is rendered by contre after words denoting anger 
or pajjton ; ex. 

Madame 



( 312 ) 



Madatne vdtre mere eft fa- Your mother is angry with 
chee contre vousy you. 

Withy before nouns denoting the matter 'y injlruments y 
tools y or expreffing how and in what manner a thing is 
done or made, is rendered by one of the following ar*- 
ticles, a, au 9 a lay al\aux> according to the gender 
and number of the following noun : ex. 
Une table a tiroirsy A table with drawers. 

Batir a chaux et a fable , To build with lime and 

fand. 
To draw with a pencil, 

with chalk. 
To fight with fwords, with 
piftols. 

The above prepofition is not to be exprefled after 
fome verbs, fuch as, to meet withy to fupply withy to re- 
proach withy &c. ex. 
II a ejfuye bien des chagrins-) 



Deffiner au crayon y a la 

eraiey 
Se battre a Yepee $ au pif- 

tolety 



He has met with many 

troubles. 
I reproached her with her 

ingratitude. 
We will fupply him with 
every thing he wants. 



jfe lui reprochai fon ingra- 

titudey 
Nous lid foumirons tout ce 

dontil aura befoitty 

It is likewife to be fupprefled when it exprefTes the 
fituatioriy pofitioriy &c. of a per fon, or when it is ufed in 
the fenfe of havingy holdingy &c. ex. 
i7 fe promene toujour s un He always walks with a 

livre a la main book in his hand ; 

that is, having or holding a book, &c. 

EXERCISES on the PREPOSITIONS. 

I have fent nothing to your brother because. of his 

idlenefs, but I forgive him on your account. — Sit 

down by that lady's fifter. — Though we are 

QuoiqueyC . ( in the fubj . ) 

near town, we are not yet secure from all danger. 

—He is become a very good mafter by dint of ftudy 

and 



319 



4nd practice. — — Cut that forrel Even with thfc 



o 



■eUle^t. 



-ground. — He will not fell it under, twelve guitl- 
terre, f. w»/«V,v. 

eas. — As to what fhe fays, I do not mind it' 



fefoucier dk,v, 



but I cannot help being furprifed at her manner 

s' ' empecher^r, 

of ahfwering. — All the prifoners (made their efcape) 

fechappertf. 

by means of the darknefs of the night. — Your broth- 
er wnV.?, f. 

er is gone to London without the knowledge 
of your mother.— Now the Englifh ladies (drefs them- 

s'habilkryV, 
felves) after the French fashion. — I give you 
all my books, except the Hiftory of France. —Why 
did you not play on the fiddle, on Friday laft ?— Do 
you not fay that you met my father on the other 
side of the bridge? — Yes^ I fpoke to him about 
your affairs, and I affure you, he acls as a tender fa- 
ther who loves you, —We how live on this side of 
the river ; and, if you come to fee me, we will fif« 

with a net or a line. -Mrs. A. is very proud, me- 
faet,m. hgne£> 

thinks herfelf above every body.— I am going to meet 
my aunt, will you go with me ? — He took my hat 
instead of his.-Let us go INTO the middle of 
the meadow.— You always travel by night at the per- 
il ot your life. _ Do not meddle with my affairs, 
meddle with your own. -As to US) little fatisfied 
^THrnsanfwersjwetook other meafures. - Yon 



ir 

E ? - horfe' 



( m ) 

liorfe (is worth) very little in comparison with his, 

He walks two or three times a day round the 

Jiis y f. % 

garden with a ftick in his hand, and only lives on 

milk and vegetables. We drank tea, after 

legumes,m. prendre?!. 

which we went to the play. -* — - 1 can do 

comedie^. pouvoir^v. fairest. 

nothing tor want of money. — How do you mea- 

fure your cambric, by the ell or by the yard ? — Do 
bati/le 3 £. *<z» 

not pufh me out of the room. — We will walk 
poujfer?. 

by the river. — They were off the Cape of Good 
Hope when they were taken : above five hundred 
men periihed in the a&ion. — We are ftill far from 
our houfe. — — I met your friend Mr. A. near the 
church. — My mother was buried near this marble 
pillar. — I do affure you (that) I do it for your 
sake. — On June the 8th, 1376, died Edward, prince 
of Wales, the delight of the nation, in the 46th year of 
his age. The parliament accompanied his corpfe to 
Canterbury, where he was interred. Ovid, one of 

the fineft poets of the Auguftan age, expired ih 

AuguJieyVd. siecle ,m. 

the feventeenth year of our Lord, at Tomi, near 

Varna, on the weftern coaft of the Black Sea, 

occidental &&). cotefi. 

whither he had been banifhed by the emperor Au«* 
0&r,adv. 

* Remember the obfervations after the article un, une, a or an. 

-guftu& 



( SM ) 

guftus. — Mrs. Fair lives in the Strand, oveu: 

demeurerft* 

against Catherine-ftreet. -My brother bought 

yefterday twenty pair of 111k {lockings at the rate 

of fourteen fliillings and fix-pence a pair. — He has 

been punifhed pursuant to an act of parliament — • 

farleinentjpx. 

We accompanied them as far as Barnet ; there they 

fought with fwor.ds and piftols \ your brother was 
fe battre, v. 

wounded in the arm, and my coulin in the head. — « 
As for me, I will not give him a penny. — He ar- 
rived here an hour after you. — Let me drink be- 

Laijferfj. 

fore you. — Did you not fee her walk with her father ? 
—■You miftake,they were both on horfeback. — Yefter- 
day I waited, from one o'clock till five, for the per- 
fon whom you were to fend to me ; I was beginning to 

grow impatient, when, at laft, I fawher coming in 9 

s' impatient er, v. enfin^zdv. 

> ■ Are you not fatisfied with the behaviour of 

contented) . conduit e y £. 

your fon Thomas ? — He behaved like an honeft 
man in that affair. — Mifs A, paints after nature* 
— Did fhe ihew you the picture fhe has drawn with 
Indian ink ? — No, but fhe fhewed me her mother's 
Chine,f. 

pi£ture done with chalk ; I affure you it is very 

craie,£. 

like. — — It was the ancient Britons who cut sm 
rejfemb/ant&d} . Breton ,m. 

road 



SI 6 
?oad yh&otch this mount am.-Wbe you going 

to Mrs, L — >'&?— — No, I am going to youra 

house i but, fincelhave met you, we will go to 

£*y house, where we will dine. — According to, 

what you tell rne, and what I have heard, fhe has a great « 

deal of wit and merit ; and, but for that large 

fear fhe has in her fbrhead, fhe would be very 

cicatrice , f. 

handfome. — A woman may pleafe without beauty, 
but fhe cannot fucceed without virtue. Do not 

lean against that wall, it is newly painted 

/appuyerjV. 

■with oil. — Go into my room ; you will find a 

letter behind the looking-glafs \ (be fo kind as) to 

miroir>m. avoir la bonte d& 

bring it to me. Do not put yourfelf before me,. 



<o-> 



and never fpeak to any body with your hat on your 

head. Go from me to Mrs. B.'s, and tell her I 

ihall be glad to fee her. No, ftay : tell her you 

come from my coufin, who has fomething to fhew 

her. — From this moment I believe you, but I was 
very angry with her when fhe told me fhe would 
fdche,zdv. 

not do it. Be not furprifed at it, fhe often has 

been accufed with indifference towards her befl: 

friends.' — I have read this book from the beginning 

to the end. — We faw the camp from the top of 

the hill. — They diffolved the army as foon as it 

was refolved that the campaign was over. — He al- 
ways 



( S17 ) 

ways goes out without me. — He poifoned his broth- 
er, with the hope of inheriting his eftates. — The 

heriter,v. blen^m. 

army marched three days and three nights without 
flopping. — On the 3d of June, 1664, the Englifh 

obtained a great vi&ory over the Dutch off 

remporter,v. Ho/landois^vn. 

Harwich, took eighteen fliips, and deftroyed fourteen 

more ._ — At laft the king, having broken his 

En/iriyTidv. 
battle-axe and fword by the force of h is blows, 
hdche d'armesyi. 

was knocked down with a ftone, and taken prif- 
renverfe, p.p. fatty p-p« 

oner. In what does happinefs 2 confift 1 ? — — If 



«-c^> 



you wifii to be happy and efteemed in this world, live 
like a man of honour and probity. Thence we 

went to France and Italy.— -It is reported on all fides 
that Paris is to- be- furrounded with walls. — My 
mafter comes generally in the morning. — We are be- 
tween fear and hope daily. — Be not unjuft towards 
your neighbours.. — It was about four o'clock when 

prochain y m. II 
we kt out. — Take all that you pleafe except my 
fword. — Upon what inftrument does your fifter play ? 
—She plays very well on the harpfichord, and fhe is 
now learning to play on the harp. — - He will do it for 
two guineas. — I thank you for your kindnefs. — In 

France they drink coffee as foon as dinner is oyer. — 
on 

I walk every day notwithstanding the bad wea- 

E e 2 ther* - 



( 218 ) 

ther. — I hope you will fucceed in your undertaking 
in spite of Mrs. Slander. — Besides his own money* 
hefpends all his fitter's. — It is faid that Gibraltar 

is blocked up by land and by fea. — I have palled 

b!oquer } v. 

through France and Italy. — Let us fee whether you 

\fiiX. 

can jump over the table. — You may go and walk 
fauter^v. 

when the rain is over. — William the Second was 
killed by an arrow in the New For eft. — We have 

paffed through Germany. — Look under the door 

Allemagnefi* 

and you will fee it. — Envy, jealoufy, and flander, 

medifance£» 

always reign among authors. — What have you done 

during my abfence ? — Your aunt has fent me fome 

books for you. — Without him what could I have 

done ? — He was fo mortified at the difobedienceof his 

fons, that, through grief, he became ill, and died. 

totnber 9 v.-. 

*— If it had not been for me, he would not have 

paid you. — Do I not live* according to the rule& 

^ vivre 9 v. regle^i. 

vou have prefcribed ? — I found your buckle under 
prefer ire^Y. boucle^.. 

the. chair. — You faid you had left it upon the ta- 

laijferfi. 

tic — I have no money about me. — Did he not 

write to you concerning that affair ? — It was to~ 

wards the evening when he arrived. 

* See the N, $, before the exercife upon the Srft conjugation. 

SECT, 



( 315 ) 

SECT. VIII. 

Of CONJUNCTIONS. 

Molt of the conjunctions are adverbs andprepofitions* 
but always attended by de or que. They have been di« 
vided into copulative, comparative, disjunctive, cdverfa- 
five, cafual, dubitative, exceptive, conditional, conttnu&- 
tive, conclufive, &c. Inftead of following this arrange- 
ment, it will be of more importance for the fcholar to 
underftand that different conjunctions require different 
ftates of the verb. Some require the following verb 
in the infinitive mood, others in the indicative, and oth- 
ers again in the j r ubjun B l ive. 
Thefe require the following verb in the infinitive mood* 

"Afin de, in order to. 

/ a Mains de* or 7 i r 
n/ v ■ Ti/r • t > unleiSc 

a JVLoins que ae, y 

Avant de* better ) L f 

* j c before. 

Avant que de, y 

Au lieu de, inftead of. 

De cramte de* or 7 r r r 

■p. j t tor rear ox. 

Ue peur de, y 

Except e de, except to. 

Faute de, for want of. 

Jufqii'a, to that degree that, till. > 

Loin de, far from. 

Pluto t que de, rather than. 

The following require the verb in the indicative, 

Ainfi que y * as. 

tout Ainfi que,* juft as. 

Apres que,* after that, after, 

a Caufe que* or 7 t_ r 

J 7 > became. 

parceque, y 

a Ce que* according as, or to. 

a conditio?! que,* on or upon condition that. 5 

a Mefure que,* m proportion as, as. 

Au lieu que, whereas.. 

Jujfttdi 



( 320 )) 



► in fuch a manner that, fo that, 



AiiflitSi que, "1 
D'abord que, \ ^ r 
Bisque, ^^sfoonas. 

Sitot que, J 

JDh le moment question moment that.- 
Au£i long-terns que, % as long as. 
Aujfi loin que,* as far as. 
Attendu que, considering that, feeing that, 
Comme, or 7 # 
Entant que, y 
Defagon que, 
De manure que, 
j De forte que, 
yL Si bien que, 
Tellement que, 
Depuis que, ever fince, fince. 
Puifque, fince. 
De me me que, even as. 
I D'ou vient que, how comes it to pafs that, why* 

Lor [que, or 7 ^ i 
*\ j c when, 

%hiana, y 

Mais, but. f 

Outre que j befides that. 

a Peine — que, hardly, fcarcely,- — but, than, or when* 

Pendant que, r^ m ft Me> 

lanats que, y 

Peut-etre que, perhaps* 

Quand, 7 -, ■ i_ 

> j „ > though* 

(Juana meme, y ° 

Que ->- de — ne, than, % only. 

Selon que, 7- * j* 

o . * , > ^according as. 

buivant que, y ° 

f This conjunction, when beginning a fentence, is always rendered 
by mats. In the middle of a fentence, the word but is always rendered 
by ne before the verb, and que after it. 

\\t has already been remarked in the degrees of cOmparifon, that 
every comparative mull: be attended by the- conjunction -que, than; it 
muft be now obferved,that, if que precedes a verb in the infinitive, it is 
to be followed by de. Bui if the verb be neither in, nor can be turned 
by the infinitive, the conjunction p muft then be attended by ne \ 
imi is, fue before the aouu or pronpun, aad m before the verb. 

Tant 



* 



™r+ 



( ; 321: V 

Tant que^ as long as. 

Autani que,* as much as. 

d'Autant que, whereas, for fo much as, fmce, 

d? Autant plus— que, fo much more, the more, — as. 

Toutefois, yet, nevertheiefs. 

Touies les fois que, every time, as often as, whenevei 

Sinon que, except that. 

Si, if, in cafe, whether. 

This laft conjun&ion, inftead of being repeated in a 
fentence, is more elegantly rendered by que, with the 
verb following it in the fubjunEllve mood, as, inftead of 
faying, 
Si vous venez chez mot, et If you call upon me, and 

fl vous neme trouvez pas, do not find me at home, 

it is more elegant to fay, 
Si vous venez chez mot, et 

que vous ne me trouviez 

pas, Zafc. 

Que mutt alfo be repeated in the fecond part of a 
fentence, as w r ell as the pronoun, w T h en : there is a con- 
junction in the firft part of it ; in this cafe que requires 
the following verb to be put in the fame mood as the 
preceding : ex. 
Des que je /'aurai vu et As foon as I have feen him 

que je lui aurai parle, and fpoken to him, I 

je vous leferai /avoir ; will let you know it. 

Quoiqu'il foit plus riche Though he he richer than 

que vous, et qu'il ait de you, and have better 

meilleurs amis ; friends. 

( # ) The conjunctions that have this mark affixed, 

rhen followed in Englifli, by a verb in the prefent 
:enfe of the indicative mood, and connected with an- 
other verb denoting futurity, require the verb, which, 
in Engliih, is put in the prefent, to be rendered, in 

French, by the future. 

ne following require the verb in the fubjunElive moocL 

X \ that, in order that, to the end that. 

Jrour que, J 

Avani que, before that. 

lu, or en casque, in cafe that, if, fuppofe that, 



*j[ a Molns que, f 
Excepte que, 
Si ce tfejl que, 
Que- -ne, 



i Bi 



( 322 ) 

i>unlefs, till. 



ten 



que, 



> though, although, for all that. 



Encore que, 

Quoique, 

Tout\ — que, 

Bien entendu que, with ■ a . provifo that, upon condition 

that, provided that, 
V* crainte que^l for f 
JDe peur que, J 
Dieu veuille que, God grant. 
Plaife or pliit a Dieu que, pleafe God, or would to God* 
a Dieu ne plaife, God forbid. 

■g^'^jfavethat. 
xiors que, J 

jfufqu'a ce que, till, until. 

Loin que, far from. 

JMoyennant que,! n v 

Pourvu que, J 

Nonobflani que, notwithftanding that* 

^Pour peu que,\uyw little foever. 

Sans que, without that. 

Soit que, whether, or, 

Suppofons que, let us fuppofe that. 

Xant s'enfaut que, it is fo far from. 



EXERCISES on the CONJUNCTIONS. 

In order to learn well, one muft ftudy with a 

devoir, v. 

great deal of attention. — It will be impoffible for you 



V5>> 



f Thefe conjunctions require the negation ne before the following" 
verb : ex. 
De cramte, or de peur^ qu'ils ne For fear they come. 

viennent, 
/I moins qifil ne le fa[fe, Unlefs he do it. 

\ See obfervations upon the pronouns indefinite, 

CO 



( 323 ) 

to learn French unless you be diligent. — Let lis 
de ^ 

breakfaft: before we begin (any thing.)-— He is gone 

*=* rien 

to church instead of coming with us. — I would 

not do it for fear of difpleafing you. — Far from 

exciting them to fight, I did all that I could to 

a fe battrey v. pour ft. 

prevent them. — She would do (any thing) (in the) world 

tout au 

rather than fpeak to him. — Hove you, because 



«<?-» 



you behave better than your brother does- — He 
fe comporter^v. 

will write to you on condition that he will fpeedi- 

prompte* 

ly receive your anfwer. — My mother will come 
mentydidv. 

to fee you, provided you promife me to go to the play 



<o% 



with her. — "We were hardly arrived when it began 
to rain. — I called at your fitter's as you (had) defired 
a P a jft r > v « 

me. — So that you faw her and fpoke to her. — She 
faid nothing to me, except that it was impoilible 
for her to do what you required of her. — When you 



=<5S 



are going to undertake an affair of importance, per- 
mit me to tell you that you ought to cdnfult you 

de confulteryV. 

friends before you begin it ; for, though you have 

good relations, your merit be known, and you do not 
parent l ,m. 

want 



; { §21 ) 

"wafit friends, your projects will not howevfc* 

manquer y v. de 

fucceed without your brother's affiftance. — Sometimes 

fecourS)VL\. 

ihofe, who meddle with bur affairs but to ferve us> 

are thofe who do u$ molt harm. — The misfortunes of 

fort,m. 

others feem to us but a dream in comparifoil 
fembler y v. . fonge y xxii 

to ours. —The belief of another life appears to me 

croyancefi* 

so much the more conformable to truth as it is 

'more neceffary to virtue. — —I will explain thefe 

rules to you as we read them. —-When fhehad 

done fpeaking, fhe (fell afleep.) — As soon as 
j?#i,p.p. de s f endormir y v. 

they had taken the general, all the army furrendered.— 

We will fet out as soon As we have dined. — As 

LONG as you (keep company with) thofe people, never 

frequenter ,v, 

come to my houfe. — How comes it to pass that 

I have not feen you till now ? — You (look at) me As 

regarder y v. 

if I had taken your book. — I avoid flanderers As 

eviter y v. medifant^m. 

much as I fear them. — As zealous a friend as he 

appears, I know one aflion of his life which is 

neither Chriftian nor equitable. — You are quite 

altered since I faw you laft. : You mult 

'change yipip* dermerement^dv. 

ftay at home, since you are* not well. — Did you 

* See the exc relies on the reflected verbs. 

not 



( 325 ) 

not fee Mr. Brown this morning ? Yes, but I 

could not fpeak to him. — If you could give me BUT 

the half of the money you owe me, I fhould be very 
much obliged to you. — How comes it that your 
fifter has not yet fent me the books I lent her a fort- 
night ago* ? As soon as I have drefled myfslf 

and breakfafted, I will go to fee him. — Your brother 
was f but twenty years old when he was made a cap- 
tain. — He had more experience than you have.— 

Send Mifs White to me when fhe has done writ- 

j£W,p.p. de 

ing. — Whilst you play and lofe your money, your 

fifter is learning her leffon. — We muft pity him who 

has no talent, and only defpife him who has no virtue. 

All men feek after riches, and yet we fee 

rechercher^ v. 

few rich men happy. Play on the harpfichord 

clavecin>m* 
while I write my letters. If you loved to 



a 



ftudy as much as you love to play, I fhould have 

(no occafion) to complain. — I punifh you as you de* 

aucun fujet ,m. 

ferve. — You will never be refpecled unless you 

forfake the bad company you keep. — As long as 

abandonnerjV, 

you behave well, you will be dear to me. — That 

fe co?nporter,v. 

would give me more pleafure than you imagine. 

s'imaginerff* 

* See the verb y avoir conjugated imperfonally. 
f See the remark after the verb Ure % to be. 

Ff 



( 326 ) 

I do not think that true philofophy may be lefs ufeful 
penfer,v. 

to women than men ; but I remark that the moft 

remarquer^v. 

part of thofe who meddle with it are but very bad 

fe me/er,v. de 

philofophers, without becoming better wives for it. — 

In fhort, faid this good king, I fhall only think myfelf 

happy inas much as I caufe the happinefs of my 

people. — How many people can only be convinced 

by experience ! The general arrived yefterday 

morning at the camp, weary and tired, but very fea- 

/<?j-,adj. 

fonably : immediately he gave his orders to be- 

pour ft. en- 

gin the action, though he had not yet all his 
gager, v. 

troops. They fought with obftinacy on both fides 

fe battreft. opinidtrete^. 

until the beginning of the night. I affiire you 
entree^.. 

that both our officers and foldiers have performed 

faire,v. 

prodigies of valour. — I fee the king and queen every 

time I go to Windfor. — If your father do not arrive 

to-cUy, and if you want money, I will lend you 

avoir befoin 

fame.— He interrupts me as often as I fpeak. — 

Besides that he never ftudies, and is always in the 

country, he has not fo much wit as his fifter.— If 

you fliould fee your fifter, and fpeak to her, &c.— I 

will explain to you every difficulty, (in order) that 



vou 

4 



( 327 ) 

you may take courage and learn well. — If you ftudy 

and take pains, I afTure you that you will learn the 

French language in a very fhort time. — Carry that 

money to Mrs. N. (in order that fhe may pay 

the writing-mafter when he comes. — Did you not 

receive your goods before war was declared ? — In 

cafe Mr. calls here, tell him I am not at home, 

pa/ftr ft. 

and aik him when he will come to fee me at Richmond. 

— You cannot finifh (to-night,) unless I help you. 

ce foir aider *, v. 

— if you love me, and are willing to oblige me, do 
not go to France with her. She {hail not go into 



V 

a 



the country unless I go with her. 1 will write 

again to your brother to-morrow, lest he has not re- 
ceived my laft letter. — I give you that penknife, on 
condition that you will not make a bad ufe of 
it. — I fliall not fet out till I have dined. — I will 

not lend it to you, unless you promife me to return 

de rendrejj* 
it to her foon. — They are not happy, though they be 

rich. — How comes it that, as we grow older, 

devenir^ v. 

we do not grow wifer ? If men were wife, and 

would follow the dictates of reafon, they would fave 

lumiere^L e pargner>v. 

themfelves many forrows. Though you fhould 

have the beft mafter in England, and learn all the 
rules of the grammar, if you do not put them in 
pra&ice you will never foeak good French. — We 

avoided 



( 328 ) 

avoided an engagement for fear, or lest, we 
eviterf?. 

fhould be taken, their force being fuperior to ours. — - 
This proceeding was the more extraordinary, as it 
was contrary to the laws of the kingdom* — Would 
tq God I had been there ! I would have conquered or 
perifhed. — God forbid I fhould blame your con- 
duel ! — God grant you may fucceed in all your 
undertakings, and be not difappointed in your hopes ! — 
Why did you tell me my father was arrived, not- 
withstanding you knew the contrary ? — —. 1 am 
going to write till we go out. — However little 
you give her, fhe is always pleafed. — I will give you 
leave to dance, provided you promife me not to 

overheat yourfelf. — Can you touch it without 
s'echaufer,v. 

my brother's perceiving it ? — Suppose we dine here 

to-day, and to-morrow at our houfe. He2 is fo 

far 1 from defpifing 4 hers. — Whether God raife up 

elever,v. 

thrones or pull them down, whether he 

aba'ijfer, v. 

communicate his power to princes or withdraw 

puijfance, f. retirer^. 

it to himfeif, and only leave them their own weak- 

nefs, he teaches them their duty in a fovereign man- 

de,p. 

ner and worthy of him. 

N. B. It is here neceffary to obferve, that verbs de- 
noting wijhy willy command, defire> doubt, fear, igno- 
ranee, entreaty, perjuafton, pretenfion, furprife, Sec. al- 
ways 



( 329 ) 

I 

ways require the conjunction que after them, with the 
following verb in the fubjunhive mood. In fhort, in 
thofe difpqfitions of mind where the will is chiefly con- 
cerned, or whenever we exprefs a thing with fome de- 
gree of doubt or hefitation x then the verb, which, inEng- 
iifh, is put in the infinitive mood, the participle adlive, 
or the future tenfe, muft, in French, be put in the 
fabjundtive mood : 

Je veux qu'zV faffe cela, I will have* him do that. 

Je doute que vous le faffiez, I doubt of your doing it. 
Je ne crois pas quW/?yi- I do not believe fhe will 

enne, come. 

See FALLOIR, and the rules after it. • / 

Qui) que, or dont, preceded by a fuperlative, require 
the following verb in the fubjundtive mood : ex. 

Cejt, la plus ho&efemme She is the handfomejl worn- 
quipuhTe fevoir, or que an that can be feen, 

je connoiffe, or thai I know. 

When qui ftands as a nominative to a verb, denoting 
a condition, it alfo requires the following verb to be 
put in the fubjunctive mood : ex. 

Je veux une femme, qui foit I will have a wife that is 

be lie j handfome ; 

that is, on condition, provided, flie be handfome. 

* It may be feen, by this infhmce, that, after the verb vculoir, the 
verb to have is not expreiTedjbut rendered in French by que. It muft 
alfo be obferved, that the fign of the future tenfe /tail, when it refers 
to the will of a perfon, and meaning L-chocfsyl do not cbcofc, do you 
ehoofe t &c= muft be rendered in French by the prefent tenfe of the 
indicative mood of the verb vouloir, according to the number and per- 
fon, with the following verb in the fubjunvfuve mood : ex. 
Je veux que vous me montriez cette Y onfall fliew me that letter, that 

letir^ is to fay, I cloofe you fhould fhew 

me that letter. 
J« ne veue pas que voire frere forte Your brother fall not go to- 

aiij 'our d 'but, day. 

Voulez-vous queje danfe ? Shall I dance r that is to fay, do you 

cboofi I fhould dance ? &c. 

F f 2 EXERCISES 



{ 330 ) 
EXERCISES upon the preceding RULES. 

I do not believe that your mother will arrive to-day. 

'-•-She wifhes you may fucceed in all your under- 

pouvoirj?. 

takings.^~You would have her return to-morrow, 

vouloirff. reveniryV. 

but that is impoflible. — I fear ihe (will go away) 

craindreyV. s'en aller. 

without fpeaking to me. — I will have your father know 

what you have done, you muft ftay here till he comes. 

refter y v* 

—I much fear he will come fooner than you expect 

attendre?]. 

him. — Do you not fay you are furprifed that he has not 

written to you ? for my part, I do not wonder at it \ for, 

quant a moi y 

he is the moft negligent man I know. — Do you think 

he will fucceed and obtain the place he aims at ? — 

ajpirer,v. 

Your mother would have you come directly : why 

vouIoir 9 v. , 

do you not come then ? — You wifh him to pay you y 

he has no money ; I am obliged to lend him fome every 

de 

day.- — You have had much trouble, and we all fear 

left hereafter he fhould give you much more.— If you 

believe him to be your friend, why then do you not 

follow his advice ?— It is neceffary for you to go there* 

que 

and aflfure him that he has done nothing that ought 

devoir^. 

(to 



( S31 ) 

(to make me angry.) — I wonder that Mr. R. has not 

fdcher>v. 

yet afked your lifter in marriage. — He is the moft 
charitable man we have in the neighbourhood ; his 
purfe is always open to any one who is poor and in- 

duftrious. — Did you not tell me you (fought for) a 

chercherjj. 

mafter who had a good pronunciation and a great deal 

of patience ? — I know nobody that improves 

faire des progres 

more than Mifs K ; and, when fhe was learning 

French, had fhe learned it by rule, fhe would fpeak, 
write, and tranflate, now much better than Mifs S — , 
though fhe was two years in France. — If you meet 
her, and* fhe fpeak to you, do not anfwer her. — Or- 
der her to do it. — I abfolutely intend that fhe fhall 

vou/oir^v, 

go there directly, and tell him, that, whether he be ill 
or well, I will have him fet out as foon as he has receiv- 
ed my letter. — Do you imagine we are fure they 

s'imag'merft. 

will come to-night ? — I will have you fee my houfe, 
and tell me what you think of it. — Has not your broth- 
er fome friends to whom he can truft ? — Do you 

fefier y Y. 

think it is poffible for you (to bring it about ?) — 

£roire>v. de en venir a bout^Y* 

Your father has bought the fineft horfe that I have ever 

feen.-»-It isjuft we fhould fu£Fer, fincewe deferve it. 

fouffrir^v. meriierfJ. 

* See the remark on the coniun<5Uon //, if. 

—i 



( 332 ) 

-— I do not fay I have feen it. — He (was afraid) left 

craindref?. queue 

you fhould come whilfr. he was (gone out.) — You did 

fortirft. 

not think that fhe wanted to deceive you when fhe 

vouloir^v. 

told you that ? — I wonder you fhould doubt that 

etre furpriS)V. 

it is your daughter who, &c. — Is there any lady of 
five-and-twenty years that appears more reafonablethan 
fhe does ? — My father would have me walk all the 



«<2>-> 



way. — Our matter has ordered that we fhould get up 
to-morrow morning early.— Co you think my mother 
will let us go to the ball next week. — four fifter 
fhall go with me to Croydon, and not you. — If you ever 
choofe a friend, I wifh you may choofe one whom you 
efteem, and who may be an honeft man.— Were Mr. S. 
difcreet and willing to undertake that affair, I would 
communicate it to him immediately. — It will be better 
for you to go and fpeak to him yourfelf whilft he is in 
town ; I do not doubt of his undertaking it, he is the 
moft diligent and the moft careful man we have in this 
country. — However, I would not have you do things 
too precipitately : confult fomebody who is your friend 
and on whom you can rely. — Were I certain that you 
would fpeak to him about it, I would defire him to 
come and dine with us to-morrow ; for, I am to fee him 
to-night at his brother's. — Shall my brother fhew you 

his tranfiation ?— Do you know any body who is going 

to 



( 333 ) 
to France ? I have fomething to fend to my fifter.— - 



a 



Yes, I know a gentleman who is going to Paris : fliall 

I tell him to (call upon) you ? — I am certain that he 
cle p offer chez fur >adj. 

will fatisfy you : are you certain he will fatisfy me r — 

Your uncle is very glad you have written to your father. 

-— I will give you no reft unlefs you be reconciled with 

que ne 

your mother. — If you do not follow my advice, be- 
lieve me, it is the greater! misfortune that can happen 
to you. — -I do not believe it is fhe who has done it. 

Do you believe it ?— Babylon was the fmeft city 

that ever was built.— The beft reafon I can give 

pouvolryV. 

you is, that I was not well. — If you lend me % 

fe porter yv. 

horfe, lend me one that goes well. 



t mm § i i Jwtrag'sBSgaL.asa^iai 



SECT. VIII. 



Of INTERJECTIONS. 

Interjections, as before obferved, ferve to exprefs 

the fudden emotions of the foul. 

There are feveral forts, viz. 
Of joy , grief ] pain, admiration, aver/Ion, filence, call- 
ing, encouraging, warning, &c. fuch as, 

Allons, gai ! come, be cheerful ! 

fa, courage ! come, come on ! 

Bon ! good ! 

Ah, mon Dieu ! oh, my God ! 

Ah, ouida ! zy, marry ! 

Ha, quelle joie ! oh, joy ! 

o ciel ! O heaven ! 

Fi ! fie ! fy upon ! 

Hola, ho ! ho there ! Malheur 



( 334 ) 

Malheur a ! woe to ! 
Mifericorde ! blefs me ! 
Prenez garde y garde ! have a care ! 
Paixy chutyjlyjl ! hift, hufh ! 
Silence ! filence ! - 

EXERCISES upon the INTERJECTIONS. 

Come, friends, let us rejoice ! — Good ! here are 

fe rejouiryV. 

news for you, brother. — Fy, fy ! Robert, you do 

not think of what you fay. — Oh ! that modefty is 
penfer>v. a que 

a lovely virtue ! Why do you not endeavour to ac- 

s 9 efficrcer y v. de ac- 

quire it ? — Alas ! who could exprefs the torments 

querir*y. 

I fuffer here ? — Woe to you ! ufurers, mifers, un~ 

ufurierym, avare>m. 

juft pofleiTors of (other people's) goods, hearken tothefe 

autruiy^ro. bieriym.ecouteryW ^ 

words, The treafures of iniquity (will be of no fervice) 
parole yi. ne fervir de rien 

to you.—- Oh ! (lazy people*) go to the ant, con- 

parejftux tj zd]. jfourmiyf. 

fider what flie does, and learn from her wifdom and in- 

duftry. — Bless me ! I am undone !— Hush there ! 

perdu } ip op. 

silence !— Oh ! the difmal effecls which lazinefs 

fnuejlep^y 

produces ! — How 1 tremendous 8 an 2 office 3 is? that 

terrible ^adj. le ^>> 

of 4 a5 judge 6 ! What wifdom, what integrity, what 

knowledge, what fagacity of mind, what experience, 
fcienc£yi. 

(are required !) 
nefaut-il pas avoir ,v. 

REMARKS 



( 535 ) 

REMARKS and EXERCISES on the Words 

de, a, and pour. 

Having, in this manner, gone through the refpective 
parts of fpeech, there will be no necelfity for a fyntax. 
It will however be neceffary to give fome rules for 
afcertaining the proper ufage of the particles de or a 
and the prepofition pour, before a verb in the infinitive 
mood, and then to point out, by way of exercife, fome 
idiomatical expreffions that moft frequently occur in the 
French tongue. % 

When two verbs come together in a fentence, the 
latter, having no facjecl exprefTed or underftood, muft 
be put in the infinitive mood, whether the Englifh fign 
to be prefixed or not. 

In the following cafes, the infinitive mood muft nev- 
er be preceded by a particle. 

Firft, when the verb in the infinitive (lands nomina- 
tive to another verb : ex. 

Aimer eft un verbe, To love is a verb. 

Secondly, after the followng verbs, aller, crcire> de- 
voir , faire, il Jhut, /avoir , valoir mieux> venir, pou- 
voir, ofer y vouhir, and penfer> when rendered by to be 
like or near. 

EXERCISES upon this RULE. 

To know how to give feafonably is a talent every 



<-o> 



body has not. — To be able to live with one's felf, 
and to know how to live with others, are the two great 
fciences of life. — I had rather do it now than later. 



aimer tnieux 3 v. 



—Why dare you not undertake it ? I think you may 

pouvoir,v. 

The great number of idiomatical expreffions in the French lan- 
guage has long been coniidered as an aknofl: infuperable difficulty in 
the way of its eafy acquirement ; however, this difficulty is daily 
decreafing ; thefe peculiar expreffions are now giving way to a reg- 
ular conftructicm, and are very little ufed by the bell writers. 



y little lueu oy 

fucceed. 



( 336 ) 

fucceed. — He fays he will lend you his gun with all 
reujfir,v. fujil,m. 

his heart, becaufe you know how to make ufe of it. 

fefervir>\. 

— Ariftotle, though fo great a philofopher, was never 

able to penetrate the caufe of that prodigy. — Tell him 

that he may fet out when (he pleafes.) — You never 

il luiplaira,v. 

could come more feafonably. — We are to go to 

pOUVOir, V. 

Vauxhall to-morrow. — I am going to fee your brother. 

— (Is it not better) to fet out now, than to wait 

valoir mieux>v. de attendre,v. 

any longer ? — If you think to oblige her, youmiftake. — 
plus fe tromper y v. 

We were to have had a ball yefterday, but my lifter 

was not well. — You did very right ; for, you ought 

bien&dv. car,c. devoir,v. 

not to fpeak to him. — I had like to have fallen 

penfer>v. 

twenty times coming here. — To inftrudt, to pleafe, 
and move the paffions, are the three principal qualifica- 
tions requifite in an orator. — If you would read this 

vou/oir>v. 

book, I could lend it to you for four or five days. 

pouvoiryV. 



The particle de is put before a verb in the infinitive 
mood : firft, when any of the following words, of, from, 
or with, are ufed before the participle active of any 
verb. (See the N. B. upon the participle active.) 

Secondly, after a noun fubftantive joined immediately 
to a verb, either without any article at all, or with the 
following articles, le, la, or les. 

Thirdly, 



( 337 ) 

Thirdly, after thefe and the like adjectives, decent, 
glad, impoffible, neceJfary,forry, worthy, vexed, &c. 

Fourthly, after the following verbs : to advife, to ap~ 
prehend, to bind, to ceafe, to command, to conjure, to counfel, 
to defend, to defer, to deferve, to defhe, to endeavour, to 
entreat, to fear, to hajlen, to long, to order, to permit, to 
perfuade, to pray, to pretend, to promife, to propofe, to re- 
fufe, to remember, to threaten, to tell, to warn, to under- 
take, &c. and the greateft part of the reflected verbs. 

And, laftly, after the conjunction que, preceded by 
-the comparative degree* 

EXERCISES on this RULE. 

I have defired your brother to lend me fome money. 
prier,\. 

— My mother ordered me to tell you to go and fpeak 

ordonner,v. c^ 

to her dire&ly. — Did you not permit him to go out 

fortir,y, 
this morning ? — I am furprifed to find you fo ill. I 

have not defired you to play'. — Bid your fifter to 

Dire,v. a 
fend me my book.— We were afraid of difpleafing 

you. — What do you advife me to do in fuch a cafe ? 

conJeiller,v. 

— My fifter and I intend to (call upon) you on Fri~ 

pajer,v. chez,p. 
day next. — I am very glad to hear you are bet- 

apprendre,v. 
ter. — She does not pretend to fpeak French as well 

fe piquer,\* 

as you. — We are tired of repeating to you the fame 
things fo often. — If you finifli your exercife foon, you 
will have the pleafure of walking, whilft the others will 

G g have 



( S38 ) 

have the trouble of working. — It is neaeffary to t 

her not to go there (any more ;) for, fhe would be in 
ns pius,zdv. 

danger of loiing her life. —Endeavour to pleafe your 



a 



matters by your application to ftudy. — Do you not 

remember having raid you would carry me to the 
de metier > v. 

camp r — Do they not deferve to be encouraged, who 

meriUr,vt 

undertake to ferve the public ? — We are all glad to 
hear you have overcome your enemies ; we fhould have 
been forry to have heard the contrary. — What a fool 



*o> 



you are to grieve fo, when you have fo much reafon 
s y affliger,v. 

to rejoice ! — Never expe£t to fpeak French well, unlefs 

you pradlife very much, — I fhall never refufe to do 

rendre^v. 

you a fervice, as long as it is in my power. — Have you 
a mind to do what you have promifed me ? — I can- 
*^ eiivie % i* 
not give you the book you afked me for, my brother 

has not (thought fit) to fend it to me back again. — 
fuger a-propQS>\. 

I defired you to bring your frfter with you % why did 

you not ?* — -I forbid you to fpeak or write to him 
defendre 9 v* 

(anymore.) — Would you not be very glad to read 

davantagefidv. 

and fpeak Italian ? — Condemn the opinion of no one 

* Do it is undcrdcod, and miifl be exprefTedin French. 

haftUy, 



( SS9 ) 

haftily,but endeavour to regulate your ovm by the 

s'ejforcer.yy* 
line ox truth. —Who can Kinder me- from , fpeaking 
^ ^s verhe,L empecherfi* 

or writing to her ? — (Give me leave) to tell you that 

Permetiri^v* 

you do very wrong to difoblige your aunt. — He 

mal&dv. 

(was not contented) to demolith the temple and pull 
fe conUnUr y v. #■* 

down the ftatufcs, but, &c. — Is there any thing 
battre,v. 
more glorious than to change anger into friendship ?— * 

(I long) to fee your mother, and tell her all that I 
II me tarde,v. 

think (about it.) 
en, pro. 

The particle a is to be placed before a verb in the 
infinitive mood : firft, after the auxiliary verb avoir* 
to have, immediately followed by a fubftantive or an 
adverb, expreffing a futurity in the action ; ex. 
J-'ai plufiehrs lettres a ecrire, I have many letters to write. 

Secondly, after nouns fubftantive joined to the verb 
avoir, or nouns adjective joined to the verb eire, figni- 
fying to be addiEled, apt, bent, diligent, difpofed, dreadful ^ 
eafy, fit, hard, inclined, quick, ready, fubjeff, ufed, &c. 

Thirdly, after the following adjectives, admirable^ 
good, dexterous, handfome, fcarce, the lajl, the fir/}, the 
fecond, &c. 

And, iaftly, after the following verbs, to amufe, to 
afpire or aim at, to begin, to condemn, to continue or go 
on, to compel or force, to defign or defiine, to difpofe, to' 
employ or fpend, to encourage, to engage, to excite, to ex-> 
hart) to help, to induce^ to invite, to learn, to pleafe, to 

ferve^ 



( 340 ) 

ferve, to take a pie afar e y a delight, in or to, to teach, to 
think, &c. 

EXERCISES ON the preceding VERBS. 
Come here, Paul, I have fomething to communi- 
cate to you. — "We have much to fear in our prefent 
fituation, and a great many hazards to run. — I cannot 
go to the play to-night \ for, I have five or fix vifits to 

pay. — . Is there any thing pleafanter to behold than the 
rendre,v* 

flux and reflux of the fea ? — We ought to learn how 



^^» 



to fubdue our paffions, to conquer our defires, and to 
fubjuguer,v* 

fuffer patiently the moil cruel misfortunes. — She is 

difgrace£. 

always the firft to (find fault) with what I do. — 

trouver a redire a 

Do not gather that apple, it is not yet good to eat.— 

Mr. N. told me you had a country-houfe to let. — 

Iouet*,v« 
Mr, F. is a very agreeable man, always ready to ferve 
his friends, but he has the misfortune to be inclined 
to gaming, — Your mafter does, not love you, becaufe 
your are not diligent in learning your leflbn. — We had 
for a long time nothing to eat but the fruits which 
we had gathered. — The greateft part of menfpend 
their time either in doing nothing, or doing what they 
ought not to do. What you fay of her is very 

hard , to be believed. — Tell him, I have no com- 
difficile&d!]. 

plaint to make about his condud. — Why do you oblige 

de 

her 



( 3* 1 ) 

her to afk my pardon fince ftie is not inclined to do it 

herfelf ? —I believe ihe takes delight in tormenting 

me . Life is fo fhort that we fliould employ all our 

days in preparing ourfelves for the other world. — - 

There is no more danger to fear. — Ufe yourfelf, faid 

s'accoutnmer??. 

a father to his ion, to praclife virtue; that alone will 

help you to bear with patience all the viciffi- 

fupporicr{\, 
tudes of fortune. — Never arnuie yourfelf in reading 

bad books. — You can never fpend your time better 

pajftr,v. 

than in reading and ftudying the hiftory of your 

own country. — Learn to fpeak well ; but above, all, 

to fpeak truth. — That fcien:e* which teaches us to 
dire,v* 

fee things as they are, is highly worthy of cultiva- 
tion. — An hone ft man always takes pleaflire in oblig- 
ing his friends. — « Does your rnafter teach you tc 

translate En^rlifh into French ? Do you begin to 

traiiflate French weil ? — Why did you not oblige him 
to pay you what he owes you ? — — Why do ye not 

(get ready) to fet out with us ? — I love. to difequrfe 
fappritergj. ._ s\eutretenir$T.*» 

* 

with polite and feniible people. 

N. B. For the fake of euphony, the following verb?-, 
to begin } to continue > to cG?ijirain y to engage 3 to exhort, t$ 
compel or force, to endeavour } tcoblige 3 may be. lucceeued 
by de or a, as nioft convenient 






The preprofition pour is to be ufed before a veto hi .. 

&e infinitive mood, when it exprefies the cdufs $ the de* 

Gg-2 J m 



( 342 } 



n> or the end, and then the Englifh particle to may 
be exprefled by in order to, to the end, or for to. This 
prepofition is alfo ufed after the adverbs enough, onpur- 
pofe, too, too muchy or lefs ; and before an infinitive, ill 
the beginning of a period. 

EXERCISES on these RULES. 

I will do every thing in my power to pleafe him.— 
Mrs; B — has too much pride to confefs £he (is in the 



avoir 



wrong.) - — To know geography well, one muft, &c~ 
tort 

— -I allure you that I came on purpofe to fee you. — 

She will do all that is in her power to oblige you, and 

to prove to you that fhe is truly your friend. — The 

wicked live to die, but the righteous die to live.— She 

has vanity enough to believe all that you tell her. — 

What makes the misfortune of kings, is not to have 

friends bold enough to tell them the truth. — I wrote 

to you fome time ago, to let you know that your 

fairest. 

brothers were arrived. — He promifed me that he would 

do every thing to defer ve the honour of your protection. 

— I fent yefterday^my fervant to your aunt's, to defire 

her to fend me back again the book I lent her a month- 

ago, but fhe was not at home. — We did all that 

faire,v. 

we could t© pafs the river, but could not (bring it 

venir a 

about.) — To convince you that I am ready to do you 
bout de y v. 

any fervice, (be fo kind as) to command me. — - Why 
avoir la fonts de 

did 



{ 343 ) 

did you not punifh her forhaving done what youforbade 

her to do ? — A man fhould live a century at leaft 

vivre,v, Jiecle^in. 

to know the world, and many other centuries to know 

how to make a proper ufe of that knowledge. 



<<^> 



IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS on the VERB 

AVOIR, TO HAVE, &C S 

Avoir mal a la tete, to have the head-ache, or a pain in 

one's head- 
Avoir 'mal aux oreilles, to have fore ears, or a pain in 



one's ears. 



Avoir mal aux yeux, to have fore eyes, or a pain in 

one's eyes. 

Avoir mal au nez, to have a fore nofe, or a pain in 

one's nofe. 

Avoir mal h la bouche, to have a fore mouth, or a pain 

in one's mouth. 

Avoir mal aux dents, cjjV*- to have the tooth-ache, &Co 

We fay, after the fame manner, 
Avoir froid aux mains, aux pieds, &&v ex.-. 
jf'aifroida la tete, aux My head, my hands* and 

mains, et aux pieds, my feet, are cold. 

Avoir beau, to be in vain : ex. 

Vous avez beau parler, It is in vain for you Xo talko 

Avoir beaucoup de peine, to have much ado- 

Avoir de la peine a : ex., 

J'ai de la peine a vous croire, I can hardly believe you* 

Avoir befoin de, to want, to have occafion for. 
Avoir la bonte de, (daigner, J I to be fo kind as* 
Avoir conmijfance, avis, de, to have notice of. 
Avoir cours, to take, to be in vogue. 
Avoir la mine de, to be like, to look like : ex. 
Vous avez la mir»e d'etre Tou look like a man of un« 
intelligent^ derftanding* 

Avoir 



r 



{ 3** ) 

Avoir pi tie de 3 to pity. 

Avoir part au gateau, to fhare in the booty. 
Avoir bonne mine, to look well : ex, 
Vous avez tres-bonne You look very well to-day. 
mine aujourd^hui, 

Avoir plus depeur que de *Mtf/,tobe.moreafraidihanhurt. 

Avoir raifon, to be in the right. 

Avoir forty to be in the wrong. 

N'a voir que f aire de, to have no occafion or bufinefs of 

or for. 
W avoir garde de, or 7 are ex- 1 to be fure not, or 
Se garder bien de, § prefTed by 5 by no means. 

Allerfon train, to go one's own way. 

Aller trouver quelqu'un, to go to fomebody. 

Venir trouver, to come to. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 

I could not call upon him this morning, becaufe 
I had a pain in my head.- — My brother would 
have come with me, but he has a sore leg, and 
is obliged to keep his bed. — - 1 heard your, mother 
had the tooth-ache : is it true I — No,, madam, 
but fhe has a pain in her fide, which prevents her 
from going out. — I have not yet finiihed my exercife ; 
for, my hands were so cgld that I could not write. 
another word $ befides that, I had much ado to find 
my books ; I did not know where to look for them.— ■ 
It will be in vain for you to write to me, I never 
will anfwer you. — I can hardly believe what you 
tell me. — It is in vain for me to fpeak to her, fhe 
ftill goes her own way. — Mifs N. cried very much 

;erday, but I think fixe was more afraid thah 



— 



2L 



( 345 > 

hurt. — It has been in vain for him to torment 
your fifter, £he never would tell him what happened to 
her when {he was at Mr. P — 's. — Go to him, and 
tell him that, unlefs he returns me my books in a very 
lhort time, I will defire his father to fend them to me ; 
when you have told him that, do not wait for his 
anfwer ; come to me immediately, I fhall be at your 
mother's, where I am to dine, and thence go to the 
play with the whole family. — In vain I give myfelf 
trouble, I am not the richer for it. — Your lifter 
does not look so well to-day as £he did yefterday. — 
Am I not in the right to go there no more. — I 
will take care to prevent them from coming here. 
— Believe me, I have long fufpefted them, and now I 
am very certain that both your coufins and they have 

HAD A SHARE IN THE BOOTY. YOU ARE IN THE 

wrong not to alk for his horfe, he would lend it to 
you. — Why fhould I borrow his horfe, when I have 
one of my own j — I have no occasion for his* 

— Be so kind as to carry that letter to Mr. H V 

but be sure not to tell him who fent you. — I hope 
you will by no means go there again, after what has 
happened to you. — He was fo altered, that fhe had 
much ado to recollect him, but he now begins to 
look very well. — Somebody having advifed Phil- 
ip, Alexander's father, to banifh from his ftates a man 
who had fpoken ill of him ; I shall by no means do 
it, anfwered he ; he would go every where and fpeak 
ill of me c 



Oh 



< 



( M6 ) 

On ETRE? to be. 

Cajbn aife, "J 

Eire -2 en bonne pciffe, > to be in good circurn** 

(lien dans fes affaires, \ fiances. 

Eire lien aupres de quelqiiun, to be hi great favour with 

one. 
Eire tnal avec qitelqtfun, to be out with one. 
Eire a charge a quelqttun, to be chargeable^ trouble- 

fome, or a burden, to one. 
Eire but a but> to be equal. 
Eire de moiiie^ to go halves. 

Eire a laportee du fujil, du canon, to be within gun-fhct. 
Eire a la port ee de la voix, to be within call. 
■p C a la veille de, ") to be upon the brink, 

\furle point de, 3 or very near to. 

Eire en etat de*~) rr 1 

j • / > to afford. 

Avoir le moyen^ j> 

EXERCISES upon the preceding IDIOMS. 

Your brother is in good circumstances now.-— 
Somebody told me he was in great favour with 
the king. — Yes, it is true, but he is out with my 
father, becaufe he is troublesome to the family. — 
Well, Mr. R. and he are equals. — I thought Mr* 
A. and Mrs D. went halves in that affair, but I 
heard the contrary. — Suffer me to tell you, you do very 
wrong to treat her as you do, you undoubtedly muft 

have forgotten fhe is in the queen's favour.— 
Well, if fhe be in the queen's favour, do you imag- 
ine I am not to tell her what I think of her conduct ? 
— The two fleets were within gun-shot, and 
very near beginning the engagement, when we left 
them. — We will be within call. — Why do you 
not take a coach now and then ? faid fhe to me. — I 

would* 



( 347 ) 

would willingly take one fometimes, replied I to her, 
but I cannot afford it. 



Ox'Fj4IRE> TO MAKE; OR DO. 

Faire cas de, to value, to elteem. 

Faire un ions' de promenade ', to take a walk. 

Faire le malade, to fham ficknefs. 

Faire I* e cole buijfoniere, to play truant. 

Faire beaucoup de chemin, to go a great way. 

Faire le be! efprit, to fet up for a wit. 

Faire fond fur quelquun, to rely upon one. 

Faire J avoir ', f envoy er dire, J to let one know, to inform^ 

Faire voile t or ? .. r <- r i *° ^ enc ^ word. 

JYLettre a la voile ', y 

Faire faire, to befpeak, to get made, to oblige one to do, 

Faire de Jon mieux, to do one's beft. 

Faire femblant, to pretend. 

Faire de fon pis, to do one's worft. 

tie Faire que de, to be juft, or 

venir de, to have but juft : ex. 

77 rte fait que d'arriver, He is but jujl arrived. 
tie Faire que, to do nothing but. 

fe Faire des amis, des ennemis, to get friends, enemies, 
fe Faire des ajf aires, to bring one's felf into trouble. 
/en Faire accroire, to be conceited, to have a good 

opinion of one's felf. 
c f en eft Fait de moi, I am undone, it is over with me. 
e'en etoit Fait de lui y he was undone. 
e'en /era Fait d'elle, {he will be undone. 
cen feroit Fait de nous, we fhouli be undone. 

The Englifh verb, to caufe, preceding the verb to be % 
immediately followed by a participle paflive, is rendered 
in French, by the verb faire, and then the verb to be is 
not expreiTed > but the participle paffive is turned into 
the infinitive mood : ex. 

II lui fit couper la tete % He caufed his head to be cut off, 

EXERCISES 



' ( 348 ) 

EXERCISES OF THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

Do not lofe that ring, for I value it much ; it 
is a particular friend of yours who gave it me. — 
I would go and take a walk, if I were well. — 
Do you not sham sickness now and then ? — Did 
not your brother play truant laft week ? — That 
man goes a great way for a trifle. — Mr. P. 

sets up for a wit wherever he goes. You 

may rely upon what I tell you. He fucceeds 

better in being conceited, than in giving others a 
good opinion of himfelf. — I begin to be very much 
fatisfied with his brother, who now does his best, 
and will foon be able to write a French letter to his 
father. — Let me know whether he will pay you 
or not. — We shall set sail about the fifteenth 
of the next month. — Why did not you bespeak 
three or four pair of fhoes more ? — Send word 
to your brother, or let him know, that there is a 
letter for him here. — I will give him an exercife, and 

oblige him to do it in my prefence. She told 

me, if fhe were obliged to do it, fhe would do 
her worst. — She pretends not to liften, but I 
allure you fhe does not lofe a word of what you fay. 
— We were but just come in when it began to 
rain. — You do nothing but play from morning 
till night. — That young lady will get friends 
every where. — If you do not take care, you will 
bring yourself into TROUBLE.—Permit me to 
tell you that they are too much conceited. — 

Your 



^ 



-•-• ■ 



( 349 ) 

Your brother is undone if his matter fhould know 
of it. — In 1606, King James caufed the oath of al- 
legiance to be drawn up •, and, in 1621, fummoned a 
parliament, in which were formed the two parties 
called Whigs and Tories. 



On DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Aimer mieux, to have rather, to choofe rather. 
Se dormer bien des airs, to take a great deal upon one's 
II nefaut pas s'etonner, it is no wonder. felf. 

II me tarde de, I long to. 

Penfer, to be like. (Followed by a verb in the infini- 
tive mood.) 
& 'en prendre a, to lay the fault or blame upon one, to 

come upon one for. 
S'v bien prendre, or *? to go the right way to 

S 'y prendre de la bonne fa$on, 5 work. 

Sy prendre mal, to go the wrong way to work. 
S y y prendre tout autrement, to go quite a different, or 

another, way to work. 
Prendre en mauvaife part, to take amifs. 
Venir a bout de, to bring about. 

EXERCISES ON the preceding IDIOMS. 

I rather choose to fet out now than later. — She 

told me fhe had rather do any thing than fpeak to 

Mr. L. — They had rather have had you ftay in 

Italy two or three years longer. — Do you not think 

Mrs. H. takes a great deal upon herself ? — 

It is no wonder that I do not fpeak French fo well 

as you ; you have been feveral years in France, and I 

never was there. — I hope your brother will fucceed in 

his undertaking ; for, he goes the right way to 

work, and I am certain that he will bring it 

H h ABOUT 



( 350 ) 

about. Your coufin, on the contrary, will always 
be poor y for, he goes the wrong way to work 
in every thing he undertakes. — She longs to fee* 
your father, and tell him how well you have behaved 
all the time of his abfence. — I had like to have been 
killed in coming here. — If he lofe, he will lay the 

j BLAME UPON YOU. Why do you LAY THE BLAME 

j upon her ? fhe was not even in the room when that 
^happened. — Should not your fifter fucceed, whom 

WOULD SHE LAY THE FAULT UPON ? You fay 

you long to fpeak French; and I too, I aflureyou. — I 
long to tell you fomething, neverthelefs I do not know 
how to communicate it to you for fear of difobliging 
y ou . — When you have a mind to tell me fomething 
difagreeable you fhould go quite a different 
way to work. — I beg of you not to take amiss 
what I tell you. — Do not begin a thing unlefs you 
are fure to bring it about. 



On DIFFERENT VERBS. 

Se pajfer de> to do without, or t© be eafy without. 

SavGir bofi gre y to take kindly of. 

Trouver mauvais que, to take ill of. * 

Tenir maifon y to be a houfekeeper. 

Tenir boutique y to be a fhopkeeper. 

-* T \ . , N C to be in one's power, 
JSJe tenir qu a y < ,. , ___ 

2 ' £ to he in ones power : ex. 

Tenir parole y To keep one's word. 

II ne tient qu y h moi y a vous y It is in my, your, his, her, 

a luiy a elk, £*fc. power, &c. 

Jl ne tient pas ct moi y a vous y It is not my, your, fault, 

&c. que y &c. if. f 

* With the following verb in the fubju native. 
-[With t,he following verb in the fubju active, and ne before it. 

Sen 



___ 



( 351 ) 

S*en tenlr h> to ftand to. 

Vouloir du bleti a y to wiih one well. 

E?i vouloir ?/, to have a ipite againft. 

Je jouh aiter cis pouvoir, I wifli I could* 

II y va y il y allo'it, de voire iwV, your life is, was, at flake* 

II y va } il y allo'it) de mon honneur, my honour , is, was, 

* concerned in it. 
Je ne laljfe pas de> I nevertheiefs, or, for all that. 

EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING IDIOMS. 

When I have wine, I drink fome •, but, when I have 
none, I am easy without. — If you will be so kind 
as to write to my father, to let him know my fitua- 

tion, I SHALL TAKE IT KINDLY OF yOU. 1 WISH 

I could do you that fervice, I would do it with all 
my heart. — I hope you will not take it ill if 
I write to your uncle at the fame time. — I shall, 
stand to what you fay. — He has been a house- 
keeper thefe five-and-twenty years. — How little fo- 
ever you fend him to prifon, he will take it kindly 
of you. — It is in her power to live in the coun- 
try and be very happy there. — It will soon lie ih 
your power to make us happy. — I aflure you it 
shall not be my fault if you do not fucceed ; 
for, I wish you well. — Since it lies in your 
power to recommend Mr. P. to your friend, why do 
you not do it ? — ■ When you fee him, you may aflure 
him that, fince it is in my power to do it, I will not 
forget him. — You have a spite against my broths 
er \ becaufe it was in his power two or three 
times to oblige you, and he never would. — I wish I 
could perfuade you how forry he was for it \ but his 

honour 



( 352 ) 

honour was concerned in not doing it : and, though 
you be very angry with him, he would, neverthe- 
less, (or, for all that,) do you fervice if it were 
in his power. — Had I thought he would have re- 
fufedme that favour,! never would have afkeditof 
him ; I might very well have done without it. — 
Every body admires her humanity ; for, though he has 
behaved in fo ungrateful a manner towards her, fhe 
would, nevertheless, have done him fervice, if 
he had lived. 



» w » m ii .. >l* y 



General and promiscuous EXERCISES on 
DIFFERENT SUBJECTS. 

Of the UNDERSTANDING of LANGUAGES. 

Intelligence *, f. 

The uhderftanding of languages ferves (for an) in- 

de 

tredu&ion to all the fciences. By it, we come, with 

parvenir,v. 
very little trouble, at the knowledge of a great many 

fine things, which have coft thofe who invented them 

a great deal of pains. By it, all times and countries 

Jiecle,vi\. 

Ke open to us. By it, we become, in fome means, 
etre y v. 

contemporary to all ages and inhabitants of all king- 
doms. It (enables) us to converfe with the mofl: 
mettre en etat 

learned men of antiquity, who feem to have lived 
and laboured for us. We find in them many matters, 

whom (we are allowed) to confult at leifure ; many 
// nous eflpermii 

friends 



( 353 ) 

friends who are always at hand, and whofe ufefol and 

agreeable converfation improves the mind. It informs 

enrichirft. 

us of a thoufand curious fubjedts, and teaches us- 

equally (how to make an advantage) of the virtues and 
a proJiter } v. 

vices of mankind. Without the affiftance of langua- 
ges, all thefe oracles are dumb to us, and all thefe 

pourjp. 

treafures (locked up $ ) and, for want of having the 

fermer* v. 
./ * 

key which alone can open us the door (to them,) we 

remain poor in the midft of fo many rrches, and igno- 
rant in the midft of all the fciences* 



Of STUDY. - 

We (come into the world) furrounded with a cloud 
naitreff. 

of ignorance, which is increafed by the falfe prejudiced 
of a bad education. By ftudy, the former is difperfed 
and the latter corrected. It gives proportion and ex- 

jujleffef. ■ 
actnefs to our thoughts and reafonings y inftructs how 
to range in due order whatever we have to fpeak or 

d:'re y v. 
write, and prefents us with the brightef! fages of anti- 

quity as patterns for our conduct, whom, in this fenfe, 
modele^m* 

We may well call, with Seneca, the mafters and teacher;! 

precepteur^m* 
* See the oBfervatioa oa the prepofiticn i#i& 4 

Oi 

Hh2 



( 354 ) 

of mankind. But the ufefulnefs of ftudy is not confined 
to what we call fcience ; it renders us alfo more fit for 

bufinefs and employment •, befides, though this 

dep/us&dv. quand>c. 

ftudy were of no other ufe but (the acquiring) a ha- 

t 
bit of labour, (the foftening) the pains of it, (the pro- 

X t 

curing) a fteadinefs of mind, and (conquering) our aver- 
fermete,£. f 

fions to application or a fedentary life, or whatever 

efte feems (to lay a reftraint upon) us, it would ftill be 

ajfujettir y v. 

of very great advantage. In reality, it draws us off 

retirer 9 v. 

from idlenefs, play, and debauchery. It ufefully fills 
up the vacant hours of the day, and renders very agree- 
able that leifure, which, without the afiiftance of lite- 
rature, is a kind of death, and, in a manner, the grav e 
of a man whilii he is alive. It enables tis to pafs a 
right judgment upon other men's labours, to enter in- 
to fociety with men of underftanding, to keep the 

frequenter^!. 

beft company, (to have a fliare in) the difcourfes of the 

prendre part a 

moft learned, to furni/h our matter for converfation, 
(without which) we muft be filent, to render it more 
agreeable and more ufeful, by intermixing facts with 
reflections, and fetting the one by the other, 

rekver y v* 

f Thefe participles a&iye are toberanteredjia Fren ch,by the infinitive. 

INDOLENCE 



( 355 ) 

INDOLENCE CHARACTERIZED. 

Indolence deprives men of all that activity whicli 

fhould call forth their virtues and make them illuftrious. 

An indolent man is fcarcely a man ; he is half a worn* 

an. He wills and unwills in a breath. He may have 

good intentions to difcharge a duty, while that duty is 

at a diftance ; let it but approach, let him view the 

time of adlion near, his hands immediately (drop down) 

tomberjt. 

in languor* What (can be done) with fuch a man ?' 

pfut on f aire * 

He is abfblutely good for nothing. Bufinefs tires 

him, reading fatigues him, the fervice of his country 

interferes too much with his pleafures, and even atten" 

dance at court, though for the time of advancement, is 

too great a reftraint upon him. His life fhould be 

pafled on a bed of down. If he be empldyed, mo- 

duvet^m. s y employer,v. 

ments (are as) hours to him j if he be amufed, hours 
fembleryV. s'amuferji* 

are as moments. In general, his whole time eludes 

him •, he lets it glide unheeded, like water under 

infenfiblement&&t* 

a bridge. Alk him what he has done with his morning, 

* matinee^* 

he knows nothing about it 5 for, he has lived without 

one reflexion upon his exiftence. He has flept as long 

as it was poffible for him to fleep, drefled flowly, amu^ 

fed himfelf in chat with the firft perfon that called upon 

him* and taken feveral turns in his room till dinner* 
faire>v e 

* See the obfervatioa en the prepcStloa w#& 

Dinner 



( 356 ) 

Dinner is ferved up, and the evening will be fpent as 

unprofitably as the morning, and his whole life as this 

day. (Once more,) fuch a man is good for nothing. 
Encore unefois&dv. 

It is only pride that can fupport him in a life fo worth- 

lefs, and fo much beneath the character of a man. 



i ■■■i wu.ni i m 



ANECDOTE of the CARDINAL VIVIERS. 

John de Brogni, Cardinal of Viviers, who prelides 
at the council of Conftance as dean of the cardinals, 
had been a hog-driver in his infancy. Some monks* 
paffing by the place where he was bufied in that mean 
employment, and taking notice of his wit and viva- 
city, offered to carry him to Rome, and bring him up 
to ftudy. The boy accepted of their offer, and went 
ftraight to a fhoe-maker to buy a pair of flioes for his 
journey , the fhoe-maker trufted him with part of the 
price, and told him, fmiling, he fhould pay him the reft 
when he was made a cardinal. He became a cardinal 
in reality, and did not forget his former low condition* 
but took care to perpetuate the memory of it. In a 
chapel he built at Geneva, over againft the gate of St. 
Peter's church, he caufed this adventure to be carved 
in a ftone, where he is reprefented young and without 
fhoes, keeping hogs under a tree, and all around the 
wall are the figures oMhoes, to exprefs the favour he 
had received from the fhoe-maker. This monument 
is ftill fubfifting at Geneva. 



Of ENGLAND. 

England is truly the queen of ifles, the empire and 
citadel of Neptune : it is, at the fame time, the Peru 
of Europe^ the kingdom of bacchus, the fchool of E- 
picurus, the academy of Venus, the country of Mars* 
the refidence of Minerva, the bulwark of Holland, the 
fcourge of France, the purgatory of the friends of fub- 
je&iori, and, in one word, the paradife of liberty. The 

ladies 



( 357 ) 

ladies there are very handfome ; courage is as if it were 
natural to the men, but it is carried to an excefs that 
approaches near to brutality. Mental talents there are 
as great as in any other country, or perhaps greater : 
it is there that fortune may be juftly faid to pour out 
her favours with a liberal hand. The language of 
England is a mixture of all thofe that are fpoken in Eu- 
rope, but it has a greater degree of energy, and is more 
copious than any other. In fhort, this nation feems 
to want nothing to complete its happinefs but the fe- 
cret of knowing how to enjoy it. The natural inqui- 
etude of the people, and their exceffive jealoufy with 
refpeft to their privileges and freedom, have often 
plunged them into all the horrors of civil war, which 
have brought them (to the very verge) of definition* 

a deux doigts 
From the obfervations I have been enabled to make, I 
can with fafety fay, that no place is more capable of af- 
fording pleafure to a young man, who under ftands the 
language, and has a fortune fufficient to fupport the ex- 
penfes of a gentleman. 

fraternaiTaffection. 

The king of Cucho had three fons, and, like many 
other parents, having rnoft affe&ion for the youngeft > 
fome days before his death declared him his fucceffor to 
the excluiion of his brethren. This proceeding was 
the more extraordinary as it was contrary to the laws 
of the kingdom. The people, therefore, thought that, 
after the death of the king, they might, without any 
crime, raife the eldeft fon to the throne. This defign 
was univerfally approved of ; but the new king, calling 
to mind his farther's laft words, rejected the offer, and 
taking the crown, placed it on the head of his youngeft 
brother, public kly declaring that he renounced it, and 
thought himfelf unworthy of it, as he was excluded by 
his father's will, and his father could not now retradt 
what he had done. His brother, being affe&ed with 
fuch a generous action, inftantly entreated him not to 
ej>pofe the inclination of the people, who defired him 



( S58 ) 

for their ruler. He urged that he alone was the law- 
ful fucceffor to the crown which he refufed, and that 
their father could not infringe the laws of the king- 
dom ; that he had been betrayed by an extravagant 
iondnefs ; and that, in a word, the people had the 
power of redreffing any breach in the eftablifhed law* 
Nothing, however, was capable of perfuading his bro- 
ther to accept of the crown. There was a glorious con- 
tefl between the two princes ; and, as they perceived 
that the difpute would be endlefs, they retired from court. 
Thus, each having both conquered and been vanquish- 
ed, they went to end their days together in peaceful fol- 
i:ude, and left the kingdom to their other brother. 

INGRATITUDE PUNISHED : 

AN EASTEPvN TALE. 
Ke that's ungrateful has no fault but one, 
All other crimes may pafs for virtues in him. — Young. 

A dervife, venerable by his age, fell ill in the houfe 
of a woman, who had been long a widow, and lived 
in extreme poverty in the fuburbs of Balfora. He was 
fo touched with the care and zeal with which fhe had 
affifted him, that, at his departure, he faid to her, « I 
have remarked that vou have wherewith to fubfift alone* 
but that you have not fubftance enough to fhare it with 
your only fon, the young Abdallah. If you will truft 
him to my care, I will endeavour to acknowledge, in 
his perfon, the obligations I have to you for the care 
you have taken of me." The good woman received 
this propofal with joy, and the dervife departed with the 
young man, advertising her, that they muft perform a 
journey which would laft near two years. As they 
travelled, he kept him in affluence, gave him excellent 
inftrudtions, cured him of a dangerous difeafe with 
which he was attacked \ in fine, he took the fame care 
of him as if he had been his own fon. Abdallah a hunr 
dred times teftifyed his gratitude to him for all his boun- 
ties ; but the old man always anfwered, " My fon, it 
is by actions that gratitude is proved \ we fhall fee, in 
a proper time and place, whether you arefo grateful 
as you pretend." Q n e 









( 359 } 

One day, as they continued their travels, they found 
themielves in a folitary place, and the dervife faid to 
Abdallah, u My fon, we are now at the end of our 
journey ; I {hall employ my prayers to obtain from hea- 
ven, that the earth may open and make an entrance 
wide enough to permit you to defcend into a place, 
where you will find one of the great eft treafures that 
the earth inclofes in her bowels. Have you courage to 
defcend into this fubterraneous vault ?" continued he. 
Abdallah fwore to him he might depend upon his obe- 
dience and zeal. Then the dervife lighted a fmall fire, 
into which he caft a perfume •, he read and prayed for 
fome moments 5 after which, the earth opened, and the 
dervife faid to him, " You may now enter, my dear 
Abdallah : remember that it is in your power to do me 
a great fervice, and that this is, perhaps, the only op- 
portunity you can ever have of teftifying to me that 
you are not ungrateful. Do not let yourfelf be dazzled 
by all the riches you will find there ; think only of fei- 
zing upon an iron candleftick with twelve branches, 
which you will find clofe to a door : that is abfolutely 
neceflary for me." Abdallah promifed every thing, 
and descended boldly into the vault ; but, forgetting 
what had been exprefsly recommended to him, whilft 
he was filling his veft and his bofom with gold and jew- 
els, which this fubterraneous vault enclofed in prodigi- 
ous heaps, the opening by which he entered clofed of 
itfelf. He had, however, prefence of mind enough to 
feize upon the iron candleftick, which the dervHe had 
fo ftrongly recommended to him : and, though the fitu- 
ation he was in ivas very terrible, he did not abandon 
himfelf to defpair •, and, thinking only in what manner 
he mould get out of a place which might become his 
grave, he apprehended that the vault had clofed only 
becaufe he had not followed the order of the dervife ; he 
recalled to his memory the care and goodnefs he had 
loaded him with, reproached himfelf with his ingrati- 
tude, and finimed his meditation by humbling himfelf 
before heaven. At length, after much pains and in- 
quietude, he was fortunate enough to find a narrow 



I 360 ) 

paiTage which led him out of this obfcure cave ; though 
it was not till he had followed it a considerable way 
that he perceived a fmall opening covered with briers 
and thorns, through which he returned to the light of 
the fun. He looked on all fides, to fee whether he could 
perceive the dervife, but in vain : he deiigned to deliver 
him the iron candleftick he fo much wifhed for, and 
formed a defign of quitting him, being rich enough, 
with what he had taken out of the cavern, to live in 
affluence without his affiftance. 

Not perceiving the dervife, nor remembering any 
of the places through which he had pafled, he went on 
as fortune had directed him, and was extremely afton- 
iflied to find himfelf oppofite his mother's houfe, from 
which he imagined he was at a great diftance. She 
immediately enquired after the holy dervife. Abdallah 
told her frankly what had happened to him, and the 
danger he had run to fatisfy his unreafonable defires ; 
he afterwards fhewed her the riches with which he was 
loaded. His mother concluded, upon the fight of them, 
that the dervife only defigned to make a trial of his cou- 
rage and obedience, and that they ought to make ufe 
of the happinefs which fortune had prefented to them ; 
adding, that, doubtlefs, fuch was the intention of the 
holy dervife. Whilft they contemplated upon thefe 
treafures with avidity, whilft they were dazzled with 
the luftre of them, and formed a thoufand projefts in 
confequence of them, they all vanifhed away before 
their eyes. It was then that Abdallah fincerely re- 
proached himfelf for his ingratitude and difobedience ; 
and, perceiving that the iron candleftick had refifted 
the enchantment, or rather the juft punifliment which 
thofe deferve who do not execute what they promife, 
he faid, proftrating himfelf,-£- a What has happened to 
me is juft , I have loft what I had no defign to reftore, 
and the candleftick, which I intended to deliver to the 
dervife, remains with me : it is a proof that it rightly 
belongs to him, and that the reft was unjuftly acqui- 
red." As he finilhed thefe words, he placed the can- 
dleftick in the midft of their little habitation. When 




( 361 ) 

When the night was come, without reflecting upon 
it, he placed a light in the candleftick. Immediate- 
ly they faw a dervife appear, who turned about for an 
hour/ and difappeared, after having thrown them an 
afper. This candleftick had twelve branches. Ab- 
dallah, who was meditating all the day upon what he 
had feen the night before, was willing to know what 
would happen, the next night, if he put a light in each 
of them ; he did id, and twelve dervifes appeared that 
inftant ; they turned round alio for an hour, and each 
of them threw an afper as they difappeared. He re- 
peated every day the fame ceremony, which had always 
the fame fuccefs, but he never could make it fucceed 
more than once in twenty-four hours. This trifling 
fum was enough to make his mother and himfelf fubfift 
tolerably : there was a time when they would have de~ 
fired no more to behappy ; but it was not considerable 
enough to change their fortune. It is always dange- 
rous for the imagination to be fixed upon the idea of 
riches. The light of what he believed he fhould pof- 
fefs ; the projects he had formed for the employment 
of it ; ail thefe things had left fuch profound traces in 
the mind of Abdallah, that nothing could eilace therm X 
Therefore, feeing the fmall advantage he drew from 
the candleftick^, he refblved to carry it back to the der- 
vife, in hones that he might obtain from him the treaiiire 
he had {een y or, at leaft, find again the riches which 
had vanimed from their fight, by reftoring to him a 
thing for which he teftified fo earneft a defire. He 
was fo fortunate as to remember his name, and that 

rted therefore 
ying with him his candle- 
ftick, which he lighted every night, and, by that meant * 
furnifhed himfelf with what was neceflfary on the road, 
without being obliged to implore the afEftance and 
cornpafiion of the faithful. TV hen he arrived at Ma- 
grebi, his firft care was to inquire in what houfe, or 
in what convent, Abounadar lodged. He was fo well 
known thst every body told him his habitat ion. He 
repaired thither directly, and found fifty porters, who 

I i kept 




( 



( 362 ) 

kept the gate of his houfe, having each a ftaff, with a 
head of gold, in their hands : the court of this palace 
was filled with flaves and domeftics : in fine, the refi- 
dence of a prince could not expofe to view greater mag- 
nificence. Abdallah, ftruck with aftonifhment and 
admiration, feared to proceed. Certainly, thought he, 
I either explained myfelf wrong, or thofe to whom I 
addreffed myfelf defigned to make a jeft of me becaufe 
I was a ftranger : this is not the habitation of a dervife, 
it is that of a king. ^s He was in this embarafiment, 
when a man approached him, and faid to him, « Abdal- 
lah, you are welcome ; my mafter, Abounadar, has long 
expected you." He then conducted him to an agree- 
able and magnificent pavilion, where the dervife was 
feated. Abdallah, ftruck with the riches he beheld on 
all fides, would have proftrated himfelf at Lis feet, but 
Abounadar prevented him, and interrupted him when 
he would have made a merit of the candleftick, which 
he prefented to him. " You are but an ungrateful 
wretch," faid he to him ; " do you imagine you can im- 
pofe upon me ? I am not ignorant of any one of your 
Thoughts : and, if you had known the value of this can- 
dleftick, you would never have brought it to me: I will 
make you fenfible of its ufeJ 9 Immediately lie placed a 
light in each of its branches ; and, when the twelve der- 
vifes had turned round for fome time, Abounadar gave 
each cf them a blow with a cane, and. in a moment, 
they were converted into twelve heaps of fe quins, dia- 
monds, and other precious ftones i* c This, {aid he, is the 
proper ufe to be made of this marvellous candleirick. 
As to me, I never defired it, but to place it in my cabi- 
net, as a talisman compofed by a fage whom I revere, 
and am pleafed to expofe it fometimes to thofe who 
come to viiit me 5 and, to prove to you, added he, that 
curiofity was the only occafion of my fearch for it, 
here are the keys of my magazines, open them, and yon 
{hall judge of my riches •, you {hall tell me whether the 
moft infatiable mifer would not be fatisfied with them." 
Abdallah obeyed him, and examined twelve magazines 
of great extent, fo full of all manner of riches, that 

he 



( 363 ) 

he could not diftinguifh which merited his admiration 
inoft ; they all deferved it, and produced new defires. 
The regret of having reftored the candleftick, and 
that of not having found out the ufe of it, pierced the 
heart of Abdallah. Abounadar feemed not to perceive 
it : on the contrary, he loaded him with careiles, kept 
him fome davs in his houfe, and commanded him to be 
treated as himfelf. When it was at the eve of the day 
which he had fixed for his departure, he faid to him 
" Abdallah, my fon, I believe, by what has happened 
to you, you are corrected of the frightful vice of ingra- 
titude *, however, I owe you a mark of my affedtion, 
for having undertaken fo long a journey with a view 
of bringing me the thing I defired : you may depart, I 
ihall detain you no longer. You mall find, to-mor- 
row, at the gate of my palace, one of my horfes to carry 
you : I make you a preient of it, as 'well as of a flave 
who fhall condudl you to your houfe, and two camels 

.ded with gold and jewels, which you ihall choofe 
yourfelf out of my treafures." Abdallah faid to him 
all that a heart feniible of avarice could exprefs when 
its paffion was fatisficd, and went to lie down till the 
mprning arrived, which was fixed for his departure. 

During the night, he was ftill agitated^, without be- 
ing able to think of any thing but the candleftick, and 
what it had produced, " I had it, faid he, fo long in my 
power ; Abounadar, without me, had never been pol- 
feffor of it : what rifes did I not run in the fubterrane- 
ou3 vault ! Why does he now poflefs this treafure of 
treafures ? Becaufe I had the probity, or rather the 
folly, to bring jt back to him \ he profits by my labour 
and the danger I have incurred by fa long a journey. 
And what does he give me in return ? Two camels 
loaded with gold and jewels : in one moment the can- 
dleftick will furnilh him ten. times as much, It is 

bounadar who is ungrateful : what wrong fhall I do 
him in taking this candkitick ? None, certainly ; for, 
he is rich : and what do I pciieis ?" Theie ideas deter- 
mined him, at length, to make all pofiible attempts fo 

ize upon the candleftick. The thing was nor dif- 

ficnlt, 



( 364 ) 

fieult, Abounadar having trufted him with the keys of 
his magazines. He knew where the candleftick was 
placed ; he feized upon it, hid it in the bottom of one 
of the facks, which he filled with pieces of gold and 
other riches which he was allowed to take, and loaded 
it, as well as the reft, upon his camels. He had no 
other eagernefs now but for his departure : and, after 
having haftily bid adieu to the generous Abounadar, he 
delivered him his keys, and departed with his horfe, his 
flave, and two camels. X^ 

When he was fom$ days journey from Balfora, he 
fold his Have, revolving not to have a wimefs of his for- 
mer poverty, nor of thefource of his prefentriches. He 
bought another, and arrived, without any obftacle, at 
his mother's, whom he would fcarcely look upon, fo 
much was he taken up with his treafare. His firft care 
was to place the loads of his camels and the candle^ 
ftick in the moft private room of the hoiife , and, in his 
impatience to feed his eyes with his great opulence, he 
placed lights immediately in the candleftick : the twelve 
dervifes appearing, he gave each of them a blow with a 
cane with all his ftrength, left he fhould be failing inthe 
laws of the talifman: but he had not remarked that Abou- 
nadar, whenheftruck them, had the cane in his left hand. 
Abdallah, by a natural motion, made ufe of his right i 
and the dervifes, inftead of becoming heaps of riches, 
immediately drew from beneath their robe each a for- 
midable club, with which they ftruck him fo hard and 
fo long that they left him almoft dead, and difappeared, 
carrying with them all his treafure, the camels, the 
horfe^ the ilave ; and the candleftick. 

Thus was Abdallah punifhed, by poverty, and ahncft 
by death, for his unreafcnable ambition^ which perhaps 
might have teen pardonable, if it had not been accom- 
panied, by an ingratitude as wicked as it was audacious, 
fince he had not fo much as the refource of being able 
to conceal his perfidies from the too-piercing eyes of his 
benefactor. 

FINIS. 



J 



M 

M 

m 

M 



Vf-!."* ' *«*£$ 



Deacidlfied using the Bookkeeper process.] 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologie » 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



'**"*! ;'" fff-fc^ 




: 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 117 503 3 » 



< &W * *"**> 



t # y i Wn 



fi 



